STORET USER HANDBOOK
THE
RIGHT ANSWERS
FOR
STORET USERS
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HANDBOOK ORGANIZATION i
RECORD OF HANDBOOK UPDATES ii
Part Subject Tab
0V OVERVIEW 0V
WQ WATER QUALITY FILE WQ
FK FISH KILL FILE FK
EF EFFLUENT DATA EF
FL FLOW PROGRAMS FL
CM CITY MASTER FILE CM
-------
HANDBOOK ORGANIZATION
STORET is a computerized data base system maintained by the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for the STOrage and
RETrieval of data relating to the quality of the waterways within
and contiguous to the United States. This STORET User Handbook
serves as the primary written source for both general and
detailed information on the content and capabilities of this
system, and was prepared to help STORET users learn and utilize
its many features.
The STORET User Handbook is divided by blue tabbed sheets into
parts, which are further divided into chapters, and into sections
within chapters. Parts include an OVERVIEW (which provides a
general introduction to the development, content, and use of the
STORET system), and a separate part for each of the principle
files within STORET, such as the Water Quality File and the
Municipal Waste Inventory File.
The STORET User Assistance Section of the Monitoring and Data
Support Division, at the Environmental Protection Agency
Headquarters in Washington, D.C., maintains this Handbook, as
well as a list of individuals who have been provided with a copy
of the document. Handbook users should use the change-of-address
cards to notify STORET User Assistance of any change in their
address or phone number. Initial releases of new material, as
well as updates to existing documentation, are distributed
automatically to individuals who appear on the list of Handbook
owners.
Following this Handbook Organization page is a page titled
'Record of Handbook Updates'. Users are encouraged to utilize
this page to record all changes made to their copy of the
Handbook, thereby providing for later reference an up-to-date
status of their Handbook.
We hope that you find this Handbook useful, and that it helps you
learn and utilize STORET efficiently and cost-effectively. Your
comments and suggestions on how to further improve the Handbook
to better serve your needs are always welcome. For further
information on this Handbook, please contact STORET User
Assistance in Washington, D.C.
STORET User Assistance
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
RECORD OF HANDBOOK UPDATES
Updates to the STORET User Handbook will be issued periodically
to revise or expand the Handbook information. Handbook updates
will be distributed to all Handbook users-of-record. Users are
urged to integrate all updates into their Handbook immediately
upon receipt, and to record all such changes to this Record of
Handbook Updates form. This record will serve as a reference to
determine the updated status of the Handbook. Each update will
be transmitted by a cover letter which will date and number the
update, and which will provide a summary of the changes
documented by the update. These cover letters should be placed
behind this Record of Handbook Updates page for later reference.
The availability of all updates will be contained in the STORET
HELP data set' named HANDBOOK.
UPDATE
NO.
DATE OF
UPDATE
HIGHLIGHTS OF UPDATE
HANDBOOK UPDATED
BY
DATE
1
2
FEB 77
JUN 77
JAN 79
APR 79
MAY 79
JUL 79
Overview, 0V
Handbook Cover, front matter
Sections 1-4 and 6, WQ-RET
Appendices, WQ-RET and WQ
Data Entry, WQ-DE
Introduction, WQ-NTRO
File Structure, WQ-FS
Remark codes WQ-DE, WQ-RET
New keyword STCNTY, WQ-RET
Sections 5 and 7, WQ-RET
Appendices F and G, WQ
Tabs: 0V, WQ, APPENDICES
Flow Data File, FL
Handbook Covers, Volume 2
Tab: WQ-RET, Cont
Appendix 7, WQ-RET
Second Edition of Basic
Retrieval
documentation: Sections 1,
2, 3, 4, and 6 and
Appendices 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
and 6 of Chapter WQ-RET;
Appendices A, B, C, D, and
E of Part WQ.
FEBRUARY 1982
11
-------
RECORD OF HANDBOOK UPDATES, Continued
HIGHLIGHTS OF UPDATE
8
9
10
1 1
12
13
14
APR 81
FEB 82
SEP 82
OCT 82
DEC 82
JUN 83
SEP 83
NOV 83
MAX 84
Append!i J, Part WQ
Parts EF and FK
Index to Part WQ
Complete revision of data
entry documentation,
Chapter DE, and
supporting appendices
Third Edition of Basic
Retrieval Documentation
Terminal Procedures Chapter.
Part WQ
Index to Part WQ
Appendix K, Part WQ
Updated Table of Contents
pages, WQ Part tabbed
divider page
Revision to Terminal
Procedures Chapter, Part WQ,
dated 83/05/10.
Revision to Terminal
Procedures Chapter, Part WQ.
dated 83/06/21.
Revision to Terminal
Procedures Chapter, Part WQ,
dated 83/10/31.
Revision to Terminal
Procedures Chapter. Part VQ.
dated 84/03/14.
HANDBOOK UPDATED
BY DATE
iii
NAY 1984
-------
o
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
0V
OVERVIEW
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART 0V
OVERVIEW
This part of the STORET User Handbook provides
an overview of the development, content, and
capabilities of the STORET water quality data
base system and describes several of the uses
made of this system by those concerned and
involved with the abatement and control of
water pollution.
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter Suhnect Page
OV-1 INTRODUCTION 1- 1
OV-2 FEDERAL LEGISLATION AND WATER QUALITY 2- 1
2.1 Highlights of America's Water
Quality Legislation 2- 1
2.2 The Charter of EPA 2- 1
2.3 Public Law 92-500 2- 2
2.4 STORET and PL 92-500 2- 3
OV-3 STORET: ITS EVOLUTION, DEFINITION, AND
OPERATION 3- 1
3.1 A History of STORET 3- 1
3.2 What STORET Is 3-2
3.3 STORET and the Computer 3- 3
OV-4 THE WATER QUALITY FILE 4-1
4.1 Introduction 4- 1
4.2 What Is The Water Quality File? 4- 1
4.3 The Data in the WQF 4- 1
4.4 Who Collects and Uses WQF Data? 4- 3
4.5 WQF Data Entry Procedures 4- 3
4.6 WQF Output Alternatives 4- 4
OV-5 USES MADE OF STORET 5- 1
5.1 Introduction 5- 1
5.2 Progress Reporting/Water Quality File 5- 2
5.3 Standards and Criteria/Water Quality
File 5- 3
5.4 Toxic Substances/Water Quality File 5- 4
5.5 Basin Planning/Water Quality File 5- 5
5.6 Research/Water Quality File 5- 6
5.7 Waste Facilities/Municipal Waste
Inventory File 5- 8
5.8 Biological Data Summaries/Fish
Kill File 5- 9
5.9 Award Summaries/Contract Awards File 5-10
OV-6 SUPPORT OF STORET USERS 6- 1
6.1 How to Become a STORET User 6- 1
6.2 STORET User Support Services 6- 2
6.3 Regional STORET Representatives 6- 6
0V
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART 0V
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER OV-1
INTRODUCTION
0V
-------
CHAPTER
OV-1
INTRODUCTION
This part of the STORET User Handbook provides an overview of the
development, content, functions, and capabilities of the STORET
water quality data base system, and describes some of the popular
uses made today of this system by those concerned and involved
with the abatement and control of water pollution.
This part was not intended to be a detailed reference document.
For detailed, technical information on STORET, please reference
the other parts of this Handbook—tabbed WQ for the Water Quality
File, MW for the Municipal Waste Inventory File, and so forth.
They contain complete, detailed information on data input
procedures, retrieval options, program and keyword
specifications, and other specific technical information of
particular interest to a STORET user. For information on the
availability of one or more of these parts, please contact STORET
User Assistance in Washington, D.C.
1-1
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART 0V
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER OV-2
FEDERAL LEGISLATION AND WATER QUALITY
This chapter highlights the principal
Federal legislation enacted by our
Government to restore and maintain
the quality of our Nation's waters.
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Section Subject Page
2.1 Highlights of America's Water
Quality Legislation 2-1
2.2 The Charter of EPA 2-1
2.3 Public Law 92-500 2-2
2.4 STORET and PL 92-500 2-3
0V
-------
2. 1
CHAPTER
OV-2
FEDERAL LEGISLATION AND WATER QUALITY
HIGHLIGHTS OF AMERICA'S WATER QUALITY LEGISLATION
Our Nation's legislative efforts to restore and maintain the
quality of its waters date back to the late 1800s when Congress
passed the River and Harbor Act of 1886, and the Refuse Act of
1899. This latter law required states, through the U.S. Army
Corps of Engineers, to obtain permits for discharges into the
Nation's waters. Since this beginning, almost a hundred years
ago, a number of other laws and amendments to existing laws
relating to water quality have been enacted, administered over
the years by a number of different government organizations. One
good example would be the Federal Water Pollution Control Act
Amendments of 1956 (PL-660), which authorizes the Federal
government to award grants to municipalities to help finance
construction of sewage treatment facilities. The evolution of
these legislative endeavors culminated in the creation, in 1970,
of the Environmental Protection Agency, and the enactment, in
1972, of the Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1972, the
most complete and extensive water pollution control program ever
enacted to clean up our Country's waterways.
2.2
THE CHARTER OF EPA
To protect and enhance our Nation's environment today and for
future generations to the maximum extent possible under the laws
enacted by Congress—that is the charter of the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency. EPA's mandate is to mount an
integrated, coordinated attack on environmental pollution in
cooperation with state and local governments, private and public
groups, individuals, and educational institutions.
Title 3 - THE PRESIDENT
Rcergonlnfien Plan No. 3 of 1970
Preparedly the Prevalent and transmitted to thr Sfruitf and the Haute
of Kepreientattvet m Congren oftemblftl, July 9, IWi, vunvant to
the provutoni of chapter 9 of title 6 of tU L mted Stolen Code'
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SUCTION 1 Ettabliihment of Agency (a) There u hereby established
the Environmental Protection Agency, hereinafter referred to as the
"Agency."
2-1
-------
EPA was created because of increasing public and governmental
awareness and concern about the dangers to the health and welfare
of Americans caused by pollution. Established in December 1970
as an independent agency pursuant to the Government's
Reorganization Plan No. 3 of 1970, EPA brought together, in a
single Federal agency, many environmental protection programs
previously carried out by more than a dozen different departments
and organizations within the Government. EPA's responsibilities
encompass a range of environmental concerns including air
pollution, solid waste management, pesticides, noise pollution,
radiation, and of course, water pollution. As an independent
regulatory agency, EPA has no conflicting obligation to promote
agriculture, commerce, or industry. It has only one mission—to
protect and enhance our environment.
The next section describes Public Law 92-500, one of the most
comprehensive pieces of legislation ever enacted to contend with
water pollution within the United States. EPA is the
administrator of this law.
2.3
PUBLIC LAW 92-500
Our Nation's current program to prevent, reduce, and eliminate
water pollution is carried out under the Federal Water Pollution
Control Act Amendments of 1972, a public law enacted in October
1972 by the Second Session of the 92nd Congress. Known as PL 92-
50C, this Federal law built upon and improved the water pollution
control program initiated by Congress in 1948 and amended
periodically in the '50s and '60s. The stated objective of
Congress in enacting this law was to restore and maintain the
chemcal, physical, and biological integrity of the Nation's
waters—in other words, to clean up, once and for all, our
rivers, lakes and streams.
F-iolic Law 92-500
92nd Congress, S. 2770
Octoaer 18, 1972
an act
•'. r*- s.5
Tin »n,y tl<* ^fi.a
of .{ni*i,f'i >r i
ot
.. ,i,*fi/.fjhd That this Art ma% be ~e-t-*. »a-.e-
OKor*
<~ited aa tne 'Federal Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of ":—"- ' "'"
•«zr J Tne Fedt-r.il Water Pollution ( ontrol A-1 i= amended to read ",*~^l '"' ^*'2>
15 follows .'^ ;-,4.' -i~'
2-2
-------
PL 92-500 proclaimed two goals for the Nation: to achieve,
wherever attainable by July 1983, an interirr level of water
quality which provides for the protection and propagation of
fish, shellfish, and wildlife, and which provides for recreation
in and on the water; and to eliminate totally, by 1985, the
discharge of any and all pollutants into navigable waters.
To achieve these national goals, as well as other provisions and
policies as set forth in the legislation, the law provided for
the collection and dissemination of basic water quality data by
EPA in cooperation with other Federal departments and agencies,
and with public or private institutions and organizations
concerned with water pollution control and abatement. STORET,
EPA's computerized water quality data base system, has amply
demonstrated its utility to help organizations fulfill their
obligations under this law.
The following section briefly describes some of the ways STORET
is used to satisfy the requirements of the different sections or
titles of PL 92-500.
2.4 STORET and PL 92-500
PL 92-500 is the most comprehensive National program ever enacted
by our country to prevent, reduce, and eventually eliminate water
pollution within the United States. This law sets forth
guidelines for the control of industrial and municipal water
pollution, expands water standards, establishes a new system of
permits for discharges into the Nation's waters, and creates a
stringent enforcement machinery and heavy penalties for
violators. The following paragraphs briefly describe some of the
roles that STORET can play in helping government agencies achieve
the requirements established by the various provisions of PL 92-
500.
Title I—Research and Related Programs
Section 104 of this Title is frequently cited as a
legislative basis for
_to operate a national "water qnf " TV «""^fTT
system, to render technical services, and to collect
ana aisseminate water quality data. Other sections of
Title I outline requirements which are today being
fulfilled, if in part, by use of STORET. An example
would be the EPA Grosse lie Laboratory's Research
Program to improve the water quality of the Great Lakes
as set forth under Section 108.
2-3
-------
Title II—Grants for Construction of Treatment Plants
The purpose of this Title is to require and to assist
the development and implementation of waste treatment
management plans and practices. STORET serves as an
integral part of this planning and review process.
STORET provides quanti^|j\tflve data uporL_wJiich
^r^^^fCTOTs^Ta'r^pe^aaseclconcerning stream waste load
ly
ajaSJatejLJatflexe^ancTwnen was_£e__£j^3jtment laciiities
^ STORET helps to determine^ the
etticiency of the operation and maintenance of
treatment works constructed with grants as compared to
the efficiency planned at the time the grant was made
(Section 210). Further, STORET contributes in the
preparation of areawide water quality management plans
within a river basin as required by Congress under
Section 208.
Title III—Standards and Enforcement
This Title is concerned primarily with determining
reasonable standards that will assure timely progress
toward the attainment of the 1983 and 1985 water
quality goals, and toward establishment of procedures
for enforcement of these standards. _A number of STORET
report programs help states trace theiP"pTb*'gress ol
iTtmrflYfmeni: errorus, as required PV
Also, STORETnas pecome an indispensable
source of information in the preparation of reports on
the condition of the Nation's water quality (Sections
305a and 305b).
Title IV—Permits and Licenses
The Law establishes a new system of permits for
discharges into the Nation's waters, replacing the 1899
Refuse Act permit program. No discharge of any
pollutant from any point source is allowed without a
permit, a legal document which establishes the limits
of allowable discharges. Permits are granted to
individual dischargers only after they show that their
effluents will not contaminate a waterway in excess of
established water quality standards, or will not lower
its existing quality. Data within STORET can be
analyzed to assure compliance with these provisions,
and to identify sources of effluent violations.
2-4
-------
Over 80 percent of all current use of STORET is directly related
to implementing the various Sections of PL 92-500. Obviously,
STORET plays a vital and active role in the operational aspects
of our Nation's water pollution control programs.
The following chapters trace the evolution of the STORET system,
and further describe some of the many ways it is utilized to
achieve the objectives and requirements of PL 92-500.
2-5
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART OV
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER OV-3
STORET: ITS EVOLUTION, DEFINITION, AND OPERATION
This chapter provides a brief history of
the development of the STORET system,
along with a description of the system
itself.
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Section Sufcnect Page
3.1 A History of STORET 3-1
3.2 What STORET Is 3-2
3.3 STORET and The Computer 3-3
OV
-------
CHAPTER
OV-3
STORET: ITS EVOLUTION, DEFINITION, AND OPERATION
3.1 A HISTORY OF STORET
Prior to the 1960s, water quality data collected by local, state,
and Federal agencies could not be easily presented in uniform
format. (A very likely factor contributing to this situation was
the lack of a sophisticated computer capability.) More often
than not, an organization that secured data for one particular
study or requirement gave little thought to the possible reuse of
the information by others. Consequently, most data reports were
of limited use, and required costly and time consuming extraction
and analysis in order to be applied to situations other than
those of first concern.
But this situation soon changed as water pollution control
personnel became increasingly aware of the importance of sound
data handling and processing systems. The basic STORET concept
for the storage and retrieval of water quality data evolved from
ideas brought together in a brief informal conference held in
August 1961 in the Basic Data Branch, Division of Water Supply
and Pollution Control, of the U.S. Public Health Service. This
concept established a single coding structure for water quality
data which allowed the data to be stored in a computer and
ultimately made available for others to use. When initially
implemented on a Public Health Service Honeywell computer in
Cincinnati in 1964, the system contained data on approximately
140 sampling locations.
As the number of stations grew, the need to handle the rapidly
expanding volume of data and number of users more efficiently
became clearly evident. Then, in 1966, an Executive Order
transferred the jurisdiction of water pollution control from the
U.S. Public Health Service to the Federal Water Pollution Control
Administration within the Department of the Interior. (This
organization was later renamed the Federal Water Quality
Administration.) With this agency realignment, the system was
moved from the tape-oriented Honeywell system to a random access
IBM system operated and maintained by the Department of the
Interior. In 1968, users were able, for the first time, to use
modern medium-speed card reading terminals to communicate with
the central STORET system from terminals located in each of EPA's
regional offices.
The STORET system was improved in many other ways over this
period of time. The original retrieval method, which selected
stations based upon their River Mile Indices, a hydrologic coding
scheme, was expanded to allow retrievals by latitude and
longitude. New reporting and analytical tools were implemented
as well as less complex input procedures.
3-1
-------
Various display capabilities were added including the plotting
and microfilming of outputs. Systems and programs were developed
to provide information and reporting procedures on municipal and
industrial waste treatment practices, sewage plant construction,
and fish kills.
About the time the Federal Water Quality Administration was
folded into a totally independent agency (EPA), the STORET system
began to exceed the capabilities of the Interior data center.
So, in 1969, the STORET system was placed on a commercial time-
sharing system. This move greatly expanded the accessibility of
the STORET data base (via convenient low-speed keyboard type
terminals) to state and local agencies everywhere.
The advent of PL 92-500 in 1972 dramatically increased the need
for the capabilities provided by STORET. The amount of data
stored within the system continues to expand, as does its
versatility to provide the information needed by its users.
Thus, more than ever before, STORET is fulfilling a vital role
for those individuals and organizations concerned with the
control and improvement of our Nation's water quality.
3.2 WHAT STORET IS
STORET is an acronym used to identify the computerized data base
system maintained by EPA for the STOrage and RETrieval of data
relating to the quality of the waterways within and contiguous to
the United States. The system encompasses not only the
centralized data base of water quality data, but also the
associated software for storing and retrieving data on water
quality, water quality standards, point sources of pollution,
pollution-caused fish kills, waste abatement needs,
implementation schedules, and many other water quality related
items. The system is used by Federal, state, and local water
quality agencies to solve such problems as defining the causes
and effects of water pollution, measuring compliance with water
quality standards, checking the status of waste treatment plant
needs, and determining pollution trends.
A Collection of Programs
To input, retrieve, and analyze STORET data, users are
provided with a collection of related computer programs
and program elements which are activated or executed by
commands or control cards entered by users from their
computer terminals. The original programs of the
system were developed for the storage, retrieval, and
analysis of water quality data. The Water Quality File
(WQF) is currently the most widely used of the STORET
files, and is described further in the following
chapter.
3-2
-------
As the STORET system grew, additional programs were
added for the storing and retrieving of other types of
data. Data files within this group include the
Municipal Waste Inventory File, the Fish Kill File, the
Contract Awards File, and others.
A Central Repository
Water quality data is very expensive to collect, and it
has long been recognized that this data should not
simply be collected for a one-time use, but rather that
the data should be available, whenever possible, for
subsequent use by people and purposes other than those
initially responsible for the data collection.
Multiple use of data can lead to tremendous savings,
over the long run, if the data is available when and
where it is needed, and in the right format.
Furthermore, if the data is stored properly, it can be
reused at a later time to evaluate changes and trends.
STORET serves as a central repository for all water
quality and related data collected by EPA and many
other contributing agencies and organizations. States
and other organizations can use the data for their own
local pollution abatement efforts, while those
concerned with national programs can review the data in
broader perspectives. The pooling of data into a
central data base contributes significantly to the
value of the data base through the benefits of multiple
use and sharing of data.
An Analytical Tool
By itself, water quality data has limited usefulness.
In order to convert data to information, the data must
be statistically analyzed and reviewed, bearing in mind
the nature of the problem under attack, the kind of
information relevant to a solution, and the special
characteristics of the data being used. STORET,
therefore, in addition to being a repository of water
quality data, also provides extensive analytical
software to aid users in converting raw data to
meaningful information. The standard and customized
retrieval programs which make up this collection of
analytical software are described in detail within
other parts of this Handbook.
3.3 STORET AND THE COMPUTER
The utilization of computer technology has been an integral part
of the design, growth, and use of the STORET system, tracing back
to the initial development of the system in the early 1960s. The
first system on which STORET was implemented was a tape-oriented
3-3
-------
Honeywell computer located at the Public Health Service offices
in Cincinnati, Ohio. Use of this system was totally in the batch
mode, i.e., all input and output was performed by computer
operators physically located at the computer facility.
Individuals located outside the Cincinnati area had no
alternative but to phone or mail in their data and/or requests
for processing. After a batch run was performed, the results
were then mailed back to the requestor.
Today, the STORE! system runs on a large-scale, third generation
IBM computer system which can easily accommodate the many
observations of water quality data available in the system, and
which can support a large number of users who are simultaneously
utilizing the system from remote terminals located in their
offices. The computer system is offered by a commercial time-
sharing service company whose primary business is to provide
remote processing services to its subscribers or clients.
Typically, commercial computer service organizations are very
quick to integrate the latest hardware components and software
releases into their user-available services, thereby passing on
to the users the benefits of the latest available computer
technology. STORET is updated and modified to take advantage of
these advances in computer technology.
3-4
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART 0V
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER OV-4
THE WATER QUALITY FILE
This chapter presents a general
description of STORET's Water
Quality File: what it is, what
data it contains, who uses the
data, and how the data can be
retrieved.
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Section Subject
4.1 Introduction
4.2 What is the Water Quality File?
4.3 The Data in the WQF
4.4 Who Collects and Uses WQF Data?
4.5 WQF Data Entry Procedures
4.6 WQF Output Alternatives
0V
-------
CHAPTER
OV-4
THE WATER QUALITY FILE
4. 1
INTRODUCTION
The Water Quality File is the largest file within STORET in terms
of amount of data stored. Due to the size of the WQF relative to
the other STORET files, and due to the extensive use made of its
data, the WQF is described in somewhat more detail in this
OVERVIEW. Other parts of this Handbook describe each of STORET's
files in considerable detail.
4.2
WHAT IS THE WATER QUALITY FILE?
The WQF is a collection of data relating to the quality of the
waterways within and contiguous to the United States. This data
is gathered by a process called water quality monitoring whereby
samples are taken of water from streams, rivers, lakes, and other
bodies of water. These samples are then analyzed within a
laboratory to determine the presence, and if present the amount,
of pollutants and other particulates within the samples. The
findings of these analyses are stored as data in the WQF.
4.3
THE DATA IN THE WQF
The information within the WQF consists of two basic types of
data: station data, which describes and categorizes the
geographical location of where a sample has been taken; and
parametric data, which describes the conditions under which a
sample was taken (such as date, time, and depth) as well as the
results of the sample analyses.
The number of unique collection points, or stations, in the WQF has
grown significantly over the years,
200,000 in 1976. The shadings of
the map reflect the relative con-
centrations of these sampling
stations across the United
States. Station data may
include the following types of
station description information:
a unique station identification
number; the latitude and
longitude of a station's location;
the state and county codes iden-
tifying the station's political
location; a River Mile Index
identifying the station's hydrologic
from about 150 in 1964 to over
4-1
-------
location; the major and minor river basins in which the station
is located; as well as other station identification codes and
descriptive information.
Some 1800 unique water quality parameters are defined within
STORET. Approximately 80 percent of the 40 million individual
observations available within the system pertain to approximately
200 of these parameters which are grouped into the general
categories shown in the table below. A single observation
represents a measurement of a single parameter at a specific
location, or station, at a specific point in time.
MM PRIOR TO 1966
•i 1966-1970
I 11971-1975
PARAMETER GROUPS
4-2
-------
4.4 WHO COLLECTS AND USES WQF DATA?
Many individuals and organizations actively participate in the
collection, storage, retrieval, and analysis of the data in the
WQF. Information is gathered through cooperative programs
involving EPA, state water pollution control authorities, and
other governmental agencies covering over 3.5 million miles of
rivers and streams, the Great Lakes, and coastal areas. Federal,
state, and local water quality control agencies utilize the WQF
to define the causes and effects of water pollution, to measure
compliance with water quality standards, and to determine
pollution trends. Many states utilize the WQF to help comply
with the reporting requirements of PL 92-500. The U.S.
Geological Survey, the U.S. Forest Service, the U.S. Army Corps
of Engineers, the Bureau of Reclamation, and the Tennessee Valley
Authority all utilize STORET's WQF in their water quality
monitoring efforts.
4.5 WQF DATA ENTRY PROCEDURES
Data may be entered into the Water Quality File via several
methods. These include keypunching data on cards and
transmitting the data via a medium-speed card reading terminal,
and entering data directly via a low-speed keyboard terminal.
Station data is screened by STORET to insure its validity for the
locations being specified. Edit checking is automatically
performed by the system on approximately 200 of the most
frequently sampled water quality parameters to preclude the
storing of erroneous values.
Once entered and permanently stored in the system, users may
change or delete any incorrect data, using the same procedures
available to input data.
4-3
-------
4.6
WQF OUTPUT ALTERNATIVES
The array of representative reports
pictured here exemplifies the ver-
satility of STORET and its water
quality data to help users prepare
a myriad of detailed, summary, or
exception reports relative to
their specific areas or .locations
of interest. Data reported can
reflect the latest, most current
information available, or it can
draw upon the historical depth of
the data, going back as far as
the '50s. Most users obtain
their reports from small portable
computer terminals conveniently
located in or near their offices.
Output alternatives include tabular
listings of data values, statistical
summaries of parameter values, and
a number of plotting techniques,
including line printer or precision
plots of sample values or statisti-
cal analyses. Plotting capabilities
also include station location plots
which readily illustrate monitoring coverage over a selected
geographical area. Violations to established water quality
standards, on an individual or summary basis, may be reported.
In addition to printed and plotted output, output may also be
placed on tape or disk for subsequent use by user-written
programs or by other application software.
Station selection options are extensive. An area of interest can
be defined by a set of latitude/longitude coordinates (thereby
describing a polygon enclosing the desired area), or by state,
county, or basin designations. One or more individual stations
can be selected by specifying their station identification
numbers. And stations may be chosen based upon the presence or
absence of one or more specific parameters, or on prescribed
values of the designated parameters.
Users can write their own programs to perform specific analyses
or to present their data in any desired format. Additional
output alternatives are anticipated as the capabilities of the
WQF retrieval programs are expanded and enhanced.
4-4
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART 0V
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER OV-5
USES MADE OF STORET
This chapter highlights a number
of uses made today of the STORET
system.
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Section Subject Page
5.1 Introduction 5- i
5.2 Progress Reporting/Water Quality File 5- 2
5.3 Standards and Criteria/Water Quality File 5- 3
5.4 Toxic Substances/Water Quality File 5- 4
5.5 Basin Planning/Water Quality File 5- 5
5.6 Research/Water Quality File 5- 6
5.7 Waste Facilities/Municipal Waste
Inventory File 5- 8
5.8 Biological Data Summaries/Fish Kill File 5- 9
5.9 Award Summaries/Contract Awards File 5-10
0V
-------
CHAPTER
OV-5
USES MADE OF STORET
5.1 INTRODUCTION
STORET is utilized by a variety of governmental agencies and
other organizations to achieve numerous objectives relating to
water quality assessment and management. New uses are conceived
every day to solve new problems or to perform different analyses
of data in light of changing or emerging water quality
situations.
In addition to the several examples portrayed on the remaining
pages of this chapter, STORET can be used to do any of the
following:
To detect changes in pollutants that could change
ambient criteria/standards.
To help promote water quality programs by
substantiating the effectiveness of other similar
programs.
To help justify budget requests for water quality
programs.
To help cut sampling costs by coordinating efforts with
other organizations.
To provide a repository for data collection efforts.
To help identify where monitoring efforts are needed,
thereby determining where funds need to be allocated.
To help design overall programs based upon the
successes of others.
To help complete water quality management basin plans.
To help prepare fact sheets required for permit
processing.
To detect changes in pollutants that could change
existing permits.
The following sections of this chapter describe in more detail
several specific uses made of four of STORET's files: the Water
Quality File, the Municipal Waste Inventory File, the Fish Kill
File, and the Contract Awards File.
5-1
-------
5.2
PROGRESS REPORTING/WATER QUALITY FILE
Under Section 305(b) of PL 92-500, states are required to submit
annual reports to EPA and Congress on the pollution of the
states' waters—its nature, extent, recommendations for control,
and the cost of these controls. STORET is the primary way many
states have found to perform data analyses for these reports.
One of the most valuable methods of reporting and analyzing water
quality for 305(b) reports is the time series analysis. STORET
is ideally suited for presenting several years of data for
comparison. A good example is the graph shown below from a
recent State of Michigan report. From this report, the State
concluded that overall water quality was improving on the Raisin
River near Monroe, Michigan.
Another effective evaluation technique is a 'before and after'
analysis. EPA's Region VIII office used STORET to evaluate a
sewage treatment plant on Fountain Creek below Colorado Springs
which was activated in late 1972. The data in STORET collected
prior and subsequent to the implementation of the new plant were
compared. The number of violations for dissolved oxygen had
dropped from 53 percent to 7 percent, for dissolved solids from
59 percent to 33 percent, for BOD from 85 percent to 73 percent,
and for fecal col iform from 89 percent to 58 percent. Similar
improvement occurred and was demonstrated when a sewage treatment
plant was built in the Fargo, North Dakota area.
These examples show the applicability of using the data in STORET
to demonstrate progress either from an overall point of view or
from the viewpoint of a single effort. As practices become more
sophisticated, these reports should begin to reflect such things
as the effects of non-point sources, and the pollution of ground-
waters.
RAISIN RIVER AT MONROE
x
UJ
Q
a
a:
UJ
100.
90.
80.
70.
60.
50.
40.
30.
20.
10.
STN = 580046
THE LINE OF BEST FIT SHOWS IMPROVING WATER QUALITY
OVER TIME — AS MEASURED BY THE WATER QUALITY INDEX
69 70 71 72 73 74
TIME OF OBSERVATION
5-2
75
76
-------
5.3
STANDARDS AND CRITERIA/WATER QUALITY FILE
Under PL 92-500, the states have established specific water
quality standards for all navigable waterways which must be met
in order for the water to be used for its intended purposes,
consistent with the 1983 goals of water quality. Once standards
have been established by states in accordance with national
criteria, it is necessary to monitor the effect of water
pollution abatement and control activities relative to those
criteria. A number of STORET report programs can be used such as
the ones pictured below, to trace the progress of water quality
improvement efforts. These reports were generated by the
execution of the WQF retrieval program STAND.
mr nrm <.!*»* D
VIOLATIONS SUMMARY
••?.• giMLITT *IO
VIOWHMI Mil
C*M«IDI TOT CMl
"0/1 /1IIPL
tn i PWI i i
11 linn tutt i iiauit
NO fiwuor TOT
* D*T (1 •IPL
1* II
II !•
II
-------
5.4
TOXIC SUBSTANCES/WATER QUALITY FILE
Although many substances are potentially toxic to aquatic life
and other organisms when present in sufficient concentration for
a sufficient period of time, the term toxic substances generally
refers to those substances which are dangerous even in very low
concentration—substances such as mercury, cadmium, and
toxaphene. To protect the public health and welfare, EPA is
empowered to restrain discharges of any new pollutants which
present an imminent and substantial endangerment to the health or
livelihood of the public. In addition, EPA places special
emphasis on the control of toxics through its discharge permit
program.
All toxic substances for which water quality analyses have been
performed are defined within STORET, and the system can easily
accommodate the inclusion of additional substances upon their
discovery. Reports such as the one shown below (from a Council
on Environmental Quality Report) can be readily obtained from
STORET data to demonstrate the presence or absence of toxic
substances in any body of water for which data are available.
DDT Levels in US Surface Waters, 1970-74
1971 'Q72
ProuciiOn A^tncv STORET
1973
1974
. l
1975
5-4
-------
5.5
BASIN PLANNING/WATER QUALITY FILE
A river basin is the area drained by a single river and its
tributaries. A water quality management basin plan is a
management document that identifies the water quality problems of
a particular basin or portion of a basin and sets forth an
effective remedial program to alleviate those problems. Overall
basin needs and priorities are assessed, actions scheduled, and
the necessary coordination with concerned organizations planned.
The needs and priorities are based largely upon water quality
data and the analysis of this data. For example, fecal coliform
bacteria is a common indicator of pollution problems in areas
affected by major municipal/industrial activity. A profile plot
of coliform along a stretch of a river using STORET's MSP
(Multiple Station Plot) program can quickly ascertain the
presence of a bacterial source and the extent of a pollution
problem as shown in the printout below.
The development of an effective planning process is crucial to
effective water quality management. This is particularly true
for river basin planning as required under various sections of PL
92-500. River basin plans are primarily the responsibility of
the states, and the law delineates the rather extensive amount of
information that must be provided.
*-> IV
5-5
-------
5.6 RESEARCH/WATER QUALITY FILE
In order to achieve our national objective of having water that
is clean enough both for recreational activity and for the
protection of fish and wildlife, numerous research and
development efforts have been initiated to acquire a thorough
understanding of the complex and variable biological systems that
characterize our waterways. Research tells us what a specific
level of a specific pollutant does to humans, animals, and crops.
It establishes thresholds at which we might expect adverse
effects from environmental pollutants alone or in combination.
(And from these thresholds, criteria for water quality standards
can be established.) It provides the basic scientific knowledge
we need to safeguard the public health and to balance the
benefits of a specific product against its environmental risks.
A representative effort is that of the EPA Grosse He
Laboratory's Research Program to improve the water quality of the
Great Lakes. This Lab is involved with a number of other
agencies in developing the scientific information needed to
assess the effectiveness of implemented programs on Great Lakes
water quality, to form the basis for needed control actions, and
to develop the scientific information needed to support the
Canadian/U.S. Agreement for the Great Lakes. Over a dozen U.S.
and Canadian agencies, universities, and joint commissions are
participating in this extensive program launched in 1972.
Since this is an on-going international program involving both
water quality management and research, it is essential that all
data gathered on the water quality of the Great Lakes be readily
accessible by all investigators. Accordingly, all participants
are required to enter all collected data into STORET, thereby
greatly expediting the use and analysis of the information
through sharing of data. This significant multi-organizational
research program not only illustrates the value of STORET in
research-oriented endeavors, but also it demonstrates how the use
of an accepted central system can foster cooperation among a
group of organizations sharing common interests.
5-6
-------
CHLOROPHYLL IN LAKE ONTARIO
The above contour map, which shows the chlorophyll levels in Lake
Ontario during 1972 and 1973, illustrates the type of graphic
display that can be obtained from STORET via a plotting option of
the WQF retrieval program MSP (Multiple Station Plot).
5-7
-------
5.7
WASTE FACILITIES/MUNICIPAL WASTE INVENTORY FILE
Data on municipal waste sources and disposal systems are critical
to the planning and execution of pollution abatement and control
programs at all levels of government. It is essential that these
data be current in order to provide accurate input to the
preparation of basin plans, annual budgets, and annual reports
(such as EPA's Cost of Clean Water report) to perform periodic
assessments of the effectiveness of control/abatement measures,
and to monitor the degrees of compliance with standards. The
Municipal Waste Inventory File serves as the repository for this
data in STORET, and includes data from all communities and/or
municipal waste facilities, including those privately owned,
within the United States.
The presence of this File in STORET makes the data readily
available to all agencies and individuals having water quality
responsibilities. Reports such as the inventory of municipal
waste facilities within the State of Delaware, a portion of which
is shown below, which lists a number of characteristics of each
facility within the State, are easily obtainable.
STORLT SYSTEM
MUNICIPAL bASFL FACILITIES INVENTORY t WASTE FACILITIES NEEDS DATA
STATE OP DELAWARE CIO)
COMMUNITY NAME
A-JD
COUNTY
NEri CASTLE CO PUD
52*100(11511
MM CASTLE
003
NEbPOHl
SZdlUUOOll
NLtf LAbTLfc
ODJ
RtD LION
URACON RUN TMIL PRK
Sb2000U011
NEW LASTLE
01)3
REHODUTH riLACH
ST200UOJ111
bUSSLI
005
SEAFORD
60500000111
MISSEX
005
SLLBYVILLE
61600U00111
SUSSEX
005
SMYRNA
62700000111
KENT
001
SUSSEX CO COUNCIL
LLCATO DISr-PriASE 1
640U0000111
bilaSEX
(105
BASIN
YR BC
YR RV
02/OB
02/UB
02/0*
X
X
02/08
193b
1962
02/11
1972
1968
02/11
X
02/04
X
02/08
DISCHARGE TO
REMAKKS
DELAWARE RIVER
DLLAriARE RIVER
DRAGON RUN CRBLK
LEHES-HEHOSETH CANAL
NANTICOIE RIVER
WILL GO TO SEC EVEN
U/OUr REG SYS
BUNTINGS BRANCH
SMYRNA RIVER
HURDbRKILL R (FUTURE)
GROUND HM-LEHBS-REHOBTH
CANAL IN FUTURE
204 PEAK SEASON
POP
SERVED
CCNuUb
X
• 1180
1366
X
X
127S
1614
7000
5537
1005
1099
• 330(1
4243
• 10000
X
FLO HGD
DAILY
DLS1CN
-
-
060
120
702
X
774
8BO
X
420
500
500
TYPE
TREATMENT
DES BOD
NONE
SERVED
SECONDARY
204
PRIMARY
X
PRIMARY
X
SECONDARY
X
PRIMARY
210
SERVED
S
E
W
S
5
S
B
S
S
X
HG/L f BOD)
U1TREATIDISCHG
14(1
131
157
X
270
-
35
87
97
X
200
HEEDS
TREATMENT
GRANTS
21
SEE WILMINGTON
00
SEE WILMINGTON
00
AC N PC UL
31 10 13
CM EGC DRH W BC
6 0
47 10
G SC C EC DCRH BC
1 24
38 10
SC LO ECG
34,34,
IB 24
SH CM EGC DRH BO
22 18
SEE REHOBETH BCACHIS7200
5-8
-------
5.8
BIOLOGICAL DATA SUMMARIES/FISH KILL FILE
The STORET Fish Kill File provides nationwide information on
major pollution-caused fish kills which result from a variety of
industrial, municipal, agricultural, and transportation-related
operations. A fish kill is usually first noticed by a fisherman,
camper, or sportsman who, as an interested and concerned private
citizen, reports the kill to a state official. In most
instances, the state agency sends trained specialists to
investigate and identify the size and cause of the kill. These
specialists sometimes request the help of Environmental
Protection Agency field personnel to assist in on-site
investigations, or to make laboratory analyses of dead fish
tissue samples. When water pollution is determined to be the
cause of the kill, the state submits a report, using the form
shown below, to the Environmental Protection Agency. Information
from these reports is entered into the Fish Kill File, which
contains fish kill data back to 1960, and from which fish kill
summary reports, such as the one shown for the State of Florida,
are easily obtained.
U I EMVINONMEMTAL PROTECTION
•MNlHtlON D C 204M
REPORT OF POLLUTION CAUSED
1CEMCV
•NOANOI
FISH KILL
1* LOCATION rSf»«n L+r Ocmmt .ic LmtituOm L«4Jf.MM
/•am Aptmv4O\1H \o /« «W Jo
FOR OVP USE ONLY
1 DAT! or KILL
CI r"CIN Q t"tl IT] I1TUWW
• POLLUTION SOURCE TYPE OF OPERATION
ATlONS
3*OiH«irP«ilcM«« MO
^ riRTiiifMi
~~}uUH|«( OHMIMCE till
irtt ufluoRf om riio
LOT OPIB*TIOa»
~j HUDLIHC 0' [OlIMilllT
WO COHTMMtftl
§•*'"'"• rj«r«it
CHIMIGU.1 ,_J PITROLCUH
•000 *« m» r~l PAPCa MO M.LKO
HID »«»UCTS - ' »*OMCII
_J TIltlLIt dJ •»•«• MO »i*(TICI
^]oi««
~] ••IL ~] THICK rj I*HI o»
dr::. d- —
C MUNICIPAL O'EM*
§K «(•*•[ ttlllw
•I'llK DIIPOUL
••TM SVUIU
B1WIMMIM POOL
•0*1* 'Public SrrvJcBj
CjHIT COHTWH.
Eft::™"1- n —
HARACTeHISTICl
5 TV*e OF FIJN KILL « BIT NO KILLED 7 fteVCHITY
'CCTCO ft. DUMATKM Or CMYICAL EFFECT
11 KKff
EPA Fwa 7500 I (>•> 7 731 PMCVIOUB COITION MAV BE utco UNTIL SUM
INSTRUCTIONS Upon conplttlon fob1 end to ibow pieper (dorm and Hcplo or tape long
REPOVT OF POLLUTION CAUSED FISH KILLS
RIVEk OR LAKL CITY Ok TOM OATt CAUSE TYPE CO-MEHCIAL EST1HATCO SEVERITY AREA D H
FLORIDA
LAKE TARPON TAP t>0« aPRINCS
UPUNO CA TAVERNIEU 1
LA THOhOTOSASaA THOHOTOSASSA
RELJV C* ri OI&MET WORLD
LA SHIP? l LULU illilTCR HAVEN
LAKE HAPTillOGE. MIMTEP HAVEN
POND ALACHUA CO
LAKt CKARLOTTL APOPKA
LAKE OcNrON AVON PARK
L-B CANAL OELU. GLADE
LD NCLLV1N t>0 BLOUrrSTUNN
LAKE HIBISCUS OEBART
LAKE HIBISCUS DEBAR V
LAKL LVA45 DELTOKA
TBQUr CK OUVAL CO
LAKL-CAFALINA tt EATOKVILLL
7EAHL LAKE fOUEST CITY
CASAL FT LAUDEMMLC
SF J3ll^ h GENEVA
ATFAPULGUS CP HAVANA
PD-COrid(.rT (.AHP INDIANfOMN
HONIRICF CM JACKSOI^ILLC
LAKE JACitSON KGANA1SVILLE
LAKE »MNCI5 UHE PLACID
NltKLy (.R UCCLEHNV
rdDKET CH HACCLE1HF I
1ARCU 13 COLt PD NAPLES
aPMKL CP NCi* bfiyiUJA UCri
LAKL AIR OllLA*AIIA
LAKL uLLDUHA ORLA^UO
Lf UhLCKriTCriEL 0«LA100
LAKL LULEMiL OBLA^M
LAKL COPELA^U UHLANJO
LA4L BAUTUH OKLANOO
LAKL LANCAbrLli UBLAKDO
LAKE JLSbUP UVILtM
at JJU-J3 H PALATR4
LAKL CLOKiL PALM BLACK
LAKE PANA*OFFKLL LA PANASOFFKEL
TMJU1 LH ST JifcllS CO
LAKL PLI.RAH »ALT SPiilNCS
SPklhb LAKL 5ENINOLE CO
PEAhL h SEMI NOLL LU
Lf riLKlUA t S EH MOLL CO I
LAKL OWcJJS U'UTILLA
MLKEk Ch VtHHOfi
• C.A1LH4AN LAVAL WEST PALI BEACH
11 7J
OJ 71
(It 71
21 7
11 9
11 7
D7 7
2* 7
0« 7
Ot 74
04 74
II 74
U) 74
17 74
29 74
til 74
III 74
14 74
2 74
1 74
1 74
6 74
0 14
t 74
1 74
0 74
2 )4
2 74
t 14
• 74
J 74
* 74
H 74
1 74
J 74
1 74
1 74
t 74
4 74
9 74
1 71
Ui 74
1» 14
27 74
09 7*
21 74
•Ot 20
100
10
IT
74
99
10D
100
lOil
90
100
100
-
SO
-
*J
90
-
1(1
to
2»
0 75
10
Bl
26
|
100
lu
100
SO
41
SO
100
10
so
7S
IS
0 -
0 -
tl
u - 10U
1 - 1UU
1 - 10U
1 - IUO
1 - IUU
0 201 BU
0 - IUU
0 JO* )U
0 -
1 601 40
0 - 100
1 000 4 IA
S 000 4 I19A 1
424 J -
111 4 1SOA ]
1 210 1 1A
SO 1 1A
4 -
ISO 4 IA
SO 4 1M
3 000 2 IA
1 000 9 6A
«00 4 IOA
2(0 4 )A
2dO 4 -
HI 121 2 79A
1 000 in
2UO 4 IN
B S71 4M
»0 1A
S1J IH
IIS 4 IH
21S 4 IN
42 6S1 2 4N
ISO IOA
1SU 4
- 4 1A
- 4 -
9
B 030 1
ISO 4 SM
I 000 1 U
SOO 4 4SOOA
200 4
IS I -
0 - 13 4 -
• SO* SOI - Jl QUO 2 In
1 - 100 4 1M
1 - 1 4bO 2 SbA
1 lodt - 21S 4 IN
14 74 tO (Ot ID* - SO |n
.
-
14
-
5-9
-------
5.9
AWARD SUMMARIES/CONTRACT AWARDS FILE
A major element of the 1956 Federal Water Pollution Control Act
was the establishment of the construction grant program which
authorized the Federal Government to award grants to
municipalities to help finance construction of sewage treatment
facilities. Although this initial legislation authorized a
modest $50 million per year in grant funds, appropriations for
grant money rose substantially in the late '60s, reaching $1
billion for fiscal year 1971. The construction grant program was
significantly enhanced and expanded with the enactment in 1972 of
PL 92-500, which authorized EPA to make grants totaling $18
billion to the states for construction of new municipal treatment
facilities.
STORE!"s Contract Awards File helps interested individuals and
organizations to track the progress of the thousands of contracts
awarded by municipalities for sewage facilities construction, to
gather statistics on the nature of these awards, and to quantify
any patterns or trends in the contract award activity. Awards
dating back to 1952 are contained in the file. The report shown
below, which used data from this File, lists information on each
sewage facility construction award granted by the State of
Montana in 1975.
CONTHACT AWARDS LISTING
ST
3U
3D
10
10
30
30
3D
30
30
10
30
10
30
30
10
30
10
30
30
30
30
III
10
30
30
30
CITYI COI
36360 Oil
19490 015
7bl40 019
45720 029
09900 031
09900 031
21240 U35
31)700 041
3B700 041
18700 041
40600 041
39780 049
39710 049
397BO 049
397HO 049
39780 049
19780 049
49710 051
50300 053
66310 071
81450 099
83950 101
07740 111
07740 111
07740 111
07740 111
3 AS I No
0901
0901
0903
1102
U901
0901
0901
0901
0901
0901
0901
0901
0901
0901
0901
0901
0901
0901
1301
0901
0901
0901
0902
0902
0902
0902
S.TATE OF HONTA4A
LOCATION 1DEN
GREAT FALLS
CHOTEAU COUNT*
SCOBEY
KALISPILL
BOiEKAN
BOZEMAN
CUT BANK
HAVRE
HAVRE
HAVRE
HILL COUNTY
HELENA
HELENA
HELENA
HELENA
HELENA
HELENA
LIBERTY COUNTY
LINCOLN COUNTY
PONDEHA COUNTY
TETON COUNTY
TOOLE COUNTY
BILLINGS
BILLINGS
BILLINGS
BILLINGS
Y8 HO DA 0
75 10 08 4
75 01 01 1
75 06 09 2
75 06 10 2
75 05 21 i
75 12 11 4
75 02 03 1
75 06 17 2
75 06 17 2
75 07 22 1
75 07 11 3
75 02 24 1
75 05 15 2
75 05 15 2
75 09 16 3
75 10 15 4
75 10 17 4
75 01 03 1
75 01 27 1
75 01 01 1
75 01 03 1
75 01 03 1
75 01 01 1
75 01 01 1
75 12 11 4
75 12 11 4
TYPE
6100
5200
9100
0110
0100
7100
5200
1100
4100
7400
7100
0100
9100
0000
7400
7100
0100
5200
0000
5200
5200
5200
5200
1300
7100
0010
$ VALUE
4.151.322
523.954
76,063
314 171
49,721
41 869
590,656
483,954
289,1115
152 156
18 300
78,419
112,810
56 415
265,678
112,611
199,774
528.954
284 380
528 954
528,954
528.954
8 068 000
3,759,285
53,978
62,002
SRC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CONTR-R V CG
SLETTEN
KIEUIT
L 1 S
UTILITY
LONG
SCUM ID
COP
FALLS
SriULAND
HCNEIL
MCNEIL
HCNEIL
HELENA
HELENA
LOCiIREH
LOCKREM
DUGDALE
KIEUIT
ZOOK
KIEUIT
KIEHIT
KIEWIT
HEYHER
SHAWNEE
LEARY
LEARY
PAGE
TYPE PSG
REPL ADDN 7
WATR COHB 4
MS LINES 2
SDRN REPR 5
STORM DRN 5
COLL SEW 5
HATR COMB 1
DIST LINE 5
PUMP SFAT 5
SEX COMB 5
COLL SEW 5
SFORM DRN 5
HIS LINES 5
STORM SEH 5
SEH COMB 5
COLL SEH 5
STORM DRN 5
WATR COMB 3
SfORM SEH 5
HATR COMB 4
HATR COHB 4
HATR COHB 4
WATR COMB 7
TRNS LINE 7
COLL SEH 7
STRH REPR 7
2
GROUPI
10
01
06
06
05
12
02
06
06
07
07
02
05
05
09
10
10
01
03
01
01
01
03
03
12
12
DODGE 1
1815880
1812488
1816760
1816795
1816687
1817693
1815810
1816764
1816764
1816896
1816896
1816176
1816669
1816669
1816852
1317185
1817185
1812438
1316331
1812488
1812488
1812488
1811696
1311696
1817648
1817643
5-10
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART OV
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER OV-6
SUPPORT OF STORET USERS
This chapter describes the many helpful
user assistance services that are made
available by EPA to all STORET users.
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Section Subject
6.1 How to Become a STORET User
6.2 STORET User Support Services
6.3 Regional STORET Representatives
OV
-------
CHAPTER
OV-6
SUPPORT OF STORET USERS
6.1 HOW TO BECOME A STORET USER
Representatives from state agencies and from other Federal,
interstate, and local government agencies may become users of
STORET. Anyone interested in becoming a user of the system
should initially contact his or her EPA Regional STORET
Representative. The names, addresses, and phone numbers of these
individuals are listed elsewhere in this chapter.
The Regional STORET Representative can advise as to what
monitoring activities are currently underway within the new
user's area of interest; he can provide information on the amount
and type of water quality data already present in the system that
might be of interest to the user; and often, he can identify
other users within the region who are pursuing an effort like or
similar to that being considered by the potential user. Further,
these representatives can provide helpful information about the
STORET system itself, and how its features and capabilities can
best be applied to benefit the user. Each region has its own
procedures with respect to its community of STORET users,
including how new users are placed on the system, and how they
are supported. However, the following guidelines should be
generally applicable as outlined below.
State Agencies
Once it is determined that the individual is to be
granted access to STORET, the Regional STORET
Representative will make the necessary arrangements to
obtain an account number which will enable the user to
access the computer system on which STORET resides. He
will discuss the alternatives available for funding the
state's use of STORET, including the arrangement of a
suitable suballowance whereby EPA reimburses the state
for its use of STORET up to the value of the
suballowance. (Should a state exceed its allotted
suballowance, it will need either to reimburse EPA or
to contract directly with the computer services vendor
for any additional computer usage charges incurred over
the suballowance.) He will also contact STORET User
Assistance in EPA Headquarters in Washington, D.C. who
will provide the user with whatever STORET
documentation and training is deemed appropriate.
If the state agency representative is establishing a
new monitoring network, a new STORET agency code will
need to be established which uniquely identifies the
6-1
-------
user's monitoring network to STORET. The potential
state user should have an estimate of the amount of
activity that will be made of STORET (the amount of
data to be stored, the number of system accesses per
month, and the amount and type of retrieval activity,
for example) so that necessary cost estimates and
budgetary provisions can be made based upon the
anticipated usage.
Federal, Interstate, and Local Agencies
Upon contacting the Regional STORET Representative,
individuals from these agencies will be advised of two
alternatives for paying for their use of STORET. They
may establish an interagency agreement for the transfer
of funds (where the agency reimburses EPA for its
STORET usage), or they may contract directly with the
computer service organization supplying the time-
sharing service. If contracting directly, the vendor
will obtain the necessary authorizations from EPA
allowing the new user to access STORET. Requests for
assistance, documentation, and training are normally
directed to the regional user assistance contacts;
however, these requests are frequently routed to STORET
User Assistance in Washington, D.C.
All users, whether state or others, are expected to provide for
their own computer terminals and terminal supplies.
6.2 STORET USER SUPPORT SERVICES
To effectively and efficiently utilize a system as large and
comprehensive as STORET, the user community must have a
responsive support organization to which it can turn for
assistance and guidance on an as-needed basis. The Data
Processing and User Assistance Branch, Monitoring and Data
Support Division (MDSD) of EPA's Office of Water and Hazardous
Materials in Washington, D.C. has this responsibility, and
provides operational and assistance support to the STORET system
and its users.
Assistance by Phone
STORET User Assistance personnel in EPA Headquarters,
Washington, D.C. are available by phone from 8 am to 5
pm Eastern Time, Monday through Friday, to answer
questions on all aspects of the STORET system.
Assistance is not normally available on weekends or on
Federal holidays.
6-2
-------
STORE! User Assistance may be contacted for questions
pertaining to STORE!'s computer system and its
communications, to the use of the vendor's terminal
command language, and to making arrangements for such
things as tapes and output delivery. Although this
group may occasionally refer a caller to the computer
services vendor or to someone within another
organization, it is very interested in keeping in
frequent touch with users, so that it may be kept
abreast of the questions and problems being experienced
in the field.
All policy decisions, with the exception of national
STORE! policies, are made at the regional level under
the direction of the Regional Point of Contact.
Questions regarding such matters as individual
suballowances (the funding process by which states are
given money by their EPA Region for the use of STORET)
and requests for programming or conversions should
properly be directed to the appropriate Regional STORET
Representative. The names of these individuals are
provided elsewhere in this chapter.
Users are invited to contact STORET User Assistance to
determine the availability of other support-related
services, such as the availability of toll-free 800
telephone numbers to be used to request assistance, or
information on how to route messages to STORET User
Assistance via the user's terminal.
Training Seminars
The available .training on STORET consists of two
seminars: a three-day Basic STORET Seminar and a two-
day Advanced STORET Seminar. Appropriate STORET
documentation and associated materials are provided
with the seminars which are usually given in each
region at least annually. A minimum attendance of 12
is required to hold a seminar, with a maximum of 24 due
to terminal limitations.
The Basic seminar assumes no knowledge of STORET and
little or no knowledge of a time-sharing terminal
command language. Topics covered include an
introduction to STORET and its concepts; an
introduction to the terminal command language currently
in use, and associated terminal procedures; data
storage techniques; basic retrieval techniques; helpful
on-line data sets; how to submit jobs to, and retrieve
output from, the STORET computer system; and others.
The Advanced seminar discusses advanced retrieval
options, machine readable output options, and related
6-3
-------
internal logic of the STORET system software.
Prerequisites include the completion of the Basic
STORET Seminar, and at least six months experience as
an active STORET user.
Certificates of course completion are issued upon
successful completion of the seminars.
STORET User Assistance attempts to fulfill all training
requests from the state agencies whenever possible, and
will, on occasion, provide training for groups smaller
than 12 people if considered critical for state
programs. It also maintains a list of users who have
expressed an interest in receiving training, and
frequently conducts special seminars to accommodate
those unable to obtain training via the normal
schedules. Information on the current training seminar
schedule can be obtained by calling STORET User
Assistance or by listing the appropriate STORET HELP
data set.
Documentation
A great deal of information pertaining to the use of
STORET is maintained on-line in the form of helpful
data sets which users can access from their terminals.
An index HELP data set is available which briefly
describes all of the data sets placed on the system for
the purpose of assisting users in some aspect of the
system.
The STORET User Handbook is the primary document
containing complete information on how to utilize the
STORET system. This material is rather extensive in
size, and is prepared for inclusion in the special 3"
18-ring loose-leaf binders provided by STORET User
Assistance. The major division of this Handbook is a
part, and includes an OVERVIEW part and one part for
each of the files within the STORET system. A listing
of the appropriate STORET HELP data set provides an up-
to-date status on the availability of all parts,
chapters, and sections of the Handbook, along with any
revisions thereto.
STORET User Assistance publishes a periodical as
described elsewhere in this section. The availability
of all new or revised documents and HELP files are
announced in this publication.
STORET User Assistance maintains a list of Handbook
owners, which is used as a mailing list for all
updates, periodicals, memos, and other items that are
periodically distributed to all STORET users-of-record.
6-4
-------
Users are welcome to contact STORET User Assistance to
verify their presence on this list and the accuracy of
their mailing address.
Interagency Panel
The STORET Interagency Panel was established in
December 1974 to recommend policies, priorities, and
approaches to be followed in managing the STORET
system. In addition to representatives from EPA's
Offices of Water and Hazardous Materials, Planning and
Management, and Research and Development, the panel is
comprised of selected regions and states, the Council
on Environmentaal Quality, the Office of Management and
Budget, and other Federal agencies, including the U.S.
Geological Survey, the National Academy of Sciences,
and the National Oceanic Atmospheric Administration.
The panel meets twice yearly to provide an opportunity
for members to review STORET current activities and
future plans, and to keep abreast of, and participate
in, STORET management and policy decisions.
Annual STORET Users Meeting
The ^annual users meeting provides an opportunity for
STORET users from around the country to discuss and
exchange ideas on their uses of the STORET system. The
three-day agenda includes presentations on the status
of the system, on planned future capabilities, and on
methods to use the system efficiently and cost-
effectively. Individual users present papers on their
uses of STORET. The forum provides an excellent
opportunity for the exchange of information between
water quality managers, and provides exposure between
state managers and EPA representatives that otherwise
would be impossible to attain. The interaction between
users is invaluable in solving common problems, in
creating an awareness of the system's capabilities, and
in achieving uniform data quality.
User Periodical
STORET User Assistance publishes, and distributes to
all users-of-record on a quarterly basis, a user
periodical titled STOR ET CETERA. This publication is
dedicated to news about the STORET system, and
regularly features such items as information on new
system enhancements, system usage reminders, retrieval
hints, references to helpful on-line STORET data sets,
and announcements of other noteworthy STORET-related
happenings. The document also provides an opportunity
for STORET User Assistance to solicit users on their
opinions about selected STORET items-of-interest, such
6-5
-------
as a request for feedback on the preferred manner of
implementing a desired system enhancement. STORET
users are encouraged to contribute topics for inclusion
in the publication.
6.3 REGIONAL STORET REPRESENTATIVES
EPA Regional STORET representatives have been assigned for each
of the ten regions. The individuals listed under the Points of
Contact column have the responsibility, within their respective
region, for establishing and implementing STORET policies, for
determining which data should and should not be stored, who
should or should not be using the system, and what their usage
allowances should be. The individuals listed under the Regional
STORET Representatives column can provide direct assistance on
questions pertaining to the use of STORET programs and other
technically-oriented matters.
6-6
-------
Region
Region I
Region II
Region III
Region IV
Region V
Region VI
Points of Contact
Walter M. Newman, Chief
Systems Analysis Branch
Environmental Protection Agency
John F. Kennedy Federal Building
Boston, Massachusetts 02203
(617) 223-5885
Herbert Barrack, Director
Management Division
Environmental Protection Agency
26 Federal Plaza
New York, New York 10007
(212) 264-2520
Larry Miller, Chief
Water Quality Monitoring Office
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
Curtis Building
6th and Walnut Streets
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19106
(215) 597-9823
John Marlar, Chief
Technical Support Branch
Environmental Protection Agency
1421 Peachtree Street, N.E.
Atlanta, Georgia 30309
(404) 526-3012 (FTS) 285-3012
Christopher Timm, Director
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
230 S. Dearborn Street
Chicago, Illinois 60604
(312) 353-6738
David White, Chief
Technical & Administration Systems
Branch
1201 Elm Street
First International Building
Dallas, Texas 75270
(214) 749-3761
Regional STORET
Representatives
Martin Fraser
(617) 223-5885
Jack Sweeney
(212) 264-0388
(FTS) 264-9850
Ted Standish
(215) 597-8046
Dan Barber
(404) 526-5989
(FTS) 285-5989
Stuart Ross
(312) 353-2061
Dave White
(214) 749-3761
6-7
-------
Region VII
Region VIII
Region IX
Region X
Walter Robohn, Federal Regional
Council Representative
Environmental Protection Agency
1735 Baltimore Avenue
Kansas City, Missouri 64108
(816) 374-5495 (FTS) 758-5429
Keith Schwab, Director
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
1860 Lincoln Street
Suite 900
Denver, Colorado 80203
(303) 837-4935 (FTS) 327-4935
Clyde Eller, Director
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
100 California Street
San Francisco, California 94111
(415) 556-7858
Dr. Gary O'Neal, Director
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
1290 6th Avenue
Seattle, Washington 98101
(206) 422-1193 (FTS) 399-1295
Dennis Degner
(816) 374-2018
(FTS) 758-2018
Thomas Entzminger
(303) 837-2226
(FTS) 327-2226
William Lewis
(415) 556-7550
Ray Peterson
(206) 399-1580
(FTS) 399-1580
Although these representatives, and their addresses and phone
numbers, were current as of the date of publication of this
OVERVIEW, they may change from time to time. Any changes to this
information can be obtained by calling STORET User Assistance.
Unless noted otherwise, the FTS telephone numbers are identical
to the public numbers shown.
6-8
-------
o
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
This part of the STORET User Handbook
describes the Water Quality File,
the largest data file within the
STORET system. All aspects of the
WQF are covered in detail, including
how to enter and retrieve data from
computer terminals.
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
WQ DECEMBER 1982
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapters
WQ-NTRO
WQ-FS
WQ-DE
WQ-RET
WQ-TP
WQ- INDEX
Appendices
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Subject
Introduction
File Structure
Water Quality Data Entry
Water Quality Retrieval
Terminal Procedures
Index
Subject
A WQF Glossary
STORET Parameters and
Parameter Codes
State and County Codes
Basin Codes
Sampling Sites Within
Sewage Treatment Plants
STORET Station Type Codes
Storing, Processing, and
Retrieving Intensive
Survey Data
User Supplied Edits
Quality Assurance Codes
Indicating Data Value
Tab
WQ-NTRO
WQ-FS
WQ-DE
WQ-RET
WQ-TP
WQ- INDEX
Page
A-l
B-l
C-l
D-l
E-l
F-l
G-l
H-l
1-1
J-l
K
Significance
Interactive Command
Procedures
K-l
WQ
DECEMBER 1982
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
O
PART WQ I
WATER QUALITY FILE 3
30
O
CHAPTER
WQ-NTRO
INTRODUCTION
WQ-NTRO APRIL 1981
-------
CHAPTER
WQ-NTRO
INTRODUCTION
This part of the STORET User Handbook describes the Water Quality
File >WQF', one of several files within the STORET system. The
WQF is the largest of the STORET files in terms of the amount of
data in the file, and it is the most frequently used STORET file.
This part describes all aspects of the WQF: how data is stored
into the file; how data is retrieved from the file; how the
system is utilized within a remote computer terminal (keyboard
and card reader) environment; and other items of information
necessary to the effective and efficient usage of the file.
The WQF part is divided into chapters, which are further divided
into sections, and into subsections within sections. To
facilitate locating a particular chapter or section, chapter
divider pages are light brown, section divider pages are light
grey. The part also has several supplementary appendices and an
index, whose divider pages are light brown. As with the part
designations, mnemonic (such as WQ-NTRO) rather than numeric
identifiers are used to identify chapters within the WQF part.
Chapter WQ-FS, File Structure, describes the structure of the
STORET Water Quality File, including the data base organization
and the layout and content of the records within the data base.
The program logic employed by STORET in processing user storage
and retrieval requests is outlined.
Chapter WQ-DE, Water Quality Data Entry, describes the procedures
and methods available to store, change, and delete station
location and parameter data in the WQF.
Chapter WQ-RET, Water Quality Retrieval, describes the retrieval
capabilities provided by STORET. The process of building a
retrieval request is described and general descriptions of each
retrieval program are given, along with detailed descriptions of
the retrieval keywords and programs that can be used to structure
a retrieval request. Retrieval examples illustrate the effect of
various keywords and keyword combinations on retrieval output.
Chapter WQ-TERM, Terminal Procedures, describes the procedures
used to access the computer system on which STORET resides, and
how data are entered and retrieved within a computer terminal
(both low-speed keyboard-type and medium-speed card-reading-type)
environment.
WQ-NTRO APRIL 1981
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART «»
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-FS
FILE STRUCTURE
WQ-FS
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sections Subiect Page
1 Introduction 1-1
2 The Hierarchical Structure of WQF Data 2-1
3 The Programs and Files Used in Processing 3-1
WQF Data
4 Storing Data into the WQF 4-1
5 Retrieving Data from the WQF 5-1
WQ-FS
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-FS
FILE STRUCTURE
CO
SECTION
1
INTRODUCTION
WQ-FS
-------
SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this chapter is to present an overview of the
Water Quality File programs and data file structures, and to
describe how they are utilized in the day-to-day activities of
storing and retrieving data. WQF processing programs and data
files are introduced and defined, and a number of flow diagrams
are presented which illustrate the relationships between these
programs and files.
The content of this chapter was not designed to provide internal
logic flows of the programs, nor to describe byte-by-byte layouts
of the various data files used by the programs. Rather, this
chapter was designed to provide enough detail necessary to
acquaint users with an overview of how user-written retrieval and
storage requests interface with WQF programs and files. It is
presumed that the reader of this chapter is an experienced user
of the STORET system.
Section 2 describes the hierarchical structure of STORET water
quality data in relation to the data files in which they are
placed. Section 3 defines the various programs and files which
make up the WQF. The remaining two sections describe the general
flow of storing and retrieving WQF data.
Other chapters of this WQ Part describe the processes of storing
and retrieving WQF data in greater detail.
WQ-FS
1-1
-------
STORE! USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-FS
FILE STRUCTURE
CO
1
SECTION i
2 •»
THE HIERARCHICAL STRUCTURE OF WQF DATA
WQ-FS
-------
SECTION 2: THE HIERARCHICAL STRUCTURE OF WQF DATA
The monitoring activities conducted by the states, EPA regions,
and other agencies and organizations are an essential aspect of
our Nation's program to prevent, reduce, and eliminate water
pollution. The findings of these monitoring activities (i.e.,
the amounts of pollutants found in water samples) are stored in
the Water Quality File, the largest of STORET's files. This
section describes the monitoring process in general, the types of
data that are stored in the WQF, and how these data are stored in
the WQF.
2.1 THE MONITORING PROCESS
Monitoring strategies are developed by individual
states, with guidance by EPA, to fulfill their own
particular water quality objectives. A great deal of
thought and planning goes into defining the area to be
covered, and in establishing the purpose to be
achieved. Once defined by planners, the network is
then defined to STORET by the assignment of an agency
code which is unique to all other networks defined in
STORET.
Part of the monitoring network strategy is the
determination of the number and location of sites to be
included within the network. It is most important that
these sites be located properly so that they present an
accurate picture of the water quality for the area of
interest. These monitoring sites are referred to as
stations in STORET, and each station within an agency
is assigned up to four owner-specified unique (to the
agency) station codes. The first station code, which
is required, is called the Primary Station Code. The
remaining three optional codes are called Secondary
Station Codes, and may be used as aliases for the
station.
Another aspect of the monitoring strategy for a network
is the determination of what needs to be sampled at the
monitoring sites, over what time frame, and at what
sampling frequency. Over 1800 unique parameters are
defined within STORET, and the planners decide which
parameters are to be measured in accordance with the
overall monitoring strategy.
Two basic types of samples are taken from water: a grab
sample and a composite sample. A grab sample is an
individual water quality sample collected at a specific
point in time; composite samples are combinations of
individual samples obtained at intervals over a period
of time. These may be several grab samples spanning a
WQ-FS
2-1
-------
24-hour period where all grabs are placed in a single
container, or a series of samples taken at equal
distances across a stream section. Analysis of these
samples for water quality data may be performed in the
field or within a laboratory. STORET provides a means
to store information on any type of water sample, from
a simple grab to a sophisticated composite sample.
Each agency has established its own procedures for
coding the results of the water sample analyses onto
sheets or forms used to prepare the data in machine
readable form, such as on punched cards. At this point
the data is ready to be stored into the WQF.
2.2 THE DATA IN THE WQF
The information within the WQF consists of two basic
types of data: station location data, which describes
and categorizes the geographical location of where a
sample was taken; and parametric data, which describes
the conditions under which a sample was taken (such as
date, time, and depth) as well as the results of the
sample analyses.
2.2.1 STATION LOCATION DATA
Water quality data measurement stations are located on
essentially all of the Nation's rivers, lakes, streams,
and other waterways; over 200,000 unique collection
points are defined within STORET. The physical
location of a station can be identified or referenced
by any or all of the ways listed and described below:
- agency code and station code identifiers
- hydrologic references
latitude and longitude coordinates
- state, county, basin, or other area
designations
AGENCY/STATION CODES
Every station is located within a specific monitoring
network which is identified by an agency code and which
is unique to all other agency codes defined within
STORET. Each station is assigned a primary station
code, and, optionally, up to three secondary station
codes, or aliases. Whenever parametric data is being
stored, changed, or deleted, the appropriate agency and
station codes must be referenced. Similarly, data for
one or more agencies and/or stations can be retrieved
by these codes.
WQ-FS
2-2
-------
HYDROLOGIC REFERENCES
A hydrologic index (or river mile index) is a numerical
code which identifies the location of a point on a
defined river system by defining the distance of the
point from, and its hydrologic relationship to, the
mouth of the river system. A complete hydrologic index
is composed of the following codes: a major basin
code; a minor basin code; a terminal stream number
which defines a stream in the minor basin; mileages
which define the distances between and to confluences
in the river system; and an index which identifies the
stream level on which the point is located.
LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE COORDINATES
Many stations, particularly those on open waters such
as oceans, lakes, bays, and estuaries, cannot always be
easily located using hydrologic indices. A station's
location can also be pinpointed by the conventional
geographical coordinates of latitude and longitude,
expressed in degrees, minutes, seconds, and tenths of a
second.
AREA DESIGNATIONS
Stations can also be identified with respect to the
state, county, and major/minor/subbasin in which they
are physically located. Another area designation with
which stations can be retrieved is the 208 area
corresponding to the designated state areawide waste
treatment management area as defined under Section 208
of PL 92-500.
2.2.2 PARAMETRIC DATA
Once a station has been identified to STORET and stored
in the system, parametric data obtained at that station
can be stored in the system.
The selection of parameters that are sampled at a
station is a function of the monitoring strategy and
other requirements established by the agency
responsible for the station. Regardless of which
parameters are sampled, certain information may be
defined for each parameter value that is to be stored
within the WQF. The following list summarizes this
information:
WQ-FS
2-3
-------
the location (primary or secondary station
code) where the sample was taken (required)
- the date (month, day, year) the sample
was collected (required)
the time (hour, minute) the sample was
collected (optional)
the depth (in feet or meters) at which
the sample was taken (optional)
the value (amount) of the parameter found
within the sample (required), and
the specification of one or more remark
codes which further describe the
conditions under which the sample was
taken (optional).
Only one set of analytical results (one data record)
may be stored under a single parameter code-date-time-
depth-location combination, which is unique to every
other parameter value record stored within the WQF.
Analytical results (values) are associated with
standard 5-digit STORET parameter codes. A complete
list of these codes, in various sort orders, can be
obtained by following the instructions given in
Appendix B: STORET Parameters and Parameter Codes.
These parameter codes define the method by which an
analysis was performed, as well as the form and units
of measurement in which the results were recorded or
stored.
2.3 HOW WATER QUALITY DATA IS STORED IN THE WQF
Figure 2-1 gives a schematic representation of how
station location and parametric data are stored within
the WQF.
As shown in the schematic, all data for a specific
station is associated with that station. Within the
system, data for a particular station is linked with
other data for that station by a series of record
pointers. Data elements are chained according to date
and time (schematically strung along a time-variable
clothesline), and according to depth within time.
Associated with each unique date/time/depth entry
within STORET are a variable number of sample values,
stored in increasing parameter code order. Only one
value may be stored for any unique
station/date/time/depth/parameter-code record. New
records are stored, and appropriately chained, in their
proper date/time and parameter code sequence.
WQ-FS
2-4
-------
STATION B 1
RMI )
LAT/LONG I
STATE, CITY, )
BASIN, AND (
AREA CODES f
fr
X^"/
^^
(A
1 .
^
A
G
E
N
C
Y
X
Y
Z
u
P
STATION A f
RMI (
LAT/LONG /
STATE, CITY, f
BASIN, AND )
AREA CODES (
/— D»te r— Date /— Date
X" T'me /• Time X Time
/- Depth / Depth X- Depth
k^l
"^ ^^ ^
C/l
UJ
g
u
a.
Z
ul
oc
u
Z
/- Composite Data f- Composite Data /- Composite Data
— Parameter code.
Remark code. Value
— Parameter code.
Remark code. Value
— Parameter code.
Remark code. Value
— Parameter code.
Remark code. Value
T 1
l^^^tfM^^Mtf
* C
— Parameter code.
Remark code. Value
— Parameter code.
Remark code. Value
— Parameter code.
Remark code. Value
r i
/
-Parameter code, INCT1EMpS'NG
Remark code. Value "Mt
— Parameter code.
Remark code. Value
FIGURE 2-1
CLOTHESLINE ANALOGY OF THE STORAGE OF
STATION LOCATION AND PARAMETRIC DATA WITHIN THE WQF
WQ-FS
2-5
-------
STORE! USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-FS
FILE STRUCTURE
CO
8
SECTION
3
THE PROGRAMS AND FILES USED IN PROCESSING
WQF DATA
WQ-FS
-------
SECTION 3: THE PROGRAMS AND FILES USED IN PROCESSING WQF DATA
This section presents a brief description of each of the
individual data files which collectively make up the Water
Quality File; it also describes the processing programs which are
invoked when users request that data be stored or retrieved.
Summary listings of these data files and programs, by function,
are shown in Figures 3-1 and 3-2. The data files are listed in
Figure 3-1 according to their use as an index, transient, or data
base file; the programs are listed in Figure 3-2 according to
th'eir use in a storage or retrieval operation. All are described
below. The remaining two sections of this chapter discuss the
interaction of these files and programs in more detail.
INDEX FILES
TRANSIENT FILES
DATA BASE FILE
STCOF
ASF
MSF
MOD
I J
Q
- Q-Q
- Q
ERROR
Q
D4
- Q
AREAFLE
RSPF
MASK
FIGURE 3-1
DATA FILES WITHIN THE WQF
WQ-FS
3-1
-------
3.1 DATA FILES WITHIN THE WQF
For purposes of explanation, these files have been
grouped into three basic categories: index files,
which are used to locate requested stations; transient
files, which are created as an intermediate step before
data is permanently stored or retrieved; and the data
base file, which contains the station and parametric
data which make up the WQF. Each of these files is
described in turn below.
3.1.1 INDEX FILES
Depending upon the station selection keywords specified
within a retrieval request, or depending upon the
storage requests specified within a storage deck, one
or more of these index files will be utilized to locate
specific stations referenced by the retrieval keywords
or storage instructions.
Each record within most of these index files contains
one or two fields which point to the exact location of
data within the WQF. These fields are the computer
sequence number (CSN) field and the relative station
position (RSP) field. Whenever a station is added to
the WQF, it is assigned the next available CSN which
will uniquely identify the station from all other
stations within the system. (CSNs of stations deleted
are permanently retired; they are not reassigned to
subsequent new stations.) The RSP points to the
beginning location in the WQF data base of the station
location and parametric data associated with the
corresponding CSN. As the STORET system processes a
retrieval request, it references various index files
depending upon the set of station identification
keywords specified within the request, which in turn
point to the locations of the water quality data of
interest.
LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE FILE (LATF)
This index file contains one 18-byte fixed-length
record for each primary and secondary station code
stored in the WQF, stored in an increasing longitude
within latitude order. The key consists of the
latitude coordinate concatenated with the longitude
coordinate.
Latitude/Longitude State RSP CSN
Coordinates Code
WQ-FS
3-2
-------
STATE AND COUNTY FILE (STCOF)
This index file contains one 16-byte fixed-length
record for each primary and secondary station code
stored in the WQF, stored in ascending state, and
county within state, sequence. Station codes are
stored in random order within county codes.
The file also contains a record for each station
according to its location within a
major/minor/subbasin. Station codes are stored in
random order within subbasin codes.
State/County Code RSP CSN
Major/Minor/Subbasin Codes RSP CSN
AGENCY/STATION FILE (ASF)
This index file contains one 33-byte fixed-length
record for each primary and secondary station code
stored within the system. The records are stored in
ascending alphanumeric station number sequence within
agency code. (Due to this ordering scheme, the primary
and secondary station codes for a particular station
within an agency may not necessarily be grouped
together.)
Agency/Station Codes State RSP CSN
Code
WQ-FS
3-3
-------
MASTER STATION FILE (MSF)
This index file contains one 195-byte fixed-length
record for each primary station code stored within the
system, stored in ascending alphanumeric sequence
within agency code. (The MSF serves as a backup to the
other index files by containing all other station
location keys, such as state and county codes, latitude
and longitude, RMI index and mile levels, agency code,
basin codes, and station type.)
Primary Station Code
Other Station
location codes
RSP CSN
RIVER MILE INDEX FILE (RMIF)
This index file contains one 112-byte fixed-length
record for each primary station code stored within the
WQF. Each record contains the station's RMI
information which includes the major and minor terminal
basin codes and the terminal stream number, the set of
12 mile and level indexes, and the corresponding CSN
and RSP. Records are stored in a downstream to
upstream sequence (i.e., in an increasing river mile
index sequence). River mile indexes of stations
located on tributaries are stored within the respective
main stem, beginning with the tributary closest to the
terminal stream.
RMI Key
Other RMI
information
RSP
CSN
WQ-FS
3-4
-------
AREA FILE (AREAFLE)
This index file contains one variable length record for
each state designated areawide waste treatment
management area defined within Section 208 of Public
Law 92-500. (The STORET help data set named
SEC208.AREAS contains a listing of all 208 areas
defined within the WQF.) Each record contains the
latitude/longitude polygon which bounds the named 208
area. An AREA retrieval is converted to a polygon
retrieval using this cross-reference file.
Area Name Polygon
RELATIVE STATION POINTER FILE (RSPF)
This index file contains one 22-byte fixed-length
record for each primary station code that has ever been
stored within the WQF. Records are stored in ascending
numerical CSN sequence. The values within the RSP
fields point to the locations of station identification
data on the water quality data base file.
CSN
RSP
State
Station
Code
Type
MASK LIBRARY FILE (MASK)
This index file contains one 12,500-byte fixed-length
record for each station mask created and stored within
the WQF. Each bit position within this record
corresponds to a single station. Masks have been
created for each STORET parameter which identify the
attribute 'parameter nnn is present at this station1
for all stations on the system. Users may also create
their own masks via the NOPAR program.
Mask Key Bit Matrix
WQ-FS
3-5
-------
3.1.2 TRANSIENT FILES
The transient files are intermediate files which are
created on a temporary basis by the retrieval and
storage programs. These files are described below.
HITS FILE
This transient file is created by the RETRIV program
and contains one record for each station that fulfills
the specified station selection and station restriction
criteria established by the station identification
keywords within the retrieval request. The file is
also utilized by RETRIV (by a program module other than
the one that created the file) during its processing of
the data selection keywords specified in the retrieval.
Records within the file are fixed-length, and contain
three fields of information: a record code, an agency
code, and a station code.
MOD FILES
These temporary files are created whenever a storage
request is processed by the programs EDITS, GDIP,
DIPMS, or WQGSTOR. Their records contain syntax-error-
free station location and parametric data which is to
be added, changed, or deleted from the WQF. Each
record contains the date, agency and station codes, and
up to ten values per sample. These files serve as
input to the UPDATE program (run over a weekend by
STORET personnel) which performs the user's requested
data storage transactions on the STORET data base and
index files.
FURTHER COMPUTATIONAL FILE (FCF)
Further Computational Files (FCFs) are files created by
the RET program which contain normal RET retrieval
output (i.e., raw data values which have not been
manipulated in any way by the WQF analysis programs)
that can ultimately be used as input to user-written
programs. An FCF can have a variety of formats,
depending upon user requirements and the amount of
information needed. FCF records can be up to 305
characters in length, and can include parameter heading
records, station heading records, data records, and
delimiter records. Layouts of the different FCFs,
their records, and the fields within these records, are
described in detail in the description of the advanced
RET program.
WQ-FS
3-6
-------
ERROR FILE
This temporary file is created whenever a storage
request is processed by the programs EDITB, GDIP,
DIPMS, or WQGSTOR. The file contains one record for
each error discovered in the processing of the storage
request. Information contained in each record includes
agency and station identification codes, the parameter
code in error, and an error number corresponding to the
error found. This file is in turn processed by the
ERROR program.
3.1.3 DATA BASE FILE
The-WQF detail data base contains all the station
identification and parametric data that is available
for retrieval by the WQF retrieval programs. The data
base resides on multiple IBM 3330 Model II Disk Storage
units, all of which are on-line during normal system
availability hours. Data for any particular station is
purposely scattered over several disk packs, to improve
access availability and efficiency. Information on any
given station includes a header record and
approximately 14 variable length data records. The
header record contains a station's relative station
position (RSP) which is pointed to by the HITS file and
the RSPF file, the station's CSN, the date range of
data stored with the station along with other check
information, and a pointer to the first data record.
There is a data record for each element of station
identification information (i.e., there is one record
that contains only RMI data, another that contains only
latitude/longitude data, and so on), followed by
records that contain the parameter codes, values, and
remarks stored for the station. The records containing
station identification information are relatively
short, while records containing parametric data can be
as long as 2000 to 2500 characters. All data records
for a given station are chained.
WQ-FS
3-7
-------
3.2 PROGRAMS USED TO PROCESS WQF DATA
For purposes of explanation, these programs have been
grouped according to their use in either a storage or a
retrieval operation as shown in Figure 3-2. A brief
description of each program is given below. Sections 4
and 5 discuss the interactions of these programs with
WQF files.
STORAGE RETRIEVAL
DISTRIBUTE SCAN
EDITS RETRIV
GDIP
DIPMS
WQGSTOR
RANGCHK
ERROR
UPDATE
FIGURE 3-2
PROGRAMS USED TO PROCESS WQF DATA
3.2.1 STORAGE PROGRAMS
DISTRIBUTE
The DISTRIBUTE program is essentially a control program
which is invoked by the procedure STWQJ. Its function
is to read the control statement entered by the user
which defines the type of storage procedure to be
initiated (i.e., ?01, ?02, ?03, ?04), and to return the
proper return code which will call the appropriate
storage processing program. The program is not
returned to after it passes control to either EDITS,
GDIP, DIPMS, or WQGSTOR.
WQ-FS
3-8
-------
EDITB
The EDITB program is called by DISTRIBUTE in response
to a ?01 type of storage procedure initiated by a user.
The program processes both station location data and
parametric data, whether adding, deleting, or changing
data. Input to the program consists of fixed-field,
standard card input. All fields are checked for
syntax, with errors written to the ERROR file. Data
passing these edit checks are written to the MOD file.
The program passes all parameter values to the RANGCHK
program, where they are checked for acceptable ranges,
before they are written to either the ERROR file or MOD
file, as appropriate. EDITB can process both grab and
composite data.
GDIP
The GDIP program is called by DISTRIBUTE in response to
a ?02 type of storage procedure initiated by a user.
The program processes only new parametric data. Input
to the program consists of cards in a variable or free-
form format. All fields are checked for syntax, with
errors written to the ERROR file. Data passing the
edit checks are passed to the RANGCHK program which
checks parameter values for acceptable ranges. Errors
are written to the ERROR file; values which are
acceptable are written to the MOD file.
DIPMS
The DIPMS program is called by DISTRIBUTE in response
to a ?03 type of storage procedure initiated by a user.
The program processes only new parametric data. Input
to the program consists of cards in a variable or free-
form format. All fields are checked for syntax, with
errors written to the ERROR file. Data passing the
edit checks are passed to the RANGCHK program which
checks parameter values for acceptable ranges. Errors
are written to the ERROR file; values which are
acceptable are written to the MOD file.
WQ-FS
3-9
-------
WQGSTOR
The WQGSTOR program is called by DISTRIBUTE in response
to a ?04 type of storage procedure initiated by a user.
The program processes parametric data (whether adding,
deleting, or changing data), and it can also process
both grab and composite data. Input to the program is
in a variable or free-form format, and consists of AC
and SC cards. All fields are checked for syntax
errors, with errors written to the ERROR file. Data
passing these edit checks are written to the MOD file.
The program passes all parameter values to the RANGCHK
program, where they are checked for acceptable ranges,
before they are written to either the ERROR file or MOD
file, as appropriate.
RANGCHK
This program is called by DISTRIBUTE whenever
parametric data are being stored in the WQF. It
performs an edit check against parameter values being
stored to assure that they fall within an acceptable
range pre-established for the parameters, and stored as
tables within the program. Appendix B to this Part of
the Handbook lists the highest and lowest acceptable
values that have been established for approximately 180
parameter codes.
ERROR
This program is called by DISTRIBUTE to obtain a
listing of errors generated during a data storage
request. The program lists the errors written onto the
ERROR file by the EDITS, GDIP, DIPMS, and WQGSTOR
programs. This program may be invoked by the user to
obtain a listing of errors generated during an UPDATE.
UPDATE
The UPDATE program is the program that actually updates
the WQF data base. It is run each weekend by STORET
personnel, and processes the data written to the MOD
file by the storage programs during the previous week.
The program performs additional edit checks on the data
being stored, changed, or deleted. It groups all of
the data into groups of deletes, additions, and changes
before sorting the transactions into agency/station
order. It first updates all appropriate index files,
then updates the detail file.
WQ-FS
3-10
-------
3.2.2 RETRIEVAL PROGRAMS
SCAN
This program performs a syntax check on all records
within a retrieval request prior to the time the
retrieval request is passed to RETRIV. It is the first
program initiated as a result of executing the STORET
RET command. The program checks for proper keyword
spelling, formatting, and punctuation, and for proper
keyword and keyword/value combinations. The program
generates a listing of errors found, and if none are
detected, it passes the retrieval request to RETRIV for
continued processing.
RETRIV
The RETRIV program is the primary program involved with
the processing of a retrieval request. It takes
control once the retrieval has successfully passed the
syntax check performed by the SCAN program, and it
remains in control until analysis functions are
required, which are performed by routines inherent
within the statistical analysis retrieval programs.
RETRIV consists of several modules each of which
processes a specific set of retrieval request keywords,
as described in more detail in Section 5.
WQ-FS
3-11
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-FS
FILE STRUCTURE
CO
m
o
SECTION O
.*
STORING DATA INTO THE WQF
WQ-FS
-------
SECTION 4: STORING DATA INTO THE WQF
This section provides an overview of the process of storing data
into the WQF. The structure of a typical storage request is
described, as are the several types of storage procedures that
can be invoked by a storage request. The interactions between
WQF files and WQF storage programs are illustrated and described,
as are the various edit and error checks that are performed by
the storage procedures. 'Chapter WQ-DE of this Water Quality
File Part presents a detailed discussion of the data storage
capability, and how it is utilized to store and maintain water
quality station location and parametric data within the WQF.
4.1 THE STRUCTURE OF A STORAGE REQUEST
A WQF storage request is composed of a set of 80-
character records either punched cards or lines of
information within a data set; which defines what
information is to be processed, and what is to be done
with the information, i.e., is it to be initially
stored, or used to change, be added to, or delete
previously stored information. The majority of these
records, or cards, are of a fixed-field format, with
specific information being coded in specific fields,
including card type codes which identify the card and
its contents to the STORET system. Certain storage
request cards relate only to station location
information, while others relate only to parametric
data.
There are nine different types of cards that can be
used, in differing combinations, to code station
location data. (And station location data can be
entered into the WQF only via these particular cards.)
The names, codes, and corresponding functions of these
cards are listed in Figure 4-1.
Other card types are used to code parametric data, and
include P cards, D cards, and 6 cards. (Chapter WQ-DE
describes these cards, and the fields within the cards,
in greater detail. >
Parametric data may not be stored in the same UPDATE
run that a new station is defined and stored in the
WQF. It is generally more prudent to first assure that
a station has been stored successfully and correctly
before storing parametric data associated with the
station.
WQ-FS
4-1
-------
CARD NAME
Agency Card
Station Type Card
Station Card
Latitude/Longitude Card
RMI Card
RMI Card
Major/Minor Basin Card
Location Description Card
Descriptive Paragraph Card
CARD CODE
A
T
S
0
1
2
3
4
USED TO SPECIFY
general information
common to a set of stations
a code depicting the
characteristics of one or
more stations
information specific to
a single station
geographical coordinates of
a station's location
hydrologic indices (river mile
indices) of a station
continuation of information
on card 1
basin location information
additional information
identifying a station's
location
textual information
describing station activity
FIGURE 4-1
CARDS USED TO STORE STATION LOCATION INFORMATION
4.2 TYPES OF STORAGE PROCEDURES
There are four procedures available to the STORET user
to initiate different storage operations. These are
known as ?01, ?02, ?03, or ?04 storage procedures which
correspond to the way they are invoked via a keyboard
terminal. The uses or functions of these storage
procedure methods are summarized in Figure 4-2.
The ?01 storage procedure (or fixed field procedure)
employs a fixed-field or standard card format, and can
be used to either add new, change old, or delete old
station location data and/or parametric data. (This is
the only storage procedure which can be used to store,
change, or delete station location data.) An agency
card and a station card will be coded to identify the
agency and stations involved. This procedure is also
applicable to all four types of samples listed in
Figure 4-2. The cards used to code the parametric data
for a ?01 storage procedure are called parametric data
cards or 6 cards.
WQ-FS
4-2
-------
FUNCTION/USE
storing new station location data
changing station location data
deleting station location data
storing new parametric data
changing parametric data
deleting parametric data
simple grab sample
grab sample with time
composite sample with dates
composite sample with all data
STORAGE
?01
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
?02
no
no
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
no
PROCEDURE
?03
no
no
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
no
?04
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
FIGURE 4-2
PERMISSIBLE CODING PROCEDURES AS A FUNCTION OF USE
The ?02 storage procedure (or decimal input procedure)
employs a variable or free-form card format, and can be
used only to store parameter values, and only to store
values sampled at a number of stations taken at
different times, dates, and depths (single station
storage). The ?02 procedure is not used to change or
delete parametric data, nor can it be used to store
composite samples with date, time, and sampling
conditions identified. The cards used to code this
procedure are an agency card, and one or more P cards
and D cards (and their respective continuation cards if
needed).
The ?03 storage procedure (another form of the decimal
input procedure) also employs a variable or free-form
card format, and also can be used only to store
parameter values. This procedure is used to store
samples taken at identical, as opposed to different,
times, dates, and depths (multiple station storage).
The ?03 procedure is not used to change or delete
previously stored parameter data, nor is it used to
store composite samples with date, time, and sampling
conditions identified. The cards used to code this
procedure are an agency card, and one or more P cards
and D cards (and their respective continuation cards if
needed).
WQ-FS
4-3
-------
The ?04 storage procedure (or WQGSTOR) employs a
variable or free-form format, and can be used either to
store, change, or delete parametric data. It also can
be used with all four types of samples. The cards used
to code this procedure are an agency card (using either
a fixed-format or a variable format), and one or more
SC cards.
Each of these procedures invokes the execution of a
specific program which processes the requested storage
procedure, as described and illustrated in the
paragraphs below.
4.3 ENTERING DATA INTO THE WQF
Figure 4-3 portrays the flow of a typical STORET
storage request through the STORET processing programs
that are invoked when a storage request is entered into
the STORET system. It also illustrates the various
files that are created as a result of the processing
performed.
Processing of a user's storage request is a two-phase
operation. It begins with the execution of the
procedure named STWQJ, which calls the DISTRIBUTE
program, which reads the user input files and which
calls the appropriate program required to process the
specified storage procedure. These programs (EDITB,
GDIP, DIPMS, and WQGSTOR) process the specified storage
request, perform a variety of error checking and field
editing routines, create both an ERROR file and a MOD
file, and if the storage request involves parametric
data, pass control to the range check program. Only
those storage request records which pass the various
editing and error checking routines are written to the
MOD file; all others are written to the ERROR file.
Errors written to the ERROR file are available to the
user who submitted the storage request, and after
correction, the storage deck can be resubmitted, and
placed on the MOD file, as described below.
Throughout the week, all users' edited and
syntactically-correct storage requests are collected on
the MOD file; this data is not permanently stored
during the week in the STORET data base as a direct
result of users' storage requests. The second phase of
the process of storing user water quality data occurs
over the weekend when STORET User Assistance personnel
run the STORET UPDATE program. UPDATE reads the data
in the MOD file, performs other edit checks on the data
being stored, changed, or deleted, and then updates the
WQ-FS
4-4
-------
STORET index and detail data base files. Storage
requests which fail the UPDATE edits (e.g., a request
to delete a station not previously stored), are called
secondary errors and are written to the ERROR file,
which users can access on Monday following the weekend
update.
STORET
HELP
ERROR
FIGURE 4-3
THE FLOW OF A STORAGE REQUEST
WQ-FS
4-5
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-FS
FILE STRUCTURE
&
m
o
SECTION O
5 *
RETRIEVING DATA FROM THE WQF
WQ-FS
-------
SECTION 5: RETRIEVING DATA FROM THE WQF
This section provides an overview of the process of retrieving
data from the WQF. The structure of a retrieval request is
described, as is the logic that should be applied in building a
retrieval request in order to obtain only that data actually of
interest. Several diagrams are explained which illustrate the
interactions between WQF files and WQF retrieval programs.
(Chapter WQ-RET of this Water Quality File Part presents a
detailed discussion of the retrieval capability, and how it is
utilized to obtain the water quality station location and
parameter data of interest.)
5.1 THE STRUCTURE OF A RETRIEVAL REQUEST
A WQF retrieval request is composed of one or more
instructions which define what information is to be
retrieved, and how the information is to be presented.
(These instructions are entered into the STORET system
as 80-column punched cards or as lines of information
of a data set via a keyboard terminal.) An instruction
is composed of a keyword — an English word, letter, or
expression which generally depicts the function that
the keyword performs — and, in most instances, an
associated value which assigns a specific quantity or
other 'value1 to the keyword. Thus the keyword and
value instruction is the basic element of the STORET
WQF retrieval language, and valid combinations of these
instructions make up a retrieval request. One keyword,
the 'PGM=program-name,' keyword, must appear as the
first keyword in any retrieval request, and it
specifies which retrieval program is to be executed by
the STORET system.
Structuring a retrieval request is a relatively
straight-forward process, involving the consideration
of each of the six basic steps shown in Figure 5-1, and
the selection of those keywords (relevant to each step)
which will result in the desired data. (Chapter WQ-RET
describes this process in more detail, as well as the
keywords that may be specified in any retrieval
request.)
WQ-FS
5-1
-------
STEP
APPLICABLE KEYWORDS
SELECT
APPROPRIATE
RETRIEVAL PROGRAM
STATE
PURPOSE
OF RETRIEVAL
IDENTIFY
STATION (S)
OF INTEREST
IDENTIFY
PARAMETRIC DATA
OF INTEREST
SELECT
PROGRAM-SPECIFIC
KEYWORDS
SELECT
PRINT CONTROL
DESIRED
SUBMIT
FOR
PROCESSING
PGM
PURP
A, B,S,RMI,LT,,
P,BD,UD,ANCr
SORT,SCALE,DR,.
PRT,SHIFT,HEAD,,
FIGURE 5-1
BUILDING A RETRIEVAL REQUEST
WQ-FS
5-2
-------
5.2 TYPES OF RETRIEVALS
There are thirteen programs available to the STORET
user to retrieve station and parametric data from the
WQF. Some programs are appropriate to those whose
interests are geographically oriented, while others are
suited to users who are more interested in one or more
water quality parameters, regardless of their specific
geographical location. In addition to the information
stored from a user's own station, a STORET user can
also retrieve data on stations other than his own,
depending upon the user's area of interest or concern.
The following list summarizes the primary function of
these retrieval programs and the types of information
they provide.
STATION INFORMATION ONLY
program-name primary function
STA produces a listing of all primary
and secondary station codes
associated with one or more
agency codes.
INDEX prints station header information
for each station retrieved.
NOPAR tests selected stations for the
satisfaction of certain
user-specified sampling criteria.
LOG plots a map identifying station
locations.
INVENTORY OF PARAMETERS SAMPLED
program-name primary function
INVENT produce summary listings about
INV120 all parameters sampled at
selected stations. INVENT
utilizes a 132-character print
line, INV120 utilizes a
120-character print line.
WQ-FS
5-3
-------
LISTINGS OF ACTUAL SAMPLE VALUES
program-name primary function
RET obtains tabular listings of actual
sample values (i.e., raw data
values which have not been
manipulated in any way by the WQF
analysis programs) for selected
stations.
PUNCH punches selected parametric data
onto 80-column cards.
STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF RAW DATA
program-name primary function
STAND compares the stored values of
selected water quality parameters
against a set(s) of user-specified
values or criteria.
MEAN performs a variety of user-specified
statistical calculations on the
values of requested parameters
sampled at selected stations.
REG extracts correlation and regression
information from selected parametric
data.
MSP performs a variety of statistical
computations on the values of
selected parameters, and produces
graphic displays of the calculated
results as a function of the
stations selected.
PLOT retrieves user-specified parametric
data, and plots the values of each
selected parameter for each selected
station as a function of time.
The output that may be requested varies according to
the retrieval program, and includes printouts, punched
cards, plots, and machine-readable output located on
disk or magnetic tape.
WQ-FS
5-4
-------
5.3 THE FLOW OF A RETRIEVAL REQUEST THROUGH RETRIV
Figure 5-2 portrays the flow of a typical STORET
retrieval request through the STORET processing
programs that are invoked when a retrieval request is
entered into the STORET system. Although all retrieval
programs do not adhere to this general flow, the
majority do. Those programs that bypass RETRIV, such
as INVENT and STA, in effect perform their own RETRIV
functions internally.
The RETRIV program is the primary program involved in
processing retrieval requests. It takes control once a
retrieval request has successfully passed the syntax
check performed by the program SCAN, and it remains in
control until analysis functions are required, which
are performed by routines inherent within the
statistical analysis retrieval programs. RETRIV reads
all general retrieval keywords specified in the
retrieval request (and as documented in Section 4 of
the WQ-RET chapter); it reads the appropriate WQF index
files to locate the data sought; it creates a HITS
file; and after obtaining the requested data from the
STORET data base, it generates the requested output.
The following paragraphs describe the functions of the
three components of RETRIV (SEC 1, SEC G, and SEC 2) in
more detail.
The program module SEC 1 reads the station
identification keywords, and searches the appropriate
WQF index files for those station entries which satisfy
the user-specified station selection and station
restriction criteria. (This process includes the
resolution of any masks specified within the retrieval
request.) SEC 1 then creates a retrieval HITS file
which contains a pointer to each station within STORET
that satisfies the specified selection and restriction
criteria. SEC 1 also prints a message indicating the
number of stations found, and produces a listing of all
control information available to the program during
this phase of execution. This control information is
often helpful to STORET User Assistance personnel for
diagnostic purposes.
Program module SEC G is executed only if the AGGR data
selection keyword is specified in the retrieval
request. If this keyword is specified, SEC G sorts the
HITS file according to the AGGR criteria, and appends
the numerical value of the AGGR keyword to each record
within the HITS file.
WQ-FS
5-5
-------
NO STATIONS
OTHER CONTROL
INFORMATION
REPORT
OF
DATA
SATISFYING
SELECTION
CRITERIA
OTHER
TEMPORARY
FILES
(FCF OTHERS)
FIGURE 5-2
THE FLOW OF A RETRIEVAL REQUEST THROUGH RETRIV
WQ-FS
5-6
-------
Program module SEC 2 reads the HITS file created by SEC
1 or SEC G, it searches the STORE! data base for those
stations referenced by the HITS file, and it compares
the raw data found with the data selection keywords
specified in the retrieval request. It then produces
the output as requested via the print control keywords
specified in the retrieval, printing and/or writing to
other temporary files those data that passed the
selection criteria.
Processing of the retrieval request is then either
concluded or passed to the appropriate analysis
function of the requested program if any statistical
analysis processing is to be performed. Complete
descriptions of the data files used and created by
these program-specific analysis functions are described
within the WQ-RET chapter.
5.4 IDENTIFYING STATIONS WITHIN A RETRIEVAL REQUEST
Station identification keywords are divided into two
groups: station selector keywords, or selectors, and
station restriction keywords, or restrictors. (These
keywords are listed and described in Section 4 of the
WQ-RET chapter.) At least one selector must be
included in a retrieval request, or no stations - and
therefore no data - will be selected by the retrieval
request. Optionally, one or more restrictors may be
included within the retrieval whose function is to
further screen the selected stations.
Station selection keywords employ OR selection logic,
while station restrictor keywords employ AND selection
logic. Normally, only a single selector should be
specified in any single retrieval request. Should more
than one selector be specified, however, caution must
be exercised, as the prevailing OR logic results in the
retrieval of all stations which satisfy all sets of
criteria as defined by the selectors, which could
easily result in the inadvertent selection of one or
more stations a multiple number of times. For example,
if a retrieval contained both a state selector keyword
(STC) and a polygon selector keyword (LT,L), stations
located within any part of the state overlapped by the
polygon (area B) would be retrieved twice, along with
WQ-FS
5-7
-------
all other stations within the remaining areas of the
polygon (area A) and the state (area C). Such
duplicated data more than likely would not have been
intended, would result in increased computer processing
costs, and surely would introduce analysis
incongruities.
The AND logic employed by the restrictors has the
effect of limiting or narrowing the number of stations
retrieved. Using the polygon/state example above, the
specification of the LT,L keywords and the ST keyword
(a restrictor which restricts the selection of stations
to the state indicated) would result in the retrieval
of stations located only in area B. The retrieval
would contain no duplication of stations, and
significantly fewer total number of stations.
The sequence by which RETRIV processes station
identification keywords is illustrated by the path
drawn in the diagram below. Selector keywords are
processed independently of each other: stations found
as a result of the first selector are ANDed with all of
the restrictor keywords specified in the retrieval,
with the surviving stations written to the HITS file;
subsequent selectors are similarly processed in the
order specified within the retrieval request.
RESTRICTORS
WQ-FS
5-8
-------
In addition to the selection concept illustrated above,
there is another guideline that should be understood
and followed when deciding which stations should be
specified via selectors, and which should be specified
by restrictors. Since the system first retrieves those
stations specified by the station selector keyword, and
then narrows or reduces those stations via the station
restrictor keyword, the criteria that would expectedly
find the fewer number of stations should always be
identified by the station selector keyword. For
example, if a user were interested in the stations
within one state of an agency whose station network
encompassed several states,the STC and U keywords
should be used. However, if it were known that an
agency didn't have too many stations, but that they
were spread over a wide multi-state area, the A, S and
ST keywords would probably result in the more efficient
retrieval. By following this guideline in retrievals
which have either STC and U, or A, S, and ST specified,
users will structure a more efficient retrieval since
less data will be retrieved, thereby minimizing the
cost of the retrieval.
WQ-FS
5-9
-------
WQ-DE
-------
Section
1
2
3
4
Appendix
1
2
CONTENTS
Subject
The Monitoring Process
Ways to Identify Stations
Coding Station Location Data
Coding Parametric Data
Subject
Index of Available HELP Files
Record Layouts - Station Location
Data Storage Cards
Data Entry Error Messages
Page
1-1
2-1
3-1
4-1
Page
Al-1
A2-1
A3-1
WQ-DE
Sep 1986
-------
The purpose of this WQ-DE chapter is to describe, both in general
terms and in detail, the procedures and methods available to store,
change, and delete station location information and parametric data
in the STORET Water Quality File (WQF).
This chapter is divided into several sections and supporting
appendices, as outlined in the Contents. Sections 1 and 2 are
somewhat general in content, and respectively present a description
of the water quality monitoring process and a discussion on the
different ways that the identity and location of a station can be
described. Sections 3 and 4 are detailed in content, and describe
the various procedures that can be used to store, change, and delete
station location information and parametric data in the WQF. The
information in the appendices relates specifically to data entry and
complements the information provided in the appendices to the WQF
part.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
SECTION
1
THE MONITORING PROCESS
WQ-DE
-------
SECTION 1
-------
SECTION 1
THE MONITORING PROCESS
The monitoring activities conducted by the states, EPA regions, and other
agencies are an essential aspect of our Nation's program to prevent, reduce,
and eliminate water pollution. The findings of these monitoring activities
(i.e., the types and amounts of pollutants found in water samples) are stored
in the STORET Water Quality File. The following paragraphs describe the
monitoring process as it relates to the WQP, from establishing a network to
entering data in STORET.
Establishing a Network (Agency)
Monitoring strategies are developed by individual states and other agencies,
with guidance by EPA, to fulfill their water quality objectives. A great deal
of thought and planning goes into defining the area to be covered and into
establishing the purposes to be achieved. Once defined by the planners, the
monitoring network is then defined to the WQP by the assignment of an agency
code, which is established at EPA Headquarters in cooperation with the agency
responsible for the network. This agency code will be unique, different from
all other agency codes defined in the STORET system.
Defining Monitoring Sites (Stations)
Part of the monitoring network strategy is the determination of the number and
location of sites to be included in the network, so that they present an
accurate picture of the water quality for the area of interest. These
monitoring sites are referred to as stations in STORET, and each station
within an agency is assigned a primary station code that is unique among all
stations associated with that agency.
Sampling Strategy
Another aspect of the monitoring strategy for the network is the determination
of the parameters to be sampled at the monitoring sites, the sampling time
frame, and the sampling frequency. Water quality managers decide which of
STORET's thousands of parameters are to be measured in accordance with the
overall monitoring strategy.
Types of Samples
Two basic types of water samples may be taken: a grab sample and a composite
sample. A grab sample is an individual water quality sample collected at a
specific point in time; composite samples are combinations of individual
WQ-DE Sep 1986
1-1
-------
samples obtained at Intervals over a period of time or distance. For example,
a composite sample may consist of several grab samples spanning a 24-hour
period during which all grabs are placed in a single container or may be a
series of samples taken at equal distances across a stream section. Analysis
of these samples may be performed in the field or in a laboratory. STORET
provides a means to store data from both grab and composite water samples.
Coding Analysis for Entry into STORET
There are several techniques for storing monitoring information in the WQF,
and each agency establishes its own procedures. Cards can be punched and read
into the system through a card reader; a file can be created on tape and the
tape sent to the data center for processing; a file can be created on a
personal computer or a minicomputer and transmitted over the
telecommunications network; or an input data set can be created on-line using
the available system editing capabilities. After a file of storage
transactions is created, it is submitted for processing using the procedures
described in detail in this chapter.
The Hierarchical Structure of WQF Data
The hierarchical structure of the data in the STORET Water Quality File is
shown in the figure below. As indicated, the highest level in the hierarchy
is the agency code, under the agency code, stations are stored, and under
stations, sample data are stored. The order in which information is entered
into the system follows the same sequence. Agency codes must be stored before
stations can be stored, and stations must be stored before sample data for
them can be stored.
STORET
AGENCY!
AGENCY2
AGENCY3
I I
STATION! STATION2
I
STATION!
I
STATION2
I I
SAMPLE! SAMPLE2
I I
STATION! STATION2
SAMPLE!
I 1
VALUE! VALUE2
SAMPLE2
VALUE1 VALUE2
WQ-DE
1-2
Sep 1986
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART WO
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
SECTION
2
NAYS TO IDENTIFY STATIONS
WQ-DE
-------
SECTION 2
-------
SECTION 2
WAYS TO IDENTIFY STATIONS
The term "station" refers to a specific location, or collection point, where
water quality data are sampled. STORET's more than 600,000 stations are
located on essentially all of the Nation's rivers, lakes, streams, and other
waterways. In order to identify a station so that it can be stored and later
retrieved, the station must be adequately and correctly described.
2.1 IDENTIFYING STATIONS
A station can be identified by any or all of the ways listed below, which are
briefly discussed in the paragraphs that follow. Items that are mandatory for
storing a station in STORET are denoted by an asterisk (*).
* Agency code and primary station code
Secondary station codes (station aliases)
* Hydrologic references - hydrologic unit codes
Hydrologic references - river mile indices and reaches
* Latitude and longitude coordinates
* State and county codes
* Station type
Station depth
* Location description
Descriptive text
* Major/minor/subbasin codes
Agency and Station Codes
Every station is located in a specific monitoring network, which is identified
by an agency code that is different from all other agency codes defined within
STORET. Each station is assigned a primary station code and, optionally, up
to three secondary station codes, or aliases. Agency codes are established at
EPA Headquarters.
Hydrologic References - Reach Numbers
Over 600,000 miles of streams and shorelines of the United States have been
divided into a network of stream segments, or reaches. Generally, reaches
WQ-DE SEP 1986
2-1
-------
extend from one stream junction to another, and are linked in a skeletal
structure that represents the branching patterns of surface water drainage
systems. A station must be identified by its own reach number, which is based
on the U.S. Geological Survey Hydrologic Unit System.
Hydroloqic References - River Mile Indices
A hydrologic index (or river mile index) is a numerical code that identifies
the location of a point (station) on a river system by defining the distance
of the point from, and its hydrologic relationship to, the mouth of that river
system. A complete hydrologic index for a station is composed of the
following codes: a terminal major basin code; a terminal minor basin code; a
terminal stream index, which defines the direction and level of stream flow;
mileages, which define the distances between and to confluences in the river
system; and a code that identifies the stream level on which the point is
located.
Latitude and Longitude Coordinates
Many stations, particularly those on open waters such as oceans, lakes, bays,
and estuaries, cannot always be easily located using hydrologic indices. A
station's location can also be pinpointed by the conventional geographical
coordinates of latitude and longitude, in degrees, minutes, seconds, and lOths
of a second. Latitude and longitude coordinates must be stored with each new
STORET station.
Political Designations
Stations must also be identified with respect to the state and county in which
they are physically located. The standard code designations for all states
and counties in the United States as established by the National Bureau of
Standards are listed in Appendix C to this part of the STORET Handbook.
Station Type
Every station must be described by a code or codes that depict the station's
characteristics, such as where the station monitors water (for example, in the
open sea, in a lake, or from a well or a pipe).
Station Depth
The total depth of the station may be stored to further describe the station.
This information is particularly valuable for lake stations.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
2-2
-------
Location Description
Every station must be described by its location or landmark name.
Descriptive Text
A station may be described by a detailed narrative.
Major/Minor/Sub-Basins
Every station is associated with an EPA major river basin and a minor river
basin and, optionally, a sub-basin.
Information that describes a station's location does not normally change.
When a station is initially identified to STORET, data for all of the items
asterisked in the listing above must be stored, along with as much information
about the other items as is known. The more information about a station that
is stored within STORET, the greater the flexibility in how that station and
its parametric data can be identified and subsequently retrieved.
2.2 TERMINOLOGY USED
The station location information described above can be entered into the WQF
as 80-column punched cards using a card-reading terminal, or as lines of
information within a data set using a keyboard terminal. (A data set is a
collection of logically related data records residing within a computer system
and accessible to users via remote terminals.) For all intents and purposes,
an 80-column card and a line of information within a data set are equivalent
entities to the STORET system. (Similarly, a deck of cards and an entire data
set are also equivalent.) To simplify the descriptions of the WQF coding
requirements, in this chapter all records of information are referred to as
cards. A collection of station location records (information) is called a
station location storage deck, and an individual record is called a station
location storage card.
WO-DE SEP 1986
2-3
-------
2.3 CARDS USED TO CODE STATION LOCATION DATA
The process of coding station location data encompasses not only the initial
storing of these data into the WQF, but also any subsequent changes,
corrections, and deletions made to the data. There are nine different types
of cards that are used, in differing combinations, to code station location
data. (Station location data can be entered into the WQF only via these
particular cards.) The names, codes, and primary functions of these cards are
as follows:
Card Name
Agency Card
Station Type Card
Station Card
Latitude/Longitude Card
RMI Card
RMI Card
Major/Minor Basin Card
Location Description Card
Card Code Used to Specify
S
2
3
Descriptive Paragraph Cards 5
the agency responsible for
a set of stations
the attributes or
characteristics of the
station
station codes specific to
each station
geographical coordinates of
a station's location
hydrologic indices (river
mile indices) of a station
continuation of RMI card 1
EPA basin names and EPA
basin codes
a narrative station
description, hydrologic
unit code, and river
reach information
textual information
describing station
activity
WQ-DE
2-4
SEP 1986
-------
These cards are used in varying combinations according to the function
(initial store, change, or deletion) to be performed. The valid combinations
are described in detail in Section 3. To establish a new station, a typical
sequence of these cards in the station location storage deck would be as
follows:
L
L
L
DESCRIPTIVE PARAGRAPH CARD 5
LOCATION DESCRIPTION CARD 4
MAJOR/MINOR BASIN CARD 3
L
L
RHI CARD 2
RMI CARD 1
LATITUDE/LONGITUDE CARD 0
L
L
STATION CARD S
STATION TYPE CARD T
AGENCY CARD A
A copy of the coding sheet used to code each of these nine station location
storage cards is provided in Appendix 2 of this chapter.
WO-DE
2-5
SEP 1986
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
SECTION
3
CODING STATION LOCATION DATA
WQ-DE
-------
SECTION 3
-------
SECTION 3
CODING STATION LOCATION DATA
This section describes in detail each of the nine cards used for coding
station location data, and also describes which cards and fields within the
cards are required to perform initial station storage, station changes, and
station deletion functions. Subsection 3.1 presents the structure of the
agency code; Subsection 3.2 presents the formats of the various station
location storage cards; Subsection 3.3 describes how to store a new station
and to combine and code these cards for the initial storing of station
location data; Subsection 3.4 describes how these cards are used to change
previously stored station location data; Subsection 3.5 describes how to
delete a station or selected station location data from the WQF; and
Subsection 3.6 provides examples of these procedures.
3.1 STRUCTURE OF AN AGENCY CODE
An agency code must be established before any station or sample information
can be entered into the Water Quality File (WQF). This code will be assigned
by the STORET User Assistance staff. When the agency code is created, the
organization and an individual in the organization who will be responsible
for the data are identified. This gives users of the data a person to
contact if there are questions about the data.
The agency code is a structured number whose positions have the following
meanings. Position 1 indicates whether the sampling network belongs to a
Federal agency, a state agency, an interstate agency, or an international
agency. Position 2 indicates whether the agency does its own monitoring and
analysis or whether another group is responsible for the data. For Federal,
interstate, and international agencies, the remaining six digits are used to
further identify the agency. For state agencies, positions 3 and 4 contain
the two-character alphabetic FIPS state code, and the remaining four
positions allow further clarification of the agency name. The following
table demonstrates the coding scheme for agency codes.
At the time that the Agency Code is established, an unlocking key (maximum
of eight characters) is chosen by the requestor. This unlocking key serves
as a safeguard against unauthorized storage of data, and it must be
specified each time data are stored, changed, or deleted for any station
associated with the agency.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-1
-------
AGENCY CODE = XXYYZZZZ
1 For Federal agency
2 For state agency
3 For interstate agency
5 For international
agency
1 Sampling and analysis
performed by agency
2 Sampling and analysis
done by someone else
Further identification
of the agency
For state agency, the
two-character FIPS
alpha state code
For other agencies,
further qualifying
information
3.2
FORMATS OF STATION LOCATION STORAGE CARDS
This subsection describes in detail each of the station location storage
cards (including the fields within the cards) that are used to store,
change, and delete station location data within the WQF. These descriptions
are presented on the following pages in a sequence that parallels their
logical use and application.
WQ-DE
3-2
Sep 1986
-------
The Agency Card (A Card): Required
The Agency Card is used to specify certain information about'the agency
responsible for a given network of stations. This card must be provided for
any storage operation involving station location data, whether an initial
storage, change, or deletion, and must precede the Station Card and other
cards that further define the operation to be performed. Asterisked (*)
items are mandatory for new station storage.
1 IMII 1 III MM MM III ...... INI .....
Illllllllll
Columns Contents
1-8 * Agency Code
The one- to eight-character agency code assigned to the
agency responsible for collecting and entering data into
the WQF. Entries are to be left-justified, leaving unused
columns blank.
9-12 Blank
13-15 Unlock After
This field is used to indicate the number of calendar days
(beginning from the sampling date as opposed to the data
storage date) the parametric data are to be locked (i.e.,
unavailable for retrieval by individuals other than those
authorized by the owners of the data), after which time
the data will be unlocked automatically. Any numerical
value up to 360 is valid. Unused columns need not be
zero-filled. Default value is zero, which indicates data
are not to be locked for any period of time.
16 Blank
17-24 * Unlocking Key
A one- to eight-character alphanumeric code, which must be
accurately specified before any information can be stored
for the respective stations. This Unlocking Key serves as
a safeguard against unauthorized storage of data. Entries
must be left-justified, leaving unused columns blank.
WQ-DE
3-3
Sep 1986
-------
25-61 Name of Individual Storing Data
The name, location, telephone number, or other information
relevant to the individual responsible for the storage of
station location information should be entered here. The
information in this field is not stored in the WQF, but is
printed on primary error listings to facilitate user •
tracking of jobs.
62-73 Blank
74-77 Lock After
The date (in the format yymm) after which data cannot be
retrieved unless the Unlocking Key is provided. The date
refers to the sampling date and not to the date the sample
was stored. If a Lock After date is not desired, code
this field as 9999, which means the data are not locked.
If coded, each column must be filled with a numerical
value. If not coded, 9999 is assumed.
78-79 Control Code
This two-character alphabetic value varies according to
the storage operation being performed, i.e., whether
changing or deleting previously stored data on the Agency
Card or on the Station Type Card. This field is left
blank for new station storage. The acceptable values are
described in detail in subsequent subsections.
80 * Card Type Code
Code with the letter A.
Sep 1986
3-4
-------
The Station Type Card (T Card); Required
The Station Type Card is used to denote one or more codes that depict a
valid type description of one or more stations. The STORET help data set
named STORET.HELP.STATION.TOPE provides a complete listing of the acceptable
station types and their associated codes. It also depicts the five
different levels of codes and how many of each may or must be specified.
Asterisked (*) items are mandatory for new station storage.
i M i M 1111111 H 111 m 111 M i M 11 m i M 11 n m m m rm 1111111 MINI-
Columns Contents
1-78 * Station Type Information
A string of one or more alphanumeric codes, separated by
slashes (/), which denotes valid combinations of
acceptable station types. Entries are to be
left-justified, with no embedded blanks. A slash does not
follow the last code specified, and remaining unused
columns are left blank.
79 Blank
80 * Card Type Code
Code with the letter T.
NOTE: Station type codes may be specified in any "level" order;
however, it is suggested that they be specified in a level
1 to level 5 order.
WQ-DE
3-5
Sep 1986
-------
The Station Card (S Card); Required
The Station Card is used to specify station identification information
pertaining to a single station associated with the agency designated on the
Agency Card (A Card). This card must be provided for any data entry
operation involving station location information, whether an initial
storage, change, or deletion operation. Asterisked (*) items are mandatory
for new station storage.
INCMH
IMIIIIIIII
H
MIIIIIIIIIMT
•mi
MINIMI II
MINIMI
11
Columns
1-3
4-18
19-33
34-45,
46-57,
and
58-67
Contents
Sort Number
The individual cards in a storage deck can be assigned a
sequence number for the purpose of collectively
identifying all cards that relate to the storage deck.
Completing this field is optional, as the information is
not stored in the WQF. Sort number may be any
alphanumeric value.
* Primary Station Code
The 1- to 15-character alphanumeric primary station code
uniquely identifies the station in the monitoring network
specified by the preceding Agency Card. Entries are to be
left-justified, leaving unused columns blank.
Blank
Secondary Station Codes
These fields are used to specify up to three alphanumeric
secondary station codes (or station aliases) associated
with a particular station. Secondary codes are
established to cross-reference stations for cooperative
monitoring and to facilitate the retrieval process. Any
or all of these fields may be left blank, but if
completed, they must be left-justified, leaving unused
columns blank. All secondary station codes and all
primary station codes assigned to stations within an
agency must be unique within the agency, i.e., an alias
WQ-DE
3-6
Sep 1986
-------
for a station cannot be the same as any primary or
secondary station code established for any other station
within the agency.
68-69 * State Code
The two-digit numerical Federal Information Processing
Standards (FIPS) state code. A complete listing of these
codes is provided in Appendix C to the WQ part of the
Handbook.
70-72 * County Code
The three-digit numerical FIBS code identifying the county
or county equivalent. A complete listing of these codes
is provided in Appendix C.
73-77 Blank
78-79 * Control Code
This two-character alphabetic value varies according to
the station storage operation being performed, i.e.,
storing a new station or changing or deleting a previously
stored station. The acceptable values are described in
detail in subsequent subsections.
80 * Card Type Code
Code with the letter S.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-7
-------
The Latitude/Longitude Card (Header Card 0); Required
The primary purpose of the Latitude/Longitude Card is to store the latitude
and longitude coordinates that identify a station's geographical location.
Asterisked (*) items are mandatory for new station storage.
ICMCM
V^r*
n
nn
mn
•illlllllllllllllH.H-ll.IMII I III I I II I MM"
Columns Contents
1-3 Sort Number
This field may be used to assign a sequence number to the
cards in a storage deck. Completing this field is
optional, as the information is not stored in the WQF.
Sort number may be any alphanumeric value.
4-6 Blank
7-13 * Latitude
The latitude of the station expressed in degrees (dd),
minutes (mm), and seconds (sss). All columns must be
completed with numerical values, including leading zeros
if necessary. Seconds may be specified to the nearest
10th of a second. The format of this field, then, is
ddmmsss, with no embedded decimals. The latitude
specified is checked by the STORET update programs, along
with the longitude, to ensure that it is a valid value for
the county specified on the S Card. Also see note below.
14-21 * Longitude
The longitude of the station expressed in degrees (ddd),
minutes (mm), and seconds (sss). All columns must be
completed with numerical values, including leading zeros
if necessary. Seconds may be specified to the nearest
10th of a second. The format of this field, then, is
dddmmsss, with no embedded decimals. The longitude
specified is checked by the STORET update programs, along
with the latitude, to ensure that it is a valid value for
the county specified on the S Card.
22-27
Blank
WQ-DE
3-8
Sep 1986
-------
28 Precision Code (PC)
A one-digit numerical value, from one to eight, that
denotes the degree of precision associated with the coded
latitude and longitude values specified in columns 7-21.
If not completed, the value of this field defaults to 4.
The allowable codes denote the following precisions:
Code Precision Code Precision
1 l/10th second 5 1 minute
2 1 second 6 10 minutes
3 10 seconds 7 30 minutes
4 30 seconds 8 1 degree
29 Depth (D)
The unit of measurement in which station depths are
recorded is identified by the code F (for feet) or M (for
meters). If not completed, the value of this field
defaults to F.
30-32 Total Station Depth
A three-digit numerical value indicating the depth of the
water at the station location, in the unit specified in
column 29. (This is not a sampling depth.) Leading zeros
must be coded. If not completed, the value of this field
defaults to 000.
33-79 Blank
80 * Card Type Code
Code with the number 0.
NOTE: Within the United States, the number of degrees longitude
is always greater than the number of degrees latitude.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
' 3-9
-------
The River Mile Index Card (Header Card 1); Optional
A hydrologic index, or river mile index (RMI), is a numerical code that
identifies the location of a point on a defined river system by specifying
its distance from, and hydrologic relationship to, the mouth of the river
system. The index is composed of a major basin code and a minor basin code,
a terminal stream number, and other codes that identify the direction of
flow, stream level, and mileage references that allow data points to be
precisely located. This card and Header Card 2, if it is necessary, are
used to store a station's RMI, and must be completed if retrievals are to be
made by river mile indices. These cards, if completed, are placed after the
Latitude/Longitude Card in the storage deck. Asterisked (*) items are
mandatory if this card is used to store station location information.
IT
n
TTTTT
TTTTT
TTTT
IT
TTT
TTTT
TTT
Columns
1-3
Contents
4-6
7-8
9-10
Sort Number
This field may be used to assign a sequence number to the
cards in a storage deck. Completing this field is
optional, as the information is not stored in the WQF.
Sort number may be any alphanumeric value.
Blank
Terminal Major Basin (Term Maj Basin)
The two-digit numerical code identifying the terminal
major basin with which the river is associated. (A
terminal major basin is the basin where the river loses
its hydrological identification, and is not necessarily
the same as the major basin in which a sampling station is
located.) A leading zero must be coded. Refer to the EPA
Regional Office for the terminal basin code for the river
being monitored.
Terminal Minor Basin (Term Min Basin)
The two-digit numerical code identifying the terminal
minor basin with which the river is associated. (A
terminal minor basin is not necessarily the same as the
minor basin in which a sampling station is located.) A
WQ-DE
3-10
Sep 1986
-------
leading zero must be coded. Refer to the EPA Regional
Office for the terminal basin code for the river being
monitored.
11-13 * Terminal Stream Number (Term Stream No.)
The one- to three-digit terminal stream number that
identifies the stream or river within the terminal minor
basin designated in columns 7 through 10. Leading zeros
mus t be coded.
14-19 * Level 1 Miles
The distance, in hundredths of a mile, from the zero mile
point of the terminal stream to the point of confluence of
the first tributary entering the main stem of the river.
Leading and trailing zeros must be specified, if
necessary, so that each column in the field has an entry.
20-76 Level Indices/Level Miles
These columns are used in pairs to indicate a station's
location on a river with respect to its river's hydrologic
index. Use as many pairs of level-indices/level-miles as
needed. If more than seven levels are necessary to define
a station's hydrologic location, use the second RMI Card
(Header Card 2) to specify the additional levels. All
values specified must be numerical; leading zeros must be
provided. If a particular level is coded, its
corresponding mileage must also be coded. Unused pairs of
level-indices/level-miles fields are left blank.
77-78 * Last Level Used
The value of the station's last (highest) stream level is
coded to designate the station's hydrologic index, a
numerical value from 1 to 12. This value must correspond
to the last level coded on this card, or on Header Card 2
if used. A leading zero must be coded.
79 Blank
80 * Card Type Code
Code with the number 1.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-11
-------
The River Mile Index Card (Header Card 2); Optional
This card is used in conjunction with Header Card 1 if more than seven
levels of stream indices must be provided to identify a station's hydrologic
location. It is not required if a station's hydrologic index can be defined
in seven or fewer levels. Up to five additional levels (from level 8 to
level 12) may be specified via this card. If used, this card must follow
the first River Mile Index Card (Header Card 1). Asterisked (*) items are
mandatory if this card is used to store station location information.
Mill!
H
11
11
II
111
imin
11
111
11
11
I INN MM II II II II II II II II'
Columns Contents
1-3 Sort Number
This field may be used to assign a sequence number to the
cards in a storage deck. Completing this field is
optional, as the information is not stored in the WQF.
Sort number may be any alphanumeric value.
4-6 Blank
7-13 * Term Maj Basin, Term Min Basin, Term Stream No.
These codes are identical to the codes used on Header Card
1.
14-53 * Level Indices/Level Miles
These columns are used to indicate a station's hydrologic
index if more than seven levels are needed. Use as many
pairs of level-indices/level-miles as necessary. If a
particular level is coded, its corresponding mileage value
must also be coded. All values specified must be numeric;
leading zeros must be coded. Unused pairs of
level-indices/level-miles fields are left blank.
54-79 Blank
80 * Card Type Code
Code with the number 2.
WQ-DE,
3-12
Sep 1986
-------
The Major/Minor Basin Card (Header Card 3); Required
This card is used to store as part of the station location data the
EPA-designated names and codes for the major river basin and the minor river
basin in which a station is physically located. A complete listing of codes
established by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency is provided in
Appendix D to the WQ part of the Handbook. Asterisked (*) items are
mandatory for new station storage.
_LL
MMiimmrmiiimi
iimmiMiiiiiiiimmTnmTiimir
Columns
Contents
1-3 Sort Number
This field may be used to assign a sequence number to the
cards in a storage deck. Completing this field is
optional, as the information is not stored in the WQF.
Sort number may be any alphanumeric value.
4-27 * Station Location Major Basin Name
The EPA name of the major river basin in which the station
is physically located. The field should be
left-justified, and embedded blanks and hyphens are
permissible. The name must correspond to the major basin
code entered in columns 68-69 of this card.
28-67 * Station Location Minor Basin Name
The EPA name of the minor river basin in which the station
is physically located. The field is left-justified, and
embedded blanks and hyphens are permitted. The name must
correspond to the minor basin code entered in columns
70-71 of this card.
68-69 * Major Basin Code
A two-digit numerical EPA code identifying the major river
basin in which the station is physically located. This
code must correspond to the name of the basin provided in
columns 4-27 of this card. A leading zero must be coded.
WQ-DE
3-13
Sep 1986
-------
70-71 * Minor Basin Code
A two-digit numerical EPA code identifying the minor river
basin in which the station is physically located. This
code must correspond to the name of the basin provided in
columns 28-67 of this card. A leading zero must be coded.
72-73 Sub-Basin Code
A two-digit numerical code identifying the sub-basin in
which the station is located. A leading zero must be
coded. EPA has no designations for sub-basins, and if a
sub-basin designation is not specified, the system will
generate zeros for this field.
74-79 Blank
80 * Card Type Code
Code with the number 3.
NOTE: Listings of the EPA major and minor basin codes
are in Appendix D. They can also be obtained through the
STORET help data set named STORET.HELP.BASIN.CODES, since
sub-basin coding is generated at the state level, the
applicable state office should be contacted for
information on sub-basin codes.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-14
-------
The Location Description Card (Header Card 4); Required
This card is used to store descriptive station header information and reach
designations for a station. The STORET help data set named
STORET.HELP.REACH.RETRIEVE describes the EPA Reach File in some detail.
Asterisked (*) items are mandatory for new station storage.
•OH
NO
1 - 1
II
IO»t«M 01 Vf IMKMMMI HNM1 HC
• II
IIIIIIIIIIMII Illllllllllllllllllllllllll
•••CM CODIHQ
— c.— «•
MM 1
ON
orr
II
MILK* ON MUCH
Illllll
£
(WMU
MM '
Columns Contents
1-3 Sort Number
This field may be used to assign a sequence number to the
cards in a storage deck. Completing this field is
optional, as the information is not stored in the WQF.
Sort number may be any alphanumeric value.
4-51 * location of site: Landmark names, etc.
An alphanumeric description (up to 48 characters in
length) of the station's actual location, such as the
alphabetic name of the river on which the station is
located and other descriptive information that would help
to pinpoint the station. Embedded blanks are
permissible. The field is to be left-justified.
52-59 * Reach Number: USGS Cataloging Unit Code
The first eight digits of the STORET reach number consist
of the FIPS Hydrologic Unit drainage basin code
designations as delineated by the U.S. Geological Survey
(USGS). These hydrologic basins, in order from largest to
smallest, are named region, subregion, accounting unit,
and cataloging unit, each designated by a two-digit code.
Enter in this field the eight-digit code for the
cataloging unit in which the station is located.
zeros must be coded for single digit values.
Leading
References for these hydrologic unit codes include a U.S.
map and a state map series, available from USGS, and USGS
circular 878-A titled "Codes for the Identification of
Hydrologic Units in the United States and the Caribbean
Outlying Areas."
WQ-DE
3-15
Sep 1986
-------
60-62 Reach Number: EPA Segment Number
The last three digits of the STORET reach number consist
of the EPA segment number, an arbitrarily assigned number
that is different for each segment within the specified
cataloging unit.
Segments are linear sections of streams, lakes,
reservoirs, estuaries, etc., that are linked to form a
skeletal structure representing the branching patterns of
surface water drainage systems. These segment numbers
were assigned without regard to the hydrological
relationship of the segments. However, within the Reach
File, segments are linked in a hydrological sequence that
allows users to retrieve and analyze segments in either
upstream or downstream order.
If the three-digit stream segment number is not specified,
columns 60 through 74 are to be left blank. Leading zeros
are required for single-digit or double-digit stream
segment numbers, if specified.
The REACHRET operand of the STORET command procedure named
%BATCH can be used to list stream segment numbers and
check digits (see column 74 below) that are associated
with a USGS drainage basin.
63-65 ON/OFF
If the preceding EPA segment number field is specified,
this field must be completed. Either ON or OFF can be
specified, depicting whether the station lies directly on
or off the specified reach. If OFF is specified, it is
assumed that the station lies within the reach's drainage
area, either upstream or upgrade. If ON is specified, it
must be left-justified (column 65 blank).
66-73 Miles on Reach
In this field, specify the distance, in miles and/or a
decimal fraction of a mile, from the beginning or
downstream end of the reach to the point where the station
is located if it is on the reach, or where the water
enters the reach if the station is not on the reach. Any
number of significant digits may be specified, and the
value is to be left-justified. A decimal point may be
specified in any columnar position as needed. A mileage
value must be specified if an 11-digit reach number is
specified in columns 52-62. Column positions to the right
of the right-most digit may be left blank.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-16
-------
74 Check Digit
If the 11-digit reach number is specified in columns
52-62, a check digit (a single digit value from 0 to 9)
must be specified. Each reach number is associated with a
specific check digit, which is used by the system for
storage purposes only to verify that the 11-digit value is
correct. See EPA Segment Number (columns 60-62) above for
details on how to determine the correct check digit.
75-79 Blank
80 * Card Type Code
Code with the number 4.
NOTE: The STORET help data set named STORET.HELP.REACH.RETRIEVL
discusses the STORET reach capability in detail.
The STORET update programs compare the latitude and
longitude specified on the 0 Card with the latitude and
longitude of the area of the USGS cataloging unit code and
of the reach number specified on this card to ensure that
all coding is correct.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-17
-------
Descriptive Paragraph Cards (Header Card 5); Optional
A maximum of 15 of these cards may be used to store a narrative that
describes the station in detail. This information is stored as the station
descriptive paragraph, which can be printed on a retrieval output at the
user's option. Each card contains up to 72 alphanumeric characters of
descriptive information, allowing up to a total of 1,080 characters of
information to be stored. These cards are placed last in a station location
storage deck. Asterisked (*) items are mandatory if this card is used to
store station location information.
Vi '
II
. . .
II
MKIMION IF m
,
Illlllllllllllll MIIIIMIMIIIIIIIIIII
MMMMMMMMMIIIIIIIIIIIIII
Columns Contents
1-3 Sort Number
This field may be used to assign a sequence number to the
cards in a storage deck. Completing this field is
optional, as the information is not stored in the WQF.
Sort number may be any alphanumeric value.
4-6 Blank
7-78 * Description
Up to 72 alphanumeric characters of descriptive
information can be specified on a single 5 Card, and the
information can be continued on subsequent 5 Cards, up to
a total of fifteen cards. Embedded blanks and other
special characters, such as punctuation marks, are
permissible. Each 5 Card corresponds to a single line of
information in the descriptive paragraph.
79 * Line Position Code
A single alphanumeric value that denotes the relative
position of the line of descriptive information (coded in
columns 7-78) in the descriptive paragraph. This field
must be completed with one of the following codes; if more
than one 5 Card is coded, this field must be coded in
ascending sequence, beginning with 0 (zero).
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-18
-------
Relative line
Code position
8 9
9 10
J 11
K 12
L 13
M 14
N 15
80 * Card Type Code
Code with the number 5.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-19
-------
3. 3 STORING A NEW STATION
In order to successfully enter a new station into the WQF, certain
information about the station must be known and coded on the appropriate
station location data storage cards described in the preceding subsection
and shown in Appendix 2 of this WQ-DE chapter. Failure to provide all of
the required information will result in an unsuccessful storage of the
station.
As a general rule, STORET users should provide as much information as
possible in addition to the required information to describe a station's
location. The more information that is stored, the more flexibility there
is in retrieving data stored for that station, not only by the user storing
the data, but also by other users who may have an interest in the data.
EPA's processing of users' storage requests is a two-phase operation. The
first phase is invoked when users submit their requests to add, change, or
delete HQF data, whether station location data or parametric data. The
first time a storage file is submitted for processing, the "Dummy" option of
the storage procedure should be used. (See the STORET Storage Concepts
diagram shown below.) This Dummy option invokes the STORET edit software
that checks the storage cards for errors and generates a Primary Error
Listing (but does not place any of the submitted transactions in the MOD
file, the special EPA holding file that contains all edited and corrected
storage transactions that are to be stored in the system the next weekend.)
Once all primary errors have been corrected, the storage deck is submitted
for processing one last time, this time using the "Final" option (which does
place all error-free transactions in the MOD file).
Throughout any given week, all users' edited and syntactically correct
storage requests are collected in the MOD file. These data are not
permanently stored in the WQF during the week. The second phase of the
process of storing user water quality data occurs over the weekend when
STORET personnel run the STORET UPDATE program. This program reads the data
accumulated in the MOD file, performs other edit checks on the data being
stored, changed, or deleted, and then updates the WQF. Storage requests
that fail the UPDATE edit checks (e.g., a request to delete a station not
previously stored) generate Secondary Error Messages that are also made
available to the user. Users storing data need to review a copy of their
Secondary Error Messages listing to ensure that their data were in fact
stored.
The flowchart below depicts this process. See the WQ-TP (Terminal
Procedures) chapter of this Handbook for information on the use of the
%STORE and %BATCH procedures, as well as other procedures that are available
to store STORET data.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-20
-------
STORET Storage Concepts
Correct
errors
Input
data set
%STORE
STORET edit
software
Pr imary
error listing
Dummy
Add data to
MOD File
Weekend
update
%BATCH error
Secondary
error listing
Parametric data may not be stored in the same run in which a new station is
defined and stored in the WQF. It is prudent to assure that a station has
been stored successfully and correctly before storing any parametric data
associated with the station.
Upon initially storing a station into the WQF, the STORET system
automatically appends three items of information to the station location
WQ-DE
3-21
Sep 1986
-------
data stored with the station: (1) the date the station was stored in the
WQF; (2) the station's archive class, which denotes whether a station's data
are on-line or in disk-mountable status; and (3) the names of the state and
county in which the station is located. This additional information appears
in the station header information printed at the top of retrieval outputs.
Bach station data storage deck must have two control cards, a 7START Card
and a ?01 Card, as well as the appropriate set of station location storage
cards described below.
The following station location storage cards (and fields within those cards)
are mandatory or optional, as indicated, when storing a new station into the
WQF. Users are reminded that the coding instructions for these cards are
described in subsection 3.2.
Required Cards Optional Cards
A Agency Card 1 RMI Card
T Station Type Card 2 RMI Card
S Station Card 5 Descriptive 'Paragraph
0 Lat/Long Card Card(s)
3 Maj/Min Basin Card
4 Location Description Card
Required Fields - A Card
Columns Field Remarks
1-8 agency code required
17-24 unlocking key required
74-77 lock after defaults to 9999
78-79 control code must be blank
80 card type code must be an A
t
It is strongly recommended that columns 25-61 be completed, as this
information is often helpful to STORET User Assistance personnel when
assisting a user with storage questions or problems.
If multiple sampling sites are being stored in the same run for the same
agency, the A Card does not have to be repeated for each S Card.
Required Fields - T Card
Columns Field Remarks
1-78 station type code required
80 card type code must be a T
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-22
-------
If multiple sampling sites are being stored in the same run and if they are
the same station type, the T Card does not have to be repeated for each S
card.
Required Fields - S Card
Columns Field
4-18 primary station code
68-69 state code
70-72 county code
78-79 control code
80 card type code
Remarks
required
required
required
must be NS
must be an S
Required Fields - 0 Card
Columns
7-13
14-21
28
29
30-32
80
Field
latitude
longitude
precision code
depth units
total depth
card type code
Remarks
required
required
defaults to 4
defaults to F
defaults to 000
must be a zero
Required Fields - 3 Card
Columns Field
4-27 station location
major basin name
28-67 station location
minor basin name
68-69 major basin code
70-71 minor basin code
80 card type code
Remarks
required
required
required
required
must be a 3
Required Fields - 4 Card
Columns Field
4-51 location of site
52-59 hydrologic unit code
80 card type code
Remarks
required
required
must be a 4
WQ-DE
3-23
Sep 1986
-------
3.4 CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED STATION LOCATION INFORMATION
No station location information changes can be made until the station has
been successfully stored in the system. At some later time, however, it may
be necessary to add to, change, or correct one or more' items of station
location information that was stored previously, such as to change an Unlock
After date or to provide additional station location information not known
when the station was initially stored.
i
The user must indicate that a change is to be made to previously stored
information by entering the appropriate code in the control code field of
either the A Card or the S Card, depending upon the kind of change to be
made, as follows:
The A Card control code field (column 78-79) must be used for two different
kinds of changes: (1) to change either the Unlock After or Lock After date;
the control code CD must be specified when the new date or dates are entered
on the A Card; and (2) to change the station type; the control code CT must
be specified and a new T Card coded (see subsection 3.4.2).
Either one of these changes must be made in a completely separate update
cycle. They cannot be made together in the same update cycle, and if either
one of these changes is being made, no other change can be made to that
station until the next update cycle. -
The S Card control code field is used for all other changes to station
location data; CX is coded in columns 78-79 of the S Card. Changes to
information supplied by Cards S 'through 5 can all be made in the same update
cycle, but in a separate update cycle from either of the changes involving
changes to A Card or T Card information.
This subsection defines the types of changes that can be made to station
location information already stored, along with the coding required to
effect the changes. These change transactions can be created in the form of
a data set or through the use of the STORET command procedure named %STNDBSC.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-24 •
-------
3.4.1 CHANGING AGENCY CARD INFORMATION (A CARD)
Agency codes and their associated Unlocking Keys cannot be changed. The
only fields on the Agency Card that may be changed by a user are the Lock
After field and the Unlock After field. These fields may need to be changed
if data were initially locked and are now to be released for retrieval
purposes.
Whenever either of these fields is being changed on an A Card, changes to
other station location cards cannot be made in the same update cycle. Both
of these A Card fields, however, can be changed in the same run.
To change a Lock After or Unlock After date, code an A Card followed by a
Station Card (S Card) for each station being changed, as follows:
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card - one for each station whose
data are being changed
Required Fields - A Card
Columns,
1-8
13-15
17-24
74-77
78-79
80
NOTE:
Field
agency code
unlock after
unlocking key
lock after
control code
card type code
Remarks
required
replaces stored date
required
replaces stored date
must be CD
must be an A
If the Unlock After field is to be changed, the Lock
After field may be left blank, and vice versa.
Required Fields ,- S Card
Columns Field
4-18 primary station code
80 card type code
Remarks
left-justified
must be an S
WQ-DE
3-25
Sep 1986
-------
3.4.2 CHANGING STATION TYPE INFORMATION (T CARD)
Any of the station type codes that were previously stored for one or more
stations within an agency can be changed. A station type code is changed by
coding a new T Card, which will completely replace the old station type
information. The T Card is followed by one or more S Cards to identify the
stations that are to have their station type codes changed. The STORET help
data set named STORET.HELP.STATION.TYPE contains a list of valid station
type codes.
To change a station type for a previously stored station, code the A, T, and
S Cards as follows:
Required Cards
A Agency Card
T Station Type Card
S Station Card - one for each station whose station
type codes are to be changed
Required Fields - A Card
Columns
1-8
17-24
78-79
80
Field
agency code
unlocking key
control code
card type code
Remarks
required
required
must be CT
must be an A
Required Fields - T Card
Columns Field
1-78 string of station
type codes
separated by
slashes
80 card type code
Remarks
this string replaces
the old string
must be a T
Columns
4-18
80
NOTE:
Required Fields - S-Card
Field
primary station code
card type code
Remarks
required
must be an S
Changes to T Card information cannot be made in the
same update cycle in which changes are made to any
other station location information, including
information on the A Card.
WQ-DE
3-26
Sep 1986
-------
3.4.3 CHANGING STATION CARD INFORMATION (S CARD)
Primary station codes may not be changed by the user. However, a new
station can be stored in STORET with the desired new primary station code,
the data transferred from the old station to the new station, and then the
old station deleted from the system. Contact STORET User Assistance for
further information.
Secondary station codes and state and county codes may be changed by the
user. Changes to fields on the S Card are made by entering the control code
CX in columns 78-79 of the S Card (not the A Card) and coding the
replacement values in the appropriate fields. Fields that are to remain as
currently stored in STORET may be either left blank or coded, at the choice
of the user. If a field is to be deleted (and a replacement value is not to
be provided), an X must be coded in the first (left-most) position of that
field.
To change station card information for a previously stored station, code the
A and S Cards as follows:
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
Required Fields - A Card
Columns
1-8
17-24
78-79
80
Field
agency code
unlocking key
control code
card type code
Remarks
required
required
left blank
must be an A
Required Fields - S Card
Columns
4-18
78-79
80
Field
primary station code
control code
card type code
Remarks
left-justified
must be CX
must be an S
Optional Fields - S Card
Columns
34-45
46-57
58-67
68-69
70-72
Field
secondary station code
secondary station code
secondary station code
state code
county code
Remarks
Fields to be changed must be
coded with the replacement
value. Remaining optional
fields may be coded or left
blank. An X must be coded
in the first (left-most)
position of any secondary
station code field to be
deleted.
WQ-DE
3-27
Sep 1986
-------
NOTE: State and county codes (columns 68-72) ace treated
as one field. Thus, if replacing the county code
but not the state code (or vice versa), the entire
five-digit field (columns 68-72) must be receded.
These codes are again checked with the stored
latitude and longitude of the station to ensure that
they are correct codes.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-28,
-------
3.4.4 CHANGING LATITUDE/LONGITUDE CARD INFORMATION (0 CARD)
Any station location data stored via the 0 (zero) Card can be changed by the
user. Changes to fields on the 0 Card are made by entering the control code
CX in columns 78-79 of the preceding S Card, coding the new 0 Card
information in the proper fields and columns, and receding unchanged data.
(Data on the 0 Card may only be changed; no data may be deleted.)
To change Latitude/Longitude Card information for a previously stored
station, code the A, S, and 0 Cards as follows:
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
0 Latitude/Longitude Card
Required Fields - A Card
Columns
1-8
17-24
78-79
80
Field
agency code
unlocking key
control code
card type code
Remarks
required
required
left blank
must be an A
Required Fields - S Card
Columns Field
4-18 primary station code
78-79 control code
80 card type code
Remarks
required
must be CX
must be an S
Required Fields - 0 Card
Columns Field
7-21 latitude/longitude
28 precision code
29 depth
30-32 total depth
80 card type code
Remarks
Fields to be changed must be
coded with the replacement
value. Remaining fields
that are not to be changed
must be recoded.
must be a zero
NOTE: The data on the Latitude/Longitude Card are treated
as one field. Thus, if any part of the field
(columns 7-32) is to be replaced, the entire field
must be recoded. A check is made to ensure the new
lat/long lies within the state/county specified for
the station.
WQ-DE
3-29
Sep 1986
-------
3.4.5 CHANGING RIVER MILE INDEX (RHI) INFORMATION (1 and 2 CARDS)
Any station location data stored via the RMI 1 and 2 Cards may be changed by
the user. Changes to fields on these cards are made by entering the control
code CX in columns 78-79 of the preceding S Card, entering the replacement
information, and by rcenter ing all the 1 Card information, including the
fields not being changed. If the 2 Card was previously stored (required
only if the hydrologic index is defined in more than seven levels), all the
2 Card information must be reentered, including unchanged fields.
Entries on the RMI 1 and 2 Cards are treated as a single field; therefore,
any change made to fields on either card requires receding all RMI
information on both cards.
These same procedures apply if RMI is being added to a previously stored
station that did not have RMI data provided at the time the station was
initially stored.
The following cards and fields are required to change RMI data:
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
1 RMI Card
2 RMI card - only if more than seven levels
are defined
Required Fields - A Card
Columns Field Remarks
1-8 agency code required
17-24 unlocking key required
78-79 control code left blank
80 card type code must be an A
Required Fields - S Card
Columns Field Remarks
4-18 primary station code required
78-79 control code must be CX
80 card type code must be an S
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-30
-------
Required Fields - 1 Card
Columns Field Remarks
7-78 all fields Replacement fields and
the remaining RMI fields
must be filled in.
80 card type code must be a 1
Required Fields - 2 Card (if used)
Columns Field Remarks
7-53 all fields Replacement fields and
the remaining RMI fields
must be filled in.
80 card type code must be a 2
NOTE: The data on the two RMI cards are treated as a
single field. Thus, if any part of a field on
either card is to be replaced, both cards must be
entirely recoded.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-31
-------
3.4.6 CHANGING MAJOR/MINOR BASIN INFORMATION (3 CARD)
Any station location data stored via the 3 Card may be changed by the user.
Changes to the 3 Card information are made by coding CX in the control code
field (columns 78-79) of the preceding S Card, and coding the new 3 Card
information in the proper fields and columns of the 3 Card. Fields left
blank on the card are not affected by the change.
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
3 Major/Minor Basin Card
Required Fields - A Card
Columns
1-8
17-24
78-79
80
Field
agency code
unlocking key
control code
card type code
Remarks
required
required
left blank
must be an A
Required Fields - S Card
Columns Field
4-18 primary station code
78-79 control code
80 card type code
Remarks
required
must be CX
must be an S
Required Fields - 3 Card
Columns
80
Field
card type code
Remarks
must be a 3
Optional Fields - 3 Card
Columns Field
4-27 station location
major basin name
28-67 station location
minor basin name
68-73 location basin
codes
Remarks
Fields to be changed or
added must be coded.
Fields not to be changed
may be either specified
or left blank.
treated as one field
WQ-DE
3-32
Sep 1986
-------
NOTE: The location basin codes (columns 68-73) ace treated
as one field. Thus, if any of the two-digit basin
codes are to be changed, the entire six-digit field
must be receded.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-33
-------
3.4.7 CHANGING LOCATION DESCRIPTION INFORMATION (4 CARD)
Any station location information stored via the 4 Card may be changed by the
user. Changes to the 4 Card are made by coding CX in the control code field
of the preceding S Card, and coding the new 4 Card information in the proper
fields and columns of the 4 Card. Fields left blank on the 4 Card are not
affected by the change.
The station location field (columns 4-51) and the reach coding fields
(columns 52-74) are each regarded as a single field; thus, if any portion of
either field is to be changed or added to, the entire field must be receded.
The following cards and fields are required to change 4 Card information:
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
4 Location Description Card
Required Fields - A Card
Columns
1-8
17-24
78-79
80
Field
agency code
unlocking key
control code
card type code
Remarks
required
required
left blank
must be an A
Required Fields - S Card
Columns Field
4-18 primary station code
78-79 control code
80 card type code
Remar ks
required
must be CX
must be an S
Required Fields - 4 Card
Columns Field
4-51 station location
information
52-74 reach coding
80
card type code
Remarks
The information coded
replaces previously
stored information.
The information coded
replaces previously
stored information.
must be a 4
WQ-DE
3-34
Sep 1986
-------
3.4.8 CHANGING DESCRIPTIVE PARAGRAPH INFORMATION (5 CARD)
Any station location information stored via the 5 Card may be changed by the
user. Changes to the 5 Card are made by coding CX in the control code field
of the preceding S Card and coding new 5 Cards that replace the
corresponding 5 Cards previously stored. Any number of 5 Cards can be
changed in this manner.
The description field (columns 7-78) of the 5 Card is regarded as a single
field; thus, the entire field must be receded, even if only a portion of the
previously stored material is to be changed or if information is to be added
to what is already stored on the respective 5 Card. The line position code
(column 79) must be entered to identify the specific line of data to be
replaced.
The following cards and fields are required to change 5 Card information:
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
5 Descriptive Paragraph Card(s)
Columns
1-8
17-24
78-79
80
Required Fields - A Card
Field
agency code
unlocking key
control code
card type code
Remarks
required
required
left blank
must be an A
Required Fields - S Card
Columns
4-18
78-79
80
Field
primary station code
control code
card type code
Remarks
required
must be CX
must be an S
Required Fields - 5 Card
Columns Field
7-78 description
79 line position
code
80 card type code
Remarks
The information coded
replaces previously
stored information.
Identifies the specific
line of data to be
replaced.
must be a 5
WQ-DE
3-35
Sep 1986
-------
3.5 DELETING A STATION OR SELECTED STATION LOCATION DATA
The STORET system allows users to delete stations that have been stored
previously (including all parametric data stored with those stations) or to
delete certain station location data, either for an entire card or on a
field-by-field basis.
3.5.1 DELETING A STATION AND ALL DATA ASSOCIATED WITH IT
The complete removal of a station and all its data, both station location
data and parametric data, is accomplished via the S Card by coding DS in the
control code field (columns 78-79) and the station code for the station to
be deleted in columns 4-18.
Please make sure when performing this operation that the correct primary
station code is specified. The procedure works; the station is totally
removed from the WQF and there is no way to recover it or the data.
To delete a station and all data stored with the station, both station
location data and parametric data, code the following:
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
Required Fields - A Card
Columns Field Remarks
1-8 agency code
17-24 unlocking key
78-79 control code left blank
80 card type code must be an A
Required Fields - S Card
Columns Field Remarks
4-18 primary station code station to be deleted
from WQF
78-79 control code must be DS
80 card type code must be an S
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-36
-------
3.5.2 DELETING SELECTED STATION LOCATION DATA
The station location data that may be selectively deleted from STORET are
the following:
Card Information that can be deleted
S secondary station codes
1 all data on card
2 all data on card
5 all data on card
To delete station location data, code the following cards:
Required Cards
A Agency Card
S Station Card
Columns
1-8
17-24
78-79
80
Required Fields - A Card
Field
agency code
unlocking key
control code
card type code
Remarks
left blank
must be an A
Required Fields - S Card
Columns Field
4-18 primary station code
78-79 control code
80 card type code
Remarks
must be CX
must be an S
Optional Cards
1 RMI Card 1
2 RMI Card 2
5 Descriptive Paragraph Card(s)
The placement of an X in column 7 of a 1, 2, or 5 Card deletes the entire
card. The placement of an X in column 34, 46, or 58 of an S Card will
delete that secondary station code.
WQ-DE
3-37
Sep 1986
-------
3.6 EXAMPLES OF CODING STATION LOCATION DATA
This subsection presents several examples of the required coding necessary
to store, change, or delete station location data from the WQF, using the
Station Location Cards described in this section.
3.6.1 EXAMPLE OF STORING A NEW STATION
A new station is to be stored for the EXAMPLE agency, whose primary station
code is SEMINAR01A. The station also has two aliases: 01041934 and
BLCK001. This station is located in Mason County (PIPS 105), Michigan (FIPS
26). Its latitude and longitude are 43 degrees, 58 minutes, and 22.2
seconds and 86 degrees, 8 minutes, and 10.3 seconds, respectively, to a
precision of 1 second. The station depth is 10 feet, and the station is
located in the Pere Marquette minor river basin (code 21) within the Lake
Michigan major river basin (code 08). The station is located on the
Onowagon River (at point C on the map below), at the Main Street bridge, 10
miles north of the Fairchild Reservoir, and is monitoring ambient stream
data. The station is 3.8 miles up river reach number 029 and in cataloging
unit 04060101. For purposes of clarity, the reach numbers are not shown on
the map. The coding to store this information is shown below.
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.12345,6789.123456789.123456789.
7START
EXAMPLE 000 TEST EXAMPLE OF NEW STATION STORAGE 9999 A
STREAM/AMBNT T
SEMINAR01A 01041934 BLCK001 26105 NSS
435822208608103 2F010 0
08210020133410000500038160001003116001002348 04 1
LAKE MICHIGAN PERE MARQUETTE 0821 3
ONOWAGON RIVER MAIN ST BRDGE 10 M FROM RESERVOIR040601010290N 3.8 4 4
THE SAMPLING SITE IS ON THE LEFT BANK AND IS SAMPLED OFF THE MAIN ST 05
BRIDGE. THIS IS 10 MILES UPSTREAM FROM THE FAIRCHILD RESERVOIR 15
SAMPLING IS DONE QUARTERLY WITH INTENSIVE SURVEYS EVERY 5 YEARS 25
THE SAMPLING IS DONE IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE CORPS OF ENGINEERS WITH 35
THE STATE LAB DOING THE ANALYSIS 45
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-38
-------
STREAM LEVEL
025)0020 «- INDEX NUMBER
MAJOR BASIN
MINOR BASIN
LAKE
TERMINAL
STREAM
NUMBER
WQ-DE
3-39
Sep 1986
-------
3.6.2 EXAMPLE OF CHANGING UNLOCKING DATES ON THE A CARD
In order to change the Unlock After and/or Lock After dates for any
previously stored station, an Agency Card (A Card) and a Station Card (S
Card) are required. The A Card is completed as usual, with the new dates
entered in the proper columns. The control code CD is required in columns
78 and 79. This is followed by a Station Card for each station being
changed, with the primary station code coded in columns 4-18. This type of
change must be the only one for the station in the update cycle.
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
701
EXAMPLE 090 TEST EXAMPLE OF 'A' CARD CHANGES 9999CDA
ABC001 S
ABC002 S
ABC003 S
ABC 004 8
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
The above example would change the Unlock After date to 90 days and the Lock
After date to 9999. The data for the listed stations will be available to
all users 90 days from its sample date.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-40
-------
3.6.3 EXAMPLE OF CHANGING STATION TYPES ON THE T CARD
In order to change the station type for any previously stored station, an
Agency Card (A Card), a Station Type Card (T Card), and a Station Card (S
Card) are required. On the A Card,-the agency code, Unlocking Key, and the
control code CT are required. The new station type is then entered onto the
T Card. These are followed by a Station Card for each station being
changed, with the primary station code coded in columns 4-18. This change
for a station must be the only change for that station in the update cycle.
The station type for the listed stations will be changed to STREAH/AMBNT.
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
701
EXAMPLE TEST EXAMPLE OF 'T1 CARD CHANGES CTA
STREAM/AMBNT T
ABC001 S
ABC 00 2 S
ABC003 S
ABC004 S
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-41
-------
3.6.4 EXAMPLE OF CHANGING AND DELETING SELECTED STATION LOCATION DATA
For station XDDR004 stored behind the EXAMPLE agency, the following changes
are made to the station header information: Station type changed to
LAKE/AMBNT; the second secondary station code is deleted. The county code
is changed to 121; the longitude is changed to 91 degrees, 58 minutes, 45.1
seconds. The total depth is changed to 030; the level 3 miles to 94.31; and
the minor basin code to 07. The location information is changed to read
ROCK RIVER NEAR BARLOW DAM SPILLWAY. The miles up the reach are changed to
3.7 miles; the 75 Card (i.e., the seventh 5 Card) is changed to read
ESTABLISHED 1965, and the entire 85 Card is deleted.
The secondary station code 123456 is deleted.
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
701
EXAMPLE TEST STORAGE EXAMPLE A
XDDR004 X 05121 CXS
342515209158451 2F030 0
08170020133410000500038160001009431001002348 04 1
150700 3
ROCK RIVER NEAR BARLOW DAM SPILL WAY 11110207004ON 3.7 1 4
ESTABLISHED 1965 75
X 85
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
701
EXAMPLE TEST STORAGE EXAMPLE CTA
AMBNT/LAKE T
XDDR004 S
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-42
-------
When changing station location information, the sequence of the change cards
roust be identical to the sequence used when the station was stored. Note
that changing data on either the 0 Card or the 1 Card requires that the
entire card be receded and the entire reach coding field on the 4 Card be
receded, even through only the miles on reach were changed. The X in column
46 of the S Card deletes the second secondary station code. Note also that
a change of T Card information cannot be made in a run in which other
station location data are changed, in that it requires a different code in
the A Card; a separate run must be made in a different update cycle.
3.6.5 EXAMPLE OF DELETING ALL DATA ASSOCIATED WITH A STATION
This example deletes four stations associated with the EXAMPLE agency.
To delete an existing station and its associated data, either or both
station location information and parametric data, an Agency Card is required
along with a Station Card for each station that is to be deleted. Use care
when doing this, because it will delete the station and all of the data
during the next update cycle. The S Card must have the primary station code
in columns 4-18 and the control code DS in columns 78-79.
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
701
EXAMPLE TEST EXAMPLE OF DELETING ENTIRE STATIONS A
XYZ001 DSS
XYZ002 DSS
XYZ003 DSS
XYZ004 DSS
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
See Section 4 for an example of deleting all parametric data from a station
but not deleting the station itself.
WQ-DE Sep 1986
3-43
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
SECTION
4
CODING PARAMETRIC DATA
WQ-DE
-------
SECTION 4
-------
SECTION 4
CODING PARAMETRIC DATA
The purpose of this section is to describe how parametric data are coded for
entry into the WQF, and in separate subsections, how to change or to delete
previously stored parametric data. The section details each of the cards
used for coding parametric data, and also describes which cards and fields
within those cards are required to perform the parametric data initial
storage, change, and delete functions.
Parametric data may be stored behind a station only after the station has
been stored in STORET.
4.1 DEFINING SAMPLE INFORMATION
The selection of parameters that are sampled at a station is a function of
the monitoring strategy and other requirements established by the agency
responsible for the station. Regardless of which parameters are sampled,
certain information may be defined for each sample that is to be stored in
the WQF. The following list summarizes the information about a sample that
may be stored in the WQF. Some of the information is mandatory for data
storage, and some is optional.
- The location (primary or secondary station code) where the
sample was taken
- The date (year, month, day) the sample was collected
- The time (hour, minute) the sample was collected
- The depth (in feet or meters) at which the sample was taken
- The values (amounts) of the sample parameters
- The specification of one or more Remark Codes that further
describe the conditions under which the sample was taken
- The specification codes of other sample qualifiers, including
medium, system multipurpose keys, and user multipurpose keys
- For composite samples, the composite type and value indicators
The maximum number of parameter values that can be stored per sample per
week is 500, a rather large number, which should not impose any restrictions
on normal data storage activity.
Analytical results (parameter values or amounts) are associated with
standard five-digit STORET parameter codes. Lists of these codes can be
obtained by following the instructions given in Appendix B: STORET
Parameters and Parameter Codes of the STORET User Handbook or by using the
STORET command procedure %BATCH. These parameter codes define the method by
which an analysis is performed and the form and units in which the results
are recorded.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-1
-------
Users are cautioned to be sure that the codes they specify are the correct
codes, i.e., that the codes correspond to the actual analytical method
employed. (Some codes are similar but distinctly different, e.g., 00070
Turbidity-Jackson Candle and 00075 Turbidity-Hellige; other parameters may
be analyzed in several forms, e.g., metals, which can be recorded in total,
dissolved, or suspended forms; and others may be recorded by a laboratory in
units other than those required for storage in STORET.)
4.1.1 THE STORET SAMPLE KEY CONCEPT
A collection of parametric data sampled at a site (a specific station
defined for a given agency) with the same date and optionally the same time
and/or depth is referred to as a sample. Each parametric data value within
a sample that is stored in the system is identified by its sample key and
must be unique for that sample key, i.e., there cannot be two values for a
parameter stored at a given sampling site with the same date and identical
other qualifiers. Thus new data records are created each time a date, time,
or depth changes. For example, assume a sample taken on February 10, 1981,
at 2 p.m. is stored and contains values of three parameters. If three
additional parameters are later stored for the same date and time, they will
become part of the original record, which will now contain values of six
parameters. If, however, the three additional parameters have a date and
time of February 10, 1981, at 3 p.m., a new record will be created for these
three parameters.
A sample key is composed of the following qualifiers: date, time, depth,
medium, a system multipurpose key (SMK), a user multipurpose key (UMK), and
composite qualifiers, as depicted below (qualifiers within parentheses are
optional):
agency code
station code
date (time) (medium)
(depth or SMK) (UMK)
(composite qualifiers)
For samples taken in water, which is the medium default, the key can
optionally include the depth at which the sample was taken and qualified
composite information, such as the type of composite (time, space, or both,
or flow proportional), a statistical value of the composite being stored
(e.g., maximum, minimum, or mean), and the type of sampling that was
performed (i.e., either continuous or grab).
For samples taken in media other than water, the media code, a system
multipurpose key, and optionally, a user multipurpose key can be stored.
Some of the acceptable values of medium are sediment, land, and fish; and
the system multipurpose key will contain a code valid for the specified
medium, e.g., a species code for biological information. When a sample has
the medium (a value other than water), SMK, or UMK qualifiers, it is said to
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-2
-------
have an expanded sample key. Only one STORET storage procedure can be used
to store samples having expanded sample keys.
4.1.2 THE STORET UPDATE PROGRAM PROCESS
The processing of users' storage requests is a two-phase operation. The
first phase is invoked when users submit their requests to add, change, or
delete WQF data, whether station location or parametric data. These requests
are processed by the appropriate STORET input processing programs that
perform a variety of error checking and field editing routines. Those
storage requests that pass the data editing process are written to a special
STORET file, called the MOD file, to await further processing. Any errors
detected during this first phase (referred to as Primary Errors) are made
available to the user so they can be corrected.
Throughout any given week, all users' edited and syntactically correct
storage requests are collected on the MOD file. These data are not
permanently stored in the WQF during the week. The second phase of the
process of storing users' water quality data occurs over the weekend when
STORET personnel run the STORET UPDATE program. This program reads the data
accumulated in the MOD file, performs other edit checks on the data being
stored, changed, or deleted, and then updates the WQF. Storage requests
that fail the UPDATE edit checks (e.g., a request to delete a data value not
previously stored) generate Secondary Errors that are also made available to
the user.
4.1.3 STORING REMARK CODES
Occasionally, parametric data that the user wishes to store in the system
may need an explanation. A group of Remark Codes has been developed to mark
this exceptional data as they are stored in the system. Listed in Table 4-1
below are the existing Remark Codes and their definitions.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-3
-------
TABLE 4-1: REMARK CODES
A Value reported is the mean of two or more determinations
B Results based upon colony counts outside the acceptable range
C Value calculated
D Indicates field measurement
E Indicates extra samples taken at composite stations
F For species, F indicates female sex
G Value reported is the maximum of two or more determinations
H Value based on field kit determination; results may not be accurate
J Estimated value; value not accurate
K Actual value is known to be less than value given
L Actual value is known to be greater than value given
M Presence of material verified but not quantified;
For temperature or oxygen reduction potential,
M indicates a negative value;
For species, M indicates male sex
N Presumptive evidence of presence of material
O Sampled, but analysis lost or not performed
P Too numerous to count
0 Sample held beyond normal holding time
R Significant rain in the past 48 hours
S Laboratory test
T Value reported is less than criteria of detection
U Indicates material was analyzed for but not detected;
For species, U indicates undetermined sex
W Value observed is less than lowest value reportable under T
X Value is a quasi-vertically integrated sample
Z Too many colonies were present to count (TNTC);
The numeric value represents the filtration volume
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-4
-------
4.1.4 WAYS TO CODE PARAMETRIC DATA
There are five ways that parametric data may be coded for entry into the
WQF. These are known as types ?00, ?01, ?02, 703, and ?04, and each of
these numbered procedures calls the proper STORET edit program to process
the data submitted. The uses or functions of these storage procedure
methods are summarized in the following table, and are further described in
the paragraphs and subsections that follow.
TABLE 4-2: STORAGE PROCEDURE FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION/USE
Storing new parametric data
Changing parametric data
Deleting parametric data
Sample Types
Grab sample with date only,
depth optional
Grab sample with date and
time, depth optional
Unqualified composites, with
beginning and ending dates
Qualified composites, with
beginning and ending dates
and times, and conditions
Samples with the expanded
sample key (MED, SMK, UMK)
STORAGE PROCEDURE
700 ?01 ?02 ?03 ?04
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes no no yes
yes yes no no yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes no no yes
yes no
no no no
The ?00 (general storage) data input procedure can be used to store
parametric data for all of the sample types, and it can also be used to
change or delete previously stored values. It utilizes the free-form method
of input, where items do not have to be entered in specific columns, but are
entered one after another disregarding columns, using a comma as a delimiter
to separate items. Therefore, it readily lends itself to the inputting of
data via telecommunication terminals. It is the only storage procedure that
can be used to store samples having an expanded sample key.
The ?01 storage procedure (fixed-form procedure) employs a fixed-field
format, i.e., items must be entered in certain columns and commas are not
used as item delimiters. It can be used to add new, or to change or delete
WQ-DE
4-5
SEP 86
-------
previously stored parameter values. This procedure is also applicable to
all types of samples shown in the table above except those that involve an
expanded sample key.
The Decimal Input (DIP) procedures Type ?02 and Type ?03 allow keypunching
of free-form data cards directly from tables or reports.
The Single Station DIP ?02 procedure is used when the same 30 or fewer
parameters are measured at all stations in the storage deck but collection
times, dates, and depths differ. The procedure may be used only to add new
samples or additional parameters to existing samples. It cannot be used to
change or delete values. An unlimited number of samples can be stored. Its
most effective use is for storing data when the same group of parameters is
to be stored for different stations, dates, times, and depths.
The Multiple Station DIP 703 storage procedure is used to store a set of
parameters taken at the same dates, times, and depths for different
stations. The procedure may be used only to add new samples or additional
parameters to existing samples. It cannot be used to change or delete
values. An unlimited number of samples can be stored. Its most effective
use is for storing data that were sampled at the same set of stations at
identical dates, times, and depths.
The ?04 storage procedure employs a variable, or free-form, card format, and
can be used to store, change, or delete parametric data. It can be used
with all types of samples except samples with an expanded sample key, as
shown in Table 4-2.
4.1.5 CARDS USED: CONTROL CARDS, STATION LOCATION CARDS, AND OTHERS
Which cards are needed for coding parametric data for storage in the WQF
depends upon the method being used. Each parametric data storage deck
begins with two control cards: a 7START card, and a ?0n card, where n is the
number that denotes the type of storage procedure being used. These
beginning control cards are then followed by the station location cards —
an Agency Card (either the A Card described in subsection 4.1.6 or, for two
of the procedures, the AC Card described in subsection 4.2.1) and, in some
cases, a Station Card (S Card). These cards identify the agency and station
to which the parametric data belong. In addition, several other cards are
used with specific procedures to input, change, or delete parametric data.
Each of these cards is described in detail under the procedure for which it
is used, and their use is summarized in the box below for reference.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-6
-------
700
7START
700
AC or A
SC
PN
DC
PNOFF
PROCEDURE
701 702
7START 7START
701 702
A A
S P
6 D
703
7START
703
A
P
D
704
7START
704
AC or A
SC
4.1.6 THE AGENCY CARD (A CARD)
As with any data entry operation involving either station location or
parametric data, the agency to which the station or parametric data are
related must be specified. An unlocking key must also be specified in order
to prevent unauthorized data entry. The agency card, also described in
Section 3, is used to provide this information when storing parametric data.
The A card can be used with any of the five storage procedures. An AC card
can be used in lieu of the A card for the 700 and 704 procedures; the coding
of this card is described in the discussions of these procedures.
The following fields of an A card are to be coded when storing parametric
data by any of the storage procedures described below.
Columns
Contents
1-8 Agency Code
The one- to eight-character agency code assigned to the
agency responsible for collecting and entering data into the
WQF. Entries are to be left-justified, leaving unused
columns blank.
9-16 Blank
17-24 Unlocking Key
A one- to eight-character alphanumeric code, which must be
accurately specified before any information can be stored
for the respective stations. This unlocking key serves as a
safeguard against unauthorized storage of data. Entries
must be left-justified, leaving unused columns blank.
WQ-DE
4-7
SEP 86
-------
25-60 Name of Individual Storing Data
The name, location, telephone number, or other information
relevant to the individual responsible for the storage of
station location information should be entered here. The
information within the field is not stored in the WQF, but
is printed on primary error listings to facilitate user
tracking of jobs.
61 Date Validity Check
This column should be coded only when storing data sampled
prior to January 1, 1932. The STORET system automatically
checks the dates (and times) specified for sampling dates,
e.g., field 4 of the data card used in the ?02 storage
procedure. All STORET dates are to be specified in a
yymmdd(tttt) format, and in storage procedures STORET
checks, among other things, that yy is greater than 31. The
yy check guards against storing inadvertent date
transpositions, e.g., erroneously coding March 30, 1986, as
300386 or 033086 instead of 860330, whi'ch is the correct way
to specify this date. Thus, if one is storing data actually
sampled in 1931 or earlier, this field must be coded with
the letter B to inhibit the date checking process. If date
checking is to be performed, leave this column blank.
62 Depth Unit
This field is used to specify the unit of measurement in
which the sample depths are recorded. Either F (for feet)
or H (for meters) may be specified. If left blank, the
value for this field defaults to F.
63-77 Blank
78-79 Control Code
This field is to be left blank for all parametric data
storage operations.
80 Card Type Code
Code with the letter A.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-8
-------
4.2 STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA
This subsection describes in detail each of the different parametric data
storage procedures and the cards and their fields used to store parametric
data within the WQF. Any of the five storage procedures may be used to add
new grab or unqualified composite sample data to the WQF. They are
presented in order of complexity of usage and increasing capability from
easier to more difficult, starting with ?00 and progressing to 702, 703,
?04, and lastly 701.
Only those parametric data storage cards listed for a storage procedure are
to be used for that procedure.
Each description is concluded with one or more examples.
4.,2.1 TYPE ?00: GENERAL STORAGE INPUT PROCEDURE
Cards Used
7START
?00
AC Card or A Card
SC Card(s) and/or PN and DC Cards
PNOFF Card(s), if necessary
Continuation Card(s), if necessary
The general storage input procedure utilizes a free-form AC agency card (or
a standard fixed-field A Card, coded as described in subsection 4.1.6) and
any combination of SC Card(s) and sets of PN, PNOFF, and DC Cards. The
procedure can be used to store all types of data, including qualified
composite samples and samples taken from media other than water.
The ?00 procedure offers the coding features of both the ?04 procedure and
the 702 procedure. All of the cards used in the 700 procedure utilize a
free-form card format, like 704, and thus lend themselves readily to
entering data via a terminal. The PN and DC Cards are comparable to the 702
P and D Cards, in that parameter codes need to be coded only once, on the PN
card, and all other sample data are coded on the DC Card. This capability
is useful whenever the same set of constituents are measured at one or more
•stations.
The choice of which data storage card to use (SC Card or PN and DC Cards) is
primarily a matter of user preference and the type of keying involved. With
the SC Card, the parameter code must be keyed for each value to be stored,
which could result in a large number of keystrokes if a large number of
values are to be stored. With the PN and DC Cards, keying the parameter
codes only once results in relatively fewer keystrokes. But because
parameter codes and their corresponding values are positionally related on
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-9
-------
the two cards, keeping track of the commas can become tedious, particularly
if not every parameter was measured in every sample.
Either the SC Card or the PN and OC Cards can be used to change or delete
previously stored data.
A special form of the PN Card, the PNOFF Card, is used to denote a switch
from a set of DC Cards to a set of SC Cards.
The formats of these cards and examples of their use are as follows.
Agency Card (AC Card)
Contents
Card Type Code
The letters AC must be coded in columns 1 and 2, followed by
a comma in column 3.
A=agency-code,
Agency-code is the one- to eight-character alphanumeric
agency code, beginning in column 4, followed by a comma.
UK=unlock ing-key,
Unlocking-key is the one- to eight-character alphanumeric
code assigned to the user storing the data, which must be
accurately specificied before any information can be stored
for the respective stations. This field must be followed by
a comma.
USER=user-name,
User-name is a 1- to 54-character alphanumeric description
of the user storing the data, including his or her name,
location, agency, telephone number, and any other relevant
information. Embedded blanks are permitted, but embedded
commas are not. This field must be followed by a comma.
This information is not stored in the WQF.
Data validity check (NDC)
This field should be coded only when storing data sampled
prior to January 1, 1932. The STORET system automatically
checks the dates (and times) specified for when samples were
taken, e.g., field 3 of the SC card. All STORET dates are
to be specified in a yymmdd(tttt) format, and in storage
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-10
-------
procedures, STORET checks, among other things, that yy is
greater than 31. The yy check guards against storing
inadvertent date transpositions, e.g., erroneously coding
March 30, 1986, as 300386 or 033086 instead of 860330, which
is the correct way to store this date. Thus, if one is
storing data actually sampled in 1931 or earlier, this field
must be coded with the letters NDC, followed by a comma, to
inhibit the date-checking process. If date checking is to
be performed, do not code this field.
Storage Card (SC Card)
This card is used to code the remaining information to be coded in a ?00
storage procedure: the station code, dates, depths, parameters and
parameter values, and other pertinent information. All fields are separated
by commas. As many SC Cards may be coded as there are samples to be
stored. This card follows the agency card, either the AC Card or the A Card.
If more than one data card is required to record all data for a given
sample, additional SC continuation cards can be used. The SC Card may be
coded up to column 80, with remaining data coded on a second card, and on as
many other continuation cards as required. Up to approximately 245
parameters and associated values can be specified in one set of SC and SC
continuation cards.
The length and content of the fields on the SC Card can vary, depending upon
storage requirements, the manner in which parameter values were recorded,
and other such variables. The fields of the SC Card must be arranged and
coded in the following sequence.
Field Contents
1 Card Type Code
The letters SC must be coded in columns 1 and 2, followed by
a comma in column 3.
2 Station Code
This field must be coded with the alphanumeric primary or
secondary station code to which the information on the card
pertains. This code must be followed by a comma.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-11
-------
Beginning Date and Time
The date on which the sample was taken, or for a composite
sample, the beginning date of the sample collection. The
date must be in this format:
yymmddtttt, where yy is the year, mm the month, dd the
day, and tttt the time in hours and minutes, using the
24-hour clock. Time is optional.
Thus, for a grab sample, the date and optionally the time
are specified; for an unqualified composite, the beginning
date is specified; and for a qualified composite, the
beginning date and time are specified.
The field must be followed by a comma.
Ending Date and Time
This field is coded only for composite data, either
unqualified or qualified, and is in the format yymmddtttt.
Thus for an unqualified composite, the ending date is
entered; for a qualified composite, the ending date and time
are entered.
If coded, this field must be followed by a comma; if not
coded, nothing is entered, not even a comma.
Medium Code
For water samples (which include bottom, vertically
integrated, core, pore, and dredge samples), this field is
not used and can be left blank, because water and
water-related samples are the assumed medium. If the sample
being stored is from a medium other than water, the keyword
MED=value, is coded where value is one of the valid medium
codes recognized by STORET. The STORET command procedure
named %BATCH may be used to obtain lists of valid media and
SHK codes. Enter SMKLIST in response to the procedure's
prompt.
If coded, this field must be followed by a comma.
Depth or SMK Code
If a depth is being stored for a water or water-related
sample, the D keyword below is specified in this field. For
a sample whose medium is other than water, the appropriate
system multipurpose keyword (SMK) is specified in this field.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-12
-------
Depth
The depth at which the sample was taken is expressed in this
format:
B
D[M] [V]xxx, where M, B, V, P, D, and
P C are all optional, but where
D only one value within each
C pair of brackets may be
specified, and where xxx is
the depth.
These are the permissible values for this field:
B - The depth to the bottom of the water
column
V - A vertically integrated sample taken
from the surface to the depth recorded
P - A pore sample, which consists of the
water extracted from a core sample
D - A sediment sample taken at the bottom,
using a sediment sampler such as an
Ekman or a Peterson dredge
C - A core sample taken at bottom, using a
core sampler such as a Phlegar or a
Wilding sampler
All values specified will be in feet unless the value
includes an M, which indicates that the values are in
meters. There can be no embedded blanks within the field.
Leading zeros of the depth value xxx need not be specified.
SMK Code
The system multipurpose key is entered by setting SMK equal
to a valid code for the medium that was specified for the
MED keyword in the preceding field. The format is
SMK=value, and if specified, must be preceded by the MED
keyword.
This field must be followed by a comma.
Type of Composite Value or UMK Code
Either a Type of Composite Value for a qualified composite
water sample or a UMK Code for a sample whose medium is
other than water is specified in this field.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-13
-------
Type of Composite Value
For water or water-related samples, this field is used only
with qualified composite data, and is used to indicate the
Composite Value Type. One of the following values must be
specified when storing qualified composite data:
A - an average value
H - a maximum value
L - a minimum value
N - the number of observations
within the sample
S - a standard deviation
U - a sum of squares
V - a variance
C - coefficient of error
X - a coefficient of variance
E - skewness
F - kurtosis
Z - the number of samples
in the composite that exceeds
established limits
% - precision
$ - accuracy
B - None of the above apply
D - Replicate sample
If coded, this field must be followed by a comma. If D for
a replicate sample is coded, a numerical value must be coded
for field 8 and a B coded in field 9.
UMK Code
For a sample whose medium (see field 5) is other than water,
the appropriate user multipurpose keyword (UMK) may be
specified in this field. The format is UMK=value, where
value is up to eight alphanumeric characters in length. If
specified, UMK must be preceded by the MED and SMK keywords
in the preceding two fields. The use of UMK is optional,
and users are responsible tor defining and maintaining the
meaning of their own UMK codes; they are not maintained by
EPA. If UMK is used, the sample cannot be a qualified
composite.
If coded, this field must be followed by a comma.
Type of Composite
This field is used only with qualified composite data/ and
indicates whether the sample was collected over a period of
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-14
-------
time or space, or both. One of the following values must be
specified when storing qualified composite data.
S - space
T - time
B - both space and time
F - flow proportional composite
1-9 - replicate number (see value D in field 7).
If coded, this field must be followed by a comma.
Type of Sampling Method
This field is used only with qualified composite data, and
indicates the type of sampling method used in collecting the
sample. One of the following values must be specified when
storing qualified composite data.
C - the samples were
collected continuously
G - the samples are individual
grab samples, but the actual
number are not to be reported
GNxx - where xx, two digits, is the number of
individual grab samples in the collection
B - Blank, when none of the above apply
(used when replicate samples are being coded)
If coded, the field must be followed by a comma. For
qualified composite samples, fields 7, 8, and 9 must all be
coded.
10 Parameter Code
This field is used for all types of samples to specify the
parameter code whose value is to be stored. The field is
coded in the format
Pxxxxx which stores the parameter xxxxx with the
next field (data item) as its value. Leading
zeros need not be coded.
As many pairs of this field and the next field may be coded
as required. A comma must follow each parameter code
specified. A complete list of parameter codes can be
obtained by following the instructions given in Appendix B.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-15
-------
11 Parameter Value
This field is used to specify the value to be stored for the
parameter code specified in the preceding field. If a
Remark Code is used, it must be the last character in the
value. Remark Codes are defined in Table 4-1.
Parameter values may be designated via either fixed point or
floating point numerical notation. The general format of
the data field is as follows:
.xxxxxxx Espp
where
(1) The designation .xxxxxxx represents a fixed point number
or the mantissa of a floating point number, which may
include from one to seven digits plus a decimal point.
The decimal point may be in any position or be omitted.
When floating point notation is used, the decimal point
is assumed to be immediately to the left of the first
digit or in the position indicated.
(2) The blank constitutes an exponent separator. Its use is
optional.
(3) The designation s indicates the sign of the exponent.
It may be coded plus (+) or minus (-) or left blank. A
plus code will cause the decimal point to move to the
right, a minus code will cause it to move to the left,
and a blank will maintain the indicated position. Use
of the exponent sign (E) is optional. If a code is not
provided, the exponent is assumed to be positive.
4) The designation pp represents the value of the
exponent. Two digits must be coded if floating point
notation is used. This code controls the extent of
movement of the decimal point from the indicated
position.
Correct codes for the numbers 5, 7.5, 0.1, and 98,500 are 5,
7.5, 0.1 or l.OE-01, and 98500 or 9.85E04 or 9.85 E04 or
9.85E+04, respectively.
As many pairs of this field and the preceding field may be
coded as required.
A comma must follow each value specified, including the last
value.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-16
-------
SC Continuation Card
If all of the parameter values cannot be coded on a single SC Card, a
continuation card may be used. One SC Card and its set of one or more
continuation cards may contain up to 500 commas, which means that data for
up to approximately 245 parameters may be entered on one SC card and its
continuation cards. The last character coded on the SC card must be a
comma, as a parameter value cannot be split and continued onto a
continuation card. The continuation card has no special fields or codes;
coding of parameter values may begin in column 1, and proceed as above. The
last character coded on a continuation card must be a comma.
Abbreviated SC Card
When coding multiple SC Cards within a single storage run for identical
stations, dates, times, depths, and expanded sample key keywords MED, SMK,
and UMK (fields 2 through 7), a '$' may be coded in their stead, which
automatically assumes that the values of these fields (from the station code
field up to the depth or the UMK code field, but not any composite type
codes) are as specified in the preceding fully coded SC Card.
The PN Card and the DC Card
The PN Card and the DC Card may also be used to store sample data in a 700
storage procedure. Both cards follow the free-form format, with commas —
and no intervening blanks — separating the fields. A comma must be coded
after the last field on each card, including any continuation cards. A PN
Card must precede the set of DC Cards that relates to it.
The PN Card is somewhat analogous to the P Card used in the 702 storage
procedure in that it is used solely to provide parameter codes. Similarly,
the DC card is analogous to the 702 D Card, except that it has the
additional capabilities for storing qualified composite and expanded sample
key data and for changing or deleting previously stored data.
The formats for these cards follow.
PN Card
Contents
Card Type Code
The letters PN must be entered in columns 1 and 2, followed
by a comma in column 3.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-17
-------
Parameter Codes
This field us used to specify the up-to-five-digit
paramenter codes whose values will be coded on the following
DC Card. Leading zeros are not required; all codes
specified, including the last, must be followed by a comma.
Up to approximately 490 pairs of this field and the
corresponding Parametric Value field in the DC Card may be
coded for each PN Card, as necessary.
A complete list of the parameter codes defined within STORET
may be obtained by using the STORET TSO command procedure
named %BATCH. See Chapter TP (Terminal Procedures) in the
STORET Handbook, Part WQ, for a further explanation of the
procedures required to obtain a copy of the parameter codes.
PN Continuation Card
If all parameter codes cannot be coded on a single PN Card, continuation
cards can be used until all codes have been entered. PN continuation cards
have no identifying code in columns 1 and 2; the coding of parameter codes
should begin in column 1 and proceed as above. The last character coded on
a PN continuation card must be a comma.
DC Card
After the parameter codes are specified on the PN Card(s), the DC Cards are
used to specify the remaining information pertaining to the sample to be
stored. The first nine fields of the DC Card are identical to the
corresponding first nine fields of the SC card described above. The 10th
and subsequent fields of the DC Card are used to code the parameter values
that correspond in sequence with the parameter codes entered on the
immediately preceding PN Card.
Field Contents
1 Card Type Code
The letters DC must be coded in columns 1 and 2, followed by
a comma in column 3.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-18
-------
Station Code
This field must be coded with the alphanumeric primary or
secondary station code to which the information on the card
pertains. This code must be followed by a comma.
Beginning Date and Time
The date on which the sample was taken, or for a composite
sample, the beginning date of sample collection. The date
must be in this format:
yymmddtttt, where yy is the year, mm the month, dd the
day, and tttt the time in hours and minutes, using the
24-hour clock. Time is optional.
Thus, for a grab sample, the date and optionally the time
are specified; for an unqualified composite, the beginning
date is specified; and for a qualified composite, the
beginning date and time are specified.
The field must be followed by a comma.
Ending Date and Time
This field is coded only for composite data, either
unqualified or qualified, and is in the format yymmddtttt.
Thus for an unqualified composite, the ending date is
entered; for a qualified composite, the ending date and time
are entered.
If coded, this field must be followed by a comma; if not
coded, nothing is entered, not even a comma.
Medium Code
For water samples (which include bottom, vertically
integrated, core, pore, and dredge samples), this field is
not used and can be left blank, because water and
water-related samples are the assumed medium. If the sample
being stored is from a medium other than water, the keyword
MED=value, is coded where value is one of the valid medium
codes recognized by STORET. The STORET command procedure
named %BATCH may be used to obtain lists of valid media and
SMK codes. Enter SMKLIST in response to the procedure's
prompt.
If coded, this field must be followed by a comma.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-19
-------
Depth or SMK Code
If a depth is being stored for a water or water-related
sample, the D keyword below is specified in this field. For
a sample whose medium is other than water, the appropriate
system multipurpose keyword (SMK) is specified in this field.
Depth
The depth at which the sample was taken is expressed in this
format:
B
D[M] [V]xxx, where M, B, V, P, D, and
P C are all optional, but where
D only one value within each
C pair of brackets may be
specified, and where xxx is
the depth.
These are the permissible values for this field:
B - The depth to the bottom of the water
column
V - A vertically integrated sample taken
from the surface to the depth recorded
P - A pore sample, which consists of the
water extracted from a core sample
D - A sediment sample taken at the bottom,
using a sediment sampler such as an
Ekman or a Peterson dredge
C - A core sample taken at bottom, using a
core sampler such as a Phlegar or a
Wilding sampler
All values specified will be in feet unless the value
includes an M, which indicates that the values are in
meters. There can be no embedded blanks within the field.
Leading zeros of the depth value xxx need not be specified.
SMK Code
The system multipurpose key is entered by setting SMK equal
to a valid code for the medium that was specified for the
MED keyword in the preceding field. The format is
SMK-value, and if specified, must be preceded by the MED
keyword.
This field must be followed by a comma.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-20
-------
Type of Composite Value or UMK Code
Either a Type of Composite Value for a qualified composite
water sample or a UMK Code for a sample whose medium is
other than water is specified in this field.
Type of Composite Value
For water or water-related samples, this field is used only
with qualified composite data, and is used to indicate the
Composite Value Type. One of the following values must be
specified when storing qualified composite data:
A - an average value
H - a maximum value
L - a minimum value
N - the number of observations
within the sample
S - a standard deviation
U - a sum of squares
V - a variance
C - coefficient of error
X - a coefficient of variance
E - skewness
F - kurtosis
Z - the number of samples
in the composite that exceeds
established limits
% - precision
$ - accuracy
B - None of the above apply
D - Replicate sample
If coded, this field must be followed by a comma. If D for
a replicate sample is coded, a numerical value must be coded
for field 8 and a B coded in field 9.
UMK Code
For a sample whose medium (see field 5) is other than water,
the appropriate user multipurpose keyword (UMK) may be
specified in this field. The format is UMK=value, where
value is up to eight alphanumeric characters in length. If
specified, UMK must be preceded by the MED and SMK keywords
in the preceding two fields. The use of UMK is optional,
and users are responsible for defining and maintaining the
meaning of their own UMK codes; they are not maintained by
EPA. If a UMK is used, the sample cannot be a qualified
composite.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-21
-------
If coded, this field must be followed by a comma.
Type of Composite
This field is used only with qualified composite data, and
indicates whether the sample was collected over a period of
time or space, or both. One of the following values must be
specified when storing qualified composite data.
S - space
T - time
B - both space and time
F - flow proportional composite
1-9 - replicate number (see value D in field 7).
If coded, this field must be followed by a comma.
Type of Sampling Method
This field is used only with qualified composite data, and
indicates the type of sampling method used in collecting the
sample. One of the following values must be specified when
storing qualified composite data.
C - the samples were
collected continuously
G - the samples are individual
grab samples, but the actual
number are not to be reported
GNxx - where xx, two digits, is the number of
individual grab samples in the collection
B - Blank, when none of the above apply
(used when replicate samples are being coded)
If coded, the field must be followed by a comma. For
qualified composite samples, fields 7, 8, and 9 must all be
coded.
10 Parameter Value
The remainder of the DC Card is coded with parameter values,
specified in the same order as the corresponding parameter
codes on the preceding PN Card. Parameter values are
separated by commas. If a value is not available for a
parameter code specified on the PN Card, the corresponding
field is coded only with a comma. If a Remark Code is used,
it must follow the value.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-22
-------
DC Continuation Card
If all of the parameter values cannot be coded on a single DC Card, a
continuation card may be used. The last character coded on the DC Card must
be a comma, as a parameter value cannot be split and continued onto a
continuation card. The continuation card has no special fields or codes;
coding of parameter values may begin in column 1 and proceed as above. The
last character coded on a continuation card must be a comma.
Abbreviated DC Card
When coding multiple DC Cards within a single storage run for identical
stations, dates, times, depths, and expanded sample key keywords MED, SMK,
and UMK (fields 2 through 7), a '$' may be coded in their stead (just as for
an SC continuation card), which automatically assumes that the values of
these fields (from the station code field up to the depth or the UMK code
field, but not any composite type codes) are as specified in the preceding
fully coded DC Card.
PNOFF Card
A ?00 storage deck may contain any combination of SC Cards and sets of PN
and DC Cards. However, when switching from a DC Card to an SC Card, a PNOFF
Card must be coded to denote the switch. (A PNOFF card is not needed when
switching from an SC Card to a PN Card.) This switching of coding modes can
take place as many times as desired by placing a PNOFF Card immediately
after a group or set of PN and DC Cards and before a group of SC Cards.
The format of the card is PNOFF, coded in columns 1 through 6, including the
comma; columns 7 through 80 must be blank.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-23
-------
4.2.1.1 EXAMPLE OF STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE GENERAL STORAGE
INPUT PROCEDURE (Type 700)
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
?00
AC,A=EXAMPLE,UK=TEST,USER=STORAGE EXAMPLE,
PN,435,410,305,940,300,900,1045,550,650,945,75,10,
400,405,630,930,31505,
DCfMSPl,8305171300,8,105,2.4,17,9.8,110,15.02,95,.41,32,104,8.1,
7.5,10,20.9,135.1,3.7E04,
DC,MSP1,8308031200,6,100,,15,,105,,61,,,145,8,,8,,,6250,
PNOFF,
SC,MSP1,850618,P300,9.7,P400,6.9,P10,15.4,
SC,MSP1,8408121500,DO,P300,5.4,P10,18.2,P400,8.2,
PN, 300,10,400,
DC,MSP1,830211,9.3,16.2,7.6,
DC,MSP1,8304151200,8305151200,DO,A,B,GN30,7.2,17.2,8.2,
PNOFF,
SC,MSP1,8507120900,8507120900,A,S,GN5,P300,12.3,
SC,MSP1,841202,P625,2.7,P1045,10.3,P1140,5.1,
SC,MSP1,8406151400,MED=RCRAGW,SMK=511000,UMK=11136203,P11,66.0,P300,8.4,
PN, 11,1029,300,400,1045,
DC,MSP1,8302180900,MED=RCRAGW,SMK=511000,UMK=07213122,68.3,.8,10.3,
7.3,3.1,
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-24
-------
4.2.2 TYPE ?02: SINGLE STATION DIP INPUT PROCEDURE
Cards Used
?START
?02
A Card
P Card(s)
D Card(s)
P and D Continuation Card(s), if necessary
The single station decimal input procedure (DIP) can be used to store all
types of data except qualified composite samples (composites with beginning
and ending dates and times and other sampling conditions specified), and
data having expanded sample keys. Its most effective use in storing data is
when the same set of parameters was sampled at a number of different
stations, but the samples were taken at different dates, times, and depths.
This procedure cannot be used to change or delete previously stored data.
Up to 30 parameters can be stored by a single P Card and one continuation
card. If more than 30 parameters are to be stored, then multiple P Cards,
and continuation cards, must be coded along with their related D Cards,
following the D Cards coded for the first 30 parameters.
The P Card is used to identify the specific parameters whose values are to
be stored. The D Card is used to identify the stations behind which the
data values for the parameters coded on the P Cards are to be stored, along
with the sample key information (date, time, and depth) and the data
values. D Cards immediately follow the P Cards with which they are
associated. Values are entered in the same order in which their
corresponding parameter codes appear on the P Card; if a parameter does not
have a value for a sample, a comma is entered to maintain the proper
one-for-one sequence.
The formats of the cards used for single station input via the ?02 procedure
are as follows:
Parameter Card (P Card)
Columns Contents
1-4 Card Type Code
A letter P enclosed within single quotation marks identifies
this card as a parameter card. Enter a comma in the column
after this field. Thus, this four-column field is coded
•P1.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-25
-------
Depth Indicator
This one-character field must either be left blank or
contain one of the following alphabetic characters that
indicates the type of depth at which the sample was taken.
Blank - Regular depth of sample measured from the surface
B - The depth to the bottom of the water column
V - A vertically integrated sample taken from the
surface to the depth recorded
P - A pore sample, which consists of the water extracted
from a core sample
D - A sediment sample taken at the bottom, using a
sediment sampler such as an Ekman or a Peterson
dredge
C - A core sample taken at bottom, using a core sampler
such as a Phlegar or a Wilding sampler
Sample Depth
If sample depths are to be coded on the following data
cards, code the letter D; if no depths are to be stored,
leave this one-column field blank.
7-76 Parameter Codes
This field is used to code from 1 to 14 five-digit water
quality parameter codes. Each code specified must be five
digits in length, i.e., leading zeros must be specified.
The codes must not be separated by commas or blanks. A
complete list of these codes can be obtained by following
the instructions given in Appendix B.
77-79 Blank
80 Continuation Code
If there are more than 14 constituents in the samples to be
stored, code the letter C in this column, and code the
additional parameters on a continuation card. If there are
14 or fewer parameters to be stored, leave column 80 blank.
P Continuation Card
A single continuation card may contain from 1 to 16 additional five-digit
parameter codes, for a total of 30 parameter codes for each P Card coded.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-26
-------
Coding begins in column 1, proceeding to column 80 if necessary. As with
the P Card, individual codes must not be separated by commas or blanks. If
more than 30 parameters are to be specified, additional P Cards and
continuation cards may be used following the D Cards for the first 30
parameters.
Data Card (D Card), Single Station DIP Format
Field Contents
1 Sequence Number
The first field of the D Card may contain a sequence or card
sorting number. The sequence number is composed of a dollar
sign ($) followed by digits. The entire number including
the dollar sign must be enclosed in single quotation marks
followed by a comma. Completing this field is optional, as
the information is not stored in the WQF; if not used,
proceed to field 2.
2 Card Type Code
A letter D enclosed within single quotation marks identifies
this card as a data card. If sequence numbers are not used,
this field can begin in column 1. Enter a comma in the
column after this field. Thus this four-column field is
coded 'D',
3 Station Code
This field must be coded with an alphanumeric primary or
secondary station code enclosed in single quotation marks.
If sequence numbers are not used, this field begins in
column 5. The field is followed by a comma.
4 Date-Time
This field is used to code the date (year, month, and day),
and, optionally, the time (using the 24-hour clock) that the
samples were taken, according to the type of sampling method
used, as follows:
(1) For grab samples with no time information, this field
must contain ,a six-digit value: the first two digits
are the year; the third and fourth digits, the month;
and the fifth and sixth digits, the day of the month.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-27
-------
(2) For grab samples with time indicated, this field must
contain a 10-digit value: the first 2 digits are the
year; the 3rd and 4th digits the month; the 5th and 6th
dig.its, the day of the month; and the last 4 digits, the
time, using the 24-hour clock.
(3) For unqualified composite samples with beginning and
ending dates indicated, this field must contain a
12-digit value: the first 6 digits are the beginning
year, month, and day; the next 6 digits are the ending
year, month, and day.
This field must contain no embedded blanks, and leading
zeros must be coded (for example, January must be coded as
01). This field is followed by a comma.
Sample Depth
If a D was coded in column 6 of the preceding P card, sample
depth is coded in this field.
Depth units are assumed to be those indicated on the
preceding A card. This field is concluded with a comma.
If a D was not coded on the preceding P card, proceed
directly to field 6. Do not code a comma to denote the
absence of the field.
If a D was indicated on the previous P card but no depth
exists, code only a comma, and proceed to field 6.
Parameter Values
The remainder of the D Card is coded with parameter values,
corresponding in sequence with the parameter codes on the
preceding P card. Parameter values are separated by
commas. There must be a comma for each parameter code
entered on the P card; thus, if a value is not available for
a parameter, the corresponding field must be coded with a
comma.
After all values for the sample are entered, the data for
the next sample are entered on a new D card.
If a Remark Code is to be associated with a parameter value,
it must immediately precede the parameter value, e.g.,
K5.2. The Remark Codes are defined in Table 4-1.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-28
-------
Parameter values may be designated via either fixed point or
floating point numerical notation. The general format of
the data field is as follows:
.xxxxxxx Espp
where
(1) The designation .xxxxxxx represents a fixed point number
or the mantissa of a floating point number, which may
include from one to seven digits plus a decimal point.
The decimal point may be in any position or be omitted.
When floating point notation is used, the decimal point
is assumed to be immediately to the left of the first
numerical digit or in the position indicated.
2) The blank constitutes an exponent separator. Its use is
optional.
3) The designation s indicates the sign of the exponent.
It may be coded plus (+) or minus (-) or left blank. A
plus code will cause the decimal point to move to the
right, a minus code will cause it to move to the left,
and a blank will maintain the indicated position. Use
of the exponent sign (E) is optional. If a code is not
provided, the exponent is assumed to be positive.
4) The designation pp represents the value of the
exponent. Two digits must be coded if floating point
notation is used. This code controls the extent of
movement of the decimal point from the indicated
position.
Correct codes for the numbers 5, 7.5, 0.1, and 98,500 are 5,
7.5, 0.1 or l.OE-01, and 98500 or 9.85E04 or 9.85 E04 or
9.85E+04, respectively.
Delimiter
The last parameter value specified must be followed by a
comma.
D Continuation Card
If all of the parameter values cannot be coded on a single D Card, a
continuation card may be used. The last character coded on the D Card must
be a comma, as a parameter value cannot be split and continued onto a
continuation card. The continuation card has no special fields or codes;
coding of parameter values may begin in column 1, and proceed as above. The
last character coded on a continuation card must be a comma.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-29
-------
4.2.2.1 EXAMPLES OF STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE SINGLE STATION
DIP INPUT PROCEDURE (TYPE ?02)
Store the following parametric data for agency EXAMPLE for the indicated
existing stations utilizing the single station DIP input procedure. The
parameter codes are 95 for conductivity; 10 for temperature; 400 for pH; 410
for alkalinity; 31505 for coliforms; 940 for chloride; 75 for turbidity; 900
for hardness; 300 for dissolved oxygen; 945 for sulphate; 620 for nitrate;
435 for acidity; 305 for biological oxygen demand; 1045 for iron; 550 for
oil; and 650 for phosphate.
STATION
CODE
205090
205090
205090
STATION
CODE
108130
108130
STATION
CODE
M350J1
M350J1
STATION
CODE
205090
205090
DATE
1/15/82
2/23/82
6/30/82
DATE
12/14/81
8/14/81
DATE
4/15/80
10/30/79
BEG
DATE
01MAR80
01APR80
TIME DEPTH
9:00 20
35
13:00 10
TIME DEPTH
10:00 20
11:00 20
TIME ACID ALK
3:00 8 105
6 100
END DEPTH
DATE TYPE
31MAR80 BOTTOM
30APR80 BOTTOM
COND TEMP PH
210 6.2
10.1
250 14.8
CL TURB
15 250
18
BOD CL DO
2.4 17 9.8
15
DEPTH
VALUE TEMP
5 10.8
8 11.2
7.
7.
HARD
120
1130
HARD
110
105
PH
7.5
8.1
ALK COLIFORMS
4 110 4,300
6 - 10,000
98 37,000
DO S04 N03
9.8 25 0.85
8.7 20 0.92
IRON OIL P04 S04
15.02 95 .41 32
50
ALK COLIFORMS
2.4 4,200
5.7 56,000
WQ-DE
4-30
SEP 86
-------
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
?02
EXAMPLE TEST EXAMPLE OF STORING DATA - ?02 A
'P1, D0009500010004000041031505
•D','205090',8201150900,20,210,6.2,7.4,110,4300,
•DV2050901,820223,35,, 10.1,7.6, ,10000,
•D1,'205090',8206301300,10,250,14.8,,98,3.7E04,
'P1, D009400007500900003000094500620
1D',1108130',8112141000,20,K15,K250,120,9.8,J25,K.85,
'D1,'108130',8108141100,20,L8,,L130,8.7, J20,. 92,
'P1, 00435004100030500940003000090001045005500065000945
'D','M350J1',8004151500,8,105,2.4,17,9.8,110,15.02,95,.41,32,
•D'f'HaSOJl'^SlOaO, 6,100, r15ff105f,50f Vf
'P1,8000010004000041031505
'D','205090',800301800331,5,10.8,7.5,2.4,4.2E03,
'D','205090',800401800430,8,11.2,8.1,5.7,56000,
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-31
-------
4.2.3 TYPE ?03: MULTIPLE STATION DIP INPUT PROCEDURE
Cards Used
?START
?03
A Card
P Card(s)
D Card(s)
P and D Continuation Card(s), if necessary
The multiple station decimal input procedure (DIP) can be used to store all
types of data except qualified composite samples (composites with beginning
and ending dates and times and other sampling conditions specified), and
data having expanded sample keys. Its most effective use in storing data is
when the same set of parameters was sampled at a number of different
stations, and the samples were taken at identical dates, times, and depths.
This procedure cannot be used to change or delete previously stored data.
Up to 20 stations can be specified by a single P Card and three continuation
cards. If data for more than 20 stations are to be stored, then multiple P
Cards — and continuation cards — must be coded following the data cards
for the first 20 stations.
The P Card is used to identify the stations whose data are being stored.
The parameter codes, dates, times, depths, and parameter values are coded on
one or more D Cards, which follow the P Cards. Values are entered on the D
Card in the same order in which their corresponding station codes appear on
the P Card; if a station does not have a value for a parameter, a comma is
entered to maintain the proper one-for-one sequence.
The formats of the cards used for multiple station input via the 703 storage
procedure are as follows:
Parameter Card (P Card)
Columns Contents
1-4 Card Type Code
A letter P enclosed within single quotation marks identifies
this card as a parameter card. Enter a comma in the column
after this field. Thus, this four-column field is coded
•P1,
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-32
-------
5-19, Station Codes
35-49*, These fields are used to specify up to five alphanumeric
50-64, station codes for the parameter values to be stored.
and Either primary or secondary station codes may be specified.
65-79 The codes must be left-justified, with unused columns in
each 15-column field left blank. (A station code can begin
only in columns 5, 20, 35, 50, or 65.) The station codes
are not to be separated by commas.
80 Continuation Code or Depth Storage Indicator
If data for five or fewer stations are being stored, and no
depth is assocated with the sample, leave this column blank.
If data for five or fewer stations are being stored and the
sample does have a depth to be stored with it, enter the
letter D.
If data for more than five stations are to be stored, enter
the letter C. If depth is to be associated with these
samples, the D is entered in this column of the last
continuation card.
P Continuation Card
Op to three continuation cards may be used to specify up to a total of 20
station codes for which parameter values are to be stored.
Columns Contents
1-4 Blank
5-79 Station Codes
Complete these columns as described above for the P card.
(Station codes must begin in the same columns as on the P
Card.)
80 Continuation Code or Depth Storage Indicator
Code the letter C if another continuation card is to be
coded. If depth values are being stored, code the letter D
in this column on the last continuation card.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-33
-------
Data Card (D Card)
Field Contents
1 Sequence Number
The first field of the D Card may contain a sequence or card
sorting number. The sequence number is composed of a dollar
sign ($) followed by digits. The entire number including
the dollar sign must be enclosed in single quotation marks
followed by a comma. Completing this field is optional, as
the information is not stored in the WQF; if not used,
proceed to field 2.
2 Card Type Code
A letter D enclosed within single quotation marks identifies
this card as a data card. If sequence numbers are not used,
this field can begin in column 1. Enter a comma in the
column after this field. Thus this four-column field is
coded 'D1,
3 Parameter Code
This field is used to code the five-digit parameter code
with which the parameter values coded on this, and on
following D Cards, for the same date, time, and stations are
associated. Leading zeros must be coded to complete the
five-digit field. The field is followed by a comma. A
complete list of these codes can be obtained by following
the instructions given in Appendix B.
4 Date-Time
This field is used to code the date (year, month, and day)
and, optionally, the time (using the 24-hour clock) that the
samples were taken at all of the stations indicated on the
preceding P Cards. This field is coded according to the
type of sampling method used, as follows:
(1) For grab samples with no time information, this field is
to contain a six-digit value: the first two digits are
the year; the third and fourth digits, the month; and
the fifth and sixth digits, the day of the month.
(2) For grab samples with time indicated, this field is to
contain a 10-digit value: the first 2 digits are to
contain the year; the 3rd and 4th digits, the month; the
5th and 6th digits, the day of the month; and the last 4
digits, the time, using the 24-hour clock.
WQ-DE SEp
4-34
-------
(3) For unqualified composite samples with beginning and
ending dates indicated, this field is to contain a
12-digit value: the first 6 digits are the beginning
year, month, and day; the next 6 digits are the ending
year, month, and day.
This field must contain no embedded blanks, and leading
zeros must be coded (for example, January must be coded as
01). This field is concluded with a comma.
Depth
This field is applicable only if a D was coded in column 80
of the P card or the last P continuation card, indicating
that sample depths are being specified. If this is not the
case, proceed to field 6.
The depth at which the sample was taken is expressed in this
format:
B
D[M][V]xxx, where M, B, V, P, D, and
p C are all optional, but where
D only one value within each
C pair of brackets may be
specified, and where xxx is
the depth.
These are the permissible values for this field:
B - The depth to the bottom of the water
column
V - A vertically integrated sample taken
from the surface to the depth recorded
P - A pore sample, which consists of the
water extracted from a core sample
D - A sediment sample taken at the bottom,
using a sediment sampler such as an
Ekman or a Peterson dredge
C - A core sample taken at the bottom, using a
core sampler such as a Phlegar or a
Wilding sampler
All values specified will be in feet unless the value
includes an M, which that indicates the values are in
meters. There can be no embedded blanks within the field.
Leading zeros of the depth value xxx need not be specified.
This field must be followed by a comma.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-35
-------
Parameter Values
The remainder of the D Card may be coded with values for the
parameter specified in field 3 in the station-by-station
order on the preceding P Card(s). Parameter values are
separated by commas. If a value is not available for a
station, the corresponding field is coded with a comma.
Parameter values may be designated via either fixed point or
floating point numerical notation. The general format of
the data field is as follows:
.xxxxxxx Espp
where
(1) The designation .xxxxxxx represents a fixed point number
or the mantissa of a floating point number, which may
include from one to seven digits plus a decimal point.
The decimal point may be in any position or be omitted.
When floating point notation is used, the decimal point
is assumed to be immediately to the left of the first
digit or in the position indicated.
(2) The blank constitutes an exponent separator. Its use is
optional.
(3) The designation s indicates the sign of the exponent.
It may be coded plus (+) or minus (-) or left blank. A
plus code will cause the decimal point to move to the
right, a minus code will cause it to move to the left,
and a blank will maintain the indicated position. Use
of the exponent (E) sign is optional. If a code is not
provided, the exponent is assumed to be positive.
(4) The designation pp represents the value of the
exponent. Two digits must be coded if floating point
notation is used. This code controls the extent of
movement of the decimal point from the indicated
position.
If a Remark Code is to be associated with a parameter value,
it must immediately precede the value, e.g., K5.2. Remark
Codes are defined in Table 4-1.
Correct codes for the numbers 5, 7.5, 0.1, and 98,500 are 5,
7.5, 0.1 or l.OE-01, and 98500 or 9.85E04 or 9.85 E04 or
9.85E+04, respectively.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-36
-------
Delimiter
The last parameter value specified must be followed by a
comma.
D Continuation Card
If all of the parameter values cannot be coded on a single D Card, a
continuation card may be used. The last character coded on the D Card must
be a comma, as a parameter value cannot be split and continued onto a
continuation card. The continuation card has no special fields or codes;
coding of parameter values may begin in column 1, and proceed as above. The
last character coded on a continuation card must be a comma.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-37
-------
4.2.3.1 EXAMPLE OF STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE MULTIPLE STATION
DIP INPUT PROCEDURE (TYPE ?03)
Store the following parametric data sampled in 1980 for the indicated
existing stations of agency EXAMPLE utilizing the multiple station DIP input
procedure. Nitrate mg/1 is parameter code 620; DO rag/1 is code 300; and
Total P04 mg/1 is code 650.
Parameters
Date Time
Parameter:
7-17 1300
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
Parameter:
7-17 1300
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
Parameter :
7-17 1300
7-18
7-19
7-20
Depth
Value
Depth
Type
M075
Stations
M076 M077 M078
Values
M079
Nitrate raq/1
10
10
15
1
—
DO mq/1
10
10
15
1
—
Total PO4
10
0
15
1
Regular
Regular
Bottom
Pore
—
Regular
Regular
Bottom
Pore
—
mq/1
Regular
Regular
Bottom
Pore
.2
.1
.2
.2
.2
10.8
10.8
10.5
10.6
10.3
.01
<.01
.04
.03
.2
.1
.2
.1
.2
10.9
10.8
-
10.8
10.6
.01
<.01
.02
.0*2
.2
.2
.2
.2
.2
10.9
11.2
-
10.9
10.9
<.01
<.01
.43
.05
.2
.2
.1
.1
.2
11.0
11.2
10.9
10.6
10.7
<.01
<.01
.19
.02
.2
.2
.1
.2
.2
11.1
11.2
11.0
10.8
10.8
.01
.02
.33
.02
WQ-DE
4-38
SEP 86
-------
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
?03
EXAMPLE TEST EXAMPLE OF STORING DATA - ?03 A
'P',M075 M076 M077 M078 M079 D
1D1,00620,8007171300,D010,.2,.2,.2f.2f.2,
'D1,00620,800718,0010,.!,.!,.2,.2,.2,
1D1,00620,800719,08015,.2,.2f.2,.lf.1,
•D1,00620,800720,DP001,.2,.lf.2f.lv.2,
1D1,00620,800721,.2,.2,.2,.2,.2,
'D1,00300,8007171300,0010,10.8,10.9,10.9,11,11.1,
'D1,00300,800718,0010,10.8,10.8,11.2,11.2,11.2,
•D1,00300,800719,08015,10.5,,,10.9,11.0,
'D1,00300,800720,DP001,10.6,10.8,10.9,10.6,10.8,
'D1,00300,800721,10.3,10.6,10.9,10.7,10.8,
1D1,00650,8007171300,0010,.01,.01,K.01,K.01,.01,
ID',00650,800718,DOOO,K.01,K.01fK.01,K.01,.02,
•D1,00650,800719,08015,.04,.02,.43,.19,.33,
'D1,00650,800720,DP001,.03,.02,.05,.02,.02,
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-39
-------
4.2.4 TYPE ?04: VARIABLE INPUT FORMAT PROCEDURE
Cards Used
PSTART
?04
AC Card or A Card
SC Card(s)
Continuation Card(s), if necessary
The variable format input procedure utilizes a free-form AC Agency Card (or
a standard fixed-field A Card) and SC Storage Card(s). The fields do not
have to be coded in specific columns; therefore/ the procedure lends itself
readily to entering data via terminals.
This procedure can be used to store all types of ambient water quality
data. These cards may be used to code the values of parameters sampled
under varying sampling methods and conditions, including a simple grab
sample, a grab sample with time identified, an unqualified composite sample
with beginning and ending dates, and a qualified composite sample with
dates, times, and other sampling conditions identified. (The procedure
cannot be used to store samples having an expanded sample key.) Up to
approximately 250 pairs of parameter codes and associated values can be
stored for any given SC Card. Data can also be changed or deleted via this
procedure.
Data items appearing in and after column 4 of the AC Card and the SC Card
are coded in free-form format, with commas — and no intervening blanks —
separating the fields. A comma must be coded after the last field on each
card.
The formats of the cards used for the 704 storage procedure are as follows:
Agency Card (AC Card)
Contents
Card Type Code
The letters AC must be coded in columns 1 and 2, followed by
a comma in column 3.
A=agency-code,
Agency-code is the one- to eight-character alphanumeric
agency code, beginning in column 4, followed by a comma.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-40
-------
UK=unlocking-key,
Unlocking-key is the one- to eight-character alphanumeric
code assigned to the user storing the data, which must be
accurately specified before any information can be stored
for the respective stations. This field must be followed by
a comma.
USER=user-name,
User-name is a 1- to 54-character alphanumeric description
of the user storing the data, including his or her name,
location, agency, telephone number, and any other relevant
information. Embedded blanks are permitted, but embedded
commas are not. This field must be followed by a comma.
This information is not stored in the WQF.
Validity check (NDC)
This field should be coded only when storing data sampled
prior to January 1, 1932. The STORET system automatically
checks the dates (and times) specified for when samples were
taken, e.g., field 3 of the SC card. All STORET dates are
to be specified in a yymmdd(ttt) format, and in storage
procedures STORET checks, among other things, that yy is
greater than 31. The yy check guards against storing
inadvertent date transpositions, e.g., erroneously coding
March 30, 1986, as 300386 or 033086 instead of 860330, which
is the correct way to store this date. Thus, if one is
storing data actually sampled in 1931 or earlier, this field
must be coded with the letters NDC, followed by a comma, to
inhibit the date checking process. If date checking is to
be perfomed, do not code this field.
Storage Card (SC Card)
This card is used to code the remaining information to be coded in a 704
storage procedure: the station code, dates, depths, parameters and
parameter values, and other pertinent information. All fields are separated
by commas. As many SC Cards may be coded as there are samples to be
stored. This card follows the agency card, either the AC Card or the A Card.
If more than one data card is required to record all data for a given
sample, additional SC continuation cards can be used. The SC Card may be
coded up to column 80, with remaining data coded on a second card, and as
many other continuation cards as required. Up to approximately 245
parameters and associated values can be specified in one set of SC and SC
continuation cards.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-41
-------
The length and content of the fields on the SC Card can vary, depending upon
storage requirements, the manner in which parameter values were recorded,
and other such variables. The fields of the SC Card must be arranged and
coded in the following sequence:
Field Contents
1 Card Type Code
The letters SC must be coded in columns 1 and 2, followed by
a comma in column 3.
2 Station Code
This field must be coded with the alphanumeric primary or
secondary station code to which the information on the card
pertains. This code must be followed by a comma.
3 Beginning Date and Time
The date on which the sample was taken, or in the case of a
composite sample, the beginning date the sample was
collected. The date must be in this format:
yymmddtttt, where yy is the year, mm the month, dd the
day, and tttt the time in hours and minutes, using the
24-hour clock. Time is optional.
The field must be followed by a comma.
4 Ending Date and Time
This field is coded only for composite data, either
unqualified or qualified, and is in the format yymmddtttt
described above, followed by a comma.
5 Depth
The depth at which the sample was taken is expressed in this
format:
B
D[M][V]xxx, where M, B, V, P, D, and
P C are all optional, but where
D only one value within each
C pair of brackets may be
specified, and where xxx is
the depth.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-42
-------
These are the permissible values for this field:
B - The depth to the bottom of the water
column
V - A vertically integrated sample taken
from the surface to the depth recorded
P - A pore sample, which consists of the
water extracted from a core sample
D - A sediment sample taken at the bottom,
using a sediment sampler such as an
Ekman or a Peterson dredge
C - A core sample taken at bottom, using a
core sampler such as a Phlegar or a
Wilding sampler (
All values specified will be in feet unless the value
includes an M, which indicates that the values are in
meters. There can be no embedded blanks within the field.
Leading zeros of the depth value xxx need not be specified.
This field must be followed by a comma.
Type of Composite Value
This field is used only with qualified composite data, and
is used to indicate the Composite Value Type. One of the
following values must be specified when storing qualified
composite data:
A - an average value
H - a maximum value
L - a minimum value
N - the number ofobservations
the sample
S - a standard deviation
U - a sum of squares
V - a variance
C - coefficient of error
X - a coefficient of variance
E - skewness
F - kurtosis
Z - the number of samples
in the composite that exceeds
established limits
% - precision
$ - accuracy
B - None of the above apply
D - Replicate sample
If coded, this field must be followed by a comma. If D for
a replicate sample is coded, a numerical value must be coded
for field 7 and a B coded in field 8.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-43
-------
Type of Composite
This field is used only with qualified composite data, and
indicates whether the sample was collected over a period of
time or space/ or both. One of the following values must be
specified when storing qualified composite data.
S - space
T - time
B - both space and time
F - flow proportional composite
1-9 - replicate number (see value D in field 6
above.)
If coded, this field must be followed by a comma.
Type of Sampling Method
This field is used only with qualified composite data, and
indicates the type of sampling method used in collecting the
sample. One of the following values must be specified when
storing qualified composite data.
C - the samples were
collected continuously
G - the samples are
individual grab samples, but
the actual number are not
to be reported
GNxx - where xx, two digits, is
the number of individual grab
samples in the collection
B - Blank, when none of the above apply
(used when replicate samples are being coded)
If coded, the field must be followed by a comma. For
qualified composite samples, fields 6, 7, and 8 must all be
coded.
Parameter Code
This field is used to specify the parameter code whose value
is to be stored. The field is coded in the format
Pxxxxx which stores the parameter xxxxx with the
next field (data item) as its value. Leading
zeros need not be coded.
As many pairs of this field and the next field may be coded
as required. A comma must follow each parameter code
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-44
-------
specified. A complete list of parameter codes can be
obtained by following the instructions given in Appendix B.
10 Parameter Value
This field is used to specify the value to be stored for the
parameter code specified in the preceding field. If a
Remark Code is used, it must be the last character in the
value. Remark Codes are defined in Table 4-1.
Parameter values may be designated via either fixed point or
floating point numerical notation. The general format of
the data field is as follows:
.xxxxxxx Espp
where
(1) The designation .xxxxxxx represents a fixed point number
or the mantissa of a floating point number, which may
include from one to seven digits plus a decimal point.
The decimal point may be in any position or be omitted.
When floating point notation is used, the decimal point
is assumed to be immediately to the left of the first
digit or in the position indicated.
(2) The blank constitutes an exponent separator. Its use is
optional.
(3) The designation s indicates the sign of the exponent.
It may be coded plus (+) or minus (-) or left blank. A
plus code will cause the decimal point to move to the
right, a minus code will cause it to move to the left,
and a blank will maintain the indicated position. Use
of the exponent sign (E) is optional. If a code is not
provided, the exponent is assumed to be positive.
4) The designation pp represents the value of the
exponent. Two digits must be coded if floating point
notation is used. This code controls the extent of
movement of the decimal point from the indicated
position.
Correct codes for the numbers 5, 7.5, 0.1, and 98,500 are 5,
7.5, 0.1 or l.OE-01, and 98500 or 9.85E04 or 9.85 E04 or
9.85E+04, respectively.
As many pairs of this field and the preceding field may be
coded as required.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-45
-------
A comma must follow each value specified, including the last
value.
SC Continuation Card
If all of the parameter values cannot be coded on a single SC Card, a
continuation card may be used. One SC Card and its set of one or more
continuation cards may contain up to 500 commas, which means that data for
up to approximately 245 parameters may be entered on one SC Card and its
continuation cards. The last character coded on the SC Card must be a
comma, as a parameter value cannot be split and continued onto a
continuation card. The continuation card has no special fields or codes;
coding of parameter values may begin in column 1, and proceed as above. The
last character coded on a continuation card must be a comma.
Abbreviated SC Card
When coding multiple SC Cards within a single storage run for identical
stations, dates, times, and depths (fields 2 through 5), a '$' may be coded
in their stead, which automatically assumes that the values of these fields
are as specified in the preceding fully coded SC Card.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-46
-------
4.2.4.1 EXAMPLE OP STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE ?04 INPUT PROCEDURE
Store the following 1985 parametric data for station M075, agency EXAMPLE,
using the ?04 storage procedure. The 18 July sample was a bottom sample,
and the 19 July sample was a core sample. All depths are in feet. The
values listed for 20 July were average and high composite sample values,
respectively, and both were space composites made up of individual grab
samples.
DATE
17 July
18 July
19 July
20 July
20 July
TIME
^
2 pm
-
12-4 pm
12-4 pm
DEPTH
100
200
1
100
100
P=620
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.2
4
P=300
10.8
10.8
10.5
10.6
15
P=650
0.01
0.01
0.04
0.02
3
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
?04
AC,A=EXAMPLE,UK=TEST,USER=EXAMPLE OF STORING DATA - ?04,
SC,M075,850717,D100,P620,.2,P300,10.8,P650,.01,
SC,M075,8507181400,DB200,P620,.1,P300,10.8,P650,.OIK,
SC,M075,850719,DC001,P620,.2,P300,10.5,P650,.04,
SC,M075,8507201200,8507201600,D100,A,S,G,P620,.2,P300,10.6,P650,.02,
SC,$,H,S,G,P620,4,P300,15,P650,3,
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
WQ-DE
4-47
SEP 86
-------
4.2.5 Type ?01: FIXFORM INPUT PROCEDURE
Cards Used
? START
A Card
S Card
Parametric Data Card(s) (6 Card)
The type 701 fixform input procedure can be used to store all types of data,
including qualified composite data, i.e., composites with beginning and
ending dates, times, and other sampling conditions specified. (However, the
procedure cannot be used to store samples with an expanded sample key.) It
can also be used to change or delete previously stored data. The procedure
utilizes a fixed-field format, where items must be entered in specific
columns. Therefore, this procedure readily lends itself to data that are to
be entered via cards, such as when converting data from an existing system
by using a conversion program. However, it is cumbersome to use on a
low-speed terminal because it is not free form.
The 6 Card is used to code the values of parameters sampled under varying
sampling methods and conditions, including a simple grab sample, a grab
sample with time identified, an unqualified composite sample with beginning
and ending dates, and a qualified composite sample with dates, times, and
sampling conditions identified. For grab samples and unqualified composite
samples, up to five parameter codes and associated values can be coded on a
single card; for qualified composites, up to four parameter codes and
associated values can be coded on a single card.
Additional 6 Cards are coded, if needed, to accomodate all parameters in a
sample that are to be stored. There is no special 6 continuation card with
a format different from the 6 Card.
The format of the parametric data card is as follows:
Parametric Data Card (6 Card)
Columns Contents
1-3 Sort Number
This field may be used to assign a sequence number to each
of the parametric data cards. Any alphanumeric value may be
specified; leading zeros must be provided. Completing this
field is optional, as the information is not stored in the
WQF.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-48
-------
4-6 Sample Depth
This field is used to store the depth at which the sample
was taken. The system will assume the units specified on
the preceding A card. If sample depth is not be to
recorded/ this field may be left blank.
7-18 Date-Time
This field is used to code the date (year, month, and day)
and, optionally, the time that the samples were taken,
according to the type of sampling method used, as follows:
(1) For grab samples with no time information, this field
must contain a six-digit value: columns 7 and 8 are the
year; columns 9 and 10, the month; and columns 11 and
12, the day of the month. Columns 13-18 are left blank.
(2) For grab samples with time indicated, this field must
contain a 10-digit value: columns 7-12 are the
collection date as defined in (1), and columns 13-16 are
the time, using the 24-hour clock. Columns 17 and 18
are left blank.
(3) For unqualified composite samples with beginning and
ending dates indicated, this field must contain a
12-digit value: columns 7-12 are the beginning year,
month, and day; and columns 13-18 are the ending year,
month, and day.
4) For qualified composite samples with beginning and
ending dates, times, and sampling conditions identified,
this field is extended through column 30, as described
in detail in Table 4-3. In this case, the coding of
parameter codes and values must begin in column 31, as
opposed to column 19, as described below.
19-23, Parameter Code
31-35,
43-47, These fields are used to specify the five-digit codes of
55-59, the parameters being coded. All codes must be numeric
and and leading zeros must be coded. A complete list of the
67-71 parameter codes can be obtained by following the
instructions given in Appendix B.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-49
-------
24-27, Parameter Value
36-39,
48-51, These four-digit fields are used to specify the values
60-63, associated with the parameter codes specified in the
and preceding five fields. The first non-zero digit of the
72-75 parameter value is to be placed in the left-most column of
the field, regardless of the magnitude of the value, and
zeros in the unused columns to the right. (For instance,
values of 0.006, 0.6, and 60 would all be coded as 6000.)
28-29, Exponent
40-41,
52-53, The location of the decimal point in the parameter value
64-65, field is assumed to be just to the left of the first
and significant digit and the exponent field is used to denote
76-77 its proper placement. The numeric values coded in this
field place the decimal point in its proper location, as
follows:
The left column of this field is used to specify the
direction of movement of the decimal point. A 0 (zero)
indicates that the decimal point is either correct in its
assumed position or is moved to the left; a 1 (one)
indicates that the decimal point is moved to the right for
correct placement. •
The right column of this field is used to control the extent
of movement of the decimal point, i.e., the value indicates
the number of positions the decimal is to be moved. Any
numeric code (0-9) is valid. (For instance, the correct
exponent codes for the parameter values of 0.006, 0.6, and
60 are, respectively, 02, 00, and 12.)
30, Remark Code
42,
54, These fields are used to assign a one-character alphabetic
66, Remark Code to further define the parameter values. The
and standard STORET Remark Codes and their corresponding
78 definitions are given in Table 4-1. This field is optional
and may be left blank.
79 Depth Indicator
Code this field with a blank or one of the following
one-digit depth indicator codes:
1 - The depth to the bottom of the water column
2 - A vertically integrated sample taken from the
surface to the depth recorded
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-50
-------
3 - A pore sample, which consists of the water
extracted from a core sample
4 - A sediment sample taken at the bottom, using a
sediment sampler such as an Ekman or a Peterson
dredge
5 - A core sample taken at bottom, using a core sampler
such as a Phlegar or a Wilding sampler
Blank - Regular depth of sample measured from the surface
80 Card Type Code
Code with the number 6.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-51
-------
TABLE 4-3
?01 COMPOSITE SAMPLE CODING
6 CARD, Columns 7-30
Columns Contents
7-12 Ending year, month, and day of the composit sample,
in the format yymmdd
13-16 Ending hour and-minute of the composite sample,
using the 24-hour clock
17 S - Space composite
T - Time composite
B - Samples that are both space and time composites
F - Flow proportional composite
1-9 - Replicate number
18 A - Computed average value of several individual
samples or average value of a continuous record
H - Maximum value of several individual samples or
maximum value of a continuous record
L - Minimum value of several individual samples or
minimum value of a continuous record
S - Standard deviation
U - Sum of squares
V - Variance
C - Coefficient of error
X - Coefficient of variance
N - The number of observations within the sample
E - Skewness
F - Kurtosis
Z - The number of samples in the composite exceeds
established limits
% - Precision
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-52
-------
TABLE 4-3 (continued)
Columns Contents
18 Continued
$ - Accuracy
Blank - None of the above apply
D - Replicate sample
19-23 Beginning date of a composite sample, only five
digits in the format ymmdd: the last digit of the year,
two-digit month, and two-digit day
24 Code with the letter C in all cases; indicates
that the sample is a composite
25-28 Beginning hour and minute of a composite sample,
using the 24-hour clock
29-30 Cb - (Where b is a blank) samples collected continuously
Gb - Composite sample made up of individual grab samples,
when the number of grab samples is not to be reported
NN - Two digits, used to report the number of grab samples
constituting a composite sample
bb - Both columns can be left blank
B - Replicates
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-53
-------
4.2.5.1 EXAMPLE OF STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE FIXFORM INPUT
PROCEDURE (TYPE ?01)
Store the following 1980 parametric data for station M075, agency EXAMPLE,
using the ?01 storage procedure. The samples were taken at a depth of 100
feet. The four samples represent, respectively, a simple grab sample, a
bottom grab with time, a vertically integrated unqualified composite with
dates only, and a qualified composite with dates, times, and sampling
conditions of time (T) and computed average value (A).
DATE
17 Jul
18 Jul
19 Jul
21 Jul
TIME
^
1430
-
1100
DATE TIME
— —
-
20 Jul
22 Jul 1200
P-620
.2
.1
.2
.2
P=300
10.8
10.8
10.5
10.6
P=650
.01
.01
.04
.02
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
TEST EXAMPLE OF STORING DATA - 701
EXAMPLE
M075
100800717 00620200000 00300108012 00650100001
1008007181430 00620100000 00300108012 00650100001K
10080071980072000620200000 00300105012 00650400001
1008007221200TA00721C1100 00620200000 00300106012 00650200001
A
S
6
16
26
6
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
HQ-DE
4-54
SEP 86
-------
4.3
CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETRIC DATA
It may be necessary to modify or change one or more items of parametric data
that was stored previously, such as to correct a coding error that resulted
in the storing of an erroneous value, or to add or change a remark code
associated with a value previously stored. This subsection defines the ways
that parametric data can be changed, and which parametric data cards and
fields are required to effect the changes.
The ?00, ?01f and ?04 storage procedures are the only ones that can be used
to change previously stored parametric data. The ?02 and ?03 procedures
cannot.
To change a value or a group of values for a sample, the sample key must be
specified exactly as it was when the data were originally stored. The
sample key is composed of the date, time, and optionally the depth, medium,
SMK, UMK, and other composite qualifiers, depending upon the sample.
Following the description of each of the methods available to change
previously stored parametric data is an example illustrating the coding
needed to make changes according to the procedure described. In these
examples, the data to be changed were already stored for parameters 10, 310,
and 400 sampled in 1980 for the stations of the EXAMPLE agency, as follows-
STATION
070001
070002
070003
DATE
15 Jul
1 Jun
2-3 Aug
TIME P=10 P=310
0.3
1400 - 0.2
20
P=400
6.5
-
WQ-DE
4-55
SEP 86
-------
4.3.1
CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETERIC DATA USING THE ?00 PROCEDURE
This procedure can be used to change previously stored data associated with
any type of sample, including samples having an expanded sample key. Refer
to subsections 4.1.6 and 4.2.1 for a detailed description of the fields of
the various cards that can be used in a 700 storage procedure.
Required Cards
7START
?00
AC or A Card
SC Card(s) and/or PN and DC Cards
PNOFF Card(s) if necesary
Columns
1-8
17-24
25-60
61
62
78-79
80
Fields Used - A Card
Field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
date check
depth unit
control code
card type code
Remarks
required
required
optional but desired
code a B to inhibit date
checking, otherwise
leave blank
required for metric depth
must be blank
must be an A
Fields Used - AC Card
Field Number
1
2
3
4
5
Field Name
card type code
agency code
unlocking key
user name
validity check
Remarks
AC followed by a comma
required
required
optional, but desired field
code NDC to inhibit date
checking, otherwise leave
blank
Fields Used - SC Card
Field Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
Field Name
card type code
station code
beginning date
ending date
media code
depth or SMK code
Remarks
SC followed by a comma
required
required
required if originally
stored for composite data
required if originally stored
required if originally
stored
WQ-DE
4-56
SEP 86
-------
7
8
9
10
11
composite value type
or UMK
type of composite
sample type
parameter code
parameter value
required if originally
stored
required only if originally
stored for composite data
required only if originally
stored for composite data
required; format PCxxxxx,
where xxxxx denotes the
parameter code whose value
is to be changed, followed by
a comma.
required; new value for the
parameter code specified in
the preceding field. If
changing a Remark Code,
it must be the last
character in the value.
Fields Used - PN Card
Field Number
1
2
Field Name
card type code
parameter code
Remarks
PN followed by a comma
required; include all
parameter codes whose values
are to be changed; a comma
is to follow each code.
Fields Used - DC Card
Field Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Field Name
card type code
station code
beginning date
ending date
media code
depth or SMK code
composite value type
or UMK
type of composite
sample type
parameter value
Remarks
DC followed by a comma
required
required
required if originally
stored for composite data
required if originally stored
required if originally
stored
required if originally
stored
required only if originally
stored for composite data
required only if originally
stored for composite data
required; format PCvalue,
where value denotes the new
value to be stored for the
corresponding parameter code
on the PN Card. If changing
a Remark Code, it must be the
last character in the value.
WQ-DE
4-57
SEP 86
-------
4.3.1.1 EXAMPLE OF CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE ?00
PROCEDURE
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
?00
AC,A=EXAMPLE,UK=TEST,USER=EXAMPLE OF CHANGING DATA,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7803151400,PC300,10.7,PC10,14.5,PC400,7.9,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7804081500,D10,PC505,130,PC400,8.1,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7901010000,7901312400,03,A,T,G,PC300,15.6,
PC10,8.3,PC400,7.2,
SC,SEMINAR01A,790314,MED=RCRAGW,SMK=311200,UMK=11136203,PC1029,2.8,
PC1140,4.7,PC400,5.4,
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
?00
AC,A=EXAMPLE,UK=TEST,USER=EXAMPLE OF CHANGING DATA,
PN,300,10,400,505,
DC,SEMINAR01A,7803151400,PC10.7,PC14.5,PC7.9,,
DC,SEMINAR01A,7804081500,DID,,,PCS.1,PC130,
DC,SEMINAR01A,7901010000,7901312400,03,A,T,G,PC15.6,,,,
DC,SEMINAR01A,821213,MED=RCRAGW,SMK=311000,UMK=11124301,PC11.2,
PC5.1,PC8.2,PC38,
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-58
-------
4.3.2 CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE ?04 VARIABLE
INPUT PROCEDURE
This procedure may be used to change any type of water-related sample except
samples having an expanded sample key (i.e., medium, SMK, and UMK). Refer
to subsections 4.1.6 and 4.2.4 for a detailed description of the fields of
the A, AC, and SC Cards.
Required Cards
?START
?04
A or AC Card
SC Card
Fields Used - A Card
Columns Field
1-8 agency code
17-24 unlocking key
25-60 user's name
61 date check
62 depth unit
78-79 control code
80 card type code
Remarks
required
required
optional but desired
code a B to inhibit date
checking, otherwise
leave blank
required
must be blank
must be an A
Fields Used - AC Card
Field Number
1
2
3
4
5
Field Name
card type code
agency code
unlocking key
user name
validity check
Remarks
AC followed by a comma
required
required
optional, but desired field
code NDC to inhibit date
checking, otherwise leave
blank
Fields Used - SC Card
Field Number
1
2
3
4
Field Name
card type code
station code
beginning date
ending date
depth
Remarks
SC followed by a comma
required
required
required if originally
stored for composite data
required if originally
stored
WQ-DE
4-59
SEP 86
-------
6 composite value type required if originally
stored for composite data
7 space/time required only if originally
stored for composite data
8 sample type required only if originally
stored for composite data
9 parameter code required; format PCxxxxx,
where C indicates a change in
parameter code xxxxx
(leading zeros need not be
coded). Code as many pairs
of this field and the next
field as required.
10 parameter value required; new value for the
parameter code specified in
the preceding field. If
changing a Remark Code,
it must be the last
character in the value.
4.3.2.1 EXAMPLE OF CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETRIC DATA USING
THE ?04 PROCEDURE
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
704
AC,A=EXAMPLE,UK=TEST,USER=EXAMPLE OF CHANGING DATA - 704,
SC,070001,800715,PC310,.3,PC400,6.5,
SC,070002,8006011400,PC310,.2,
30,070003,800802,800803,PC10,20,
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
WQ-DB SEP 86
4-60
-------
4.3.3 CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE ?01 (FIXFORM)
PROCEDURE
This procedure can be used to change data associated with any type of
sample, except samples having an expanded sample key (i.e., medium, SMK, and
UMK). Refer to subsections 4.1.6 and 3.2 for a detailed description of the
fields of the A and S Cards.
Required Cards
7START
A Card
S Card
6 Card
Fields Used - A Card
Columns Field
1-8 agency code
17-24 unlocking key
25-60 user's name
61 date check
62 depth unit
78-79 control code
80 card type code
Fields Used - S Card
Remarks
required
required
optional, but desired field
optional; code a B to
inhibit date checking,
otherwise leave blank
required for metric depth
must be blank
must be an A
Columns
1-3
4-18
80
Field
sort number
station code
card type code
Fields Used - 6 Card
Remarks
optional
either a primary or
secondary station code
is required
must be an S
Columns
1-3
4-6
7-18
19-23
Field
sort number
sample depth
date time
parameter code
Remarks
optional
required if depth
originally stored
required if originally
stored
code the parameter whose
value is to be changed;
for
qualified composites, see
note below.
WQ-DE
4-61
SEP 86
-------
24-27 parameter value
28-29 exponent
30
31-78
79
remark code
parameter information
card type code
80
card type code
code the new value to be
stored with parameter code
above
code the appropriate
exponent information
for parameter value above,
as described for the 6 Card
code the new remark, if
applicable
repeat, as required for
additional parameters and
values, as described above
for columns 19-30
code a C, to indicate
that data for all
parameters coded (and also
for all parameters coded
on continuation cards)
will be stored in place
of existing data
For changing parametric data
for a sample with depth
other than regular depth
(e.g., core, pore, or
dredge), code the
appropriate depth
indicator code in column
79, and code a C instead
of a 6 in column 80.
must be a 6, except code a C
if changing a sample with a
qualified depth
NOTE:
When changing data associated with qualified composite
samples, columns 7-30 must contain the appropriate sample key
as described in Table 4-3, and the coding of parameter codes
and values whose data are to be changed must begin in column
31.
WQ-DE
4-62
SEP 86
-------
4.3.3.1 EXAMPLE OF CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETRIC DATA USING
THE ?01 (FIXFORM) PROCEDURE
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
EXAMPLE TEST EXAMPLE OF CHANGING DATA - ?01 A
070001 S
800715 00310300000 00400650011 C6
070002 S
8006011400 00310200000 C6
070003 S
80080280080300010200012 C6
SEMINAR01A S
7803151400 00300107012 00010145012 00400790011 C6
0107804081500 00505130013 00400810011 C6
0037901312400TA90101COOOOG 00300156012 00010830011 00400720011 C6
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
The last 6 Card in the example above shows changing values for three
parameters for a qualified time composite of grab samples taken at a depth
of 3 feet taken during January 1979.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-63
-------
4.4
DELETING PARAMETRIC DATA ALREADY STORED
The STORET system allows users to delete parametric data that have been
previously stored. All parametric data for a station may be deleted, or
selected samples or selected parameters within a sample may be deleted. The
chart below depicts which procedures can be used to perform the indicated
delete function. (See the end of Section 3 for information on deleting
station location information.)
Delete Function
both station and all data
all data for a station
entire sample
selected sample values
Procedure
?00 ?01 ?04
X
X
XXX
XXX
Described
Below in
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
To delete parametric data from the WQF, the sample key must be specified
exactly as it was when the data were originally stored. The sample key is
composed of the date, time, and optionally the depth, medium, SMK, UMK, and
other composite qualifiers, depending upon the sample.
Following the description of each of the ways available to delete previously
stored parametric and/or station data is an example illustrating the coding
needed to effect the deletions according to the procedure described.
4.4.1
DELETING BOTH STATION LOCATION AND PARAMETRIC DATA
This subsection describes how to delete both parametric data and the station
behind which they were stored. Please make sure when performing this
operation that the correct station codes are specified. The procedure
works; the station is totally removed from the WQF and there is no way to
recover it or the data.
An A Card and an S Card, with control code DS specified, are the only cards
needed to delete all station location data and parametric data stored for a
specific primary station code. Refer to subsections 3.2 and 4.1.6 for a
detailed description of the A Card and S Card fields.
WQ-DE
4-64
SEP 86
-------
Required Cards
7START
A Card
S Card
Columns
1-8
17-24
25-60
78-79
80
Columns
4-18
78-79
80
Fields Used - A Card
Field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
control code
card type code
Fields Used - S Card
Field
primary station code
control code
card type code
Remarks
required
required
optional, but desired
must be blank
must be an A
Remarks
station to be deleted
must be DS (delete station)
must be an S
4.4.1.1 EXAMPLE OF DELETING BOTH STATION LOCATION AND PARAMETRIC DATA
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
EXAMPLE
070001
TEST EXAMPLE OF DELETING ENTIRE STATION
A
DSS
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
4.4.2 DELETING ALL PARAMETRIC DATA PREVIOUSLY STORED WITH A STATION
An A Card and an S Card, with control code DD specified, are the only cards
needed to delete all parametric data previously stored with a station.
Refer to sections 3.2 and 4.1.6 for a detailed description of the A Card and
S Card fields.
Please be careful when using this parametric data deletion procedure: It
works. All data stored behind the specified stations are totally removed
from the system, and there is no way to recover the data.
WQ-DE
4-65
SEP 86
-------
Required Cards
7START
A Card
S Card
Columns
1-8
17-24
25-60
78-79
80
Columns
4-18
78-79
80
Fields Used - A Card
Field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
control code
card type code
Fields Used - S Card
Field
primary station code
control code
card type code
Remarks
required
required
optional, but desired
must be blank
must be an A
Remarks
required
must be DD (delete data)
must be an S
Users are cautioned that when storing replacement data for data deleted in
the same run, the station reference number must be the same, i.e., a
station's data may not be deleted using the primary station code and
re-stored using a secondary station code.
4.4.2.1 EXAMPLE OF DELETING ALL PARAMETRIC DATA PREVIOUSLY STORED WITH A
STATION
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
TEST EXAMPLE DELETING ALL PARAMETRIC DATA
EXAMPLE
070001
A
DDS
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
WQ-DE
4-66
SEP 86
-------
4.4.3
DELETING ENTIRE SAMPLES
Either the ?00, ?04, or ?01 procedure may be used to delete an entire
sample, i.e., all values stored for a specific sample key. This sample key
must be entered exactly as it was when the data were stored. The SC, DC, or
6 Cards specify the delete action to be taken, depending upon the storage
procedure used, as follows.
On an SC Card (for either ?00 or ?04), the sample key is entered followed by
a comma, followed by the characters "DEL" and a comma. No other entries can
appear on the card. To delete a sample using the DC Card (for 700), a PN
Card must be coded with at least one parameter code, followed by a DC Card
with the appropriate sample key and the characters "DEL" and a comma. To
delete a whole sample using the 6 Card (for ?01), the sample key is entered
followed by the characters "DEL" in the first parameter code field, columns
19 through 21, or in columns 31-33 for qualified composite samples. No
other entries can appear on the card.
The detailed coding requirements and examples for these cards follow.
4.4.3.1 DELETING ENTIRE SAMPLES USING THE ?00 PROCEDURE
Entire samples can be deleted from a station using the ?00 procedure as
described below. This procedure can be used to delete previously stored
data associated with any type of sample/ including samples having an
expanded sample key. Refer to subsections 4.1.6 and 4.2.1 for a detailed
description of the fields of the various cards that can be used in a ?00
storage procedure.
Required Cards
?START
?00
AC or A Card
SC Card(s) and/or PN and DC Cards
PNOPP Card(s) if necesary
Fields Used - A Card
Columns Field
1-8 agency code
17-24 unlocking key
25-60 user's name
61 date check
62 depth unit
78-79 control code
80 card type code
Remarks
required
required
optional but desired
code a B to inhibit date
checking, otherwise
leave blank
required for metric depth
must be blank
must be an A
WQ-DE
4-67
SEP 86
-------
Fields Used - AC Card
Field Number
1
2
3
4
5
Field Name
card type code
agency code
unlocking key
user name
validity check
Remarks
AC followed by a comma
required
required
optional, but desired field
code NDC to inhibit date
checking, otherwise leave
blank
Fields Used - SC Card
Field Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Field Number
1
2
Field Name
card type code
station code
beginning date
ending date
media code
depth or SMK code
composite value type
or UHK
type of composite
sample type
delete code
Remarks
SC followed by a comma
required
required
required if originally
stored for composite data
required if originally stored
required if originally
stored
required if originally
stored
required only if originally
stored for composite data
required only if originally
stored for composite data
code DEL followed by a comma
Fields Used - PN Card
Field Name
card type code
parameter code
Remarks
PN followed by a comma
at least one parameter
code must be specified; a
comma is to follow each
code.
Fields Used - DC Card
Field Number
1
2
3
4
Field Name
card type code
station code
beginning date
ending date
media code
Remarks
DC followed by a comma
required
required
required if originally
stored for composite data
required if originally stored
WQ-DE
4-68
SEP 86
-------
6 depth or SMK code required if originally
stored
7 composite value type required if originally
or UMK stored
8 type of composite required only if originally
stored for composite data
9 sample type required only if originally
stored for composite data
10 delete code code DEL followed by a comma
4.4.3.2 EXAMPLE OF DELETING ENTIRE SAMPLES USING THE ?00 PROCEDURE
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
700
AC,A=EXAMPLE,UK=TEST,USER=EXAMPLE OF DELETING DATA,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7804151300,DEL,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7804161300,010,DEL,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7903151000,7904151000,D3,A,T,C,DEL,
SC,SEMINAR01A,810415,MED=RCRAGW,SMK=511100,UMK=11126205,DEL,
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
700
AC,A=EXAMPLE,UK=TEST,USER=EXAMPLE OF DELETING DATA,
PN,10,
DC,SEMINAR01A,7804151300,DEL,
DC,SEMINAR01A,7804161300,010,DEL,
DC,SEMINAR01A,7903151000,7904151000,D3,A,T,C,DEL,
DC,SEMINAR01A,800712,MED=RCRAGW,SMK=411000,UMK=13124108,DEL,
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-69
-------
4.4.3.3 DELETING ENTIRE SAMPLES USING THE ?04 PROCEDURE
Entire samples can be deleted from a station using the ?04 procedure as
described below. Refer to subsection 4.2.1 for a description of the AC Card
and SC Card fields.
Required Cards
?START
?04
AC or A Card
SC Card
Columns
1-8
17-24
25-60
61
62
78-79
80
Fields Used - A Card
Field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
date check
depth unit
control code
card type code
Fields Used - AC Card
Remarks
required
required
optional, but desired
code a B to bypass
required for metric depth
must be blank
must be an A
Field Number Field Name
1
2
3
4
5
card type code
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
validity check
Remarks
AC followed by a comma
required
required
optional, but desired
code NDC to inhibit date
checking, otherwise leave
blank
Fields Used - SC Card
Field Number Field Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
card type code
station code
beginning date
ending date
depth
composite value type
space/time
Remarks
SC followed by a comma
required
required
required only for composite
data
required if originally
stored
required only for
composite data
required only for composite
data
WQ-DE
4-70
SEP 86
-------
8 sample type required only for composite
data
9 delete code code DEL followed by a comma
4.4.3.4 EXAMPLE OF DELETING ENTIRE SAMPLES USING THE ?04 PROCEDURE
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
?04
AC,A=EXAMPLE,UK=TEST,USER=EXAMPLE OF DELETING A SAMPLE,
SC,070001,780715,DEL,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7804151300,DEL,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7804161300,DID, DEL,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7903151000,7904151000,03,A,T,C,DEL,
SC,SEMINAR01A,810415,MED=RCRAGW,SMK=511100,UMK=11126205/DEL,
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
4.4.3.5 DELETING ENTIRE SAMPLES USING THE ?01 PROCEDURE
Entire samples can be deleted from a station using the ?01 procedure as
described below. Refer to subsection 3.1 in Section 3 for a description of
the A Card and S Card.
Required Cards
7START
A Card
S Card
6 Card
Fields Used - A Card
Columns Field Remarks
1-8 agency code required
17-24 unlocking key required
25-60 user's name optional, but desired
61 date check code a B to bypass
62 depth unit required for metric depth
78-79 control code must be blank
80 card type code must be an A
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-71
-------
Fields Used - S Card
Columns
4-18
80
Columns
1-3
4-6
7-18
19-21
or
31-33
80
Field
station code
card type code
Fields Used - 6 Card
Field
sort no.
sample depth
date/time
delete code
Remarks
either a primary or
secondary station code
is required
must be an S
card type code
Remarks
optional field
required if originally
stored
required; code sample
key as initially stored
for qualified composite
samplesf code DEL in
columns 31-33; for all
other samples, code DEL
in columns 19-21
must be a 6
4.4.3.6 EXAMPLE OF DELETING ENTIRE SAMPLES USING THE ?01 PROCEDURE
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
701
EXAMPLE TEST
070001
800715 DEL
7804151300 DEL
0107804161300 DEL
0037901312400TA90101COOOOG DEL
EXAMPLE OF DELETING A SAMPLE
A
S
6
6
6
6
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
WQ-DE
4-72
SEP 86
-------
4.4.4 DELETING ONE OR MORE VALUES
Either the 700, 704, or ?01 procedure may be used to delete selected sample
values that have been previously stored in the WQF. As with deleting any
parametric data, the sample key must be entered exactly as it was when the
data were stored. The SC, DC, or 6 Cards specify the delete action to be
taken, depending upon the storage procedure, as follows.
On an SC Card (for either ?00 or ?04), the sample key is entered, followed
by a comma, followed by one or more PDxxxxx, entries where xxxxx denotes the
parameter codes whose values are to be deleted for the indicated sample
key. Each PDxxxxx entry is followed by a comma.
When using DC Cards (for 700), a PN Card containing all of the parameter
codes whose values are to be deleted must be coded first. This card is
followed by one or more DC Cards coded with the proper sample keys, and with
the code "PD" entered for each of the paraemters on the PN Card whose value
is to be deleted, ensuring that the sequence of the parameters on the PN
Card is maintained. Each PD entry, including the last PD, must be followed
by a comma.
When utilizing the ?01 procedure to delete a previously stored data value,
the sample key is coded on the 6 Card, followed by the parameter codes to be
deleted, and the letter D coded in the first (left-most) position of the
value field.
The detailed coding requirements and examples for these deletion requests
follow.
4.4.4.1 DELETING SELECTED PARAMETER VALUES USING THE ?00 PROCEDURE
Entire samples can be deleted from a station using the 700 procedure as
described below. Refer to subsection 4.2.1 for a detailed description of
the fields of the various cards that can be used in a 700 storage
procedure. This procedure can be used to delete previously stored data
associated with any type of sample, including samples having an expanded
sample key.
Required Cards
7START
700
AC or A Card
SC Card(s) and/or PN and DC Cards
PNOFF Card(s) if necesary
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-73
-------
Fields Used - A Card
Columns
1-8
17-24
25-60
61
62
78-79
80
1
2
3
4
5
Field Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
date check
depth unit
control code
card type code
Remarks
required
required
optional but desired
code a B to inhibit date
checking, otherwise
leave blank
required for metric depth
must be blank
must be an A
Fields Used - AC Card
.Field Number Field Name
card type code
agency code
unlocking key
user name
validity check
Remarks
AC followed by a comma
required
required
optional, but desired field
code NDC to inhibit date
checking, otherwise leave
blank
Fields Used - SC Card
Field Name
card type code
station code
beginning date
ending date
media code
depth or SMK code
composite value type
or UMK
type of composite
sample type
parameter code
Remarks
SC followed by a comma
required
required
required if originally
stored for composite data
required if originally stored
required if originally
stored
required if originally
stored
required only if originally
stored for composite data
required only if originally
stored for composite data
required; format PDxxxxx, where
xxxxx denotes the parameter
code whose value is to be
deleted.
WQ-DB
4-74
SEP 86
-------
Fields Used - PN Card
Field Number
1
2
Field Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Field Name
card type code
parameter code
Remarks
PN followed by a comma
required; include all
parameter codes whose values
are to be changed; a comma
is to follow each code.
Fields Used - DC Card
Field Name
card type code
station code
beginning date
ending date
media code
depth or SMK code
composite value type
or UMK
type of composite
sample type
delete code
Remarks
DC followed by a comma
required
required
required if originally
stored for composite data
required if originally stored
required if originally
stored
required if originally
stored
required only if originally
stored for composite data
required only if originally
stored for composite data
code PD followed by a comma
for each value to be deleted,
ensuring that the sequence
of PD codes corresponds to
the sequence of the parameter
codes on the PN Card.
WQ-DE
4-75
SEP 86
-------
4.4.4.2 EXAMPLE OF DELETING SELECTED PARAMETER VALUES USING THE 700
PROCEDURE
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
?00
ACfA=EXAMPLE,UK=TEST,USER=EXAMPLE OF DELETING DATA,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7804151300,PD400,PD10,PD600,PD300,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7804161300,D10,PD400,PD300,PD31501,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7903151000,7904151000,03,A,T,C,PD10,PD400,PD300,PD31616,
SC,SEMINAR01A,820315,MED=RCRAGW,SMK=311100,UMK=13124503,PD1029,
PD1140,PD1002,PD31501,
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
7START
?00
ACrA=EXAMPLEfUK=TEST,USER=EXAMPLE OF DELETING DATA,
PN,400,10,600,300,31501,31616,
DC,SEMINAR01A,7804151300,PD,PD,PD,PD,,,
DC,SEMINAR01A,7804161300,D10,PD,PD,PD,PD,,,
DC,SEMINAR01A,7903151000,7904151000,D3,A,T,C,PD,PD,,PD,fPD,
DC,SEMINAR01A,810403,MED=RCRAGW,SMK=411100,UMK=21320217,PD,PD,,PD,PD,PD,
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
WQ-DE SEP 86
4-76
-------
4.4.4.3 DELETING SELECTED PARAMETER VALUES USING THE ?04 PROCEDURE
Parameter values can be deleted from a station on a selected basis using the
?04 procedure. Refer to Subsection 4.2.4 for a description of the AC Card
and the SC Card.
Required Cards
7START
?04
A or AC Card
SC Card
Columns
1-8
17-24
25-60
61
62
78-79
80
Field Number
1
2
3
4
5
Field Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fields Used - A Card
Field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
date check
depth unit
control code
card type code
Fields Used - AC Card
Field Name
card type code
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
date check
Fields Used - SC Card
Field Name
card type code
station code
beginning date
ending date
depth
composite value type
space/time
sample type
Remarks
required
required
optional, but desired
code a B to bypass
required for metric depths
must be blank
must be an A
Remarks
AC followed by a comma
required
required
optional, but desired
NDC to bypass date check
Remarks
SC followed by a comma
required
required
required only for
composite data
required if originally
stored
required only for
composite data
required only for
composite data
required only for
composite data
WQ-DE
4-77
SEP 86
-------
parameter code
required; PDxxxxx format
deletes the parameter
value associated with
parameter xxxxx for the
specified station-time-
date-depth combination
(leading zeros need not
be specified)
4.4.4.4 EXAMPLE OF DELETING SELECTED PARAMETER VALUES USING THE ?04
PROCEDURE
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
PSTART
?04
AC,A=EXAMPLE,UK=TEST,USER=EXAMPLE OF DELETING DATA,
SC,070001,800715,PD310,PD400,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7804151300,PD400,PD10,PD600,PD300,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7804161300,D10,PD400,PD300,PD31501,
SC,SEMINAR01A,7903151000,7904151000,03,A,T,C,PD10,PD400,PD300,PD31616,
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
4.4.4.5 DELETING SELECTED PARAMETER VALUES USING THE ?01 PROCEDURE
Parameter values can also be deleted from a station on a selected basis by
using the ?01 procedure. Refer to subsection 3.1 in Section 3 and to
subsection 4.2.5 for complete descriptions of the A, Sf and 6 Cards.
To delete an individual parameter for a given sample, the parametric data
card is coded as if data were being stored, except that a D (for delete) is
coded in the left-hand column of the value field that corresponds to the
parameter to be deleted. Numerical values in other fields of the same card
are treated as valid data and stored. Replacement values for the deleted
parameter may be coded on the same 6 Card or subsequent 6 Cards. The cards
and fields that are to be coded are described below.
Required Cards
?START
701
A Card
S Card
Parametric Data Card (6 card)
WQ-DE
4-78
SEP 86
-------
Fields Used - A Card
Columns
1-8
17-24
25-60
61
62
78-79
80
Columns
4-18
80
Columns
4-6
7-18
19-23
24-27
31-35,
43-47,
55-59,
and
67-71
36-39,
48-51,
60-63,
and
72-75
80
Field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
date check
depth unit
control code
card type code
Fields Used - S Card
Field
station code
Remarks
required
required
optional, but desired
code a B to bypass
required for metric depth
must be blank
must be an A
card type code
Fields Used - 6 Card
Field
sample depth
date-time
parameter code
parameter value
parameter code
parameter value
card type code
Remarks
either a primary or
secondary station code
is required
must be an S
Remarks
required if originally
stored
required; both beginning
and ending dates if
deleting composite samples
code the five-digit
parameter whose value
is to be deleted; for
qualified composites, see
note below
code a D in the left-most
position of the field to
delete the preceding
parameter code
repeat as required, as
described above for
columns 19-23
repeat as required, as
described above
for columns 24-27
must be a 6
WQ-DE
4-79
SEP 86
-------
NOTE: When deleting data associated with qualified composite samples,
columns 7-30 must contain the appropriate sample key as described
in Table 4-3, and the coding of parameter codes whose data are to
be deleted must begin in column 31.
4.4.4.6 EXAMPLE OF DELETING SELECTED PARAMETER VALUES USING THE ?01
PROCEDURE
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789
7START
EXAMPLE TEST EXAMPLE OF DELETING VALUES A
070001 S
800715 00310D 00400D 6
7804151300 00300D 00010D 00400D 6
0107804161300 00505D 00400D 6
0037901312400TA90101COOOOG 00300D 00010D 00400D 6
123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.123456789.
WQ-DB SEP 86
4-80
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
APPENDIX
1
INDEX OF AVAILABLE HELP FILES
WQ-DE SEP 1986
-------
APPENDICES
-------
APPENDIX 1: INDEX OF AVAILABLE HELP FILES
A number of helpful data sets are maintained on the system by STORET User
Assistance. These data sets are available on-line and can be listed at any
time by simply entering the appropriate commands from a low-speed keyboard
type terminal. They also may be printed at an RJE terminal.
The STORET help data set named STORET.HELP.INDEX provides a listing of the
names of all currently available STORET help data sets. This data set also
gives the date each data set was added or last changed. STORET users should
occasionally list this data set, and scan the date column for any help data
sets added or changed since they last reviewed the index. (A listing of the
help data set names can be obtained at a keyboard terminal by issuing the
TSO command LISTC LEVEL('STORET.HELP1).)
The STORET help data set named STORET.HELP.PRNTHELP contains the job control
language necessary to produce a listing of the names of STORET help data
sets at a user's RJE terminal.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
Al-1
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
HATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
APPENDIX
2
RECORD LAYOUTS
STATION LOCATION DATA STORAGE CARDS
WQ-DE SEP 1986
-------
STORET WATER QUAUTY R1E-STATION LOCATION STORAGE
AMNCT CMO (A CAIO)
ACiNCr COM
ILrfi JtatKri
n
9-11
UNLOCK
AF1II
lllujr.l
II - II
UNLOCKING «Y
iLtfl Jellify!
IIIIIMI n
INDIVIOUM STORING MIA NAME LOCAIION AGENCY TELEPHONE
tOpmmal Cufnmniu-iulf MH kr uorrdl
LOCK
APTE»
VII MO
CON
not
COM
I ITTTTT
III I
STATION TYK CAIO (I CAM)
* SUING OF VMIO COMBINATIONS Of STATION IVK COWS SEPARATED IT SIASHIS
1111111 1111111111111111 n 1111111111 r
STATION CAID |S CAIO)
son
NO
P>IMARV STATION EODI
ILtfl Juadjt
IIHIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII Illlllllllllllllllll
STATION ALIASES
III SECONDARY SIAIION COM
<3t SICONOAIV SIAIION COM
ILeflJu,llfyl
Ot SECONMIV SIAIION
tOOHLrJi Jialftl
fMuiiJ
CON
TKX
in
umunc/UMonuDf CAID (HUMI CAW A
MWI
NO
n
lONGIIUM
iZrm Filll
IB'Mll
18/oni)
MIIMIIIIIIHIIIMMIIIIIIIIII Ill Hill mill I
Ml CAID (HIAOfI CAID 1)
son
HO
n
TE»M
STIEAM
NO
mum
IEVII > IHMX
LEVU 1
INOIX
1EVEI 3
HUES
IEVII 4
INMX
a - 4s
IEVCI S
INMX
IBVEl S
WHS
ItVil 6
INMX
M - 43
HVil 7
•INMX
IASI
IEVBI
USED
m
niiiMiiMin
IMI CAID (HIADCI CAID 1)
son
NO
IB/mill
n
HI
IEIM
SIHAM
NO
II - 13
UVEI •
MllfS
14 - 31
IEVII •
INMX
UVII 10
INMX
IIVII 10
MIIIS
IEVEI II
INMX
IIVII 1}
MIUS
fMwll
lllllllllllllTTIIIIlll.il
iiiHiiiiiini
MAJOI/MINOI BASIN CAID (HIAOfI CAW 1)
son
NO
SIAIION LOCATION MAK» BASIN NAME
SIAIION LOCATION MINOt BASIN NAME
10 71 I 72 71
in mil mrm
TTTTT
lOCATION MSCIIPTION CAW (HIA
son
NO
LOCAIION OF HIE lANBMABK NAMES ETC
RIACH CODING
REACH NUMBER
OH
orr
•S
MII.CI ON REACH
£•
IBItnkl
n
nn
EPA Fonn 7500-24 IRw 8-831 Previoui adition n obtoliu
PAGE I OF 2
-------
son NO
t - 3
MSCMPWE PARAGRAPH CMOS (HIAKR CARD 5)
MSCRIPI10N 17-711
n
TTTTmrr
n
TTnTT
11 mr
n
I 5
n
mi
n
25
HIIMIIII
sonSo
n
mil
3 5
II
IIIMII
tt
TTTTTT
Illllll
4 5
son
i - »
n
I
m
II i n
TTTTT
NO
i - »
I I IliimTTT
n
sonSo
n
nrr
65
I Slant!
IIIIUIIIIIIITTTT
n
TTTTTT
75
UNI HIM
MM Illlllllllllll
85
n
i
i HI r
95
null i HIT
nn
TTTTT
J|5
son NO
I - )
Illllllllll II I IIIIITTTT
K IS
1111 I I I M ITTTT
15
111111111 i i 111111111 iTrrn
iatiNo
MS
n
UN
IIIIIIIIIMIinTT
N 5
EPA Form TBOO-M (ROT. MM Pnwoui idition is obiotau
PAGE J Of 2
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
APPENDIX
3
DATA ENTRY
ERROR MESSAGES
WQ-DE SEP 1986
-------
APPENDIX 3: DATA ENTRY ERROR MESSAGES
This appendix describes the error messages that are generated as a result of
an inaccurate or improper attempt to store/ change, or delete station and/or
parametric data within the WQF. The descriptions are presented in error
message number sequence, and give the format of the message itself, followed
by a brief explanation of the error message, and where possible, a suggested
corrective action to be taken. (A few of these messages, such as numbers 00
and 41, are informational in content and do not depict an error condition.)
DATA ENTRY ERROR MESSAGES
00 DIAGNOSTIC COMMENT
This message is automatically printed each time an A or AC agency
card in encountered, indicating the beginning of a set of storage
transaction cards. No action is required by the user.
01 INVALID TYPE OF STATION
A required station type (T) card is missing from the deck being used
to store a new station. Include this card in your storage deck and
resubmit. The STORET help data set named STORET.HELP. STATION.TYPE
provides a complete listing of the acceptable station types and
their codes.
02 UNLOCKING CODE IS BLANK
The unlocking key field (columns 17-24) of the agency (A) card was
found to be blank. This code must be provided for all storage
operations. Enter the proper unlocking key, left-justified, and
resubmit the storage cards.
03 AGENCY CODE IS BLANK
The agency code field (columns 1-8) of the agency (A) card was found
to be blank. This code must be provided for all storage
operations. Enter the proper agency code, left-justified, and
resubmit the storage cards.
04 DATE CODE INVALID
The lock-after field (columns 74-77) of the agency (A) card was
checked for a numeric value, and one or more blanks and/or
alphabetic characters were found. This field must be completed on
all new station storage operations, even if a lock-after date is not
desired. Correct the improperly-completed field (keying 9999 if no
lock-after date is desired) and resubmit the storage cards.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-1
-------
05
INVALID CONTROL CODE
A value other than CD, CT (A card) or NS, DD, DS, ex (S card) or a
blank value (either A or S card) was found in the control code field
(columns 78-79) of either the agency (A) or station (S) card. One
of the above values must be specified. Correct the control code
field and resubmit the storage cards.
06 ILLEGAL CARD FOR CT OR CD AGENCY CARD
One or more invalid types of storage cards were detected after the
agency (A) card. Only a station type (T) card and a station (S)
card are valid after an agency card having a CD or CT coded in the
control code field, columns 78-79. Check for proper deck set-up or
for mis-coded card type codes (in column 80), correct, and resubmit
the storage cards.
07 CARD TYPE ORDER OR INVALID CARD TYPE
One or more cards in the storage deck are out of order and/or have
Improper codes in the card code field, column 80. Check for proper
deck set-up or for miscoded card type codes and resubmit the
corrected storage deck.
08 LAT/LONG ERROR
The latitude and longitude fields (columns 7-21) of the
latitude/longitude (0) card either contain one or more embedded
blanks and/or alphabetic characters, contain values that fall
outside an acceptable latitude/longitude range, or contain both.
All columns must be completed with numeric values, including leading
zeros if required, and the values must fall within the following
ranges:
DEGREES MINUTES SECONDS
latitude >0, <90
<60
<600
longitude <180
<60
<600
Correct the improperly-specified latitude/longitude values, and
resubmit the storage deck.
WO/-DE
A3-2
SEP 1986
-------
09 INVALID MILEAGE AND INDEX CODE
One or more of the level-miles fields (columns 14-76 of the 1 card,
or columns 14-53 of the 2 card) of the RMI cards contain embedded
blanks and/or alphabetic characters. All completed fields must
contain only numeric values, including leading zeros if required.
(Unused level-index/level-mile field pairs are to be left blank.)
Correct the improperly-specified mileage/index values, and resubmit
the storage cards for that station.
10 SUPERFLUOUS 2 CARD
At least one pair of level-index/level-mile fields in the preceding
RMI card (Header Card 1) was blank, therefore the detected RMI card
(Header Card 2) is unnecessary. No action required.
11 MILEAGE BLANK
An RMI card (either Header Card 1 or Header Card 2) has a
level-index coded without a corresponding level-mileage. Enter the
required level-mile value, including leading zeros if needed, and
resubmit the storage cards for that station.
12 NO PRIMARY STATION CODE
The primary station code field (columns 4-18) of a station (S) card
is blank. This field must be completed with an alpha-numeric value,
left-justified, leaving unused columns blank. Enter the proper
primary station code and resubmit the storage cards for that station.
13 CARD 4 MISSING
A Location Description Card (Header Card 4) was not found after a
Major/Minor Basin Card (Header Card 3). Provide the appropriate 4
card, and resubmit the storage cards for that station.
14 INVALID COL 79
The line position code field (column 79) of a Descriptive Paragraph
Card (Header Card 5) contains an improper value, i.e., a value other
than 0 through 9, or J through N. Correct this improperly-specified
code and resubmit the storage cards for the station.
15 This error message is no longer in use.
16 DATE ERROR
An invalid date or time was detected in a parametric data storage
card. No information was stored for the sample. The error could
have resulted from a blank or alphabetic character being entered in
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-3
-------
the date time field (all entries must be numeric with leading zeros
specified, if required), or from the specification of an invalid
date such as a 14th month, or a date sometime in the future (a
sampling date must be either the current or an earlier date). For a
?01 storage procedure, correct columns 7-18 of the parametric data
card. For 702 and 703 storage procedures, correct field number 4 of
the appropriate data (D) card. For a ?04 storage procedure, correct
field number 3 of the appropriate SC storage card. For a ?00
storage procedure, correct field 3 of either the appropriate SC or
DC card. Resubmit the sample.
17 DEPTH ERROR
An invalid value was specified for the depth of the sample. No
information was stored for the sample. Sample depth values must be
numeric, and must not contain embedded blanks or alphabetic
characters. Check the depth field for a mispunch (columns 4-6 of
the parametric data card for a 701 storage procedure, field 5 of the
data D card for 702 and 703 storage procedures, field 5 of the SC
storage card for a 704 storage procedure, and field 6 of the SC or
DC card for a 700 storage procedure). Correct and resubmit.
18 DATA VALUE ERROR
An invalid entry was detected in a parameter code field or an
exponent field of a parametric data storage card. Parameter codes
must be numeric, with leading zeros specified, if required. The
two-digit exponent field also must be numeric: the left digit must
be either a 1 or a 2, the right digit may be any digit (0-9). For a
701 storage procedure, check the appropriate fields of the
parametric data card (columns 19-23, 31-35, 43-47, 55-59, and 67-71
for parameter codes; columns 28-29, 40-41, 52-53, 64-65, and 76-77
for exponents). For a 702 storage procedure, check the parameter
codes in columns 7-76 of the P card (and the codes entered in any P
continuation cards, if coded), and check the exponent values in the
parameter values field (field six) of the data (D) card (and of the
exponents entered in any D continuation cards, if coded). For a 703
storage procedure, check the parameter code field (field 3) and the
parameter value field (field 5) of the data (D) card (and any D
continuation cards, if coded). For a 704 storage procedure, check
the parameter code field (field 9) and the parameter value field
(field 11) of the SC storage card (and any SC continuation cards, if
coded). For a 700 storage procedure, check fields 10 and 11 of the
SC card, or field 2 of the PN card and field 10 of the DC card.
Correct the improperly-coded entry and resubmit the data storage
cards.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-4
-------
19 VALID S CARD MISSING FOR REQUESTED CHANGE
The card shown was rejected due to an improperly-coded or missing
station (S) card. No information for the station was stored or
changed. The presence of a latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0),
a Major/Minor Basin Card (Header Card 3), or a Location Description
Card (Header Card 4) indicates that station location information is
being stored or changed, but that either the required S card was
omitted or a required control code was miscoded. Check for the S
card and for an NS or CX control code in columns 78-79. Correct and
resubmit.
20 This error message is no longer in use.
21 INVALID UNLOCKING KEY
An invalid unlocking key was detected in columns 17-24 of the agency
(A) card. This value must match the unlocking key established by
the owner of the agency. Correct the improperly-specified entry,
and resubmit the A card and all storage cards associated with the A
card.
22 This error message is no longer in use.
23 DATA DELETED
A deletion was performed as requested. No action required.
24 TOO MANY NEW PLUS OLD PARAMETERS
An attempt was made to store more than 250 parameters for a single
sample for a given date and time. The number of parameters within
the storage run, when added to the number of parameters already
stored for the sample, exceeded the system limit of 250. None of
the parameters within this storage run were stored. Reduce the
total number of parameters to 250 or less and resubmit.
25 NO VALUE TO BE DELETED
An attempt was made to delete parametric data that do not exist as
identified in the deletion request. No action was taken. Check the
appropriate identifying information (station code, date, time,
depth, media, SMK and UMK codes, and parameter code), correct, and
resubmit if necessary.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-5
-------
26 DUPLICATE PAR
An attempt was made to store parametric data that already exist in
the system. Check date, time, depth, station code, media, SMK and
UMK codes, and parameter code for correctness and resubmit if
necessary.
27 This error message is no longer in use.
28 DUPLICATE DESCRIPTIVE HEADER INFORMATION
An attempt was made to store a line of descriptive paragraph
information (via a Descriptive Paragraph Card - Header Card 5) that
is already stored for the specified station. The duplicate line was
not stored. Check the appropriate 5 cards, and correct and resubmit
if necessary.
29 STATION NOT IN SYSTEM
An attempt was made to delete all parametric data for a station not
yet stored in the system. No data were deleted. Check columns 4-18
of the station (S) card and columns 1-8 of the agency (A) card for
the proper codes. Correct and resubmit.
30 TOO MANY NEW PARAMETERS FOR DATE
An attempt has been made to store more than 250 parameters for a
single sample for a given date and time. The number of parameters
specified within the storage run may not exceed the system limit of
250. None of the parameters within the storage run were stored.
Reduce the number of parameters to 250 or less and resubmit.
31 This error message is no longer in use.
32 DUPLICATE NEW PARAMETERS
Two or more data cards within the storage-run were detected that
contain identical parametric information for the same station, date,
and time. Only one of any such duplicated card was stored. No
corrective action is required unless the duplication was caused by a
coding error, rather than by an inadvertent repetition of a data
card.
33 This error message is no longer in use.
34 DUPLICATE NEW STATION
An attempt was made to store a station that is already stored for
the specified agency. (This is a secondary error message generated
by the UPDATE program.) Check the station (S) card for a
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-6
-------
mis-specified primary station code, or the agency (A) card for a
mis-specified agency code. Correct and resubmit if necessary.
35 This error message is no longer in use.
36 DUPLICATE SECONDARY STATION CODE
An attempt was made to store a secondary station code that is
identical to a primary station code already stored for the specified
agency. All primary and secondary station codes defined within an
agency must be unique. No information for the duplicate station was
stored. Check the S card for a mis-specified secondary station
coder or the A card for a mis-specified agency code. Correct and
resubmit if necessary.
37 DUPLICATE PRIMARY STATION CODE
An attempt was made to store a primary station code identical to a
primary station code already stored for the specified agency. (This
is a primary error message generated by one of the editing
programs.) All primary station codes associated with an agency code
must be unique. No information for the duplicate station was
stored. Check the S card for a mis-specified primary station code,
or the A card for a mis-specified agency code. Correct and resubmit
if necessary.
38 NO MATCHING STATION
An attempt was made to change station location information for a
station that had not been previously stored for the specified
agency. No information was stored or changed. Check the S card for
a mis-specified station code, or the A card for a mis-specified
agency code. If the station and agency codes are correct, resubmit
the station card and store the information as a new station (by
specifying NS in columns 78-79 of the S card).
39 MISALIGNMENT
An invalid field length was detected in the beginning or sampling
date and time field (field 3) or in the ending date and time field
(field 4) of a SC storage card entered as part of a 700 or 704
storage procedure. Valid entries for these fields are either six or
ten digits in length, and must be all numeric, with leading zeros
specified if required. Data were not stored. Correct the
improperly-specified date/time value and resubmit.
40 NO DATA TO BE DELETED FOR DATE
An attempt was made to delete all existing parametric data for a
particular sample date that does not exist in the system as
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-7
-------
identified in the deletion request. No action was taken. Check the
appropriate identifying information (station code, agency code,
date, depth, time, media, SMK or UMK codes), correct, and resubmit
if necessary.
41 DELETED ALL DATA FOR STATION
A deletion of all parametric data stored for the specified station
was performed as requested. No parametric data, for any date,
remains for the station. No action required.
42 ATTEMPT MADE TO DELETE STATION - STATION NOT FOUND
An attempt was made to delete a station that does not exist in the
system as identified in the deletion request. No action was taken.
Check the primary station code field (columns 4-18) of the station
(S) card, and the agency code field (columns 1-8) of the agency (A)
card. Correct and resubmit if necessary.
43 DUPLICATE SECONDARY STATION CODE
An attempt was made to store a secondary station code that is
identical to another secondary station code already stored for the
specified agency. All station codes must be unique within an agency
code. No information for the duplicate station was stored. Check
the secondary station code fields (columns 34-45, 46-57, and 58-67)
of the station (S) card, and the agency code field (columns 1-8) of
the agency (A) card for the mis-specified code, correct, and
resubmit if necessary.
44 DUPLICATE NEW STATIONS - ONLY ONE STORED
An attempt was made to store two stations having identical station
codes. All station codes must be unique within an agency code. The
first station encountered was stored during the final storage run.
Submit a station inventory retrieval to determine which station was
stored. Check the primary station code field (columns 4-18) of the
station (S) card for miscoding, correct, and resubmit if necessary.
45 PARAMETER COUNTING ERROR
An unequal number of parameter codes-and corresponding parameter
values were detected in a 702 DIP storage procedure, i.e., the
number of parameter codes specified in columns 7-76 of the P card
(and in the P continuation cards, if present) was either less than
or greater than the number of parameter values specified in field 6
of the D card (and in the D continuation cards, if present). No
information was stored for the sample. Check the appropriate cards
for the omitted/extraneous codes/values, correct, and resubmit.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-8
-------
46 This error message is no longer in use.
47 INVALID REMARK
An invalid remark code was specified in a data card. No information
(either remarks or values) was stored for the sample. Check the
following fields for the mis-specified alphabetic code: for a 701
storage procedure, columns 30, 42, 54, 66, and 78 of the parametric
data card; for 702 and ?03 storage procedures, the last position of
the parameter values within field 6 of the data D card; for a ?04
storage procedure, the last position within field 10 of the SC
storage card; and for a 700 storage procedure, field 11 of the SC
card or field 10 of the DC card. Correct and resubmit.
48 ACTUAL AND BLANK DEPTH
A storage transaction was encountered that lacks a sampling depth
value, while all other samples being stored do have sampling depth
values. The sample lacking a depth value was not stored; the
samples having depth values were stored. Check columns 4-6 of the
parametric data card (for a 701 storage procedure), column 6 of the
P card and field 5 of the D card (for a ?02 storage procedure) ,
column 80 of the last P card and field 5 of the D card (for a 703
storage procedure), field 5 of the SC card (for a 704 storage
procedure), and field 6 of the SC or DC card (for a 700 storage
procedure). Correct and resubmit.
49 TRANSACTIONS WITH DIFFERENT COMPOSITE DATE
A discrepancy was detected between the beginning dates of qualified
composites coded on the data cards being stored and the
corresponding dates already stored for the sample.
Check the appropriate date field for an improper entry. (For a 701
storage procedure, columns 7-18 of the parametric data card; for a
704 storage procedure, the beginning or sampling date and time field
of the storage (SC) card; and for a 700 storage procedure, field 3
of the SC or DC card.) For a qualified composite, if the ending
dates are the same, the beginning dates must also be the same.
The sample with the latest final date was rejected. No further
action is required unless the composite data stored were incorrect.
50 YEAR LESS THAN 32
A date check of a data card detected a year earlier than 1932 (or no
year at all). Check the date-time field (columns 7-8 or 13-14) of
the parametric data card (for a 701 storage procedure); the
date-time field (field 4) of the data (D) card (for 702 and 703
storage procedures); and the beginning or sampling date and time
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-9
-------
field (field 3) of the SC card (for a 704 storage procedure) or of
the DC card (for a ?00 storage procedure). Correct the date and
resubmit.
If the year specified was intentional, code a B in the date check
field (column 61) of the agency (A) card (or NDC on the AC card for
a ?00 or 704 storage procedure), which specifies that no date
checking is to be performed by the system.
51 DATE GREATER THAN DATE OF RUN
An attempt was made to store data having a sampling date greater
than (i.e., after) the storage date. A sampling date must be either
the current or an earlier date.
Check the date-time field (columns 7-8 or 13-14) of the parametric
data card (for a ?01 storage procedure); the date-time field (field
4) of the data (D) card (for 702 and 703 storage procedures); and
the beginning or sampling date and time field (field 3) of the SC
card (for a 704 storage procedure) or of the DC card (for a 700
storage procedure). Correct the date and resubmit.
52 MONTH EITHER GREATER THAN 12 OR 0
An invalid value was detected in a month field of a data storage
card. Values must be numeric, from 01 to 12, with leading zeros
specified, if required. Check the date-time field (columns 9-10 or
15-16) of the parametric data card (for a 701 storage procedure);
the date-time field (field 4) of the data (D) card (for 702 and 703
storage procedures); and the beginning or sampling date and time
field (field 3) of the SC card (for a 704 storage procedure) or of
the DC card (for a 700 storage procedure). Correct the date and
resubmit.
53 DAY EITHER GREATER THAN 31 OR 0
An invalid value was detected in a day field of a data storage
card. Values must be numeric, from 01 to 31, with leading zeros
specified if required. Dates for February must be equal or less
than 28, except in leap years when it may be 29. Check the
date-time field (columns 11-12 or 17-18) of the parametric data card
(for a 701 storage procedure); the date-time field (field 4) of the
data (D) card (for 702 and 703 storage procedures); and the
beginning or sampling date and time field (field 3) of the SC card
(for a 704 storage procedure) or of the DC card (for a 700 storage
procedure). Correct the date and resubmit.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-10
-------
54 FIRST CARD OF RUN NOT AN A CARD - NO CARDS STORED
The first card within the storage deck was not an agency (A) card.
No information was stored. Insert a proper A card in front of the
station and data cards to be stored and resubmit the entire run.
55 This error message is no longer in use.
56 NEW AGENCY CODE STORED
This message is printed whenever a new agency code is successfully
stored in the system by a special run performed by STORET User
Assistance. No action is required by the user.
57 STATION NOT PRESENTLY IN SYSTEM/*DATA CARD*/
Parametric data were stored for a station not yet stored within the
system. If the station had not been stored before the weekend
update, the parametric data will not be stored.
58 STATION NOT IN SYSTEM
An attempt was made to change station location information for a
station not yet in the system. No station information was changed.
A station must be stored in the system before it can be changed or
deleted. Check columns 4-18 of the station (S) card and columns 1-8
of the agency (A) card for the proper codes. Correct and resubmit.
If the station is to be stored over the coming weekend, the
information may be changed next week.
59 NO CARDS IN INPUT FILE
An attempt to store data was made but no data were found in the
input stream. The data could have been placed incorrectly within
the job stream, or an incorrect or empty data set referenced.
Examine the input stream, correct, and resubmit.
60 CONTROL CODE NO LONGER VALID - CHANGED TO CX
In an attempt to change station header information, an invalid
control code was specified in columns 78 and 79 of the S card. The
control code for this operation is CX. Correct the S card and
resubmit.
61 INSUFFICIENT INFORMATION ON DATA CARD
Insufficient information was provided on the SC card for a ?00 or
704 storage procedure. Information required includes station code,
date and time, and appropriate parameter data.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-11
-------
62 CARD AFTER "A" CARD NOT DATA CARD - REST NOT STORED
An SC or PN storage card was not found immediately after the agency
card (either the fixed format A card or the variable format AC
card), as required by the ?00 or 704 storage procedures. No
information was stored. Check the card preceding this card for a
mispunch in the card type code field, columns 1-2 (AC card) or 80 (A
card), or provide the required SC or PN card. Resubmit the run.
63 ERROR IN PARAMETER CODE
A parameter code field contains a blank or alphabetic character.
Parameter codes must be numeric, with leading zeros specified, if
required. The parameter and its corresponding values were not
stored. Check the appropriate parameter code fields: columns
19-23, 31-35, 43-47, 55-59, and 67-71 of the parametric data card
(for a ?01 storage procedure); columns 7-76 of the P control card
(for a ?02 storage procedure); field 3 of the D data card (for a ?03
storage procedure); field 9 of the SC card (for a ?04 storage
procedure); and field 10 of the SC card or field 2 of the PN card
for a ?00 storage procedure. Correct and resubmit.
64 NO PARAMETER FOR VALUE
A parameter code was not specified for a corresponding parameter
value that was coded on a parametric data card. No information for
the sample was stored. Check the parameter code field (columns
19-23, 31-35, 43-47, 55-59, and 67-71) of the data card used in the
701 storage procedure. Correct and resubmit.
65 TOO MANY FIELDS FOR DATA CARD SET - ALLOWED MAX=500
Up to 500 commas can be coded on any single set of data cards
included within a 700 or 704 storage procedure. Thus a maximum of
approximately 250 pairs of parameter codes and values can be
specified on each set of SC and SC continuation cards; or a maximum
of approximately 500 parameters for a set of PN and PN continuation
cards, or 500 values for a set of DC and DC continuation cards. No
information was stored for the sample. Ascertain the number of
parameter codes/values in excess of this limitation, divide the data
into sets of storage cards having less than 500 commas per set, and
resubmit the data as multiple runs.
66 This error message is no longer in use.
67 INSUFFICIENT OR INVALID COMPOSITE INFORMATION
Information required to store composite data was not specified or
was improperly specified. No information was stored for the
sample. Both field 6 (composite value type), field 7 (space/time
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-12
-------
composite) and field 8 (sample type) of the SC card must be
completed when storing composite data via a 700 or 704 storage
procedure. For a ?00 storage procedure, also check fields 7,8, and
9 of the DC card. Also, only certain values are permitted for each
of these fields. Check these fields for an omission or an improper
value. Correct and resubmit.
68 LAT/LONG MISSING
The latitude and longitude coordinates of the station being stored
were not specified. This station location information is required
in order to store a new station into the WQF. The station was not
stored. Check for the presence of the required latitude/longitude
card (Header Card 0), or for the completion of columns 7-21 of that
card. Provide the required information, and resubmit the station
location deck.
69 EITHER LAT/LONG OR STATE/COUNTY CODE IS INCORRECT
Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates and/or state and county
codes are initially stored or changed, a check is performed to
verify that the location defined by the coordinates does in fact lie
within the state/county boundaries specified. The station was not
stored, or no existing station location information was changed.
Check the validity of the coordinates specified in columns 7-21 of
the latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) with the state/county
codes specified in columns 68-72 of the station (S) card, or already
stored in the system. Correct and resubmit.
70 NEW AGENCY CODES MUST BE STORED BY HEADQUARTERS
An attempt was made to store a new agency code into the WQF, a
procedure that can be performed only by STORET User Assistance
personnel in EPA Headquarters. Please contact this staff for
assistance.
71 INVALID OR MISSING S CARD PRECEDING THIS CARD
Something is amiss with an S card in a 701 storage procedure, either
station storage or data storage. In a data storage run, a 6 card
was detected after the agency card; no information was stored. In a
station storage run, an S card was not found after a station type
(T) card; information up to this point was stored. Check for the
inclusion and proper coding of an S card and resubmit the
unprocessed cards.
72 PRIMARY STATION NOT CODED - STATION NOT STORED
An attempt was made to store a station without specifying the
station's primary station code; either the station (S) card was not
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-13
-------
submitted, or the primary station code field (columns 4-18) of the S
card was blank. The station was not stored. Check the station
location storage deck for the omission. Correct and resubmit.
73 STATION HAS BEEN ARCHIVED - STORAGE NOT PERMITTED
Information cannot be stored for the referenced station code, as the
station has been archived and is no longer accessible via normal
storage procedures. Contact STORET User Assistance personnel at EPA
Headquarters for assistance.
74 'R' CARD MUST BE PRECEDED BY AN 'A1 OR 'R1 CARD
In order to transfer a station stored in the WQF to an archive
class, a special Archive card (or R card) must be used. An R card
can follow only a fixed format agency (A) card or another R card.
Examine the storage deck for proper card sequence. Correct and
resubmit.
75 This error message pertains only to the storage of effluent data.
Refer to the Effluent Data part of the Handbook.
76 This error message pertains only to the storage of effluent data.
Refer to the Effluent Data part of the Handbook.
77 This error message pertains only to the storage of effluent data.
Refer to the Effluent Data part of the Handbook.
78 This error message pertains only to the storage of effluent data.
Refer to the Effluent Data part of the Handbook.
79 This error message pertains only to the storage of effluent data.
Refer to the Effluent Data part of the Handbook.
80 LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN STATE/COUNTY BOUNDARY
Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are initially stored or
are changed, a check is performed to verify that the location
defined by the coordinates does in fact lie within the political
boundary specified. The coordinates specified in this run via the
latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie within the
state/county specified in columns 68-72 of the station (S) card, and
consequently were not stored. Correct the invalid coordinate
value(s) and resubmit.
81 LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN GREAT LAKE BOUNDARY
Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are initially stored or
are changed, a check is performed to verify that the location
defined by the coordinates does in fact lie within the political
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-14
-------
boundary specified. The coordinates specified in this run via the
latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie within the
boundary of the Great Lakes as specified in columns 68-72 of the
station (S) card, and consequently were not stored. Check the
coordinate values specified, correct, and resubmit. Call STORET
User Assistance at EPA Headquarters should further assistance be
necessary.
82 LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN ATLANTIC OCEAN BOUNDARY
Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are initially stored or
are changed, a check is performed to verify that the location
defined by the coordinates does in fact lie within the political
boundary specified. The coordinates specified in this run via the
latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie within the
boundary of the Atlantic Ocean as specified in columns 68-72 of the
station (S) card, and consequently were not stored. Check the
coordinate values specified, correct, and resubmit. Call STORET
User Assistance at EPA Headquarters should further assistance be
necessary.
83 LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN PACIFIC OCEAN BOUNDARY
Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are initially stored or
are changed, a check is performed to verify that the location
defined by the coordinates does in fact lie within the political
boundary specified. The coordinates specified in this run via the
latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie within the
boundary of the Pacific Ocean as specified in columns 68-72 of the
station (S) card, and consequently were not stored. Check the
coordinate values specified, correct, and resubmit. Call STORET
User Assistance at EPA Headquarters should further assistance be
necessary.
84 LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN GULF OF MEXICO BOUNDARY
Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are initially stored or
are changed, a check is performed to verify that the location
defined by the coordinates does in fact lie within the political
boundary specified. The coordinates specified in this run via the
latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie within the
boundary of the Gulf of Mexico as specified in columns 68-72 of the
station (S) card, and consequently were not stored. Check the
coordinate values specified, correct, and resubmit. Call STORET
User Assistance at EPA Headquarters should further assistance be
necessary.
85 This error message pertains only to the storage of effluent data.
Refer to the Effluent Data part of the Handbook.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-15
-------
86 This error message pertains only to the storage of effluent data.
Refer to the Effluent Data part of the Handbook.
87 ALPHANUMERIC VALUES MUST BE 5 CHARACTERS OR LESS
The values for certain 84000-series parameter codes used In the
storage of data may contain alphanumeric data, but they must be five
characters or less in length. No information was stored or
changed. Check the appropriate parameters and parameter values
(columns 31-41, 43-53, 55-65, and 67-77 of the parametric data card
for a ?01 storage procedure, field 9 of the SC card for a ?04
storage procedure), or field 10 of the SC card or field 2 of the PN
card for a ?00 storage procedure. Correct and resubmit.
88 INVALID FARM BYPASS FIELD
An invalid bypass-code was specified for the PARH subparameter on
the EXEC statement. The job was not run. Users may request a
bypass code from STORET User Assistance to store values for
parameters or latitude/longitude coordinates that are legitimate but
that do not meet STORET range check criteria. The STORET command
procedure named %MAGIC also provides the current bypass code.
89 This error message pertains only to the storage of effluent data.
Refer to the Effluent Data part of the Handbook.
90 This error message pertains only to the storage of effluent data.
Refer to the Effluent Data part of the Handbook.
91 TIME>2400 NOT ALLOWED
An invalid time value was specified in a date-time field. No
information was stored for the sample. Time values are based upon
the military 24-hour time system; acceptable hour values range from
1 to 24, minute values from 0 to 60. Check the appropriate
date-time fields: columns 7-28 of a parametric data card for a ?01
storage procedure; field 4 of data card for a ?02 or ?03 storage
procedure; fields 3 and 4 of an SC or PN card for a ?00 or ?04
storage procedure. Correct and resubmit.
92 PREVIOUS ERROR - LOOKING FOR AGENCY OR 'SC1 CARD
The ?04 storage procedure allows the entry of an SC,$ as a coding
shortcut and assumes the station code, dates, times, and depths from
the preceding SC card. Similarly, the ?00 storage procedure allows
the use of either SC,$ or DC,$ codes as a coding shortcut. This
message indicates that an error was detected in the previous SC or
DC card that contained the station code, date, and time references.
The SC,$ or DC,$ card (and subsequent shortcut cards) will be
ignored. Error checking will resume with the next agency card
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-16
-------
(either a fixed format A card or a variable format AC card) or SC or
PN card, whichever occurs first within the deck.
93 BASIN CODE ERROR
A syntactically-incorrect basin code was detected in the basin code
fields of the major/minor basin card (Header Card 3). No
information was stored for the station. Check columns 68-73 of the
3 card, which must consist of a string of six digits. Alphabetic
characters and blanks are invalid, and leading zeros must be coded
if required. If a subbasin code is not appropriate, the last two
positions of this field may be blank.
94 This error message pertains only to the storage of effluent data.
Refer to the Effluent Data part of the Handbook.
95 NO ERRORS
This message prints whenever no syntax-related errors were detected
within a request to initially store, change, or delete station
location information. No action is required by the user. The
requested transactions will be processed with the weekly update, and
if no logical errors are detected, will be permanently stored in the
WQF as requested.
96 END OF RUN
The printing of this message indicates that the storage run did in
fact process successfully to completion. This message appears
immediately after any and all error messages, or if none are found,
appears at the end of the run's printout. No action is required by
the user.
97 STATION DELETED
Both station location and parametric data for the specified station
were deleted as requested via the DS value in the control code field
of the station(s) card. No information pertaining to the station
remains in the system. No action is required by the user.
98 STATION CANNOT BE DELETED AND ADDED IN SAME RUN
An attempt was made to both delete and add station location
information to a station in the same week, which is invalid. No
information was stored or deleted for the station. Station location
information can be changed or deleted only after the station has
been successfully stored into the WQF over a weekend by EPA
Headquarters personnel. Delete and then re-store the station in
subsequent weeks via separate runs.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A 3-17
-------
99 T CARD INFORMATION
This is an information-only message, which indicates that the
station type (T) card as printed was processed. No action is
required by the user.
100 NO LEVEL 1 CODE
An inconsistent or insufficient combination of station type codes
was specified on the station type (T) card. One, and only one, level
1 code is required. No information was stored for the station.
Check the string of alpha-numeric station type codes specified in
columns 1-78 of the T card. The STORET help data set named
STORET.HELP.STATION.TYPE contains a list of all station type codes
defined within STORET. Qorrect and resubmit.
101 NO LEVEL 2 CODE
An inconsistent or insufficient combination of station type codes
was specified on the station type (T) card. One, and only one, level
2 code is required. No information was stored for the station.
Check the string of alpha-numeric station type codes specified in
columns 1-78 of the T card. The STORET help data set named
STORET.HELP.STATION.TYPE contains a list of all station type codes
defined within STORET. Correct and resubmit.
102 NO LEVEL 3 CODE FOR PIPE
An inconsistent or insufficient combination of station type
codes was specified on the station type (T) card. If PIPE was
specified as a level 1 code, then one, and only one, level 3
code must also be specified. No information was stored for
the station. Check the string of alpha-numeric station type
codes specified in columns 1-78 of the T card. The STORET
help data set named STORET.HELP. STATION.TYPE contains a list
of all station type codes defined within STORET. Correct and
resubmit.
103 NO LEVEL 4 CODE FOR PIPE
An inconsistent or insufficient combination of station type codes
was specified on the station type (T) card. If PIPE was specified as
a level 1 code, and if a level 3 code was specified, then one, and
only one, level 4 code must also be specified. No information was
stored for the station. Check the string of alpha-numeric station
type codes specified in columns 1-78 of the T card. The STORET help
data set named STORET.HELP.STATION.TYPE contains a list of all
station type codes defined within STORET. Correct and resubmit.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-18
-------
104 MORE THAN ONE LEVEL 1 CODE
More than one level 1 station type code was specified in the station
type (T) card. One, and only one, level 1 code must be specified
when storing a station in STORET. The station was not stored. The
STORET help data set named STORET.HELP.STATION.TYPE contains a list
of all station type codes defined within STORET. Correct the codes
specified on the T card and resubmit.
105 MORE THAN ONE LEVEL 2 CODE
More than one level 2 station type code was specified in the station
type (T) card. One, and only one, level 2 code must be specified
when storing a station in STORET. The station was not stored. The
STORET help data set named STORET.HELP.STATION.TYPE contains a list
of all station type codes defined within STORET. Correct the codes
specified on the T card and resubmit.
106 PIPE AND AMBNT
The station type codes PIPE and AMBNT cannot both be specified on a
station type (T) card. If the level 1 code is PIPE, then the level
2 code must be other than AMBNT; or if the level 2 code should be
AMBNT, then the level 1 code must be other than PIPE. The STORET
help data set named STORET.HELP. STATION.TYPE contains a list of all
station type codes defined within STORET. Correct the codes
specified on the T card and resubmit.
107 PIPE OR AMBNT REQUIRED
The level 1 station type code specified in the station type (T) card
was not PIPE and the level 2 code was not AMBNT. If the level 1
code is not PIPE, then the only valid level 2 code is AMBNT; if the
level 2 code is not AMBNT, then the level 1 code must be PIPE. The
STORET help data set named STORET.HELP.STATION.TYPE contains a list
of all station type codes defined within STORET. Correct the codes
specified on the T card and resubmit.
108 INVALID TYPE CODE IN T CARD
One or more invalid station type codes were detected in the station
type (T) card. No information was stored for the station. Check
the string of station type codes specified in columns 1-78 of the T
card for a typographical error or other invalid entry. The STORET
help data set named STORET.HELP. STATION.TYPE contains a list of all
station type codes defined within STORET. Correct and resubmit.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-19
-------
109 MORE THAN ONE LEVEL 3 CODE
More than one level 3 station type code was specified in the station
type (T) card. A level 3 code is required only if the level 1 code
is PIPE; its use is optional otherwise. If used, however, a maximum
of one level 3 code is permitted. The STORET help data set named
STORET.HELP. STATION.TYPE contains a list of all station type codes
defined within STORET. Correct the codes specified on the T card
and resubmit.
110 CARD IGNORED - SEARCHING FOR NEXT A OR T CARD
An error had been discovered in a preceding card within the storage
deck that caused this, and perhaps subsequent, cards to be purposely
ignored and bypassed without editing. Error checking will resume
with the next agency card, either a fixed format A card or a
variable format AC card.
Ill INVALID Q CARD - JOB TERMINATED
An improper entry was detected in one or more fields of the Quality
Assurance (Q) card. No information was stored for the station from
this point on. Check column 2 for a proper quality assurance code,
or columns 3-7 for a properly structured 5-digit parameter code.
All other columns, including column 80, are to be blank. Correct
and resubmit.
112 TOO MANY Q CARDS - MAXIMUM=200
The number of Quality Assurance (Q) cards submitted in the run
exceeded the maximum allowable number of 200 cards. None of the Q
cards were stored, nor were any of the other cards within the deck
processed. Ascertain the number of Q cards within the run, divide
them (and their associated data cards) into sets having less than
200 Q cards, and resubmit the data as multiple runs.
113 INVALID AQC IN PARAMETER CODE
An invalid quality assurance code was detected in the parameter
code. Either an incorrect letter code was specified, or the code
was placed in the wrong column. The data referenced by the card was
not changed. Check the entries for valid AQC codes in all
positions. Correct and resubmit.
114 This error message is no longer in use.
115 This error message is no longer in use.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-20
-------
116 DATA NOT CHECKED, NO MATCHING X-REF STATION OR LIMITS
Although user-supplied data edit checks were invoked, the referenced
cross-reference station or pre-edit limits were not found. Store
the appropriate cross references, and resubmit.
117 This error message is no longer in use.
118 REQUIRED FIELD LEFT BLANK FOR CX OR NS TRANSACTION
An attempt was made either to blank out a previously stored and
required station location information field (via a CX transaction)
or to store a new station without providing all required station
location information (via an NS transaction). Check the station
location storage cards for missing required fields. Correct and
resubmit.
119 PARAMETER CODE IS IN INVALID RANGE
An attempt was made to store data behind an invalid parameter code.
All data following the invalid parameter, within the concerned
storage data set, was not stored. Check the appropriate parameter
code fields: columns 19-23, 31-35, 43-47, 55-59, and 67-71 of the
parametric data card (for a 701 storage procedure); columns 7-76 of
the P card (for a 702 storage procedure); field 3 of the D card (for
a ?03 storage procedure); field 9 of the SC card (for a 704 storage
procedure); and either field 10 of the SC card or field 2 of the PN
card (for a ?00 storage procedure). Correct and resubmit.
120 TOO MANY CHARACTERS FOR STATION NUMBER
An attempt was made to store data, in which a station code exceeding
the allowed maximum of 15 characters was specified. Check the
appropriate station code fields: field 3 of the D card (for a ?02
storage procedure), field 2 of the SC card (for a 704 storage
procedure), and either field 2 of the SC card or DC card (for a 700
storage procedure). Correct and resubmit.
121 MORE THAN ONE LEVEL 4 CODE
An attempt was made to store a station having more than one level 4
code on the station type (T) card. Delete the extra level 4 code(s)
and resubmit.
122 INVALID COMBINATION LEVEL 5 SEWERS
An attempt was made to store a station having an invalid combination
of level 5 sewer identifiers on the station type (T) card. Only one
of the three accepted level 5 sewer type codes (CMBSWR, SANSWR, or
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-21
-------
STMSWR) may be specified for each station being stored. Correct and
resubmit.
123 SEWER IN LEVEL 5 BUT NOT OUTFALL IN LEVEL 4
An attempt was made to store a station having CMBSWR, SANSWR, or
STMSWR as a level 5 code, but having other than OUTFL or CMBSRC as a
level 4 identifier. When using one of the three accepted level 5
sewer codes, a level 4 type identifier must be specified, indicating
OUTFL or CMBSRC only. Correct the improperly-specified entry on the
station type (T) card and resubmit.
124 TOO MANY STATIONS ON "P" CARD - MAX=20
An attempt was made to store data, using the 703 storage procedure,
in which more than 20 stations were coded on a single P card. Code
the additional stations on a separate P card, repeat the D cards
associated with those stations, and resubmit.
125 NO VALUE FOR REMARK CODE
A remark code was specified in a data card, but no value was
associated with the remark code. For 702 and 703 storage
procedures, parameter values are to immediately follow remark codes
in field 6 of the data card; for 704 storage procedures, parameter
values precede remark codes in field 10 of the SC card; for 700
storage procedures, a paraemter value must precede the remark code
in field 11 of the SC card or field 10 of the DC card; and for 701
storage procedures, parameter values precede remark codes in
specific columns. Examine the coding in the data cards, correct,
and resubmit.
126 DATA CANNOT BE STORED UNDER SEC # SAME WEEK AS STATION STORAGE
An attempt was made to store parameter data behind a secondary
station code of a station initially stored during the week. No data
were stored. Resubmit storage run the next week.
127 INVALID REACH NUMBER
One or more alphabetic and/or special characters, and/or blanks were
encountered in columns 52-62 of the location description card
(Header Card 4). Only numeric values may be specified in this field
and no blanks are allowed. If only the cataloging unit code is
specified, then columns 60-62 must contain zeros. The station was
not stored. Correct and resubmit.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A 3-22
-------
128 REACH MILEAGE CANNOT BE STORED WITHOUT PREVIOUS REACH*
An 11-digit reach number has not been previously stored for the
station, or is not coded in columns 52 through 62 on the location
description card (Header Card 4) on which the mileage was coded.
The station was not stored. Check that the correct station and/or
reach is being specified. Correct and resubmit.
129 INVALID REACH MILEAGE
One or more alphabetic and/or special characters were encountered in
columns 66-73 on the location description card (Header Card 4).
Only numeric values and at most one decimal point may be coded. The
station was not stored, or the requested station changes were not
made. Correct and resubmit. /
130 REACH CODE NOT IN SYSTEM
The specified 8-digit cataloging unit code or 11-digit reach number
on the location Description card (Header Card 4) has not been
defined within STORET. Check for a miscoding error, correct, and
resubmit.
131 NO VALUE FOR PARAMETER
In a 700, 702, 703, or 704 storage run, a parameter code was
specified in the appropriate column, but no parameter value for that
code was found. Sometimes users enter a remark code, but forget to
enter the parameter value. Examine the date coded in field 11 of
the SC card or field 10 of the DC card for a 700 storage procedure,
field 6 of the D card for a 702 or 703 storage procedure, and field
10 of the SC card for a 704 storage procedure. Correct and resubmit.
132 DUPLICATE COMMA
In a 700 or 704 storage run, a comma was coded on an SC card
immediately after another comma with no intervening data. In coding
AC and SC cards, a comma is coded to conclude a data field only if
data were coded for that field. Correct and resubmit the run.
133 TOO MANY/TOO FEW 7 CARDS FOUND - NO CARDS STORED
The required control cards that begin any storage transaction were
miscoded, in the wrong order, or absent. Every storage run must
begin with a ?0n card (where n is a 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4), followed by a
7START card. Check the deck for the proper specification of these
control ards and resubmit.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A 3-23
-------
134 QUOTE OR COMMA MISSING IN DIP STORAGE
A miscoding has been detected in a P or D card submitted in a 702 or
?03 storage run. Check the last card printed for the error. Check
that station codes are enclosed within single quotation marks, and
that all fields on the D card are separated by commas. Correct and
resubmit.
135-139 These error messages should not be encountered by users. Should you
receive one, however, plase call STORET User Assistance.
140 INVALID LOCK AFTER DATE - MAX=360
A non-numeric value was encountered in columns 74-77 of the agency
(A) card. Lock after values must be numeric. The entire run was
aborted. Correct and resubmit.
141 PARAMETER CODE NOT IN SYSTEM
The indicated parameter code is not defined in the STORET system.
The entire sample was not stored. Check the parameter code for
correctness and resubmit. Call STORET User Assistance at EPA
Headquarters for information on requesting a new parameter code.
142 TOO MANY PARAMETERS FOR PN CARD - MAX ALLOWED=500
A maximum of 500 commas is permitted on a set of PN and PN
continuation cards used to specify paraemter codes in a ?00 storage
procedure. These cards were not processed. Reduce the number of
parameter codes specified in the set, and resubmit.
143 PREVIOUS PN OR PNOFF CARD INVALID-CARD IGNORED
Ina 700 data storage transaction, an error was found on the previous
PN or PNOFF card. Subsequent cards in the storage deck will be
ignored until the next PN or PNOFF card is found. Check for
characters in a PN field, for the presence of a PNOFF card
immediately preceding a PN card, and for a non-blank character in
columns 7-80 of the PNOFF card. Correct and resubmit the ignored
cards.
144 INVALID SMK CODE
An invalid system multipurpose key (SMK) code has been detected
within a DC or SC card in a 700 storage procedure run. One of the
following conditions exists: (1) A media code (MED keyword) did not
precede the SMK keyword, and is required if SMK is present; (2) A
MED keyword with a value not water related was specified, but the
SMK keyword is missing or is blank and not set equal to a value. If
media is other than water, an SMK is required; (3) the specified SMK
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-24
-------
value is either zero or not numeric; or (4) the specified SMK value
was not found in the appropriate STORET system authorized SMK values
table. The DC or SC card is ignored along with any continuation
cards. Correct and resubmit.
145 INVALID MEDIA CODE
An invalid media code (MED keyword) has been detected within a DC or
SC storage card in a ?00 storage procedure run. Either (1) the
value specified is greater than 8 characters in length or was not
found in the STORET system table for authorized media values, or (2)
an SMK keyword was specified, but the media code was for a water
related medium. The DC or SC card is ignored along with any
continuation cards. Correct and resubmit.
146 INVALID UMK CODE
An invalid user multipurpose key (UMK) code was detected in a DC or
SC card in a ?00 storage procedure run. A UMK keyword must be
preceded by both a media keyword (MED) and a system multipurpose
keyword (SMK), and the media value must be a medium other than
water. Also, check that the specified UMK value is not greater than
eight characters in length and does not contain an asterisk (*).
The entire DC or SC card and any continuation cards were ignored.
Correct and resubmit.
147 This error message is no longer in use.
148 INVALID VALUE FOR REACH CODE CHECK DIGIT
In a 701 station storage procedure, a reach code check digit value
was specified in column 74 of the location description card (4 card)
that was invalid for the reach code specified in columns 52 through
62 on the card. The station was not stored. Check that the correct
reach number was coded, and if correct, check the reach retrieval
directory for the correct check digit for this reach. The REACHRET
operand of the STORET command procedure named %BATCH can be used to
obtain a listing of stream reach numbers and their associated check
digits. Correct the 4 card and resubmit the entire storage deck.
149-150 These error messages should not be encountered by users. Should you
receive one, however, please call STORET User Assistance.
151 ERROR FOUND READING CARD FILE
The STORET system was unable to read the input data set containing
the data storage transactions that were submitted for processing via
either a %STORE or %SUBMIT command procedure. No data were stored.
Either the referenced input data set was empty, or it had an
improper logical record length. Under TSO, the Irecl must be 88 for
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-25
-------
a line numbered data set or 80 for an unnumbered data set; under
WYLBUR, the Irecl must be 80 or the data set must have CARD as an
attribute. Correct and resubmit the entire deck.
152 INCORRECT FORMAT
In a ?00 data storage transaction, either an SC card was used
immediately after a PN card, or a DC card was used without a
preceding PN card. The data on the card were not stored. SC cards
must follow an AC, A, or PNOFF card, and DC cards must follow a PN
card. Check the order of the storage cards in the data storage deck
and resubmit the card that was not stored.
153 CONTINUATION REJECTED DUE TO PREVIOUS ERROR
An informational error message. The continuation cards to a
preceding SC or DC card in a 700 or ?04 storage run were ignored due
to a previously found error. Check the error given for the SC or DC
card in error, correct, and resubmit the unprocessed cards.
154 VALUE NOT ALLOWED FOR PARAMETER DELETE
A value field was found immediately after a PD field in either a SC
or DC card within a 700 or 704 storage procedure. No such value is
allowed for a request to delete a previously stored value. The
entire card, along with any continuation cards, is ignored. Check
the coding on the card, for example, whether the value was to have
been changed, which requires a PC code followed by a value.
Correct, and resubmit the affected cards.
155 STATION CODE ALL NOT PERMITTED
A value of ALL is not valid for a primary or secondary station
code. The station was not stored, and all cards in the 701 storage
deck were ignored. If this value had been entered for a primary
station code, enter a proper value, which must be unique within the
agency specified on the A card. If this value had been entered for
a secondary station code, either respecify the code or remove it as
one of the station's aliases. All secondary station codes must also
be unique within the agency. Resubmit the entire station storage
request.
156 This error message is no longer in use.
157 CATALOGING UNIT CODE NOT IN SYSTEM
In a 701 station storage procedure, the 8 digit USGS cataloging unit
code specified in columns 52-59 of the location description card
(Header Card 4) was not found in the STORET master file of valid
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-26
-------
hydrologic codes. The station was not stored. The sitution can be
overriden by contacting STORET User Assistance.
158 LATITUDE LESS THAN REACH MINIMUM LATITUDE
The station latitude specified in columns 7 through 13 of the
latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) is less than the minimum
latitude allowed for the reach. The station was not stored.
Included within the Reach Master File are a minimum and maximum
latitude and longitude that envelops all points on the reach.
During station storage, these latitude and longitude limits arre
compared with the latitude and longitude specified for the station
on the Zero card. Check the value specified, and if correct,
contact STORET User Assistance who can override or correct the alues
in the Reach Master File.
159 LONGITUDE LESS THAN REACH MINIMUM LONGITUDE
See error message 158.
160 LATITUDE GREATER THAN REACH MAXIMUM LATITUDE
See error message 158.
161 LONGITUDE GREATER THAN REACH MAXIMUM LONGITUDE
See error message 158.
162 REACH NOT IN SPECIFIED STATE/COUNTY
The state/county code for the station, as specified in columns 68
through 72 of the station card (S Card), was not found in the Reach
Master File, which contains the codes (up to eight) for each county
that the reach flows through. The station was not stored. Check
the value specified, and if correct, contact STORET User Assistance
who can override the values in the Reach Master File.
163 REACH MILEAGE GREATER THAN REACH LENGTH
The reach mileage coded for the station in columns 66 through 73 of
the location description card (Header Card 4) is greater than the
maximum length of the reach as defined in the Reach Master File.
The station was not stored. Correct and resubmit the entire ?01
station storage run.
164 INVALID REACH CODING - ON OR OFF INCORRECT
An invalid value was coded in columns 63 through 65 of the location
descripton card (Header Card 4); the only valid values are ON or
OFF. The station was not stored. Check that the field was not left
WO-DE SEP 1986
A3-27
-------
blank, or that a zero was coded instead of an oh, or that ON was
spelled NO. Correct and resubmit the entire 701 station storage run.
165 LATITUDE LESS THAN CATALOGING UNIT MINIMUM LAT
The station latitude specified in columns 7 through 13 of the
latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) is less than the minimum
latitude allowed for the cataloging unit specified in columns 52
through 59 of the location description card (Header Card 4). The
Catloging Unit File, which is checked during new station storage,
contains a minimum and maximum latitude and longitude that envelops
the entire area of the cataloging unit. This lat/long table is
separate from the Reach Master File lat/long table, and if this
error message is encountered, error message number 158 was probably
also generated. The station was not stored. Check the value
specified, and if correct, contact STORET User Assistance who can
override or correct the values in the Cataloging Unit File.
166 LONGITUDE LESS THAN CATALOGING UNIT MINIMUM LONG
See error message 165.
167 LATITUDE GREATER THAN CATALOGING UNIT MAXIMUM LAT
See error message 165.
168 LONGITUDE GREATER THAN CATALOGING UNIT MAXIMUM LONG
See error message 166.
169 ERROR IN RANGE TABLE - JOB TERMINATED
This error message should not be encountered by users. Should you
receive it, however, please call STORET User Assistance.
170 VALUES FOR PARNOS 84000-84999 MUST BE IN QUOTES
Parameter numbers 84000 through 84999 have been reserved for
paraeters that have alphanumeric values. In ?02 and ?03 storage
procedures, these values must be enclosed in single quotation
marks. The D Card was ignored. Correct and resubmit.
171 MISSING DEPTH/SMK
In a 700 storage procedure, if the media keyword (MED) and the user
multipurpose key (UMK) are specified on an SC or DC card, the system
multipurpose key (SMK) must also be specified. The SC or DC card
was ignored. Correct and resubmit.
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A3-28
-------
172 This error message does not pertain to Water Quality File data
storage.
173 VALUE FOR PAQ NOT VALID
A value following a PAQ keyword (used for the storage of aquifer
data) on an SC or DC card in a 700 storage procedure must be either
7 or 8 characters in length, and the first 3 characaters must be
numeric. The SC or DC card was ignored. Correct and resubmit.
174 AMBNT AND NONAMB ARE MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE
Both of these level 2 station type codes were specified on the
station type card (T Card) in a 701 station storage run, where only
one of them is permitted. The T card was ignored along with the
other station location storage cards associated with the T card.
The STORET help data set named STORET.HELP.STATION.TYPE provides the
most current list of station type codes along with rules of their
use. Correct the T card and resubmit the ignored set of station
location cards.
175 AMBNT OR NONAMB REQUIRED
In any ?01 station storage run, one of the level 2(a) station type
codes - either AMBNT or NONAMB, but not both - must be specified on
the station type card (T Card), and neither was found. The T card
was ignored along with the other station location storage cards
associated with the T card. The STORET help data set named
STORET.HELP.STATION.TYPE provides the most current list of station
type codes along with rules of their use. Correct the T card and
resubmit the ignored set of station location cards.
176 UPGR AND DOWNGR ARE MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE
Both of these Level 5 station type codes were specified on the
station type card (T Card) in a ?01 station storage run, where only
one of them is permitted. The T card was ignored along with the
other station location storage cards associated with the T card.
The STORET help data set named STORET.HELP.STATION.TYPE provides the
most current list of station type codes along with rules of their
use. Correct the T card and resubmit the ignored set of station
location cards.
177 UPGR/DOWNGR ONLY VALID FOR WELL AND SPRING
On a station type card (T Card) of a 701 station storage run, one of
these Level 5 codes was specified, denoting the station's
association with a well or spring, but neither WELL or SPRING, a
required Level 1 type code, was specified. The T card was ignored
along with the other station location storage cards associated with
WQ-DE SEP 1986
A 3-29
-------
the T card. The STORE! help data set named STORET.HELP.STATION.TYPE
provides the most current list of station type codes along with
rules of their use. Correct the T card and resubmit the ignored set
of station location cards.
179 VALUE FOR AQUIFER IS NOT VALID
Up to five aquifer codes can be specified on the latitude/longitude
(Header Card 0) card, each code beginning in column 38, 46, 54, "62,
or 70. Codes are either seven or eight characters in length; the
first 3 must be numeric, the last 4 or 5 alphabetic. If the code is
seven characters in length, the eighth position must be blank, so
that subsequent aquifer codes begin in the correct column on the 0
card. The station was not stored. Check the specified codes for
accuracy, correct the 0 card, and resubmit the station storage deck.
190 THE CARD PRINTED BELOW CAUSED THE PREVIOUS ERROR
Due to an error in an SC or DC continuation card within a ?00 or ?04
storage procedure, the entire set of continuation cards was ignored,
as noted in the preceding error message number 153. This error
message lists the specific continuation card containing the error.
Correct and resubmit the unprocessed cards.
191 INVALID PRECISION VALUE: 1-8 IS VALID
An invalid precision code was specified in column 28 of the
latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0). Numerical values one
through eight only are valid. Any other entry results in this error
message and the station is not stored. Correct and resubmit.
* U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE. 1987-720-252
WO-DE SEP 1986
A3-30
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
m
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-RET
WATER QUALITY RETRIEVAL
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sections Subject Page
1 Syntax Considerations 1-1
2 Building a Retrieval 2-1
3 General Descriptions of WQF Programs 3-1
4 General Retrieval Keywords 4-1
5 Machine-Readable Output From STORET 5-1
6 Basic Retrieval Programs and Their Special 6-1
Keywords
7 Advanced Retrieval Programs and Their Special 7-1
Keywords
Appendices
1
2
3
4
5
Subject Page
Index of Available HELP Files Al-1
Tables of WQF Keywords by Retrieval Program A2-1
Summary of Retrieval Keyword Descriptions A3-1
Summary of Most Frequently Used Purpose Codes A4-1
Retrieval Error Messages A5-1
WQ-RET
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
The purpose of this WQ-RET chapter is to describe, both in
general terms and in detail, the retrieval capabilities of the
STORET Water Quality File (WQF).
This chapter is divided into sections and supporting appendices,
as outlined in the Table of Contents. Section one describes the
syntax rules that generally apply to the use of the STORET
retrieval language and the Handbook. Sections two and three are
somewhat general in content, and present, respectively, a
discussion on structuring a retrieval request, and a general
description of each retrieval program. Sections four through
seven are detailed in content, and present complete descriptions
of the many keywords and programs which make up the WQF retrieval
capability. The appendices provide a number of indices,
summaries, and cross references to assist the STORET user.
In order to present the keywords and programs in an orderly
manner, they have been grouped into four logically-distinct
modules as follows:
Section Contents of Section
4 General Retrieval Keywords
5 Machine-Readable Output From STORET
6 Basic Retrieval Programs and Their Special Keywords
7 Advanced Retrieval Programs and Their Special Keywords
General retrieval keywords are those keywords which are not
program dependent, and are generally applicable to any WQF
retrieval. Section five describes advanced keyword capabilities
whose most effective use usually requires several months of
experience as an active STORET user. Sections six and seven
describe in detail the individual programs and those keywords
which are associated only with one or several specific programs.
Effective use of the programs described in Section seven requires
users to have several months of experience with the basic
retrieval programs.
Each keyword and program description includes all information
that pertains to the keyword or program being described,
including illustrative computer printouts. To facilitate the
location of a particular keyword and/or program description, all
pages of the detailed descriptions have the name of the
keyword/program printed in the upper right corner for quick
visual reference.
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-RET
WATER QUALITY RETRIEVAL
m
o
SECTION
1
SYNTAX CONSIDERATIONS
(Basic Retrieval; Third Edition)
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
-------
SECTION 1: SYNTAX CONSIDERATIONS
This section presents the various format requirements, notation
conventions/ and other rules that apply to the ways the WQF
retrieval language is coded. These syntax rules apply unless
otherwise noted.
The basic element of the STORET WQF retrieval language is the
keyword, which may or may not have a specific value associated
with it. Each such keyword and/or keyword/value combination is
referred to as an instruction. As illustrated in Section 2,
Building a Retrieval, a WQF retrieval request is composed of one
or more instructions which define exactly what information is to
be retrieved from the WQF, and how the information is to be
presented. These instructions can be coded on 80-column punched
cards for entry through a medium-speed card reading terminal, or
entered as lines of information within a data set using a
keyboard type terminal. For the purposes of this Handbook, a
punched card and a line in a data set are equivalent.
1.1 INSTRUCTION FORMAT (FREE FORM)
Most WQF retrieval instructions can be specified in
free form, where one or more instructions can be
entered on each line of the retrieval request.
Retrieval instructions are specified as pairs of
keywords and values, entered as 'keyword^value,' with
an equal sign separating the keyword and its value.
Some STORET keywords have no associated values, and are
entered as 'keyword,1.
A comma must follow each instruction, including the
last instruction within the retrieval request.
Embedded commas within values are not permissible. If
an instruction contains both a keyword and a value, a
comma follows the value; if no value is associated with
the keyword, a comma follows the keyword.
A series of instructions may be entered on a single
line as long as no more than 80 characters or positions
are used. Except as otherwise noted, the last
character on any line must be a comma; an instruction
cannot be continued onto a subsequent line.
A retrieval request may be made up of any combination
of single and/or multiple instructions per line. This
capability allows instructions to be specified in
logical groups or combinations on a line by themselves,
as illustrated in the steps described in Section 2,
Building A Retrieval.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
1-1
-------
The first instruction on a line normally begins in
column one, though it may begin in any column.
Subsequent instructions on a line normally begin
immediately after the preceding comma, though one or
more blanks may be left between instructions. The
following retrievals are equivalent.
PGM=RET, PGM=RET,PURP=305/STA,
PURP=305B/STA, or A=14AGNFS9, S=071723,
A=14AGNFS9, P=ll, P=300,
S=071723,
P=l1,P=300,
1.2 ORDER OF INSTRUCTIONS WITHIN A RETRIEVAL REQUEST
The first instruction within any retrieval request must
be the 'PGM=pr©gram-name,' instruction which denotes
the beginning of a retrieval request, and which
specifies the WQF retrieval program to be executed.
There are a number of other instructions which must be
specified in a certain order when used in conjunction
with certain other instructions. For example, when
selecting stations, the agency keyword (A) must precede
its associated station keywords (S); and the county
keyword (CO) must follow the state keyword (STC) to
which it applies. Positional requirements are noted in
the keyword detailed descriptions in Sections 4 through
7.
1.3 SPECIAL NOTATION USED IN THIS DOCUMENT
Where the user must code a blank character or blank
space (a column in which nothing is coded), it will be
indicated in this document by a lower case letter b
with a slash through its stem (b).
When coding retrieval requests to be processed by a
computer, care must be exercised to ensure that the
letter oh (0) is not mistakenly coded in place of the
digit zero (0), or vice versa. Readers should note
that the capital letter oh of the type face used in
this Handbook is noticeably rounder than its slimmer
zero. Similarly, the capital letter eye (I) or the
little letter el (1) must not be confused with the
digit one (1).
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
1-2
-------
1 .4 UPPERCASE AND LOWERCASE
Within each keyword description is a discussion of the
various values that can be associated with the
respective keyword. These values are expressed either
as lowercase letters or words, as numbers, or as
uppercase letters or words.
If the value is lowercase, then that value can be
assigned a variable quantity or expression, as defined
in the keyword description. For example, ' PGM=program-
name, ' means that the value for the PGM keyword, i.e.
program-name, can be specified as RET, INVENT, PLOT, or
any other acceptable WQF retrieval program name.
If the value is either a number or in uppercase, then
that value cannot be a variable and must be entered as
shown. For example, DSROC= \2f , means that the only
acceptable instruction formats are 'DSROC*!,1 or
'DSROC-2, '.
All keywords are given in uppercase letters which
indicates that they must be specified as indicated.
Abbreviations are not acceptable.
1.5 NOTATION CONVENTIONS
The presence of braces I f enclosing a column of two or
more values indicates that an optional choice exists
among the enclosed values, but that one of the enclosed
values must be specified if the associated keyword is
specified within the retrieval request. For example,
the format of the beginning date keyword is shown as:
fyymmddl where yy=year
BD= Jyymm >, mm=month
(yy J dd-day
which indicates that if BD is specified, then it must
be assigned one of the kinds of values shown within the
braces.
1.6 DEFAULT VALUES
The system assumes a default value for any optional
keyword not supplied by the user. These default values
are described in the section relating to the specific
keyword. Whenever a default value is overridden, the
entire default is replaced.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
1-3
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-RET
WATER QUALITY RETRIEVAL
CO
SECTION
2
BUILDING A RETRIEVAL
(Basic Retrieval; Third Edition)
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
-------
SECTION 2: BUILDING A RETRIEVAL
This section describes, in general terms, the process of building
a retrieval request, which when processed by the STORET system,
results in the selection of the water quality station and
parameter data of interest, presented in the desired format. The
logical sequence of the six basic steps which make up this
process parallels the order in which the detailed descriptions of
the retrieval keywords and programs are presented in subsequent
sections of this chapter.
A WQF retrieval request is composed of one or more instructions
which define the information to be retrieved, and how the
information is to be presented. (These instructions are entered
to the STORET system as 80-column punched cards or as lines of
information via a keyboard terminal.) An instruction is composed
of a keyword — an English word, letter, or expression which
generally depicts the function that the keyword performs— and,
in most instances, an associated value which assigns a specific
quantity or other 'value' to the keyword. Thus the keyword and
value instruction is the basic element of the STORET WQF
retrieval language, and valid combinations of these make up a
retrieval request. The following paragraphs present a logical
approach to selecting a combination or set of instructions for
most retrieval applications.
THE BASIC STEPS OF BUILDING A RETRIEVAL
As a user progresses through the six basic steps shown on the
next page, the retrieval request evolves from general to
specific. Initially, a user will find he must consider each of
the steps shown, and select those keywords (relevant to each
step) which will result in the desired retrieval. However,
frequently a user will be able to perform a different analysis by
using an 'old1 retrieval, and redoing part of the steps. For
purposes of emphasizing the keywords pertinent to each step, the
keyword and value being described will be underlined.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
2-1
-------
STE
APPLICABLE KEYWORDS
SELECT
APPROPRIATE
RETRIEVAL PROGRAM
STATE
PURPOSE
OF RETRIEVAL
IDENTIFY
STATION (s)
OF INTEREST
IDENTIFY
PARAMETRIC DATA
OF INTEREST
SELECT
PROGRAM-SPECIFIC
KEYWORDS
SELECT
PRINT CONTROL
DESIRED
SUBMIT
FOR
PROCESSING
PGM
PURP
A,B,S,RMI,LT,..
P,BD,UD,ANC,..
SORT,SCALE,DR,.
PRT,SHIFT,HEAD,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
2-2
-------
STEP 1: SELECT APPROPRIATE RETRIEVAL PROGRAM
The keyword PGM is used to select the appropriate WQF
retrieval program. Some programs are appropriate to
those whose interests are geographically oriented,
while others are suited to those who are more
interested in one or more water quality parameters,
regardless of their specific geographical location.
The following list summarizes the primary functions of
these programs and the type of information they
provide:
Inventory of Parameters Sampled
INVENT list summary information on parameters sampled
(132 character line)
INV120 list summary information on parameters sampled
(120 character line)
Listings of Actual Sample Values
RET tabular listings of selected parameters
ALLPARM list sample values for all parameters
PUNCH punch selected parametric data onto 80-column
cards
Statistical Analysis of Parameter Data
STAND compare actual data values against standards
MEAN perform statistics on selected parameters
REG perform linear regression analyses on
parametric data
MSP plot selected statistics of parameter
values as functions of stations
PLOT plot data values as a function of time
Station Information Only
STA list station codes for selected agencies
INDEX list station header information
NOPAR select stations meeting specified sampling
criteria
LOC plot a map showing station locations
The first instruction in a retrieval request must be
the PGM keyword, whose value is one of the program
names listed above, such as:
STEP 1
PGM=RET.
Request tabular listings
of selected parameters.
Sections 6 and 7 of this chapter present detailed
descriptions of these retrieval programs.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
2-3
-------
STEP 2: STATE PURPOSE OF RETRIEVAL
The PURP keyword, which identifies both the purpose and
the ultimate recipient of the output of a retrieval,
must be specified in each retrieval request and falls
logically as the second step in building a retrieval.
In most instances the purpose will be to satisfy some
reporting requirement of Public Law 92-500 and the
ultimate recipient will be a Federal agency, a state
agency, an EPA regional office, or other user. The
information provided by this keyword is used in various
analyses of the uses made of the data stored in the
WQF.
STEP 2
PGM=RET,
PURP»305B/STA,
Request will satisfy
requirements of
Section 305B of
PL 92-500.
Appendix 4 to this chapter contains a summary of
frequently used PURP values.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
2-4
-------
STEP 3: IDENTIFY STATION(s) OF INTEREST
After the retrieval format has been selected with the
PGM keyword and the purpose of the retrieval has been
specified with the PURP keyword, the stations to be
used are identified for the retrieval. The WQF
provides several station identification keywords used
to define which of the approximately 500,000 sites
available within the WQF are of interest for a
particular retrieval. The several basic ways that
stations can be selected are listed below.
1. Stations may be selected by their agency code and
station number whether specifying individual stations
or a range of station numbers. Either primary and/or
secondary numbers may be used.
2. All stations within a geographical area may be
selected. In order for a station to be retrieved,
its correct lat/long must have been stored.
3. All stations located along a stretch of stream may be
selected, either on the main-stem only or on the
main-stem and its tributaries. In order for a
station to be selected, its river mile index (RMI)
must have been stored.
4. All stations within a specified state or states may
be retrieved.
5. Station selection may be limited to those within a
specified county. The county code must have been
stored for this method of station selection.
6. All stations within a basin (whether major, minor, or
sub) may be selected.
7. All stations within a specified 208 area may be
retrieved.
8. Stations may be selected by the presence of a
particular parameter or group of parameters or by a
specific type or types of station codes.
STEP 3
PGM=RET,
PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,
5=071723.
Request will select
station 071723, owned
and maintained by
agency 14AGNFS9.
WQ-RET
2-5
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
STEP 4: IDENTIFY PARAMETRIC DATA OF INTEREST
Data selection keywords enable a user to restrict the
parametric data retrieved to those specific parameters,
specific sampling dates, sampling depths, and sampling
conditions of interest. There are approximately 5000
unique parameters defined within STORET.
STEP 4
PGM=RET,
PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,
S=071723,
BD=730101,
P=11,P=300,
Request will select
all values for
temperature in degrees
Fahrenheit (P=ll) and
dissolved oxygen (P=300)
sampled since January
1, 1973 (BD=730101).
STEP 5: SELECT PROGRAM-SPECIFIC KEYWORDS
Most of the WQF retrieval programs have one or more
'special1 keywords. For example, the PLOT program has
a keyword which allows the user to choose symbols to
identify plotted data values. This keyword would
obviously not be applicable to programs whose function
is to print station descriptions. The example below
shows the use of the program-specific keyword DR used
to select decimal placement in RET retrievals.
STEP 5
PGM=RET,
PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,
5=071723,
BD=730101,
P=11,P=300,
DR=1.
Request will print
values for parameter
300 as whole numbers.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
2-6
-------
STEP 6: SELECT PRINT CONTROL DESIRED
The final step in building a retrieval is to determine
whether the standard print format for the chosen
program is satisfactory, and if not, what changes
should be made. The PRT, HEAD, SHIFT, and PRMI
keywords allow the user some control over the content
and format of the printed output.
STEP 6
PGM=RET,
PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,
S=071723,
BD=730101,
P=n,P=300,
DR=1,
SHIFT,
SHIFT causes the
station header
information to be
shifted from the
upper right hand
corner to the upper
left hand corner of
each page of the
printed output.
SUBMITTING THE RETRIEVAL FOR PROCESSING
Once the retrieval has been set up and visually checked
for omissions and coding errors, it is ready for
submission to the STORET system for processing by the
computer. The retrieval instructions chosen in the six
basic steps can be keypunched onto cards and submitted
via a card-reading terminal, or they can be keyed via a
keyboard terminal. Computer output generated by the
above retrieval is shown on the next page.
WQ-RET
2-7
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
a 9 M MR O JTONAI.OH 11 ~
V-fc-j. 14AGNIS9 701016 —
(JOY 0051 HI-T IM-PPII LI ASS OO C.SN-RSP IMHOIOH
^^.r>. ' — 00011 00100
Ql)
® © ©
IJATI P1HI IIHTII WAPI-H 1)0
f IIOM Ol PI Ml'
TO DAY 1 1 IT 1 AIIN MC/I
71/01/03 O'J 75 33 0 14
73/05/11 OH 30 49 0 11
73/06/04 09 00 63 0 9
73/07/05 09 10 69 5 R
73/OH/03 OB 30 69 0 II
73/09/1 1 09 15 66 0 II
73/17/70 10 50 33 0 14
74/05/lfi 10 0 10
74/06/13 09 30 60 5 9
74/06/76 O9 •>$ 0007 611 O 9
74/07/19 OR 10 O007 7R O II
74/011/77 10 30 O007 67 O
75/05/16 10 50 55 0 10
70/00/79 10 15 00 0
75/06/11 10 Oil O010 61 0 9
71/06/74 09 00 77 0
75/07/0? 1 1 00 11009 7fl 0 II
75/07/10 10 00 7H 0
75/07/15 10 40 71 0
75/07/77 1O 35 76 O
71/011/77 Oil 30 O009 6G 11 n
75/09/74 09 30 OJ 0
71/1 O/O? 10 00 50 0
75/10/07 || on 11005 11 n in
71/10/16 in jo 47 n
71/10/71 n on mm'-, 411 n ii
75/1 1/04 00 4 1 0
7f./04/7J 30 44 n ||
7C,/05/->H |5 (, | |
10 no?? 57 1
45 IHI44 47
7f./0f./ 10 I n b'l
7f /H7/1 1 Ml 71
7f»/nll/n 1 Ml {,n
I1 nii/ii (,'i
II (IH4II (j/l
1) Primary Station Code 15)
2) Secondary Station Code
3) Latitude and Longitude
4) Station Location 16)
5) State and County Codes
6) State and County
7) Major Basin 17)
8) Basin Codes
9) Minor Basin
10) Agency Code
11) Depth Units
12) Archive Class (00-online)
13) Station Type
14) Date sampled - required
information stored for
each sample. If no date
appears on the printout,
the date listed in the
preceding line applies.
(7\
^r*-~
IIS45
J\ ^.^
=Hi5) (j§)
^-'/TYPA/AMIINT/I.AKF
•0373137
V^
^s—.
\D
Time sampled - optional
information which may be
stored for each sample.
Depth of sample - optional
information which may be
stored for each sample.
The computer sequence
number (CSN) and the
relative station position
(RSP) values uniquely
identify the station and
are helpful to the STORET
programming staff in
resolving problems
encountered in retrieving
data.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
2-8
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-RET
WATER QUALITY RETRIEVAL
m
o
SECTION
3
GENERAL DESCRIPTIONS OF WQF PROGRAMS
(Basic Retrieval; Third Edition)
WQ_RET FEBRUARY 1982
-------
SECTION 3: GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WQF PROGRAMS
This section gives a brief description of each of the retrieval
programs available for use with STORET's WQF. Accompanying each
program description is an example of the type of computer output,
or report, produced by the program. Detailed explanations of
these programs and their associated keywords are given in
Sections 6 and 7 of this chapter. Summaries of the WQF retrieval
programs and keywords may be found in the appendices to this
chapter.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
3-1
-------
PGM=INVENT,
PGM=INV120,
The primary function of these two inventory programs is to
retrieve summary information on all of the parameters that have
been sampled at the stations specified in the retrieval request.
Information listed for each parameter includes the number of
observations, the mean value, variance, standard deviation,
coefficient of variance, standard error of the values, the
maximum and minimum values, and the beginning and ending sampling
dates for the data stored. INVENT utilizes a 132-character print
line; INV120 excludes the printing of the coefficient of variance
and the standard error so that the listing can print on a 120-
character line.
/TV PA/AHBNT/ STREAM
INDEX 1310001 002740 09440
MILES 0324 10 075O 60 079 70
PARAMETER
OOO10 HATER TEHP
000*1 STREAM FLOW
CLHT
NST-CFS
00076 TURB TRBIDHTR HACH FTU
001 16 INTNSVE SURVEY I DENT
00300 DO
00335 COD LOWLEVEL
004OO PH
00403 LAB PH
00410 T ALR CACO3
00425 HCO3 ALK CACO3
00430 COS ALK CACO3
OOSOO RESIDUE TOTAL
00530 RESIDUE TOT NFLT
OOS35 RESIDUE VOL NFLT
00610 NHJ*NH4- H TOTAL
O06I5 N02-N TOTAL
OO620 NO3-B TOTAL
00625 TOT RJEL N
00630 ND2tNO3 H -TOTAL
00665 PHOS-TOT
00669 PHOS-TOT HYDRO
HG/L
MG/L
SU
HG/L
MG/L
HG/L
HG/L
HG/L
HG/L
HG/L
HG/L
HG/L
HG/L
HG/L
HG/L P
MG/L P
7060140
47 56 00 0 111 79 00 0 2
MTH LITTLE BLKIT R AT HFNRY MINE
16079 IDAHO CARIBOU
PACIFIC. NORTHWEST 130600
UPPER SNAKE RIVER
71IDSURV 7BOI20
OOOO CLASS 00 C5H-R5P 0316401-0429290
RNX IIUMBER MEAN VARIANCE STAN DEV COEF VAR STAND ER MAXIMUM MINIMUM BEG DATE END DATE
17 3 7588 17 1389 3 48409 253776 845015 20 OOOO 7 OOOOO 77/06/09 81/11/24
1
1
7
1
1
K
TOT 7
1
1
1
1
K 1
2
TOT 1
K
TOT
2
K
TOT
X
1
K
TOT 7
K
TOT 1
K
TOT I
TOT 1
6 7230 143 941 11 9976 717429 3 79396 40 OOOO 8 OOOOO 77/08/30 81/08/25
79833 17 3B99 4 17OI2 2 31889 1 20381 IS OOOO 290000 79/05/09 81/11/24
776101 733E*08 4831 62 006210 1080 38 781601 771601 77/06/09 61/11/24
11764 7 83269 I 66312 184600 408216 12 5000 5 7OOOO 77/O6/09 HI/11/24
48999 67 7210 8 22926 1 09B70 1 88792 26 30011 4OOOOO 77/06/09 81/11/24
100000 100000 100000 76/11/06 78/11/06
12049 66 8873 8 17847 1 14658 1 87876 26 HOD 1 OOOOO 77/06/09 81/11/24
58213 348313 590181 077638 157732 B B500O 6 80000 '7/O7/06 61/11/24
39 750 4746 63 «B 9103 702627 19 6927 4]5 000 204 000 79/Q5/D9 61/11/24
OOOOO 000000 000000 000000 1 OOOOO 1 OOOOO 79/05/09 81/11/24
94 350 7082 31 84 1565 170237 IB B179 619 OOO J01 000 77/06/09 61/11/24
51875 84 4923 9 19197 1 77254 2 29799 37 OOOO 1 OOOOO 77/O6/09 61/11/24
33333 333335 577352 431014 333334 2 OOOOO 1 00000 '6/11/06 79/11/05
54210 75 B170 8 7O730 1 33096 1 99759 37 OOOO 1 OOOOO '7/O6/09 61/11/24
10000 6 43001 2 53575 497205 1 46401 8 OOOOO 3 30000 77/O8/30 7/11/28
OOOOO 2 OOOOO 2 OOOOO 77/O6/09 7/06/09
32500 6 68920 2 58635 598000 L 29317 8 OOOOO 2 OOOOO /7/O6/09 7/11/28
057800 002713 052067 901154 011647 24800O 013000 77/06/09 1/11/24
021400 0019B1 044906 2 07973 019904 10100O OOIOOO 77/06/09 7/10/25
OOIOOO OOIOOO OOIOOO 77/11/28 //11/26
018000 001654 040669 2 25941 016603 101000 OOIOOO 77/06/O9 7/11/28
054200 001563 039537 729471 017662 11 OOOO 020000 7//06/09 7/11/28
010000 01 OOOO 01 OOOO /7/10/2S 7/10/25
711052 197921 444083 625669 102063 1 9000O 100000 77/O6/O9 1/11/24
100000 100000 100000 77/07/06 7/07/06
680500 206173 454061 667250 101532 1 90000 1 OOOOO 77/06/09 1/11/24
108154 005130 071627 662273 019866 200000 01 OOOO 76/11/O6 1/11/24
010000 010000 010000 80/06/25 0/06/25
101143 005424 073648 726157 019683 20000O 010000 78/1 1/O6 1/11/24
050769 001141 033779 665346 009369 150000 020000 77/11/28 1/11/24
025000 000390 019748 789937 006062 05000O 010000 77/06/O9 0/11/17
042632 001020 031945 749322 OO7329 I5000O 010000 77/O6/09 1/11/24
031667 000617 024833 784193 010136 08000O 010000 16/11/06 1/05/19
010000 776E-10 OOOOO9 OOOBB1 000003 010000 010000 79/O3/20 81/11/24
020000 000383 019579 978945 005430 080000 010000 7B/11/O6 81/11/24
INDEX 1310001 002740 09440
MILES 0324 30 O75O 6O O79 70
PARAMETER
00010 MATER
00061 STREAM
00076 TURB
00095 CVDUCTVY
00300 DO
00335 COO
00400 PH
00403 LAB
00410 T ALK
00430 C03 ALK
O0530 RESIDUE
00535 BUI DUE
00610 *H3*NH4-
00615 N02-N
00620 HOS-N
00625 TOT RJEL
00630 N02fcN03
00665 PHOS-TOT
00669 PHOS-TOT
TEHP
PLOW
TRBIDHTR
AT 25C
SURVEY
LOWLEVEL
PH
CAC03
CACO3
TOTAL
TOT NPLT
VOL HFLT
N TOTAL
TOTAL
TOTAL
N-TOTAL
HYDRO
can
1 NST-CFS
JTU
HACH FTU
HICROMHO
HC/lT
HC/L
SU
SU
MG/L
HG/L
HC/L
HC/L
MG/L
HG/L
HC/L
HC/L
HG/L
HC/L
HC/L P
HC/L P
RHX a
K
TOT
X
TOT
K
TOT
K
TOT
II
TO*
K
TOT
K
TOT
K
TOT
V
TOT
UMBER
17
1O
6
12
20
17
19
1
20
14
16
18
12
70
1
I
7
1
7
1
1
I
'
MEAN
13 7588
16 7730
1 15000
1 79833
739 200
9 11764
7 48999
100000
7 12049
7 58213
7 55000
346 778
1 OOOOO
494 350
7 51875
54210
10000
37500
057800
021400
OOIOOO
01BOOO
054200
010000
046B3J
711052
100000
680500
108154
010000
050769
025000
042632
031667
01 OOOO
020000
2080140
42 SB 00 0 111 29 00 0 2
MTH LITTLE BLKFT R AT HENRY MINE
16029 IDAHO CARIBOU
PACIFIC NORTHWEST 130600
UPPER SNAKE RIVER
21IDSURV 780120
OOOO CLASS 00 CSN-RSP 0316401-0429790
VARIANCE
12 13B9
143 941
494999
17 3B99
3B253 6
2 83289
67 7210
66 887]
348313
054622
4591 00
7082 31
84 4923
75 6170
6 43001
6 68920
002713
001981
001654
001563
001576
197921
206173
005130
001141
OOO390
001020
000617
776E-10
000383
STAN DEV
3 48409
11 9976
703562
4 17012
195 586
1 66312
8 22926
8 17847
590181
233714
67 7569
OOOOOO
64 1565
9 19197
6 70730
2 53575
2 58635
052087
044506
040669
039537
039701
444883
454063
071677
033779
019748
031945
024B33
000009
019579
MAXIMUM
20 OOOO
40 OOOO
2 10000
15 OOOO
942 000
12 5000
26 3000
100000
26 3000
8 85000
OOOOO
15 000
OOOOO
19 000
7 OOOO
7 OOOO
OOOOO
OOOOO
OOOOO
248000
101000
OOIOOO
101000
110000
010000
110000
1 900OO
100000
1 90000
20000O
010000
150000
050000
1 50000
OBonofl
01 OOOO
060000
MINIMUM BEG DATE END DATE
7 OOOOO 77/06/09 81/11/24
6 OOOOO 77/06/30 81/OB/25
400000 '7/07/06 78/11/06
29000O 79/05/09 81/11/24
107 OOO 77/06/09 81/11/24
5 700
-------
PGM=RET,
The function of the RET program is to obtain, for selected
stations and parameters, listings of actual sample values, i.e.,
raw data values which have not been manipulated in any manner by
the WQF analysis programs. The listings show the sampling dates,
times, and depths of the parameters specified in the retrieval
request. As many as fifty parameters can be requested in a
single retrieval.
/TYPA/ANBIIT/LJUIC
00011
MTE TIME DEPTH WATER
TON OF TEMP
TO DAT peer FAUN
71/12/20 10 SO 33
74/05/16 M
74/06/11 09 JO 60
74/06/26 O9 23 OOOT 6B
74/OT/19 OB 1O OO07 78
74/08/37 10 » 0007 67
TS/Oft/16 10 SO 55
75/03/29 10 IS 60
T3/O6/11 10 OO O010 61
7S/O6/24 M OO 72
73/07/02 11 OO OOOf 78
73/07/10 10 00 7B
73/07/1S 10 40 71
75/07/22 10 15 7*
75/08/27 M 10 OOM M
71/09/24 » JO 51
79/10/02 10 00 SO
71/10/07 11 OO OOOS 51
75/10/1* 10 30 47
73/10/21 11 OO OOOS 4B
75/11/04 10 00 43
74/04/31 10 30 44
76/05/28 10 13 63
10 30 0022 57
10 43 0044 47
76/06/10 OB 1O M
76/07/11 11 OO 71
76/08/01 10 00 »0
10 IS 0020 48
10 30 0040 S4
76/08/15 OB 30 70
OB 43 O01S 71
09 00 0030 41
7t/09/lt 10 30 62
11 OO 0018 62
00301
DO
HC/L
13
1
1
1
D 0*
PI
t
071723 09070*000042 402OIO2ROO41
LOW L IEUT< 261DEG 8 THI PRON JCT 1182 AMD US43
26053 MICHIGAN OOCDIC
LAKE SUPERIOR 22120O
OHTOHMON RIVER-HIODLE BR OMTOMOOH •
14AGNF» 781016
O031 PEET DEPTH CLAM OO CSM-UP 0480198-0373137
100 00610 0104S 31 SOI
1 NH3+MH4- IRON TOT COU
N TOTAL PR TOT HF I KENDO
11 MO/L ue/L /1AAML •
SO 2BO 5
50 120 IBO
70 10
140
60 280 300
50 620 10
60 120
00
00
20
42
70
40
00
on
70
00
70
OO
00
SO
00
M (ISOK 70
60 050K 1OR
60 OSOB 1OO
BO O30X 50K
no osnx snu
BO 030 90
90 051K 160
60 050X 50K
HP IBO MO
SO MOK 100
on 130 SOK
HO 740
20 0 050K Snic
20 0 030K 120
WQ-RET
3-3
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
PGM=ALLPARM,
The primary function of the ALLPARM program is to obtain, without
specifying any parameter codes, tabular listings of actual sample
values (i.e., raw data values which have not been manipulated in
any manner by the WQF analysis programs) for all parameters
stored at selected stations.
230O40 POTO-riP6 OH
3* 00 18 O 077 IS 21 O 7
POTOMAC RIVFH AT GxrAT FALLS
24031 MRTLAND
IKMTH ATUurric 0214*0
O2111204
inonr
t4M03
/TTM/AKBfT/l
inn 0214001
HUM OOli 42
INITIAL
INITIAL Til
HBAL MTC
57/10/14 57/10/14 S7/1O/71 57/10/28 57/11/04 S7/11/11 S7/11/18 17/11/29
COUP
57/10/28
7850 17*0 9230 21Jn 1MO M20
SS7*
210
147
10
t
10
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
3-4
-------
PGM=MEAN,
The MEAN program performs a variety of user-specified statistical
calculations on requested parameters, and provides maximum
flexibility with regard to combining stations and grouping data
according to desired time frames. The statistical functions that
can be selected include maximum, minimum, mean, sum of squares,
variance, standard deviation, and other basic statistical
analyses. High and/or low data values can be eliminated prior to
analyses, and calculations can be performed on the logarithms of
the values. The program also can be used to calculate loadings,
dissolved oxygen saturation, temperature conversions, and un-
ionized ammonia.
071711 MOTM000041 40M10M0041
4ft 14 M 0 on » 49 0 1
um L uur« Mian a mi ram JCT u> Jure QMS
M091 NICMOM oaanie
nm
/TTM/MBT/LWI
IB/I
14/01/00
14/01/01
79/01/00
19/01/01
M/OI/00
74/01/01
77/01/00
77/01/01
m/u/oo
71/01/01
41 0000 7 40000
40 4000 • 14444
79/01/00
00/00/00
tmnon nnii
NM1NUM
41 J4
711 OOK 13 MOO
If 4977 • S1470
HI
7
90000
uooo
1H7I
• TOTU.
M/L
111 400 407 900
BOOOO O40000O 90 OOOO
3790O O040749 140 000
21040 OM1113 141 447
« 11 11 10
40000 ifloono 740 one 1900 on
9000O O400OOO 90 MOA 9 OOOnfl
jnn 0744449 147 •!* M4 9OO
Statistical calculations of selected parameters can be easily
obtained by the MEAN program. This run produced yearly (for the
years 1973 through 1978) and period-of-record groupings of six
parameters stored at station 071723. The blank areas of the
report reflect no data stored for that parameter for that period.
WQ-RET
3-5
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
PGM=PLOT,
The PLOT program plots the values of each selected parameter (y-
axis) for each selected station for the specified time period (x-
axis). Values plotted may take the form of raw concentrations
(e.g. mg/1) or loadings (e.g. Ibs/day). Options include scale
control and plotting of symbols. Plots are produced on EPA's
digital plotting equipment (CALCOMP) and disseminated to users.
StORET
071723 090706000042 402010280042
46 14 30 0 089 21 45 0 3
LONG L XFAST«.26IDEG 8 7HI FROM JCT US2 AND US45
26053 MICHIGAN GOGEBIC
LAKE SUPERIOR 221200
ONTONAGON RIVER-MIDDLE BR ONTONAGON R
I4AGNFS9 781016
0051 FEET DEPTH CLASS 00 CSN-RSP 0480198-0373137
MAT JUN
STARTING OATt 76/4 /23
JUL AUG
SAMPLE DATE
SEP
This PLOT program output plots the values of parameter 01045
(Iron, Total, ug/1) stored at station 071723 for the year 1976.
(Data were not stored for the period not shown on the plot.)
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
3-6
-------
PGM-LOG,
The LOG program plots a map of a user defined area, and plots a
symbol to denote the locations of and, optionally, the number of
observations of a specified parameter stored for all stations
within the area, using CALCOMP plotting routines. Printed output
from the mapping routine includes a listing of all stations and
their associated latitude and longitude coordinates. Plots can
also optionally include outlines of cities, lakes, reservoirs
(where available), and county lines. Plotted stations can be
tagged with coded identifiers which cross-reference to the
printed output.
.
-------
PGM=STAND,
The STAND program compares the observed values of selected water
quality parameters with a set of values (criteria) specified
within the retrieval request. These criteria could be the state
or Federal standards currently in force for a particular stream
segment of interest. Stored parameter values which do not
satisfy the criteria comparison are flagged with an asterisk (*)
in the program output. The program provides for various output
formats, including violations lists and violations summaries.
04M1M-0373137
71/04/04 MM
7J/M/11 MIS
74/07/1* M10
76/M/03 1030
76/M/16 11JO
620 0*
S40 0*
740 0*
071191
40 14 30 0 OM 31 4S O 3
L tiur< Miami > m ran JCT i
Two formats of the STAND program are shown above: Violations with
Supporting Parameters, and a Violations Summary.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
3-8
-------
PGM=INDEX,
The INDEX program prints station header information (up to ten
per page) for each station retrieved to enable users to easily
examine stations of interest.
STATS LOCATION NANP
PUNS STN NO SECONDARY STATION NUMBERS MINOR BASIN BASIN COOS
LAT/LONO/PREC STORED RATE MAJOR BASIN DEPTH
STATION TYPE CODE
RIVES NILE < IP I HVDR UNIT
INDEX < PRESENT I MILES ON I
11PM 22OBS LOUISIANA MISSISSIPPI R1V AT LULINO LA
Olft MISS IIV-NATCHES TO GULP 1021
I* 1} M 0 OW IS 4B 0 3 STORED 771003 SO CENTRAL-LOVER HISS B OPPTH 0
/TVPA/AHBNT/NTBEAH
....... -^^^ UXIISIANA MISSISSIPPI RIVER B H !•]
NATCHE1 TO OULP 1021
10 01 10 0 ON 10 00 0 2 STORED 78041} LONER MISSISSIPPI RIVES DEPTH 40
/TVPtfJMHT/HTHEMl •
INDEX I021SOO
MILES It) OO
I1ITSILL 2»T» LOUISIANA HEAD OP PASSES
110 LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-MATCHES TO OULP 1021
» Of OB 0 DM IS OS 0 2 STORED 7SO41B S C LONER MISSISSIPPI B DEPTH 1274
/TYPA/MtBMT/B1
111TSILL 210TS
III LONBB MISSISSIPPI BIVER-HATCBES TO OULP 1021
M 2S If 0 OM 41 21 0 2 STORED 7B041S S C LONER MISSISSIPPI R DEPTH 127*
/TYM/AMBNT/BTREM
I11TSILL 2SOBS LOUISIANA LULINO
III LONER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-HATCHES TO OULP 1021
2* J* It 0 090 21 40 0 2 STORED TB041B B C LONER MISSISSIPPI B DEPTH 12Tt
/TYPA/ANBHT/STRBAH
I11TBILL 21091 LOUISIANA LUTCHEB
111 LONER MISSISSIPPI RIVES-MATCHER TO OULP 1021
10 01 SS 0 090 41 4S 0 2 STORED 71Ml6 B C LOVES MISSISSIPPI B DEPTH 12Tt
/TYPA/AMBMT/BTRBAM
I11TBILL 11071 LOUISIANA HEN ORLEANS
114 LONER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-HATCHES TO GULP 1021
29 IT 01 0 090 M IT 0 > STORED 7R04IB • C LOWR MISSISSIPPI R DEPTH MTt
/TYPA/ANBNT/NTREAN
111TBILL 2104T LOUISIANA PLAOUENINE
lit LONER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-MICHES TO GULP 1021
10 IT IS 0 091 II S9 0 1 STORED 7SO41S S C LONER HI SSI HIPP I R DEPTH »TC
/TYPA/AHSNT/BIR1AII
111TSIU. 211» LOUISIANA ST PRMCISVIUS
117 LONER NISSISSIPPI RIVER-HATCHES TO OULP 1021
M 45 M 0 091 21 41 0 2 STORED 78O41S S C LONER MISSISSIPPI R DEPTH 117*
/TYPA/AMOT/STnAN
HIM mot LouiBiun TiRRtmnn PUISR van NORES
04T LONER HISS B-MTCHEB TO OULP 1021
M M 1°0_OM « « 0 2 STORED ?K»12 S CENTRAL LONER HISS B DEPTH 999
/TYPA/AMSNT/STRBAN
WQ-RET
3-9
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
PGM=STA,
The STA program produces a listing of all primary and secondary
station codes associated with a specified agency code.
1I4AOCT89
OM PH3
OM 00*
OM R22
OM LT OXBOW
OM MOMOOM1
OM M14000013
OM ABOVE MIDDY
OM MA OLAOE LK
OM HID BR OBT
OM KILLER DAH
OM HL-a
OM NON-2
OM HONDCAUX R-A
OOSNMBS POMD
OOP 070847
OOP 07MS3
OOP 07MS9
OOP 0708*5
OOP 070871
OOP 07M77
OOP 070881
OOP 07OW3
OM 403010*4107*
OM 40301M42071
OM 5 BL
OM 707000100039
OOB 7070001 OOOS 2
•P- 4111
STORET RETRIEVAL DATE 81/05/11
OM PM4
008 R15
MB 090
M8 MC-3
MS O4MOOM07
MB 0707010113
MS ABOVE BALE
MS ADDIS- 1
*
MB MID BRAN OUT
OOS MILLSTONE
MB HL-3
MS NON-3
OOS MONO-1
OOB MOHAN- 1
MS MOTURA
OOP 070B4B
OOP 070854
OOP 0708*0
OOP 0708**
OOP 07087]
OOP 070878
OOP 070884
OOP 070904
*
OOS 403010*47077
oos 5llonnnoofl
OOS 707000100044
nns 707000100053
NS-
TNS-
OOS FHS
OOS RIB
OOS 04051
OOS PRECIP
MS 040*030002
MS A-PRAHEU
OOS ABOVESHELTER
MS ADMIN AREA
OOS MIDDLE FORK
OOS MINERAL LAKE
OOB MHO UNIT
MS HONB-in
oos noose L CPCD
MS NORCRXCCCA
MS HOUNTAINNE
OOP 70849
OOP 7H055
OOP 708*1
OOP 70B67
OOP 7087]
OOP 70B79
OOP 70BB5
OOP 7090S
•
nns iminnin
nns n7nnninon4S
7745
77A5
OOS FM6
MS R19
MP 220008
OOS USFS R-9
OM 040*030005
OOS AA230E1200
Ons ABOVEBWAMP
OOS ADKIN SITE
HOB H1DDLEBURV
OOS MIRROR LAKP
009 HOCCARIN LK
nns HONWAUX
Ons NOOSF LAKP
Ons MORGAN LK 11
MS HOUHTAIN5H
OOP 0 0850
OOP 0 0856
OOP o na*2
OOP n OR6R
OOP 0 M74
nnp OTftRflo
nnp 070BR6
nnp 070906
nns 7n7nnnmm 1 1
ons MID
nOS R20
OOS ANTHONY
MS 010*000019
OOS 0511000008
ons ABOVE
MS ABV FERT
OOS ADMIN SITE 0
nns HILL CREEK
Ons MITIGAHKl
nns MOLL LAKP
nns HONDEMIX IN
nns HOMP LK cc
nns MOROAH LK cc
ons HSH-i
nnp 07nes
nnp 070B5
OOP 07086
onr 07086
OOP 07087
nnp 070DB
OOP O7O9n
'•
nns HITTI P RFAV
Ons 7n7nnOlOOn47
oos 70707001 7 U
OOS MUS
nns m
OOS FERT MAX
OOS 040513OM3
OOS 0511010010
OOS ABOVE LOLETA
OOS ABVFRT7778
OM AOMIN SITE 2
•
OOB HILL L
OM HL-1
OM MON-I
nns MONDEAUX OUT
OOS HOOSEHD HELL
nns KSH-j
nn 070852
no n7nasR
nn 070864
On 070870
nn D70B7*
nn 070482
On 070902
OO 07O9M
•
OnS 40S090O11 U
nns 707000100038
nns 707000100051
OOS 9030501 O
This run of the STA program produced a listing of the 4,111
primary station codes and 2,765 secondary station codes (a
portion of which is shown here) associated with agency 14AGNFS9.
This listing is sorted in station code sequence, reading left to
right, top to bottom.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
3-10
-------
PGM=PUNCH,
Output from the PUNCH program is a deck of 80-column punched
cards containing the station codes, sampling dates, and data
values for up to six parameters. These cards may be used as
input to a user-written program and submitted through a card-
reading terminal.
JTTT^TV:---'
(7
0
rn. _— tr-pr^
-.n.-a "'•,'.A-
lOOOOOBOOOOb 0 0
W. jj'Ji-I-'J.' " •^-il'.'iSCI
D
1
OOOOOO 00 0000000 OtO
1
'A-'/T.-^S.-iio ••••- '.'
li .
1
00 0000000000 Od 00
. .. BtOOltl
•^-9 = .y
1
\
00 0000090
m 111 m 111 m 111 111111111111111, 1111111111111111111111111111111,11111111111 r
2222222222222222J222222 222222222.2222222«22222222222222 22222222,2222222S222222
31333331333J3333<333 "33333 3113]]3 , 333333333J133 13333333333333333J333333333333
4 4 4 4 4 4 I 4 4 <4 « 4« 4 4 4 « 4 4 4 4 « « 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4.4 4 iH 4 4 414 I 4!i't1(4 4 4 «I 4 4144 4 4 41» 4 4 I 4 4 4 <4 4 4« 4
SSiSlSSSSSSSSSSiSS5SSS5S 5SSS5 SSSSSSS,SSiS] SSI SSSSSiS SS SSS.SSSSSSSjSSSS5S5S5
EECEiEEtCEEIECEiEESEEECSCiiEEGEESCEGEEEitEIf(tiE(ES«GEEf1EE
-------
PGM=MSP,
The MSP (Multiple Station Plot) program performs a number of
statistical computations on the values of selected parameters,
and plots the resulting values as a function of the stations
selected. The program allows the user rather extensive control
over the format of the resulting plots. Parameters to be
plotted, scaling and axes control, statistical values to be
plotted, stations to be grouped, and line printer or digital
plotter output are all user-optional specifications.
?S- C
30
SO
MULTIPLE srnnud PLOT IMSPI
FROM 690121 TO 761027
90 ,20
PLOT NO I
210 MILES
210 MILES
This run of the MSP program plots the max, mean, and min values
of dissolved oxygen sampled over a seven year period at stations
located along a 180-mile stretch of a river.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
3-12
-------
PGM-REG,
The REG program allows the computation of the best-fit straight
line relationship between a parameter and time, between two
different parameters at the same site, or between the same or
different parameters at two different sites. The program permits
specification of features of the linear regression analysis to be
performed, including the specification of time periods, and
maximum abscissa and ordinate values.
NUtBLR OF 3V1PLE POINTS
bUMHARY PAGE
LUHRbLAllON 1 REGHI »SION ANA1V->IS TWO OUALITY PAHAHbTrRS SAIt M Ft
STATION 070001 LOtK' LAKt 10 II E KAn.HiMl.tr
I LONllTUDI 4b 14 31 2 OKI 21 48 0 1
PAHAHI.rb«
00011
OOJOO
KbUUl Ei FbD
ANALYolb FROM I47J/ 1
UATLK
DO
1976/ 7
FAUN
Mu/L
KH. LIVED
ANAlValb tKOI 1V7J/ I/ J TO H76/ 7/1*
ri I INI
JKIlilN In U 0
(.ORRbLAFlON (.O
ItNT Of HETtlMINAriUH
II 24J •
-0
0 41
SIANDARD FRHOR 0> lariH\rt 0 54228
STANDARD bRRUH OF INflft-LPT ll 5101U
bTANDARD I RROR OP blOPu U OU908
T VAlUb rOH INThH^fPr jl J34J2
I VALUb tOH BLOPl 14 1131J
44 2SOU S5 5000 66 7500
HATF R TtMP FAHN
This run of the REG program displays the best-fit straight line
relationship between two parameters (water temperature and
dissolved oxygen) at a single station location. A summary of the
statistical computations performed is provided on a summary page
which accompanies the REG print plot. The asterisks appearing in
the plot margin denote the intercepts of the regression line with
the plot axes. Users may draw a line between these points to
show the regression line.
WQ-RET
3-13
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
PGM=NOPAR,
The NOPAR program performs station selection only, and produces a
summary printout and three optional files which identify those
stations meeting specified sampling criteria based on minimum
sampling frequencies of parameter groups for specified time
periods. A representative output is not shown below since the
primary purpose of the NOPAR program is to produce a computer
file of station data which will be read by a subsequent retrieval
utilizing another WQF retrieval program.
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
3-14
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-RET
WATER QUALITY RETRIEVAL
CO
m
o
SECTION
4
GENERAL RETRIEVAL KEYWORDS
(Basic Retrieval; Third Edition)
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
SECTION 4: GENERAL RETRIEVAL KEYWORDS
This section describes in detail those WQF retrieval keywords
that generally apply to all or most of the WQF retrieval programs
available to STORET users. This group of general retrieval
keywords is divided into five logically distinct categories
titled: Retrieval Identification Keywords; Station
Identification Keywords; Data Selection Keywords; Print Control
Keywords; and Miscellaneous Retrieval Keywords.
The order of these categories, as well as the order of the
keywords described within each category, parallels the suggested
sequence that a user should follow when considering keywords for
inclusion into a retrieval request. The Retrieval Identification
Keyword category contains two keywords, PGM and PURP, both of
which are required for all retrieval requests, and which
logically are the first keywords specified in any retrieval.
These are followed by one or more of the station identification
keywords that are used to specify which sampling stations are to
be selected in the retrieval request. The data selection
keywords define which water quality parameters and samples are to
be selected for the stations specified, and how the samples
containing those parameters will be treated. The print control
keywords further define the format of the information that is to
appear on the retrieval output. Finally, the miscellaneous
retrieval keywords provide' additional ways to identify data of
interest.
The individual keyword descriptions contain extensive information
on the keywords, including what they are used for, what their
format and allowable values are, and how they are used with other
retrieval keywords and programs. The keyword name appears at the
top outside corner of the first page of each keyword description
to facilitate easy reference. If a keyword is required, the word
'required* will appear in the classification category of the
keyword description. Also included in each keyword description
are one or more examples which illustrate correct uses of the
keyword in various retrieval requests. Efforts were made to keep
the examples uncomplicated, in order to highlight the use of the
keyword being explained. To this end, portions of the following
standard format of keywords and keyword values will be used,
where appropriate, in all of the examples herein:
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,BD=730101,
P=11,P=300,P=400,P=610,P=1045,P=31501,
Appendices to the WQ-RET chapter contain a Table of Keywords by
Program which summarizes which keywords can be used with which
programs, and a Summary of Keyword Descriptions, which gives a
brief description of each WQF retrieval keyword. A listing of
the general retrieval keywords appears on the next page.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-1
-------
GENERAL RETRIEVAL KEYWORDS
Retrieval Identification Keywords
PGM
PURP
Station Identification Keywords
station selection keywords (selectors)
A,B,S
LT,L
RMI
STC,CO
BS
AREA
MASK
station restriction keywords (restrictors)
ST
STCNTY
U,ONLYU,NOTU
EXTRACT
ARCLASS
Data Selection Keywords
P RMKK
PM UD,LD
PARONLY D
PARH1,PARH2 BOT
PARU,PARF DSROC
PRV,PLV,PHV ANC
OUTSIDE UK
BD,ED AGGR
BT,ET IS
BG,EG C Function
R
Print Control Keywords
PRT
SHIFT
HEAD
PRMI
Miscellaneous Retrieval Keywords
INCLUDE
ECHO,NOECHO
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-2
-------
RETRIEVAL H
IDENTIFICATION =
KEYWORDS <
PGM name of WQF retrieval program
PURP purpose of retrieval
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-3
-------
PGM
CLASSIFICATION: Retrieval Identification Keyword; Required
USE: This keyword denotes the beginning of a retrieval
request and is used to specify the WQF retrieval
program to be performed.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
PGM=program-name, where program-name is one of the
following WQF retrieval programs:
INV120 MEAN INDEX REG
INVENT PLOT STA NOPAR
RET LOG PUNCH
ALLPARM STAND MSP
The functions of these programs are
described in detail in Sections
3, 6, and 7 of this chapter.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword must be the first keyword specified within
a retrieval request, and can be specified only once per
request.
In general, the keywords discussed in this section may
be used with any PGM option. The keywords which are
unique or special to the individual programs are
discussed in detail in Sections 6 and 7 of this WQ-RET
chapter. Appendix 2 to this chapter contains a summary
of keywords by program, which denotes which keywords
apply to which retrieval programs.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-5
-------
PURP
CLASSIFICATION: Retrieval Identification Keyword; Required
USE:
This keyword is used to identify both the purpose and
the recipient of each retrieval request. Retrieval
purposes are used to analyze the uses made of the
data stored in the WQF. This information can also be
used by the users of the system to determine how
' STORET's WQF supports their program requirements.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
faaaa/bbb eeee
PURP=
-------
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
Specify only once per retrieval request.
Appendix 4 to this WQ-RET chapter contains a summary of
the most frequently used PURP values.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data for a
state in support of
section 303(e).
Retrieve data for a
contractor in support of
the Coastal Zone
Management Act of 1972.
Retrieve data for a state
in support of the Water
Quality Inventory Report
requirement (the second
version cites the subsection)
PGM=RET,PURP=303E/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
or
PGM=RET,PURP=303(E)/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101 ,
PGM=RET,PURP=PL92-583/CON,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=305/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=ll ,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
or
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA.
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
80=730101,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-8
-------
STATION
IDENTIFICATION
KEYWORDS
Station Selection Keywords
Keyword Selects By
A,B,S Agency/Station
LT,L Latitude/Longitude Coordinates
RMI River Mile Index
STC,CO State/County
3
BS Ma3or/Minor/Sub Basin >
AREA Designated 208 Area §
MASK Station Masks °
Station Restriction Keywords
Keyword Further Restricts to
ST State
STCNTY State/County
U,ONLYU,NOTU Agency Codes
EXTRACT Station Attributes including
parameter presence and station type
ARCLASS Archived Data
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-9
-------
STATION IDENTIFICATION KEYWORDS
The STORET Water Quality File contains data values on water
quality samples taken from approximately 500,000 unique
collection points located on essentially all of the rivers,
lakes, streams and other waterways within and contiguous to the
United States. The Station Identification keywords described in
the following pages are used to specify which of these stations
are to be selected by a retrieval request. It is important, in
terms of both computer cost and ease of analysis, to use these
keywords to structure a retrieval request that selects the exact
stations in which you are interested. To this end, the following
paragraphs describe this station retrieval process in somewhat
more detail.
Station Retrieval Alternatives
There are several basic ways that station data can be retrieved
from the WQF. These alternatives and their keywords follow:
Selection Alternatives Keywords
1 stations by specific agency codes and/or A,B,S
station codes
2 all stations whose latitude/longitude LT,L
coordinates are within a user-defined
geographical area
3 stations along a length of a waterway RMI
using River Mile Indices
4 stations within one or more states STC,CO
and/or counties
5 stations by major/minor/sub basin BS
6 stations within any designated state AREA
areawide waste treatment management area
as defined by Section 208 of PL 92-500
7 stations selected by system and/or MASK
user-supplied masks through the EXTRACT
keyword
In addition to the selection alternatives mentioned above, there
are several ways that the set of retrieved stations can be
further limited. These alternatives and their keywords follow:
Restriction Alternatives Keywords
1 stations within one or more states ST
2 stations within one or more state counties STCNTY
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-10
-------
3
4
stations by specific agency code
stations with certain parameter or type
characteristics
archived data
U
EXTRACT
ARCLASS
Selectors vs. Restrictors
Station identification keywords are divided into two groups:
selectors and restrictors. The keywords ST, STCNTY, EXTRACT,
ARCLASS, and U, NOTU, ONLYU are restrictors. All other station
identification keywords are selectors.
At least one selector must be included in the retrieval request,
or no stations (and therefore no data) will be selected by it.
Optionally, one or more restrictors may be included whose
function is to further screen the selected stations.
Logic
Generally, only one selector should be specified per retrieval.
More than one selector may be specified, if necessary, but
caution should be used. Since each selector is processed
independently of the others, users may inadvertently select the
same station more than once. For example, if a retrieval
contained both the LT,L keywords (specifying a polygon which
encompassed part of a particular state) and the STC keyword
(specifying that same state), then, since LT,L and STC are both
selectors, the stations located within that part of the state
overlapped by the polygon (area B) would be retrieved, printed,
and analyzed twice, along with all other stations within the
remaining areas of the polygon (area A) and the state (area C).
LT=I,STC=nn,
(Stations in B are
selected twice)
(Stations only in B
are selected)
STATION SELECTION LOGIC
WQ-RET
4-11
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
The result is duplicated data that will result in an increase in
the cost of the retrieval and difficulty with analysis. The
logic employed by the restrictor keywords has the effect of
limiting or narrowing the number of stations retrieved. Using
the polygon/state example above, the specification of the LT
keyword (a selector) and the ST keyword (a restrictor for
retrieval by state) would result in the retrieval of stations
located only in area B since the stations would have to be in
both the polygon AND the state in order to be retrieved. There
will be no duplication of stations retrieved, and significantly
fewer total number of stations retrieved.
Selection Strategies
The set of station identification keywords allows for a number of
different keyword combinations. In fact, different combinations
of selector keyword and restrictor keyword pairs can result in
the same set of stations retrieved. For example, the A keyword
and a range of stations identified by B and S can be used to
retrieve all stations within a particular agency, which are then
narrowed by those stations associated with the agency but located
in a particular state (ST keyword). The same group of stations
could be selected by specifying the STC and U keywords.
Whenever stations are selected both by state and by an agency
code, users have a choice of specifying these criteria by either
a station selector keyword (STC or A,S) or a station restrictor
keyword (ST or U). The following guideline should always be
followed in determining which stations should be specified via
the selector keyword, and which should be specified by the
restrictor keyword. Since the system first retrieves those
stations specified by the station selector keyword, and then
narrows or reduces those stations via the station restrictor
criteria, the criteria that would expectedly find the fewer
number of stations should always be identified by the station
selector keyword. For example, if a user were interested in the
stations within one state of an agency whose station network
encompassed several states, the STC and U keywords should be
used. However, if it were known that an agency didn't have too
many stations, but that they were spread over a wide multi-state
area, the A, S and ST keywords would probably result in the more
efficient retrieval. By following this guideline in retrievals
which have either STC and U, or A,S and ST specified, users will
structure a more efficient retrieval since less data will be
retrieved, thereby minimizing the cost of the retrieval.
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-12
-------
A
B
S
CLASSIFICATION: Station Selection Keyword
USE:
These keywords are used to select a specific set of
sampling stations by specifying the agency code (A) of
the owner/agency, and specific station codes (S), as
established by that agency, or in conjunction with B,
ranges of station codes.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
A=agency-code,
S=station-code,
B=
used to specify the agency whose
stations are to be retrieved, where
agency-code is the one-to-eight-
character agency code assigned to
the agency responsible for collecting
and entering the data into the WQF.
used to specify a specific station
code, to select that station,
or to serve as an end point for
a range (in conjunction with
keyword B).
specified in a retrieval request
to switch modes from single
station selection to range of
stations, and back again.
DEFAULT VALUE: A: None.
S: None.
B: BH5,
NOTES ON USAGE:
The S keyword may specify either a primary or a
secondary station code, or if used with the B keyword
to delimit a range, may be a fictitious station code.
The A keyword must precede the first S to which it
applies.
Agency codes (A) and station codes (S) entered in the
retrieval are paired to form A and S pairs. Each
agency code is paired with all the station codes which
follow it, until superceded by another agency code.
WQ-RET
4-13
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
Usually, A and S pairs are used as station selectors,
with each,pair identifying one station to be retrieved.
The B keyword, if supplied, serves to re-set the search
technique/mode. If 'B=P,' is entered, subsequent A and
S pairs are used alternately as beginning and ending
points for ranges of primary (P) station codes. (The
first station specified in a range must be alpha-
numerical ly lower than the end-of-range station.
Alphabetic characters are lower than numbers.) 'B=S,'
has the same effect, but refers to beginning and ending
points of ranges of secondary (S) station codes.
'B=B,' refers to ranges that may include both primary
and secondary station codes.
'B= ,' is coded, together with a preceding 'A=agency-
code,' to turn off the range search. Subsequent A and
S pairs will be again used singly, and each will
retrieve one station.
Single stations are printed in the order requested;
ranges of stations are printed in increasing numerical
order. Agencies are always printed in the order
requested.
The A keyword is valid with all WQF retrieval programs.
For all programs except STA, INVENT, and INV120 if the
A keyword is specified, the S keyword must also be
specified. The A keyword may be specified alone with
INVENT and INV120 and is the only station selector
keyword valid with program STA. A and S pairs provide
the only valid station selection method for program
REG.
Up to 700 S keywords may be specified per retrieval.
A listing of the current agency codes is available in a
STORET help data set named AGENCODE. The STA program
(described in Section 6) may be used to obtain lists of
stations for agency codes of interest.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
When a specific network of stations, or one or more
specific stations, is of interest, these keywords
provide for the most efficient, and perhaps easiest,
way to define the stations within the retrieval.
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-14
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data from stations
with primary numbers between
070001 and 070009 for agency
14AGNFS9, and individual
stations 070021 and 070024
for the same agency. Note
the recommended practice of
repeating the agency code
whenever the B keyword
is re-specified.
Retrieve data from stations
with primary numbers 071721
through 071723 and from those
with secondary codes LONGL
through 0406020006 for agency
14AGNFS9.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,B=P.5=070001.
5=070009,A=14AGNFS9,B= ,
5=070021,5=070024.
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=305/STA,
A=l4AGNFS9,B=P,5=071721,
5=071723,A=14AGNFS9.
B=S,S=LONGL,5=0406020006,
WQ-RET
4-15
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
LT
L
CLASSIFICATION: Station Selection Keywords
USE:
The area containing stations of interest may be defined
by coding the latitude and longitude coordinates of
either 1) a set of vertices that form one or more
polygons, or 2) the center of a circle with a defined
radius. A polygon is a geographical area bounded by
straight lines connecting three or more vertices (a)
whose locations are pinpointed by their respective
latitude and longitude coordinates.
Two keywords, LT and L, are used to define this type of
station selection criteria. The LT keyword is used to
initiate a polygon search, or it may be set equal to a
number which invokes a search for those stations that
are in a circle whose radius is defined by that number.
The L keywords are specified in pairs, one pair for
each vertex of the polygon, or for the,center of a
circle.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
LT=I,
LT=n,
specifies that all stations within the defined
polygon are to be retrieved, including those
stations located at the vertices of the polygon.
specifies that all stations to be retrieved
are located within a circle whose radius is n
meters and whose center is defined by the
following single pair of L keywords, n may
be any numerical integer up to 7 digits.
WQ-RET
4-17
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
L=
dddmmsst
dddmmss
ddmmsst
ddmmss
dddmm
ddmir
ddd
dd
used in conjunction with the LT keyword
to specify the latitude and longitude
coordinates of one or more points, either
the vertices of a polygon or the center
of a circle. The first L in a pair is set
equal to the latitude and the second L to
the longitude, using any one of the
formats shown, where d stands for
degrees, m minutes, s seconds, and t
tenths of a second. Leading and trailing
zeros may be omitted.
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
The LT and L keywords are used in conjunction with one
another; if either is used, the other must be. The LT
keyword must precede all L keyword pairs to which it
applies. For each vertex, the latitude must be
specified before its longitude. (Within the
continental U.S., the degrees of latitude of any
location are less than the degrees of longitude of the
location.) Up to ten polygons can be defined within a
single retrieval each initiated with LT=I. A total of
700 vertices may be specified per retrieval request.
A "polygon" retrieval scans all stations within the
polygon whose vertices are specified by
latitude/longitude. The stations within this polygon
must have been stored with latitude/longitude
coordinates in order to be retrieved by these keywords.
Although the majority of stations stored within the WQF
have latitude/longitude coordinates stored, a small
percentage of stations do not. If you are aware of the
existence of a station but it does not appear in a
polygon retrieval, then it was stored without
latitude/longitude coordinates. Storage of
latitude/longitude coordinates became a mandatory
requirement in 1974.
Once a geographical area has been defined, any
latitude/longitude pair of that area may serve as a
beginning point and the remaining vertices of the area
may be specified in either a clockwise or counter
clockwise direction. Since the crossing of lines is
invalid, once a direction has been determined it may
not be changed for a given polygon.
Stations will be printed in increasing longitude within
latitude order, beginning with the southeastern most
station of the polygon.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-18
-------
There are no restrictions on the use of these keywords
with other WQF retrieval keywords. However, care
should be exercised when using their, with other station
selectors. The keywords are valid for all programs
except REG and STA.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
Retrieving stations by polygon is often helpful when
the area of interest is comprised of overlapping state
and basin boundaries. This station selector method is
also an effective way to determine the monitoring
networks that exist in a particular area of interest.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data for stations
within the specified polygon.
Print the station header
information for those stations
located within 10 kilometers
of the point 39 20 15 and
108 25 30.7.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
LT=I,L=4645283.L=8950,
L=4635,L=90,L=4610454,
L=8950102,L=46,L=8935,
L=4645283,L»8925.
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
PGM=INDEX,
PURP=104B6/EXAMPLE,
LT=10000,
L=392015,L=10825307,
WQ-RET
4-19
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
Specifying the coordinates of a polygon's vertices in
such a way that one or more lines connecting the
vertices (in the order defined by the sequence of L
keywords) cross other lines results in eliminating
desired areas. Stations located outside the polygon
described, say in area B in the diagram below, are
omitted from the retrieval.
WRONG WAY
RIGHT WAY
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-20
-------
RMI
CLASSIFICATION: Station Selection Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to initiate the selection of
sampling stations utilizing river-mile-indices.
A hydrologic, or river mile, index (RMI) is a numerical
code which identifies the location of a point on a
stream by defining its distance from, and hydrologic
relationship to, the mouth of the river system. The
index is composed of a major and minor basin code, a
terminal stream number, and other codes which identify
the direction of flow, stream level, and mileage
references which allow stations to be uniquely located.
The country has been divided into several major basins
and these have been further divided into minor basins.
Streams which flow into the ocean, into a large lake,
out of the country or into a dry area are terminal
streams (Level 1), and are numbered in a counter-
clockwise direction within a minor basin. Beginning at
the mouth of a terminal stream, the distance to the
first confluence is determined. This tributary is a
level 2 stream, and at the confluence a flag is drawn.
The flag is annotated with the level and index number
on the top and the mileage up the stream on the bottom.
The index numbers always increase as you go upstream
and are odd for those streams entering on the left and
are even for those entering on the right. The last
digit is zero so missed or new streams may be added
without disrupting the numbering system. This scheme
is continued until the headwaters are reached. After
completing the level 1 stream, a level 2 stream is
selected and the same scheme is used to index its
tributary streams which are level 3 streams. This is
done until all of the streams in the minor basin have
been assigned index numbers and mileages.
Parts of the following areas have RMI values stored:
Michigan, Northeast Region, Ohio River Basin,
Mississippi River, the Pacific Northwest, the Potomac
River Basin, and the Tennessee River Basin. If RMI is
available for the area, and if it has been stored, the
RMI keyword may be used to retrieve the stations.
WQ_RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-21
-------
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
The RMI keyword is coded on a card (line) by itself and
its values on the next card (line) in a fixed-field
format, where its various values must appear in
specific columns or positions on a line. Three types
of fixed field control cards (or line images) can be
specified, each of which must be preceded by the
keyword RMI- (without a trailing comma). These cards
are a 7 card, an 8 card, and a 9 card.
The 7 card is used to retrieve all stations above a
control point along a waterway, and is coded as
follows:
7 card;
Column or Position
1
7-13
The number
Contents
'T
14 - 19, 20 -
25 - 28, 29 •
33 - 36, 37 •
41 - 44, 45 •
49 - 52, 53 -
and 57 - 60
61 - 66
67
24,
32,
40,
48,
56,
Major basin, minor basin, and
terminal stream number of the
terminal stream.
The level 2-12 streams index
numbers are entered as needed
to describe the control point.
The last level entered is the
one for the stream on which the
control point is located.
The distance up the last
stream to the control point
to the nearest hundreth of a mile.
Comma (,)
The 8 and 9 control cards are used as a pair to
retrieve stations between two points along a waterway.
All of the 8 card and columns 14 through 53 of the 9
card describe the location of the upstream point;
columns 72 through 79 of the 9 card describe the
downstream point. These cards are coded as follows:
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-22
-------
8 card:
Column or Position Contents
1 The number'8'.
7 - 13 The major basin, minor basin
and terminal stream number
of the terminal stream.
14 - 19 The miles up the level 1
stream to the confluence of
the level 2 stream, or if the
upstream control point is on
the level 1 stream, the distance
to the control point (Base miles)
to the nearest hundredths of a mile.
20 - 25 The level 2 stream index
number.
26 - 31 The miles up the level 2
stream to the nearest hundredth
of a mile.
32 - 36 The level 3 stream index
number.
37 - 41 The miles up the level 3
stream to the nearest hundredth
of a mile.
42 - 45, 51 - 54, The index numbers for the
60 - 63, and 69 - 72 level,4 - 7 streams as
needed.
46 - 50, 55 - 59, The distance up the stream
64 - 68, and 73 - 76 that is indicated by the preceding
index number as needed.
A comma (,) must immediately follow the last entry
on this card.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-23
-------
9 card;
Column or Position Contents
1 The number '9'
14 - 17, 22 - 25, The index numbers for the
30 - 33, 38-41, level 8-12 streams as
and 46-49 needed.
18-21, 26 - 29, The miles up the stream that
34 - 37, 42 - 45, is indicated by the preceding
and 50 - 53 index number as needed.
71 Type of retrieval control desired.
Code "2" to retrieve stations only
on the main-stem. Code "4" to
retrieve stations on the main-stem
and on the tributaries below the
control point.
72 - 73 The level of the stream on
which the downstream control
point is located.
74 - 79 The distance up the indicated
stream to the downstream
control point.
80 Comma (,)
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-24
-------
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
Stations will be printed in upstream hydrologic order.
When main stem and tributaries are requested, all main
stem stations are printed followed by all stations on
each tributary, beginning with the tributary closest to
the terminal stream.
When using multiple sets of RMI cards within a single
retrieval request, all 7 cards should be entered
first, followed by all 8 and 9 card pairs.
An RMI card must precede each 7, 8, and 9 card. Each
7, 8, and 9 card must be ended with a comma; no comma
is to be coded after the RMI keyword. A station may be
physically located in a basin other than its terminal
basin. For example, a sampling station on the Ohio
River at Cincinnati would be physically located in
major basin 05 (Ohio River Basin); however, its
terminal major basin would be 10 (Southwest Lower
Mississippi Basin) since this is the last basin through
which water from the Ohio flows before it enters the
ocean.
There are no restrictions on the use of RMI with any
other retrieval keywords. However, care should be
exercised when using this keyword with other station
selectors. This keyword is valid for all programs
except REG and STA.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-25
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
>£,STREAM LEVEL
02^00020 «- INDEX NUMBER
03 MAJOR
14 MINOR BASIN
TERMINAL
STREAM
NUMBER
Using the river system shown above, the following will
retrieve data from all stations above point A.
012345678
1234S678901234S678*01234567I»012345678>01234567(9012145678*012345678*012345678*0
PG*-UT.roHF-305B/STA.
UI-
7 031400200003000010
P-11,F-300.P-400.
BD-730101,PHI,
003121.
To retrieve data from stations between points B and C
on the mainstern and on the tributaries below point C,
the 8 and 9 cards are utilized, as follows:
012345(78
12345678*012345678*012345678»012345678*01234S678*012345678>012345678»01234567890
PGM-RET.PUBP-305B/nA,
UI-
8 03140020133410000500038160001003116001002348,
ni-
* 402002818,
P-11,P-300,P-400,
BD-730101,Pmi,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-26
-------
Control Point
1 is 0.75 mile
up Gamma Creek.
Control Point 2 is
2.20 miles up Delta Creek.
Control Point 3 is 17.62
miles up Delta Creek.
003
OCEAN
z.zz
X: level number
Y: stream index
number
Z: mileage
Major Basin: 12
Minor Basin: 08
The following will retrieve all stations above control point 1 on
the map above, namely stations A, B, C, and D:
012345(71
12345678901234 9G7890123496789012J4 96709012349(7890123496 78 9012341(789012)4 567090
PON-INVENT, PURP-305B/STA,
1208002000090
000079,
The following will retrieve data from stations E and F on the
main stem of Delta Creek between control points 2 and 3. If a 4
were coded in column 71 of the 9 card (instead of a 2 as shown),
data from stations located on the tributary to Delta Creek
(stations G and H) would also be retrieved.
012349678
123496789012349678901234967890123496789012349678901234967890123496789012349(7(90
PCII-INVKirr,PURP-305B/STA,
MI- t
8 1208002000*63000030001762.
mi-
9 202000220.
WQ-RET
4-27
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
STC
CO
CLASSIFICATION:
USE:
Station Selection Keywords
These keywords are used to retrieve stations according to
the states and/or counties in which they are located.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
STC=state-code,
C0=county-code,
where state-code is a two-digit
numerical Federal Information
Processing Standards (FIPS)
state code. Leading zeros may
be omitted.
where county-code is a three-digit
numerical FIPS code identifying
the county or county equivalent,
such as an independent city.
Leading zeros may be omitted.
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
When one or more CO keywords are specified, they must
follow the STC keyword and value to which they apply.
STC can be specified without any following CO keywords
to retrieve all stations for all counties within the
state(s) specified.
There is no limitation on the number of times these
keywords can be specified within a single retrieval.
Care should be exercised, however, when these keywords
are used with other station selectors.
Stations are printed in random order within a county,
but counties always will be retrieved in numerical
order within a state regardless of order requested.
States are listed in the order requested.
These keywords are valid for all programs except REG
and STA.
Listings of the state and county codes are contained in
Appendix C to this part of the Handbook.
WQ-RET
4-29
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data from
stations in Gogebic(53)
and Ontonago(131) counties
in Michigan(26) as well
as Vilas(125) county in
Wisconsin(55).
Retrieve a summary of the
data for all stations in
the State of California (06)
in counties Sacramento (067)
and El Dorado (017).
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=26,CO=53,C0131,
STC=55.CO=125,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
PGM=INVENT,PURP=104B6/STA,
STO06,CO=017,CO=067,
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
The STC keyword should not be confused with the ST
keyword which is also used to request stations based
upon the state in which they are located. It should be
noted that STC is a station selector, where ST is a
station restrictor. When STC is used in conjunction
with another station selector, such as LT,L or RMI, it
could result in the retrieval of some stations twice.
The ST keyword should be used to restrict stations
retrieved (by means of a station restrictor) to those
in one or more states.
The keyword CO can not be used in conjunction with the
keyword ST.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-30
-------
BS
CLASSIFICATION:
USE:
Station Selection Keyword
This keyword is used to retrieve stations according to
the major/minor/sub basins in which they are located.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
BS=
Smmnnss)
mmnn >
mm )
where
mm is the two-digit major basin code
nn is the two-digit minor basin code
ss is the two-digit sub basin code
Acceptable values of BS include mm,
mmnn/ or mmnnss. Leading zeros of
one digit codes must be specified.
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
These codes designate the major, minor, and sub basin
in which a station is physically located, and should
not be confused with the terminal basin codes used with
RMI.
Listings of the major and minor basin codes are
contained within Appendix D to this Handbook. They can
also be obtained by listing the STORET help data set
named BASIN.CODES. Since sub basin coding is performed
at the state level, the applicable state office should
be contacted for information on sub basin codes.
There are no restrictions on the use of this keyword
with other WQF retrieval keywords. However, care
should be exercised when using this keyword with other
station selectors. The keyword may be used with all
programs except REG and STA.
Stations are printed in random order within the sub
basin/minor basin/major basin categories. Major basins
are printed in the order requested.
WQ-RET
4-31
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
If a sub basin is not specified, then all stations in
the major/minor basin indicated are retrieved; if both
a minor and sub basin are not specified, then all the
stations in the major basin indicated are retrieved.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data from
stations in the
Ontonagon minor basin (12)
of the Lake Superior (22)
major basin.
Retrieve a summary of the
data in the Sacramento River
Basin.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
BS=2212,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
PGM=INVENT,PURP=104B6/STA,
BS=1409,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-32
-------
AREA
CLASSIFICATION: Station Selector Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to retrieve stations located
within a designated state areawide waste treatment
management area as defined within Section 208 of
PL 92-500.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
AREA=area-name, where area-name is one of the designated
208 areas.
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
Stations are printed in latitude/longitude order within
the requested area.
A listing of all 208 areas defined within STORET can be
obtained by listing the STORET help data set named
SEC208.AREAS. Additional information can be obtained
from the publication titled "Water Quality Management
Directory", dated July 1, 1976 which lists designated
local and state WQM agencies, principal contacts, and
EPA regional contacts. The publication is available at
EPA regional offices or from the Program Management
Branch of the Water Planning Division, EPA
Headquarters, Washington, D.C. A recent map of the
designated 208 areas is shown on the next page.
A maximum of 10 areas can be specified per retrieval.
Latitude/longitude polygons defining the 208 areas were
computed utilizing the Census Bureau county data base.
Therefore, only those stations stored with a correct
latitude and longitude will be retrieved.
There are no restrictions on the use of this keyword
with other WQF retrieval keywords. However, care
should be exercised when using this keyword with other
station selector keywords.
This keyword is valid with all WQF retrieval programs
except STA and REG.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-33
-------
EXAMPLE(S) :
Retrieve data from
stations in the
Muskegon, Michigan
208 area.
Retrieve a summary of data
for all stations in the
Cape Cod, Massachusetts
208 area.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
AREA=MUSKEGON,
P=l1,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
PGM=INVENT,PURP=208/EPA,
AREA=CAPECOD,
• "I" •—*
MAP OF DESIGNATED 208 AREAS
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-34
-------
MASK
CLASSIFICATION: Station Selector Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used in con]unction with the EXTRACT
keyword so that only those stations satisfying the
EXTRACT criteria are selected. (The keyword itself
selects no stations; its presence in a retrieval
satisfies the requirement that at least one station
selector be specified in each retrieval request.)
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
MASK,
There is no value associated with this
keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all WQF programs except REG
and STA.
If this keyword is specified in a retrieval, the
EXTRACT keyword must also be specified.
EXAMPLES:
Retrieve all the stations
associated with municipal
water supplies that are
sampling parameters 31516 or
31517 and 70900 in the ocean
at points where all effluents
should have been effectively
treated.
PGM=INDEX,PURP=104B6/STA,
MASK,
EXTRACT-(P31516 OR P31517)
AND P70900 AND OCEAN AND
TREATD AND MUN,
WQ-RET
4-35
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
CLASSIFICATION: Station Restrictor Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used in conjunction with a station
selector keyword to further limit the stations that are
selected to those within the states specified.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
ST=state-code,
where state-code is one of the
two-digit numerical Federal
Information Processing Standards
(FIPS) state codes. A leading
zero may be omitted.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
A maximum of three state codes may be specified via the
ST keyword in any single retrieval request.
This keyword must be used in conjunction with at least
one station selector keyword.
Listings of the state codes are contained in Appendix C
to this part of the Handbook.
This keyword is valid for all programs except REG and
STA.
Stations are printed in the order that the station
selection keywords (specified in the retrieval with ST)
are normally printed, unless the U keyword is also
specified, in which case stations are printed in
numerical order within agency.
EXAMPLE(S):
Restrict retrieval of
stations within the polygon
to only those stations
in the state of
Michigan.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
LT=I,L=4645283,L=8950,
L=4635,L=90,
L=4610454,L=8950102,
L=46,L=8935,L=4645283,
L=8925,
ST=26,
P=l1,P=300,P=400,
WQ-RET
4-37
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
Retrieve an inventory for PGM=INVENT,PURP=104B6/STA,
the stations that are in the BS=0909,
Nebraska portion of the North ST=31,
Platte River Basin.
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
The ST keyword and the STC keyword are not
interchangeable. ST is a station restrictor, STC a
station selector; consequently, each functions
differently. If stations are to be selected within a
state without regard to other station selection
criteria, then STC should be used.
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-38
-------
STCNTY
CLASSIFICATION: Station Restrictor Keyword
USE: This keyword is used in conjunction with a station
selector keyword to further limit the stations that are
selected to those within the state-county specified.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
STCNTY=ssccc,
where:
ss is the two-digit FIPS code for the state
desired
ccc is the three-digit FIPS code for the county
within that state. Leading zeros must be
specified.
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
All five digits for this keyword must be specified, and
it may be specified up to 30 times in one retrieval.
This keyword must be used in conjunction with at least
one station selector keyword.
Valid FIPS state and county codes are found in Appendix
C to this part of the Handbook.
This keyword is valid for all programs except REG and
STA.
The STCNTY keyword differs from the CO keyword in that
STCNTY further restricts the stations retrieved by a
station selector keyword. A more efficient retrieval
will be structured if the ST keyword, set equal to the
state code, is used with the STCNTY keyword; this is
not a requirement, however.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-39
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve only those stations
whose primary station numbers
are between 070009 and 070029
and which are also in Fairfax
County, Virginia.
Using the INDEX retrieval
format, retrieve only the
stations in the Potomac
River basin (0214) that are
also in Fairfax County (059)
Virginia (51) and Montgomery
(031) and Prince Georges (033)
counties Maryland (24).
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,
B=P,8=070009,5=070029,
STCNTY=51059,
BD=730101,P=11,P=1045,
P=300,
PGM=INDEX,PURP=2 08/LOC,
BS=0214,
ST=51,STCNTY=51059,
ST=24.STCNTY=24031,
STCNTY=24033,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-40
-------
u
ONLYU,
NOTU,
CLASSIFICATION: Station Restrictor Keywords
USE:
These keywords are used with a station selector keyword
to restrict a retrieval to all stations within
specified agency codes.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
U=agency-code,
ONLYU,
NOTU,
DEFAULT VALUE(S)
U:
ONLYU:
NOTU:
specifies the agency for which
stations are to be retrieved,
where agency-code is the one-to-
eight character agency code
assigned to the agency responsible
for collecting and entering the
data into the WQF. The stations
retrieved will be listed in
ascending numerical sequence within
agency code.
specifies that the stations
retrieved via one or more U keywords
are to be listed in the order of the
station selection keyword (e.g. RMI
or LT,L) rather than in numerical
sequence. There is no value
associated with this keyword.
specifies that the agencies
referenced by one or more U
keywords are to be excluded
from the retrieval. There
is no value associated with this
keyword. This keyword preserves
the order of stations established
by station selector keywords.
None.
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
WQ-RET
4-41
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
NOTES ON USAGE:
Any number of U keywords can be specified in a single
retrieval request.
The A keyword and U keyword are not interchangeable.
The A keyword is used as a station selector, usually in
conjunction with the S keyword; the U keyword is used
as a restrictor to limit selected stations to those
within specific agencies.
These keywords are valid with all WQF retrieval
programs except STA and REG.
NOTU and ONLYU are mutually exclusive, i.e., both
cannot be used in the same retrieval.
Stations are printed in station number order within
agency in the order the agencies are specified, unless
the ONLYU keyword is specified.
A listing of the current agency codes is available in a
STORET help data set named AGENCODE.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data from
only those stations in
Gogebic County, Michigan
which belong to agency
14AGNFS9.
Retrieve data from only
those stations in Gogebic
County, Michigan which
do not belong to agency
14AGNFS9.
Retrieve data from stations
within the specified
polygon belonging to
agency 14AGNFS9, and have
the selected stations listed
in order by the latitude
and longitude coordinates.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=26,CO=53,
U=14AGNFS9,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=26,CO=53,
NOTU,U=14AGNFS9,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
LT=I,L=4645283,L=8950,
L=4535,L=90,L=4610454,
L=8950102,L=46,L=8935,
L=4645283,L=8925,
ONLYU, U=UAGNFS9,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-42
-------
EXTRACT
CLASSIFICATION: Station Restrietor Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to limit a retrieval request to
those stations with a specific attribute or combination
of attributes as described by station masks. A station
mask is a computer device which contains one bit of
information on every STORET station. Masks are created
by the STORET programming staff to be used by all
STORET users, or they may be created by STORET users
(using PGM<=NOPAR) to meet their individual needs.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
EXTRACT^mask-name operator mask-name . . .),
where mask-name is the system name for
any existing STORET mask, and operator
is a valid LOGICAL operator ( 'AND1 ,
'OR1 ).
Mask-names and operators may be combined in
any logically-consistent fashion, using
parentheses where necessary to eliminate
ambiguity.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
A mask has been created for each STORET parameter,
identifying the attribute 'parameter nnn is present at
this station1 for every station on the system. The
names of these masks are the same as the parameter
number.
Masks have been created to facilitate retrieval by four
of the 129 priority pollutant groups. The four masks
are: PRIPOLIN for inorganics, PRIPOLME for metals,
PRIPOLPE for pesticides, and PRIPOLOR for organics.
The STORET help data set named PRIORITY.POLUTANT.GROUPS
lists the parameter numbers included in each group.
Masks have also been created to facilitate retrieval by
station type. The STORET help data set named
STATION.TYPE contains a list of valid station type
codes (masks) which may be combined in any order to
retrieve stations with particular station type
attributes.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-43
-------
Users may create masks utilizing the retrieval program
NOPAR. Masks may be created for stations in a specific
area that are, for example, sampling specific
parameters during a specific time period a specified
number of times per year. The criteria for a mask may
be as sophisticated or as simple as a user desires.
The EXTRACT keyword can then be used to restrict the
retrieval of stations to those stations identified in a
user-created mask. When utilizing user-created masks,
a job control language (JCL) data definition (DD)
statement must be used to indicate the location of the
mask. The DDNAME must start with the letter U, and
this is the value used in the EXTRACT statement. See
the description of the NOPAR program in Section 7,
Advanced Retrieval Programs and Their Special Keywords,
for more detail on this capability.
EXTRACT may be used with all WQF programs except REG
and STA, and usually serves as a station restrictor, to
be used in conjunction with a station selection keyword
such as LT, L, RMI, or STC, to limit the number of
stations retrieved to those meeting both the station
selection criteria AND the mask criteria.
Note the use of the MASK station selector keyword
whenever no other station selector is specified in a
retrieval with the EXTRACT keyword. The MASK keyword
itself selects no stations; its presence in a retrieval
satisfies the requirement that at least one station
selector be specified in each retrieval request.
Note also that the EXTRACT keyword functions to
retrieve stations, and does not specify which
parameters are to be retrieved. The parameter keyword
P must be specified as usual to obtain data listings.
Stations are printed in the order that the station
selection keywords (specified in the retrieval with
EXTRACT) are normally printed, unless the U keyword is
also specified, in which case stations are printed in
numerical order within agency.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
This keyword might be used to limit a retrieval to
stations which sample a particular parameter, thus
eliminating from the retrieval any station which has no
observations of that particular parameter. In the
event that the parameter is infrequently measured (a
newly discovered toxic parameter, for example), the use
of the EXTRACT keyword can result in a major cost
reduction in the retrieval. Through the use of masks
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-44
-------
built by the user with the NOPAR program (described in
Section 7), the retrieval can( be very effectively
limited to stations with minimum acceptable quantities
of data.
EXAMPLE(S):
Obtain an inventory of
stations in Maryland
(STC24) which sample
either parameter 300 or
parameter 400.
Obtain an inventory of
stations in Delaware
(STC 10) which have at
least one observation of
Plutonium (22010) as well
as either one observation
of Total Uranium (22601)
or one observation of
Dissolved Uranium (22603).
Obtain an inventory of
stations in Colorado (STC 08)
which have either parameter
present in each of the
following pairs:
608 - 610
10-11
400 - 430
Obtain an inventory of all
ambient stream stations
under agency code 1110NET.
Obtain an inventory of all
effluent stations for the
state of Delaware.
Obtain an inventory of the
ambient stream stations in
Maryland which also have
sampled parameter 650
(total phosphorus as P04)
during 1978.
PGM=INVENT,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=24,
EXTRACTS00 OR 400.
PGM=INVENT,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=10,
EXTRACT=(22601 OR 22603)
AND 22010.
PGM=INVENT,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=08,
EXTRACT*(608 OR 610)
AND (10 OR 11) AND
(400 OR 430).
PGM=INVENT,
PURP=208/STA PLANNING STUDY,
A=1110NET,
EXTRACT*AMBNT AND STREAM,
PGM=INVENT,
PURP=305B/STA ANNUAL REPORT,
STC=10,
EXTRACTS IPE.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
STC-24,
BD=78,ED=78,
EXTRACT-(650 AND AMBNT AND
STREAM).
WQ-RET
4-45
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
Perform an index retrieval PGM=INDEX,PURP=208/FED,
for the stations in the Wabash BS=0517,
River minor basin (17) of the EXTRACTSP310 OR P300)
Ohio River major basin (05) AND P600 AND PRIPOLIN,
that are sampling either
parameter 310 or 300, and
parameter 600. The stations
must also contain data for
inorganic priority pollutants.
Retrieve all the stations PGM=INDEX,PURP=104B6/STA,
associated with municipal MASK,
water supplies that are EXTRACTSP31516 OR P31517)
sampling parameters 31516 or AND P70900 AND OCEAN AND
31517 and 70900 in the ocean TREATD AND MUN,
at points where all effluents
should have been effectively
treated.
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
Even though a retrieval has EXTRACT references to
specific parameter codes, it uses those only for
purposes of station selection.
For example:
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=51,EXTRACT=31515 OR 31516.
will NOT print any results. In spite of references to
parameters 31515 and 31516, a retrieval must specify
(via the P keyword) which parameters are to be printed.
It is NOT necessary to print the parameters referenced
by the EXTRACT. The following is acceptable:
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=51.EXTRACT=31515 OR 31516,
P=300,P=400,P=610,P=39560,P=10,
and will print data on parameters 300, 400, 610, 39560,
and 10 for all STORET stations in Virginia (STC 51)
with at least one observation of either parameter 31515
or 31516.
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-46
-------
ARCLASS
CLASSIFICATION: Station Restrictor Keyword
USE:
Data of some infrequently-used stations in the Water
Quality File have been archived, i.e., taken off-line,
in order to save on-line storage costs and space. This
keyword is used to retrieve data for stations whose
data have been archived.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
ARCLASS
ALL
where n and m are any
two-digit whole numbers
of the archive class(es)
to be retrieved. Each
archive class number
must be preceded by a
slash; a leading zero
must be specified. Any
number of individual
archive class numbers
may be specified.
Specifying ARCLASS=ALL
will retrieve all data
stored, whether archived
or regular on-line data.
DEFAULT VALUE: ARCLASS=00,
NOTES ON USAGE:
The archive status of parametric data for any given
station can be determined by examining the archive
class code printed in the output of the STA program.
^See Section 6 for a description of this retrieval
program.) An archive class other than 00 (on-line)
indicates that data for that station have been
archived.
This keyword acts as a station restrictor; consequently
it must be accompanied by one or more station selector
keywords within the retrieval.
This keyword is valid for all programs except INDEX and
STA.
WQ-RET
4-47
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
The following are the current archive classes and the
types of data stored in them:
CLASS
EXAMPLE(S):
00
01
02
03
04
TYPE OF DATA
On-line data
Oklahoma oil well data and Oregon
fish and game data
USGS well and spring data
ORSANCO continuous monitoring data
and California well data
National Urban Runoff Program data
Retrieve all well data that
may have been archived
for any station within
the WQF.
PGM=ALLPARM,PURP=305B/STA,
EXTRACT=WELL,MASK,
ARCLASS-/02,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-48
-------
DATA
SELECTION
KEYWORDS
P specify water quality parameter codes
PM identify equivalent parameters for purposes
of analysis
PARONLY sample selection based on parameter presence
PARH1/PARH2 change parameter headings
PARU,PARF convert parameter units and values
PRV,PLV,PHV sample selection based on parameter value
OUTSIDE retrieve values outside specified range of
values
BD,ED beginning date, ending date
BT,ET beginning time, ending time
BG,EG beginning date group, ending date group
R restrict parameters according to remark codes
RMKK specifies action to be taken with data having _
a remark code of K >
UD,LD restrict samples according to depth M
m
D convert depth units rn
3
EOT bottom samples 5
z
DSROC regular/composite samples
ANC composite samples
UK unlocking protected data
AGGR combine data retrieved from a group of
stations into a single station
IS intensive survey data
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-49
-------
DATA SELECTION KEYWORDS, Continued
C Function retrieve data by parameter group, media,
phase, or C.A.S. number
The STA, INDEX, and NOPAR programs do not retrieve
data. Therefore, these data selection keywords are
not valid for these programs. The intensive survey
keyword IS is also described in detail in Appendix G,
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-50
-------
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to specify the individual water
quality parameters that are to be retrieved.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
P=parameter-code, where parameter-code is one of
i the five-digit water quality
parameters defined within STORET.
Leading zeros need not be
specified.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is required for all programs which
retrieve data except for INVENT, INV120, ALLPARM, and
LOC, for which it is optional. The keyword is not
valid for programs STA and INDEX.
Up to 50 parameters may be specified for the RET, MSP,
MEAN, MSP with the MEAN keyword specified, and STAND
programs; up to 10 parameters may be specified for PLOT
and REG; up to 6 parameters may be specified for PUNCH;
up to 1200 parameters may be specified for INVENT and
INV120; and up to 2000 parameters may be specified for
ALLPARM. The P keyword may also be used for a special
purpose with the LOC program. If more parameters are
specified than are allowed, the retrieval does not run.
If used with the PM keyword, the combined number of PM
and P keywords may not exceed these maximum limits.
Parameters retrieved are listed in the order specified
in the retrieval request.
'P=0', will produce a blank column on printouts which
may be used as space for user comments or notes.
The same parameter may be requested more than once in a
retrieval request.
Complete listings of the STORET parameter definitions
and codes can be obtained via the computer as described
in Appendix B.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-51
-------
P must be specified with the programs RET, PUNCH,
STAND, MEAN, REG, MSP, and PLOT, unless 'PRT=PAR,' is
specified, which replaces the printing of data values
with a station description paragraph. When not
specified for programs INVENT, INV120, and ALLPARM, all
parameters stored will be retrieved.
EXAMPLE(S)
Retrieve data on water
temperaturedl }, 00(300),
pHUOO), ammonia( 61 0),
iron(1045), and coliforms
(31501).
PGM=RET,PURP>
A=14AGNFS9,S<
P=l 1 ,P=300,P>
'305B/STA,
=071723,
= 400,P=610,
P=1045,P=31501
BD-730101,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-52
-------
PM
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE:
This keyword may be used to retrieve parametric data
for a single constituent which has been stored in
several different forms, under several different STORET
parameter codes. The keyword allows a user to identify
parameter codes which are equivalent for purposes of
analysis.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
PM=parameter-code [* factor],
where parameter-code is one of
the five-digit water quality
parameters defined within STORET
that may be considered equivalent
to the parameter-code specified
by the preceding P keyword
(leading zeros need not be
specified), and where factor is
the multiplication factor that
will properly convert the
parameter value from its stored
value to one compatible with the
value of the parameter specified
by the P keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
The PM keyword may be used with any program which
retrieves data except ALLPARM.
One or more PM keywords may be used to equate a
corresponding number of parameter codes to another
parameter code specified by a P keyword. In any one
retrieval, however, the combined number of P and PM
keywords may not exceed the following limits:
Retrieval Program
RET,MSP,STAND,MEAN
PLOT,REG
PUNCH
INVENT,INV120
Maximum Number of
P plus PM Keywords
50
10
6
1200
WQ-RET
4-53
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
All values retrieved from the set of equivalent
parameters are reported as if they were a single
parameter; however, only one value is reported for a
single date, time, and depth. Should two or more
values be found for the same date, time, and depth, the
value for the numerically greater(est) parameter code
(as opposed to parameter value) is reported.
Regardless of which value is used, the column headings
used will be those normally printed for the last
parameter specified in the P,PM sequence.
The PARU and PARF keywords may be used with P keywords
in order to equate the stored values of P- parameters
with the values of PM= parameters, either stored (no
factor specified) or converted (factor specified). In
addition, the column headings can be changed via the
PARH1 and PARH2 keywords. The keywords PARU, PARF,
PARH1, and PARH2 are described in following pages.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
Many nitrate and metals parameters have different
parameter codes which correspond to the method used to
measure the parameter's presence in a sample. The PM
keyword enables one to retrieve values from a group of
parameters that may be considered equivalent for
reporting and analysis purposes.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data on the
transparency of the water
(P=77) at the specified
station, and equate pH
(P-400) and phytoplankton
production (P=70990) to
P=77.
Parameters 20, 30, and 40
are similar, as are
parameters 50, 60, and 70.
For stations 230040 and
230041 for agency 1110NET,
print the data for each
group of parameters if data
are present for any of the
parameters.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071723,
P=77,PARU= RODS,PARF=0.01,
PM=400*100,PM=70990,
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=104B6/EXAMPLE,
A=l110NET,5=230040,5=230041,
P=20,PM=30,PM=40,
P=50.PM=60,PM=70,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-54
-------
PARONLY
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to specify that parametric data
associated with each water quality sample are to be
printed only when values for certain selected
parameters are present; it is used in conjunction with
the P keyword.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
PARONLY=n, where n is a whole number from one to
ten which represents the number of
parameters which must be present in
the sample in order to.print data for
all parameters specified in the
retrieval request.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
The value of n can not exceed 10 or be greater than the
number of P keywords specified within the retrieval
request.
It is important to note that the parameters to which
PARONLY refers are those that appear first in the
string of parameters specified. For this reason, the
parameters that are referenced by PARONLY must be
specified before other parameters.
This keyword is used in conjunction with the P keyword.
It is positioned after the last P keyword within the
retrieval request.
This keyword is valid with all programs which retrieve
data except INVENT and INV120.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
This keyword is most helpful when used to assure the
presence of one or more parameter values before
producing output which will be used for such things as
establishing a water quality index, or inputting to a
river basin model.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-55
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data only
when there are values
for the first three
parameters (11,300,400).
PGM=RET,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071723,
P=11,P=300,P=400,P=610,
P=1045,P=31501,
PARONLY=3,
BD=730101,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-56
-------
PARH1
PARH2
PARU
PARF
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keywords
USE:
These keywords are used to change the parameter
headings from the defaults shown in the parameter
listing to a user-supplied heading and to apply a
multiplication factor to the stored values such that
the new value matches the new heading.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
PARH1"line-one,
PARH2=line-two,
PARU-new-units,
PARF=factor,
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
where line-one and line-two are
strings of up to eight characters
each which replace lines one and
two of the parameter heading.
where new-units is a string of up to
eight characters which denotes any
valid unit measurement expression.
where factor is the multiplication
factor that will properly convert the
parameter value from its stored value
to its desired value.
These keywords are valid with all programs which
retrieve data except INVENT, INV120, and ALLPARM.
PARH1, PARH2, PARU, and PARF should not be used with
the MEAN program to compute loadings or to perform
calculations.
These keywords are specified for each parameter whose
units and values are to be changed for reporting
purposes. These keywords do not alter the stored units
and values for the parameters.
STORET assumes that a correct conversion factor has
been specified. Consequently, it performs the
conversion according to the PARU, PARF instructions
without any check on the values specified.
WQ-RET
4-57
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
The PARH1, PARH2, and PARU keywords must be positioned
immediately after the P keyword to which they refer,
and immediately before their associated PARF keyword.
These keywords may be specified for as many of the
parameters retrieved as the user chooses.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve raw data and
convert the values for
parameter 1045 (total iron)
from ug/1 to mg/1.
For station 4435A2 for agency
11EPALES, print parameter
625, changing the header to
"change example" and the
units to ug/1. The values
should be multiplied by 1000
for this example. In column
two, print parameter 625 as
it would normally appear. In
the third column, change the
heading to "head change", and
the units to cg/1. Divide
the values by 10 so that they
match the units specified.
Retrieve raw data and convert
parameter 1042 (Copper, Total)
from ug/1 to mg/1 and change
the heading to read Cu Tot
Copper instead of
Copper, Cu, Tot.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071723,
P=11,P=300,P=400,P=610,
P=1045,PARU= MG/L,
PARF=.OQ1,
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=104B6/EXAMPLE,
A=l1EPALES,S=4435A2,
P=625,PARH1=CHANGE,
PARM2=EXAMPLE.
PARU= UG/L,PARF=1000,
P=625,
P=625,PARH1=HEAD,
PARH2=CHANGE,
PARU= CG/L,PARF=.l,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
P=1042,PARH1=CU TOT.
PARH2=COPPER,PARU= MG/L,
PARF=.001,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-58
-------
PRV
PLV
PHV
OUTSIDE
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keywords
USE: These keywords are used to specify that parametric data
associated with specified water quality samples are to
be printed only when the values for a specific
parameter or parameters within the sample fall within a
specified range.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
PRVeparameter-code, where parameter-code is one of
the five-digit water quality
parameters defined within STORET,
and specifies the parameter whose
values are to be compared with
the values specified for PLV and
PHV.
PLV=low-value, where low-value and high-value
are any numerical value, including
a decimal value, between -899E+7
and +899E+7. PLV establishes the
PHV=high-value, low value of the desired range of
values for parameter-code; PHV
establishes the high value of the
desired range of values for
parameter-code.
OUTSIDE, specifies that the values retrieved
for the PRV parameter are to be
outside the range of values specified
by PLV and PHV, i.e., less than the
PLV value, greater than the PHV value.
DEFAULT VALUES: PHV=+1E+50,
PLV=-1E+50,
OUTSIDE, Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
If the PRV keyword is used in a retrieval, either, or
both, the PLV and PHV keywords must also be specified.
A maximum of two sets of these keywords may be
specified in a retrieval request. If two sets are
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-59
-------
specified, then both conditions must be satisfied
before data will be printed.
The PRV keyword may specify a parameter other than
those whose values are to be printed if the PRV
parameter's values lie within the specified range.
(The parameter keyword P is used to indicate which
parameters are to be printed.)
To specify a single value for a parameter, set PLV and
PHV equal to the same value.
These keywords are valid with all retrieval programs
which retrieve parametric data, except INVENT, INV120,
and ALLPARM.
The OUTSIDE keyword may be specified once per set of
PLV and PHV keywords, and if specified, applies only to
the set it immediately follows. Thus, it can be
specified a maximum of two times in a retrieval
request.
EXAMPLES:
Retrieve parameters 400, 300,
and 310 when the value for
parameter 10 is between 12
and 18 degrees, and when the
value for parameter 300 is 8.
Retrieve parameters 400, 300,
and 310 when the value for
parameter 10 is less than 12
and greater than 18 degrees,
and when the value for
parameter 300 is 8.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071723,
PRV=10,PLV=12,PHV=18.
PRV=300.PLV=8.PHV=8,
P=400,P=300,P=310,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
PRV=10,PLV=12,PHV=18,OUTSIDE,
PRV=300,PLV=8,PHV=8,
P=400,P=300,P=310,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-60
-------
BD
ED
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keywords
USE:
These keywords are used to restrict the parameter
values to be retrieved by specifying that data sampled
before (BD) and/or after (ED) the specified dates are
to be eliminated from the data retrieved.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
BD=
fyymmdd)
(yy I '
fyymmdd}
ED= Jyymm > ,
(yy )
values may be specified in any of
the three formats shown, where
yy = last two digits of the
calendar year
mm = two digit numeric for the
month of the year
dd = two digit numeric for the
day of the month
Leading zeros must be specified.
DEFAULT VALUES: BD=010101,
ED=991231,
KEYWORD
BD
ED
VALUE
entered
yy
yymm
yy
yymm
assumed
yyOlOl
yynunOI
yy!231
yymmSl
WQ-RET
4-61
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
NOTES ON USAGE:
These keywords are valid with all programs which
retrieve data.
These keywords apply to all of the parameters selected
within the retrieval request.
Either keyword may be specified; they do not have to be
specified in pairs.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data collected PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
on or after July 15, 1972. A=l4AGNFS9,S=071723,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=720715,
Retrieve data collected PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
on or before July 15, 1972. A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
P=l1,P=300,P=400,
ED=720715,
Retrieve data collected PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
between April 5, 1966 and A=l4AGNFS9,S=071723,
August 18, 1970. P=l1,P=300,P=400,
BD=660405, ED=700818,
Retrieve data collected PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
during the entire years of A=l4AGNFS9,S=071723,
1972, 1973 and 1974. P=l1,P=300,P=400,
BD=72,ED=74,
Retrieve data collected PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
between the beginning of A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
April 1972 and the end of P=l1,P=300,P=400,
October 1974. BD«7204,ED=7410,
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
If a date range is specified for which no data were
sampled, the result will be no retrieval output.
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-62
-------
BT
ET
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keywords
USE:
These keywords are used to restrict the parameter
values to be retrieved to those which were sampled
during a specific period of time during the day.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
BT=tttt,
ET=tttt,
where tttt is the time of day
based on a 24-hour-per-day
military time system. All four
digits must be specified; leading
zeros must be specified. BT
specifies the beginning time, ET
the ending time.
DEFAULT VALUES: BT=0000,
ET=2400,
NOTES ON USAGE:
These keywords are valid for all programs which
retrieve data, and apply to all parameters selected
within the retrieval request.
When more than one time period is specified in a
retrieval, the periods must be specified in ascending
order. A maximum of three periods (three pairs of
BT,ET keywords) may be specified in a retrieval.
If used within a retrieval, both keywords must be
specified.
WQ-RET
4-63
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE:
Retrieve data sampled between PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
the hours of 8:00 am to 11:00 A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
am, and between 3:00 pm and P=l1,P=300,P=400,
7:30 pm. BD=720715,
BT=0800,ET=1100,
BT=1500.ET=1930,
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-64
-------
BG
EG
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keywords
USE: These keywords are used to restrict retrievals to
parameter values sampled during specific months and
days of each year. Samples with dates before and/or
after the specified date groupings will be eliminated
from the retrieval.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
BG=mmdd, where mm is the two digit numeric for the
month of the year, and dd is the two digit
EG=mmdd, numeric for the day of the month, (yy for
year is not an option with these keywords.)
Leading zeros must be specified, and both
mm and dd must be specified for each keyword.
BG specifies the beginning of the date group,
EG specifies the end of the date group.
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
These keywords are valid for all programs which
retrieve data.
If used within a retrieval, both keywords must be
specified.
When more than one date group is specified, the groups
must be specified in ascending date order. A date
group may span one or more months, or one or more days.
BG and EG combinations may be specified a maximum of
three times in a retrieval.
If BG and EG are not used, no groupings will result;
data retrieved will be for periods indicated by BD
and/or ED, or for the period of record, if BD and/or ED
are not used.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
This keyword is helpful with season dependent
retrievals where one or more seasons (or sets of
months) are needed.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-65
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data that exists PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
for the month of January A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
and for the last four P=300,P=400,
months of all years between BD=660101,ED=751231,
1966 and 1975. BG=0101,EG=0131,
BG=0901,EG=1231.
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
Date groups may not overlap (e.g., BG=0201, EG=0431,
BG-0301, EG-0631, is invalid), nor may they span the
end of a year (e.g., BG=1101, EG=0131, is invalid, but
BG=1101, EG=1231, BG=0101, EG=0131, is valid).
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-66
-------
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE: At data storage time, users may associate one of
several remark codes with data values stored, for the
purpose of providing clarifying information on the
circumstances surrounding the sampling or analysis
technique. The R keyword is used to restrict the
retrieval of parameters to those values stored with
selected remark codes.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
EPA-remark-codes
ALL
OFF
*
where EPA-remark-codes is a string of one or more of
the following valid EPA remark codes:
A Value reported is mean of two or more
determinations.
B Results based upon colony counts outside
the acceptable range.
C Value calculated.
D Indicates field measurement.
E Indicates extra samples taken at
composite stations.
F In the case of species, F indicates female
sex.
G Value reported is maximum of two or more
determinations.
H Value based on field kit determination;
results may not be accurate.
J Estimated value; value not accurate.
K Actual value is known to be less than value
given.
L Actual value is known to be greater than
value given.
M Presence of material verified but not
quantified. In the case of temperature
or oxygen reduction potential, M indicates
a negative value. In the case of species,
M indicates male sex.
N Presumptive evidence of presence of
material.
0 Sampled, but analysis lost or not performed.
S Laboratory test.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-67
-------
ALL,
OFF,
T Value reported is less than criteria of
detection.
U Indicates material was analyzed for but
not detected. In the case of species, U
indicates undetermined sex.
W Value observed is less than lowest value
reportable under "T" code.
X Value is a quasi vertically-integrated sample,
retrieves all data for which a non-blank
remark code is stored. This value is
equivalent to specifying all of the above
alphabetic EPA remark codes.
disables remark code selection restrictions
until superceded by a subsequent R keyword
within the retrieval request. All values
are retrieved regardless of remark code stored.
retrieves only data having no remark codes
stored.
DEFAULT VALUE: R=OFF,
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all retrieval programs except
INVENT, and INV120, which automatically summarize data
by remark codes.
The R keyword may be specified as many times as needed
in each retrieval, and applies to all parameters which
follow it within the retrieval request, until
superceded by a subsequent R keyword.
U.S. Geological Survey data (agency code 112WRD) can
be similarly restricted by the R keyword. However,
some USGS data are identified with a two character
remark code. The first character may be either an F
(field measurement value) or an X (extra analysis for
daily sampled stations) and this character is ignored
by the R keyword. Only the second character in the
field is affected by the R keyword and these codes
correspond to the STORET remark codes listed above.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-68
-------
See the description of the ALLPARM program for a
special use of the R keyword.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve only those
values of parameters 11
and 1045 which have remark
codes of K or L. Retrieve
all values of parameters
300 and 400.
Retrieve data stored for
parameters 11 and 610 only
if no remark codes have been
stored with the values.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
R=KL,P=11.P=1045.
R=OFF.P=300,P=400.
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071723,
R=*,P=11.P=610.
BD=730101,
WQ-RET
4-69
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
RMKK
CLASSIFICATION:
USE:
Data Selection Keyword
This keyword is used to specify what action, if any, is
to be taken for those parameter values having a remark
code of K.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES;
RMKK= fEXCL\ ,
I ZERO/
observations with remark code K
will either be excluded (EXCL)
from the calculations performed,
or will be set equal to zero
(ZERO).
DEFAULT VALUE:
NOTES ON USAGE:
None. All values retrieved will be included.
EXAMPLE:
This keyword is valid for all retrieval programs except
INVENT, INV120, and RET. F
If this keyword is not used, all values will be
included in the calculations, whether remarked or not,
unless the R keyword was specified to exclude remarked
data from the retrieval.
When RMKK=ZERO, is specified, a value of 0.0 is
substituted for any value having a remark code of K.
Set any remarks of K equal
to zero before performing the
indicated calculations.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=104B6/EXAMPLE,
PRT=DATA,
A=11140100,S=173863,
RMKK=ZERO.
P=10,HV=13,P=60,LV=20,
P=300,LV=0.5,SF=N2CS,
WQ-RET
4-71
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
UD
LD
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keywords
USE:
One of the values that can be stored with sampling data
is the depth at which the sample was taken. The UD and
LD keywords are used to restrict the parametric values
to be retrieved to those sampled above, below, or
between specified depths.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
UD=upper-depth,
LD=lower-depth,
where upper-depth is any whole
number between zero and 999999
specifying the upper sample depth
limitation. Data sampled at
depths closer to the surface
(values numerically less than the
upper-depth value) will not be
retrieved.
where lower-depth is any whole
number between zero and 999999
specifying the lower sample depth
limitation. Data sampled at
depths closer to the bottom
(values numerically greater than
the lower-depth value) will not
be retrieved.
Leading zeros need not be
specified for either UD or LD.
Values are assumed to be in feet
unless the D keyword is specified.
(D«M specifies depth in meters.)
DEFAULT VALUES:
NOTES ON USAGE:
UD=0,
LD=999999,
These keywords are valid with all programs which
retrieve data.
Either keyword may be specified; they do not have to be
specified in pairs.
If UD and/or LD are specified, samples which are not
stored with depth values are disregarded.
WQ-RET
4-73
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
Each keyword may be specified once and if specified,
applies to data for all parameters selected within the
retrieval request. If either is specified more than
once, only the last-specified value will be valid.
The units associated with the values for UD and LD are
assumed to be feet unless the 'D=M,' instruction is
specified to request a conversion from feet to meters.
Appendix E contains a list of location codes which may
be stored in the sample depth field to denote inplant
sampling for municipal or industrial stations.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve samples between 5
and 20 feet only.
Retrieve all samples from a
depth of 5 feet and below.
Retrieve all samples taken
from a depth of 20 feet and
above.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071723,
P=300,
UD=5.LD=20,
BD=730101,
PGM-RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A= 14AGNFS9,S=071723,
P=300,
UD=5,
BD-730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071723,
P=300,
LD=20,
BD=730101,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-74
-------
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to specify the units associated
with sample depths that are to appear on the printed
output.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
D= /F\ , where
D=F, specifies that depths are to be printed
in feet.
D-M, specifies that depths are to be printed
in meters.
DEFAULT VALUE: D=F,
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data except INVENT and INV120.
This keyword may be specified only once within a single
retrieval request and applies to all parameters
retrieved. If specified more than once, only the last
specified value will be valid.
Depth is stored in the WQF in feet, with values rounded
to the nearest whole foot. Data entered in meters is
converted to feet before storing. Data can be
retrieved in feet or in the nearest tenth of a meter.
This can result in an inconsistency when depth
information in meters is input to STORET, and is then
retrieved with D=M specified. Users should be aware of
this potential error, as illustrated in the following
example:
Assume a sample depth of 0.5 meter is stored. This
value is converted by STORET to feet (1.64 feet) and
stored to the nearest whole foot (2 feet). If this
depth is retrieved in meters (D=M), the stored value (2
feet) is converted to meters (0.61 meter) and printed
out to the nearest tenth of a meter (0.6 meter).
The value specified or defaulted for the D keyword is
used by the LD and UD keywords.
WQ-RET
4-75
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data and print
depth information in
meters rather than in feet.
PGM=RET, PURP=3 0 5B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,8=071723,
P=11,P-300,P=400,P=610,
P-1045,P=31501,
60=730101,
/TYPA/AMBNT/LAKE
071723 090706000042 407010280042
46 14 30 0 089 21 45 0 3
LONG L %FAST«,261DEG 8 7MI FROM JCT US2 AND US4S
26053 MICHIGAN GOGEBIC
LAKC SUPERIOR 2212(10
OMTOIIAGON RIVF.R-MIDDLF DR ONTONAGON R
14AGNFS9 7(11016
0015 METLR DEPTH CLASS 00 CSN-RSP 0400198-0373137
DATE
FROM
TO
73/01/03
73/05/15
73/06/04
73/07/05
73/08/03
73/09/11
73/12/20
74/05/16
74/06/13
74/06/26
74/07/19
74/08/27
75/05/16
75/05/29
75/06/11
75/06/24
75/07/02
75/07/10
75/07/15
75/07/22
75/08/27
75/09/24
75/10/02
75/10/07
75/10/16
75/10/21
75/11/04
76/04/23
76/05/28
76/06/30
76/07/13
76/08/03
TIME 1
OF
>EP1
m
DAY METER
09 25
08 30
09 00
09 10
08 30
09 15
10 50
09 30
09 25
08 10
10 30
10 SO
10 15
10 00
09 00
11 00
10 00
10 40
10 35
08 30
09 30
10 00
11 00
10 30
11 00
10 00
10 30
10 15
10 30
10 45
08 10
11 00
10 00
10 15
02
02
02
03
02
02
01
01
06
13
06
1
1
1
0
7
7
5
5
7
4
1
00011
WATER
TEMP
FAHN
33 0
49 0
63 0
69 5
69 0
66 0
33 0
50 0
60 5
68 0
78 0
67 0
55 0
60 0
61 0
72 0
78 0
78 0
71 0
76 0
66 0
53 0
50 0
51 0
47 0
48 0
43 0
44 0
63 0
57 0
47 0
69 0
73 0
68 0
68 0
0030
DO
MG/L
13
10
8
8
a
a
13
10
8
8
7
10
8
7
8
9
10
11
9
9
6
8
8
a
7
D
8
6
7
2
1
4
9
2
7
9
6
2
8
6
1
7
.6
4
7
7
0
4
4
1
6
004C
PH
SU
6
6
6
6
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
6
6
6
6
>0
50
50
50
50
50
no
50
SO
70
60
50
60
00
00
20
42
70
40
00
00
70
00
70
00
00
50
00
00
60
60
80
80
80
90
60
00610
NH3+NH4-
N TOTAL
MG/L
0 OSOK
0 OSOK
0 OSOK
0 OSOK
0 OSOK
0 OSO
0 OSOK
0 OSOK
01045
IRON
FE TOT
UG/L
50
140
140
52
280
1?0
140
780
620
120
70
100
100
50K
50K
90
160
SDK
31501
TOT COLI
MFIHFNDO
/100ML
10
100
1500
30
800
5
180
10
300
10
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-76
-------
EOT
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE:
When storing data for a sample, users have the option
of specifying a depth indicator indicating, for
example, whether the sample is a bottom, regular,
dredge, or vertically-integrated sample. This keyword
is used to specify the types of sample depths to be
included in the retrieved data.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
BOT=values,
B
V
P
where values is a string of one or more of
the following characters which invokes the
retrieval of samples as defined below:
bottom samples
vertically-integrated samples
pore samples, which consist of the
water extracted from a core sample
dredge samples, sediment samples taken
at the bottom using a sediment
sampler such as an Ekman or a
Peterson dredge
core samples, taken at the bottom
using a core sampler such as a
Phlegar or a Wilding sampler
water samples
W
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data except INVENT and INV120.
Only one EOT keyword may be specified in a single
retrieval request and applies to all parameters
retrieved. If more than one are specified, only the
last-specified value will be valid.
If EOT is not specified, then all types of depth
samples will be retrieved.
WQ-RET
4-77
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE(S)
Retrieve only bottom and
dredge samples.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071723,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
BOT=BD,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-78
-------
DSROC
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to specify whether the data
retrieved are to include only regular (grab) samples or
only composite samples.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
DSROC
Mil
where
DSROC=1, specifies that data values from
regular (grab) samples are to be
retrieved. Data from composite
samples are to be excluded.
DSROC*2, specifies that data values from
composite samples are to be
retrieved. Data from regular
(grab) samples are to be excluded.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data.
Only one DSROC keyword may be specified within a single
retrieval request and it applies to all samples. If
more than one are specified, only the last-specified
keyword will be valid.
If only specific composite value types are of interest,
use the ANC keyword. DSROC retrieves or excludes all
values stored as composites.
If DSROC is not specified within a retrieval request,
then both regular (grab) and composite sample data will
be retrieved.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data only from
composite samples.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=UAGNFS9,5=071723,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
DSROC=2,
WQ-RET
4-79
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
ANC
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE:
When storing data resulting from sophisticated
composite samples, certain calculated values associated
with the sample also can be stored. If only specific
types of composite values are desired, then the ANC
keyword is used to specify which types of composite
values are to be retrieved.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
ANC=values,
where values is a string of one or more of the
following characters which invokes the
retrieval of values as defined below:
A
H
L
* or N
S
U
V
c
X
E
F
Z
$
B
average values
maximum values
minimum values
the number of samples comprising the
composite
standard deviation values
sum of squares values
variance values
coefficient of error
coefficient of variance
skewness
kurtosis
the number of samples in the composite
that exceeds established limits
precision
accuracy
none of the above
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data.
Values for the above ANC values must have been stored
for the composite. STORET will not compute them as a
result of this keyword being specified. (The data had
to have been stored using a sophisticated composite
storage procedure, either ?01 or ?04.)
If ANC is not specified, then all values stored for the
composite samples will be retrieved.
WQ-RET
4-81
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
If the data to be retrieved include any composite value
types, ANC should be used to specify which of the
values are to be considered for calculations and
analyses.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve only composite
samples, and only print
values for these samples.
Retrieve high and low
values for composite
samples.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,DSROC=2,
ANC=A,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA
A=14AGNFS9,5=071723,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
ANOHL.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-82
-------
UK
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE: When storing data into the WQF, users have the option
of protecting, or locking, the data from retrieval by
others for the purpose of checking the validity of the
data before releasing it. This keyword is used to
free, or unlock, the locked data for retrieval. All
WQF data remains protected for storage purposes by
users other than the owner of the data.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
UK=unlocking-key, where unlocking-key is the one-to-
eight alphanumeric unlocking key
for the agency responsible for
storing the data.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data.
This keyword can be used only once within a retrieval
request. If specified more than once, only the last-
specified value will be valid. If the retrieval
involves two or more agencies who have stations with
locked data, multiple retrievals must be run in order
to retrieve all locked data of interest.
Data is locked at sample level, not station level.
Therefore users can have part of their data locked, and
part unlocked.
When a retrieval encounters locked data, a diagnostic
message is printed indicating the agency code, station
number, and unlocking date for the locked data.
Users must obtain unlocking keys directly from the
respective agency. STORET User Assistance does not
give out this information. Users can reference the
STORET help data set named AGENCODE to identify an
individual to contact within an agency of interest.
UK is usually used in conjunction with the A or U
station identification keywords. However, it can also
be used with other station identification keywords.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-83
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve data including
values locked with an
associated locking code of
12345678.
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
UK=12345678,
Failure to specify an unlocking key when the data are
locked, or failure to specify an unlocking key
correctly via the UK keyword, will result in no data.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-84
-------
AGGR
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Keyword
USE:
The AGGR keyword is used to combine (or aggregate) data
retrieved from a group of stations into a single
station according to the geographical area specified
with the AGGR keyword.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
AGGR'
STATE
COUNTY
SUBAREA
MAJORSASIN
MINORBASIN
SUBBASIN
ASA
CELLaaaaaXbbbbb
ALL
where the value specifies
the geographical area into
which the retrieved data
are to be aggregated.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data except RET and ALLPARM.
Cells are used to define an area specified in seconds
of latitude (aaaaa) by seconds of longitude (bbbbb).
The maximum area which may be specified by the CELL...
value is approximately 27 degrees latitude by 27
degrees longitude (99999 seconds high, 99999 seconds
wide). Cells are computed from south to north,
beginning at the southeastern-most point of the
retrieval area, proceeding westerly. Leading zeros of
aaaaa and bbbbb values need not be specified.
Specifying 'AGGR=ALL,' aggregates all parametric data
for all stations retrieved as if the data were from a
single station.
WQ-RET
4-85
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve all stations in
Michigan and print the
requested data in area
aggregates whose
dimensions are 15 minutes
latitude by 30 minutes
longitude.
Retrieve all stations in
Michigan and print the
requested data in county
aggregates.
PGM= INVENT, PURP=3 0 5B/STA,
ST026,
SP
AGGR=CELL900X1800.
PGM=INVENT,PURP=305B/STA,
810=26,
SP,
AGGR-=COUNTY.
«1962
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
TOTAL
STA BEG
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
2
1
4
0
4
0
1
4
6
0
2
0
2
0
12
STA END 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
1
1
3
2
2
3
2
1
4
0
0
3
7
0
32
26001 COUNTY ALCONA 3? STATIONS PROCESSFn IN THIS AGGREGATE
STA END-PFR10D OF RFCD IN YRS
OF DBS 1 OF SAMPLE -0 « 5 O >-]
0 0 n 0 0 0
o o o o n o
o n o n o o
0 o o n o o
OOOOOO
OOOOOO
90 8 0 1 0 0
30 11 0 0 1 0
143 14 0 1 0 0
196 17 0 2 1 0
110 12 0 0 2 0
298 31 0 1 0 1
347 45 n 0 3 0
181 23 0 n 0 2
579 10 0 1 0 0
650 14 0 4 0 0
176 9 0 0 0 0
686 33 0000
934 38 0 0 0 3
1059 70 0 2 2 3
OOOOOO
5479 375 0 14 9 9
26001 COUNTY ALCONA 32 STATIONS PROCESSED IN THIS AGGREGATE
PARAMETER
00001
00010
00011
00020
00021
00032
00035
00016
00060
00061
00065
00070
00075
00076
00077
00080
00081
00094
00095
00100
00101
00110
HSAHPLOC
HATER
HATER
AIR
AIR
CLOUD
HIMD
HIHD
STREAK
STREAK
STREAK
TURB
TURB
TURB
TRJUISP
COLOR
AP COLOR
UMDUC^/V
CHDUCTVY
DO
DO
BOD
FT FROM
TEHP
TEHP
TEHP
TEHP
COVER
VELOCITY
DIR PROH
FLOW
PLOH.
STAGE
JRSH
HLCE
TRBIDHTR
SECCHI
PT-CO
PT-CO
PI ELD
AT 25C
SATUR
5 DAY
RT BANK
CENT
PAHN
CENT
PAHN
PERCENT
HPH
RORTH-0
CFS
INST-CFS
FEET
JTU
PPM SIO2
HACK FTU
INCHES
UNITS
UNITS
HICROHHO
HICROHHO
MG/L
PERCENT
MG/L
NUHBER
1
144
192
48
151
47
47
42
11
4
13
43
2
147
104
49
166
15
265
282
1
1
HEAN VARIANCE
OOOOOO
12 7458
58 2291
21 6042
59 3889
49 6596
6 25532
175 476
30 7190
1 28750
1 21154
2 38046
32 0000
1 56683
163 788
12 6735
13 1988
294 866
2B8 706
7 69545
77 0000
2 30000
53 8656
207 B17
23 5106
427 006
1685 54
16 4986
6703 46
3395 98
1 07063
512330
2 57408
1058 00
2 94482
5810 59
274 975
154 754
508 571
18653 3
9 71982
STAN DEV COEP VAR STAND BR
7 33932
14 4159
4 84878
20 6641
41 0553
4 06185
81 8747
58 2751
1 03471
715773
1 60439
32 5269
1 71605
76 2272
16 5823
12 4400
22 5515
136 577
3 11766
575822
247571
224437
147946
826714
649144
466586
1 89704
801659
590797
671984
1 01647
1 0*524
465400
1 10841
942512
076480
471067
405131
611610
1 04038
699861
1 67059
5 98853
592482
12 6335
17 5706
517355
198520
244668
23 0000
141537
7 47469
2 36891
965533
5 82278
8 3R987
185654
MAXIMUM MINIMUM BEG DATE END DATE
OOOOOO
24 0000
82 0000
31 0000
92 0000
100 000
15 0000
315 000
148 000
2 60000
2 14000
8 00000
55 0000
12 0000
377 000
70 0000
65 0000
318 000
1100 00
13 6000
77 0000
2 30000
OOOOOO 75/07/08 75/07/08
1 50000 67/04/20 80/08/21
31 0000 75/02/04 80/12/16
12 0000 69/06/18 71/06/21
8 00000 75/06/18 80/12/16
OOOOOO 69/06/18 71/06/21
OOOOOO 69/06/18 71/06/21
20 0000 69/06/18 72/07/2*
.200000 67/05/15 70/10/12
150000 70/08/18 71/08/10
140000 75/08/2* 80/12/16
280000 70/08/18 78/08/09
9 00000 69/05/05 69/08/26
150000 74/08/06 80/12/16
48 0000 67/04/20 80/08/25
OOOOOO 69/08/26 80/08/25
1 00000 74/08/06 80/12/16
264 000 80/08/20 80/08/25
8 50000 67/05/15 80/12/16
OOOOOO 67/10/10 80/12/16
77 0000 71/08/17 71/08/17
2 30000 67/10/30 67/10/30
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-86
-------
IS
CLASSIFICATION:
Data Selection Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to retrieve intensive survey data,
It allows a user to separate, at retrieval time,
intensive survey data from data collected as part of a
routine fixed station monitoring network. It also
allows a user to segregate data at a station of the
intensive survey by specific intensive survey.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
! yyssnn[/yyssnn]...
NOT
ONLY
IS=yyssnn..
IS=NOT,
IS=ONLY,
, where
specifies that only those samples
belonging to the specified
intensive survey identifier(s)
yyssnn are to be retrieved.
yyssnn is a six-digit numerical
value, unique within a state for
any given year, composed of the
last two digits of the year in
which the survey was begun (yy>,
the FIPS code for the state in
which the survey was begun (ss),
and the number of the survey (nn)
conducted within state ss for
year yy. nn may be any numerical
value from 00 to 99. Up to 20
yyssnn identifiers may be
specified in a single retrieval
request, each identifier
separated from the preceding
identifier by a slash (/).
specifies that no intensive survey
data are to be retrieved.
specifies that only intensive
survey data are to be retrieved,
regardless of with which
intensive survey it is associated.
WQ-RET
4-87
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
DEFAULT VALUE: None. If not specified, intensive survey
data will be retrieved along with
other data stored, according to
the data selection keywords
specified.
NOTES ON USAGE:
The intensive survey identifier is stored as the value
for parameter 116, which signifies that the sample for
which the parameter is stored belongs to the specified
intensive survey. Refer to Appendix G of this part for
a complete description of storing, processing, and
retrieving intensive survey data.
The IS keyword is valid with the RET, MEAN, PLOT, LOG,
STAND, PUNCH, MSP, and REG retrieval programs.
'IS=NOT,' inhibits the retrieval of all samples which
have a value stored for parameter 116; 'IS=ONLY,'
retrieves only samples which have values stored for
parameter 116.
When specifying more than one identifier via the yyssnn
value of the IS keyword, each identifier must be unique
and different. A sample is selected if it contains any
one of the specified intensive survey identifiers.
EXAMPLE(S):
Obtain a location plot and PGM=LOC,PURP=305B/STA,
listing of the stations that STO24,
belong to survey number 10 TAGS,SCALE=24000,
conducted by the State of 15=772410,
Maryland during 1977.
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-88
-------
c
FUNCTION
CLASSIFICATION: Data Selection Function
USE: This function is used to retrieve data for all
parameters that comprise one or more sets of
parameters, without specifying the individual parameter
codes that make up the set. The sets of parameters
include parameter groups, media-related parameters,
phase (e.g., suspended or dissolved), and Chemical
Abstracts Service (CAS) numbers.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
|EXTRACTJ=C(set-identifier [operator set-identifier...]),
where set-identifier is the official name of
a parameter group, a media-related
parameter, or a parameter phase, or is a
five- through nine-digit CAS number; and
where operator is any valid logical operator
('AND', or 'OR'). Lists of these names are
provided below.
The set-identifier value can be further
modified to retrieve a subset of the group
of values, as follows:
set-identifier:x:y
where x denotes the relative position within
the set of parameters where the retrieval is
to begin, and where y denotes the number of
parameters within the set to be retrieved,
beginning at parameter number x.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-89
-------
NOTES ON USAGE:
A C Function can serve as an aid to parameter selection
(when coded as a value of the P keyword), or as an aid
in station selection (when combined with the EXTRACT
Keyword).
When used with the EXTRACT keyword, set-identifiers,
mask-names, and operators may be combined in any
logically-consistent fashion, using parentheses where
necessary to avoid ambiguity. (See the EXTRACT keyword
description for information on structuring valid
EXTRACT expressions.)
The C Function operates similarly to the INCLUDE
keyword (see the descriptions of the miscellaneous
retrieval keywords), in that the STORET system
automatically includes the entire set of parameters or
stations (referenced by the C Function) into the
retrieval request.
When used, the C Function will retrieve all parameters
within a group, and most groups contain hundreds of
parameters. The set-identifier:x:y value of the C
Function is used to divide a group of parameters into
sub-groups so that the number of individual parameters
retrieved does not exceed the maximum number of
parameters that can be retrieved by the retrieval
program. For example, P-C(METALS), would retrieve over
400 parameters, several hundred over the RET program
limit of 50. Specifying P=C(METALS:1:50),
P=C(METALS:51:50), ... in separate retrieval requests
in separate jobs will retrieve the parameters in this
group.
The STORET command PRTPAR can be used to determine the
number of parameters that meet the C Function
expression. It also determines the number of stations
in STORET behind which these parameters are stored.
This command can be entered whenever you are in a
STORET/TSO env i ronment.
Values for the C Function must be either official group
names of parameter groups or valid CAS numbers. The
names of the parameter groups are listed below; further
information on these groups, including the number of
parameters within the group, is provided in Appendix B,
STORET Parameters and Parameter Codes. The STORET help
data set names PARGROUP contains the JCL to obtain a
sorted listing of STORET parameters by group, with CAS
numbers.
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-90
-------
Name of Parameter Group
Official Name
Administrative ADMIN
Bacteriological BACT
Biological BIOL
Dissolved Oxygen DO
Flow FLOW
Inorganics INORG
Organics ORG
Metals METALS
Nitrogen NITR
Oxygen Demand OXYDE
Pesticides PEST
Phosphorous PHOS
Physical PHYS
Radiological RAD
Sol ids/Particulates SOLIDS
Temperature TEMP
Miscellaneous Other MISC
Media-Related Groups
Water column WATER
Air AIR
Tissue TISSUE
Effluent EFFLUENT
Land LAND
Bottom sediment SEDIMENT
Food FOOD
Meteorological METEOR
Other (non-specific) OTHER
Phase
Total of material TOTAL
Dissolved material only DISS
Suspended material only SUSP
Material in wet sediment only WET
Material in dry sediment only DRY
Material in fat (tissue) FAT
Other (non-specific) AOTHER
Most STORET parameters fall into several groups and/or
CAS designations, and specifications can be combined in
many useful ways to limit retrievals to stations and/or
parameters specifically desired. For example, STORET
parameter code 71900 (Mercury, Total ug/1 as Hg) is a
member of the following groups: CAS I 7439976, METALS,
WATER, and TOTAL. The C function expression P=C(TOTAL
AND METALS AND WATER AND 7439976), will retrieve this
parameter along with any others which fall into all
four categories.
WQ-RET
4-91
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Produce an inventory of all
STORET stations in Virginia
that are monitoring ambient
stream water for Coliform
Bacteria (P=31616), and are
also monitoring for metals
in the water column.
Produce a tabular listing of
Temperature (P=10), Dissolved
Oxygen (P=300), and pH
(P=400) for all STORET sites
in the country that are
monitoring either for CAS
number 7440666 (Zinc) or
7439976 (Mercury).
Retrieve the first 50
parameters belonging to the
organic group that are
measured in water for the
stations along the Gold Digger
River and print the raw data
for the years 1971 through
1980.
PGM=INVENT,PURP=404E/EPA,
STC=51,
EXTRACT*(AMBNT AND STREAM)
AND P31616 AND
C(METALS AND WATER).
PGM=RET,PURP=30SB/FED,
MASK
EXTRACTS ( 7440666 OR
7439976),
P=10,P=300,P=400,
PGM=RET,PURP=104B6/EXAMPLE,
INCLUDE*
CN.EPAIII.AAAA.GOLD.DIGGER,
P«C(WATER AND ORGtliSO).
EXTRACTS (WATER AND
ORG;1;50),
BD=710101,ED=801231.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-92
-------
PRINT
CONTROL
KEYWORDS
PRT print options
SHIFT shift station header information
HEAD report identification information
PRMI print RMI values
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982 H
4-93 g
-------
PRINT CONTROL KEYWORDS
The PRT, HEAD, SHIFT, and PRMI print control keywords described
in detail in the following pages are used to control what
information is printed on a retrieval output, and in what
locations it is to appear. The following annotated sheet of a
representative output report references the keyword or keywords
specified in the retrieval request that resulted in the
information shown.
RFFRICVAL
PUN 1
RIVFR
SYSTEM
I JDFX 02140O1
•IILFS 0016 42
O16465OO
G5 GAGF
230040 POTO-MP6
39 00 1s 0 077 15 11 0 2
POTOMAC RIVER AT GREAT FALLS
24031 MARYLAND
NORTH ATLANTIC 02149"
POTOMAC RIVER
1110HET £40603
0000 FEET DEPTH CLASS 00 CSN-RSP 0000179-O094343
III
IV
VII VIII IX
XI
DESCRIPTION
ACTIVATION DATF1 OCT 14. 1957 SAMPLED BY1 U S ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEFRS
FIELD ANALYSIS BY1 U S ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS OTHER COOPERATING AGFN-
CIES' MARYLAND STATE DEPT OF HEALTH NEAREST PERTINENT GAGING STATION'
NFAR WASHINGTON. D C , OPERATED BY U S G S DRAINAGE ARFA AT CAGING
STATION1 11,560 SQUARE MILES PERIOD OF RECORD' 1930 TO PRFSENT REMARKS'
GAGING STATION BFLOH DIVFRSION FOR DIST OP COLUMBIA MUNICIPAL SUPPLY
AVERAGE DISCHARGE INCLUDFS DIVERSION ADJUSTMENT
1) Report Identification Information - specified via the
HEAD keyword.
2) Station Header Information - information stored in
WQF for each station. The example on the last page
of Section 2, Building a Retrieval, defines the
information printed as station header information.
3) Station Type - information stored in WQF for each
station.
4) RMI Information - included in Station Header
Information via the PRMI keyword.
5) Station Description Paragraph - specified via the
PRT keyword.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-94
-------
PRT
CLASSIFICATION: Print Control Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to control what is to be printed
from a retrieval. Output options include combinations
of the station description paragraph and the raw data.
Station header information always prints.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
PRT»
PAR
DATA
BOTH
NO
PRT=PAR,
PRT=DATA,
PRT=BOTH,
PRT=NO,
the PRT keyword may be assigned any one of
the following values, as follows:
specifies that only the station description
paragraph is to be printed. Stored or
calculated parametric data values will
not print.
specifies that only the stored parametric
data values and any calculated data values
are to be printed.
specifies that both stored parametric data
values (and calculated values, if applicable)
and the station description paragraph are to
be printed.
specifies that the stored parametric data
values used for the analysis are not to be
printed. Calculated data values and station
header information will be printed.
DEFAULT VALUE:
NOTES ON USAGE:
PRT=DATA,
PRT=NO,
For program RET.
For programs MEAN, STAND, PLOT,
LOC, MSP, and REG.
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data except INVENT, INV120, and ALLPARM.
This keyword may be used only once in any retrieval
request. If specified more than once, only the last-
specified value will be valid.
WQ-RET
4-95
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
The table below summarizes the information printed as a result of
the various values of the PRT keyword.
KEYWORD
VALUE
PAR
DATA
BOTH
NO
STATION
HEADER
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
i
STATION
DESC PARA
Yes
No
Yes
No
PARAMETRIC
DATA
No
Yes
Yes
No
CALCULATED
DATA
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
EXAMPLE(S):
Print the station
description paragraph along
with the station header
information and the data.
Print calculated values
output by the MEAN program,
and also stored
parametric data values.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
P=l1,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
PRT=BOTH.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071723,
P=l1,P=300,P=400,P=610,
P=1045,P=31501,
BD=730101,
PRT=DATA,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-96
-------
SHIFT,
CLASSIFICATION: Print Control Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to shift a retrieval's station
header information from the upper right hand corner of
each page to the upper left hand corner of each page.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
SHIFT, There is no value associated with this keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data except INVENT, INV120, and ALLPARM.
If SHIFT and HEAD are both used in a single retrieval,
care must be exercised in the specification of the HEAD
keyword character strings so that the station header
information (moved by SHIFT) does not override the
report identification information (specified by HEAD).
See further discussion under the HEAD keyword
description.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
Depending upon the information retrieved, the station
header information is often the only information on the
right half of the retrieval output. Shifting of this
header information will allow the output to be printed
on narrower paper, or to be trimmed for easier
handling.
EXAMPLES:
Print the station
header information in
the upper left hand
corner of each page
rather than in the
upper right hand corner.
PGM=RET,PURP= 3 0 5/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
SHIFT.
WQ-RET
4-97
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
HEAD
CLASSIFICATION: Print Control Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to specify user-entered report
identification information which is to be printed at
the top of each page of a retrieval. This information
is in addition to the station header information, and
optionally the station description paragraph, and is an
ideal way for users to title their retrievals.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
HEAD-text, where text is a string of from
one to 65 alphanumeric
characters, including blanks,
which will be printed at the top
of each page of the retrieval in
the positions designated by the
user.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data except ALLPARM.
The specified character strings may not contain any
embedded commas, but a comma must follow each line of
text.
Up to five HEAD keywords can be specified in a single
retrieval request for a total of five lines of report
heading information.
Care should be exercised when HEAD and SHIFT are used
in the same retrieval request. If the SHIFT keyword
which shifts the station header information to the left
corner of each page is specified along with the HEAD
keyword in a retrieval, 35 blanks must be left at the
beginning of each value of the HEAD keyword so that the
report identification information (specified by HEAD)
is not overriden by the station header information.
When used with the LOC program, the text for the HEAD
keyword may not exceed 35 characters.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-99
-------
EXAMPLE(S/:
Print the following
two lines at the top
of each page of output
DATA COLLECTED
SINCE 1973
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
PGM-RET,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071723,
P=l1,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
HEAD»DATA COLLECTED,
HEAD=SINCE 1973,
When coding a lengthy value for a HEAD keyword, it is
very easy to overlook placing a comma at the end of the
instruction. The HEAD keyword is like all other
keywords in this STORET syntax requirement.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
4-100
-------
PRMI,
CLASSIFICATION: Print Control Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to specify that RMI coding (see
the description in this section on the RMI station
selector keyword) is to appear as an additional line of
station header information. (All other coding stored
with a station prints automatically.)
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
PRMI,
There is no value associated with this
keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
data.
Programs INVENT, INV120, and INDEX print RMI
information automatically. The keyword must also be
used with mileage-linear retrievals using the Multiple
Station Plot (MSP) program (see Section 7).
The storing of RMI information with a station is
optional. Obviously, RMI values have to have been
stored in order for this keyword to have validity.
EXAMPLE(S):
Print the RMI information
for the station along with
the station header and data.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=l1150050,5=255420,
P=10,P=300,P=400,
PRMI
WQ-RET
4-101
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
Miscellaneous Retrieval
Keywords
m
INCLUDE
NOECHO
ECHO
add retrieval instructions contained in a
data set
suppress printing of lines of a retrieval
request
print lines of a retrieval request
WQ-RET
4-103
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
INCLUDE
CLASSIFICATION: Miscellaneous Retrieval Keyword
USE: This keyword is used to add lines of STORET retrieval
instructions to a retrieval request from a data set
located in the user's library or available from a
central STORET library.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
INCLUDE=data-set-name,
where data-set-name is either 1) the fully
qualified name of any cataloged disk data
set, or if enclosed in parentheses as in
(dataname), 2) the name of a STORET-owned
library data set.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
The INCLUDE keyword may be inserted at any point in the
retrieval request. It will cause the inclusion of the
entire contents of the named data set at the point the
INCLUDE statement appears in the retrieval request.
The data set may contain any text which is valid within
the STORET retrieval language. It may NOT contain
another INCLUDE statement.
The INCLUDE statement may be specified any number of
times in each retrieval request.
WQ-RET
4-105
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Do an inventory retrieval for PGM=INVENT,PURP=104B6/EXAMPLE,
specific stations along the INCLUDED
Gold Digger River. The list CN.EPAIII.AAAA.GOLD.DIGGER,
of stations is in a data set
named GOLD.DIGGER in a user
library owned by a user with
userid EPAIII and account
number AAAA.
The STORET library contains PGM=INDEX,
a data set named SNAKE which PURP=229/FED,
contains a polygon around the INCLUDES(SNAKE),
Snake River. List all
station header information
for the stations along the
Snake River.
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-106
-------
NOECHO
ECHO
CLASSIFICATION: Miscellaneous Retrieval Keywords
USE: When a STORET retrieval request is submitted for
processing, each line of the request is printed
(echoed) on the terminal as a result of its being
processed by the STORET SCAN program. These keywords
are used to control the printing of excessively long
retrieval instruction sets, both at the terminal and on
printed output. This capability is particularly useful
with the use of the INCLUDE keyword or the C Function
capability which may contain extremely large numbers of
retrieval instructions.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
NOECHO, There are no values for these two keywords.
ECHO,
DEFAULT VALUE: ECHO,
NOTES ON USAGE:
NOECHO may be inserted at any point in a retrieval
request, and causes the SCAN program to STOP printing
the usual echo of your input text. If it is placed
before an INCLUDE keyword, the echo of the INCLUDEd
text will also be suppressed. Print is suppressed
until an ECHO keyword is encountered.
ECHO may be inserted at any point in a retrieval
request, and causes the SCAN program to start printing
all input text in the retrieval, even INCLUDEd text.
ECHO is the default.
These keywords may be used any number of times.
Users should note that constructing an INCLUDE data set
to begin with a NOECHO keyword makes it impossible to
print the file contents during SCAN. Similarly,
constructing an INCLUDE data set to begin with an ECHO
keyword makes it impossible to suppress the echo of the
INCLUDEd text.
Retrieval requests with syntax errors may be very
difficult to de-bug if NOECHO is in effect. The NOECHO
is, however, over-ridden in the event an error occurs
for the line on which the error appears.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
4-107
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
In the example used in the PGM=RET,PURP=104B6/EXAMPLE,
description of the INCLUDE NOECHO.
keyword and the C Function, INCLUDE*
suppress the printing of the CN.EPAIII.AAAA.GOLD.DIGGER,
polygon statements, but not ECHO,
the rest of the retrieval. P=C(WATER AND ORG:1:50),
EXTRACT=C(WATER AND
ORG:1:50),
BD=710101,ED=801231,
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
4-108
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-RET
WATER QUALITY RETRIEVAL
CO
m
o
SECTION i
6 o>
BASIC RETRIEVAL PROGRAMS
AND THEIR
SPECIAL KEYWORDS
(Basic Retrieval; Third Edition)
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
-------
SECTION 6: BASIC RETRIEVAL PROGRAMS
AND THEIR SPECIAL KEYWORDS
Program Name
INVENT
INV120
RET
ALLPARM
MEAN
PLOT
LOG
STAND
INDEX
STA
PUNCH
Primary Program Function
provides summary information on all parameters
sampled at requested stations
(132 character line)
provides summary information on all parameters
sampled at requested stations
(120 character line)
lists sample values for selected parameters
lists sample values for all parameters
performs statistical calculations on
parametric data
plots parametric data as a function of time
plots locations of stations within a
geographic area
compares stored parameter values with parameter
standards
lists station identification information
lists primary and secondary station codes
punches selected WQF data onto 80-column cards
The following pages contain a detailed discussion of each of
these programs, including a statement on the program's use, a
summary of the keywords that are special or unique to the
respective program, and sample printouts which illustrate the
printed output of the program. Immediately after each program
description are the detailed descriptions for the keywords
specific to the program.
A summary of the keywords described in this section, listed by
the program with which they are associated, follows.
WQ-RET
6-1
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
BASIC RETRIEVAL PROGRAMS AND THEIR SPECIAL KEYWORDS
INVENT
INV120
PSA
SP
RET
DR
ALLPARM
SQUASH
P=ALL
MEAN
LV,HV
DG
SORT
BASE,VD
SF
PCTL
PCTLWT
LOAD
LOG
DM
LL1,LH1,LL2,LH2
CALCULATION OF DISSOLVED
OXYGEN SATURATION
CALCULATION OF UN-IONIZED
AMMONIA
CALCULATION OF COLIFORM/STREP
COUNT RATIO
PLOT
FACT,SYM
SC
LOAD
LOG
LL1,LH1,LL2,LH2
NOPLOT
LV,HV
REGLINE
CALCULATION OF DISSOLVED
OXYGEN SATURATION
CALCULATION OF UN-IONIZED
AMMONIA
CALCULATION OF COLIFORM/STREP
COUNT RATIO
LOG
SCALE
NOCOUN
NOPOLPLT
TAGS,STREAMS,CLR
LOCSYM
SYMSIZE
STAND
LV,HV
PSI,PSA,PVS,PSO
TS
CALCULATION OF DISSOLVED
OXYGEN SATURATION
CALCULATION OF UN-IONIZED
AMMONIA
CALCULATION OF COLIFORM/STREP
COUNT RATIO
INDEX
CARDOUT
STA
NO SPECIAL KEYWORDS
PUNCH
NO SPECIAL KEYWORDS
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-2
-------
PGM=INVENT,
PGM=INV120,
KEYWORDS SPECIAL TO THESE PROGRAMS:
The following two keywords are special to these two
programs and are described in detail on the following
pages.
PSA, prints station descriptions for all stations
retrieved, even if no parameter data have been
selected.
SP, suppresses all printed output except summary
information.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-3
-------
PGM-INVENT,
PGM=INV120,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The function of these two programs is to produce
summary listings about all parameters that have been
sampled at the selected stations. Information listed
for each parameter includes the number of observations
and its period of record, as well as several
statistical expressions of the data. All summary
information is printed according to remarks. If remark
codes were stored for any of the parameters, each
summary for that parameter is printed according to
remarked data, unremarked data, or a combination of
both. The programs also produce the same summary
information for selected parameters. INVENT utilizes a
132-character print line; INV120 excludes two columns
of statistical data (the coefficient of variance and
the standard error) so that the listing can print on a
120-character 1ine.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
All station selection keywords described in Section 4
are valid with these programs. Data selection keywords
valid with INVENT and INV120 are P, BD, ED, BG, EG, ET,
BT, R, AGGR, UD, LD, UK, ANC, and DSROC. The only
valid print control keyword is HEAD. The keywords
SELECT and NOSELECT described in Section 5 are valid.
The P keyword may be specified up to 1200 times. If
individual parameters are specified, only those
specified will be printed.
i
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
These programs provide excellent summary information
for users who wish to review the coverage for their own
network, or who wish to review monitoring activities in
other geographical areas.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-5
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
EXAMPLE 1
Retrieve an inventory
for station 2080140
of agency 21IDSURV.
PGM=INVENT,PURP=305B/STA,
A»21IDSURV,S-2080140,
/TVPA/AHBHT/STREAH
INDEX 1310001 002740 09440
HILE6 OJ24 30 0750 60 079 TO
PARAMETER
00061 STREAM PLOW
00070 TURB JKfiN
00076 TURB TRBIDHTH
0009S CHOUCTVY AT 7SC
001 16 IHTHSVE SURVEY
0030O 00
00400 PH
00403 UB PH
00410 T ALK CA003
O0425 HC03 ALK CACO3
00430 C03 ALK CACO3
005OO RESIDUE TOTAL
00530 RESIDUE TOT HFLT
00535 RESIDUE VOL NFLT
00610 NH3+NK4- H TOTAL
00620 HO3-H TOTAL
00625 TOT XJEL N
00630 NO2tN03 H-TOTAL
00665 PHOS-TOT
00669 PHOS-TOT HYDRO
INST-CFS
JTU
HACH FTU
HICROHHO
I DENT
HG/L
SU
su
HG/L
MO/L
HG/L
HG/L
HC/L
MG/L
MO/L
HC/L
HC/L
HG/L
MO/L P
HG/L P
RHK
K
TOT
K
TOT
K
TOT
K
TOT
It
TOT
TOT
TOT
X
TOT
K
TOT
2080140
47 SB 00 0 111 29 00 0 2
16079 IDAHO CARIBOU
PACIFIC NORTHWEST 130600
UPPER SHAKE RIVER
71IDSURV 7B0120
0000 CLASS 00 C5N-RSP O3 16401-0429290
NUMBER HEAH VARIANCE STAN DEV COEP VAR STAND ER MAXIMUM MINIMUM BEG DATE END DATE
10 16 7230 143 941 11 9976 717429 3 79396 40 OOOO B 00000 77/08/3O 81/08/25
6 15000 494999 703562 611793 7B7228 2 10OOO 400000 77/07/06 78/11/06
17 79833 17 3B99 4 17012 2 31889 1 203B1 IS OOOO 290000 79/05/09 81/11/2
2Q 39 ?OQ 38253 8 19S SB6 264S91 43 7343 942 OOO 107 000 77/06/0* 81/11/2
70 778101 733E+08 4831 62 006310 1080 38 781601 771601 77/06/09 81/11/2
17 11764 2 83289 1 6B312 184600 408216 17 50OO S 70000 77/06/09 Hl/11/2
1 100000 100000 100000 78/11/06 78/11/0
20 12049 66 BB73 8 17847 * 1 14858 1 82876 26 3000 100000 77/06/O9 Bl/11/2
14 58213 348313 590181 077838 157732 85000 6 8000O 7/07/M 81/11/2
16 55000 054622 233714 030956 058429 OOOOO 7 10000 7/06/09 81/11/2
18 46 278 4591 00 67 7S69 195672 IS 9705 IS 000 204 000 7/06/09 Bl/11/2
17 39 750 4748 63 68 9103 7O2B27 19 8927 15 OOO 204 000 9/05/O9 81/11/2
12 OOOOO 000000 000000 000000 OOOOO 1 OOOOO 9/05/09 81/11/2
20 94 3SO 7082 31 84 1S6S 170237 18 8179 19 000 J01 000 7/06/09 81/11/2
1 51671 64 4973 9 19191 1 35254 2 2979* 7 OOOO 1 OOOOO 7/06/09 81/11/3
10000 6 43001 2 S3S7S 497205 1 46401 OOOOO 3 30000 7/08/3O 77/11/28
OOOOO OOOOO 2 OOOOO 7/06/09 77/06/09
32500 6 68920 2 58635 598000 1 29317 OOOOO 2 OOOOO / 7/06/09 77/11/28
2 OS7BOO 002713 0520B7 901154 011647 2480OO 013000 77/06/O* 81/11/24
001000 001 OOO 001000 77/11/28 7 //I 1/28
018000 001654 040669 2 25941 016603 1010OO 001000 77/06/09 77/11/28
OS4200 001563 039537 779471 017682 110000 020000 7//06/09 77/11/28
010000 010000 010000 '7/10/25 77/10/25
046833 001576 039701 847708 016200 110000 010000 77/06/09 77/11/28
1 7110S2 197971 444883 625669 102063 1 90OOO 100000 77/06/09 81/11/24
100000 100008 100000 77/07/06 77/07/06
7 680500 206173 4S4063 667250 101532 1 90000 100000 77/06/09 81/11/24
1 1081S4 005130 071627 662273 019866 2000OO 010000 78/11/06 81/11/24
010000 010000 010000 BO/06/25 80/06/25
1 101143 005424 073648 728157 019683 200000 010000 78/11/06 81/11/24
1 050769 001141 033779 665346 009369 1500OO 02000O 77/11/20 81/11/24
025000 000390 019746 789937 008062 050OOO 010000 77/06/09 80/11/17
1 042632 001020 031945 749322 007329 150000 010000 77/06/09 81/11/24
031667 000617 024833 784193 010138 OBOOOO 010000 7B/11/06 81/05/19
010000 776E-10 000009 000881 000003 010000 010000 79/01/20 81/11/24
1 020000 000383 019579 97B94S 005430 OBOOOO 010000 76/11/O6 81/11/24
EXAMPLE 2
Retrieve an inventory
for station 2080140 of
agency 21IDSURV but limit
print to 120 characters.
PGM=INV120,PURP«=305B/STA,
A-21IDSURV,5=2080140,
/TYPA/AHBHT/STREAH
INDEX 1310001 002740 09440
MILES 0324 30 0750 60 079 70
PARAMETER
00010 HATE!
00061 STREAK
00070 TURB
00076 TURB
O009S CNDUCTVy
00116 IHTHSVE
00300 DO
00335 COD
00400 PH
00403 LAB
00410 T ALK
00425 HC03 ALK
00430 COS ALK
00500 RESIDUE
00530 RESIDUE
00535 RESIDUE
0061 O NH3+HH4-
00615 N02-K
00620 H03-N
00625 TOT KJEL
00630 KO2fcMO3
00665 PHOS-TOT
00669 PHOS-TOT
TEMP
FLOW
JK8U
TRBIDNTR
AT 25C
SURVEY
LOHLEVEL
PH
CACO3
CACO3
CACO3
TOTAL
TOT HFLT
VOL NFLT
H TOTAL
TOTAL
TOTAL
H-TOTAL
HYDRO
CENT
INST-CFS
JTU
HACH FTU
HICROHHO
I DENT
HG/L
HG/L
SU
SU
HG/L
HG/L
MG/L
HC/L
HO/L
HG/L
HC/L
HG/L
HG/L
HG/L
HG/L
HC/L P
HG/L P
RHX t
K
TOT
K
X
TOT
K
TOT
K
TOT
K
TOT
K
TOT
K
TOT
K
TOT
K
TOT
UMBER MEAN
17 13 7586
10 16 7230
6 1 15000
12 1 79833
20 739 200
20 776101
1 7 48999
100000
2 7 12049
1 7 SB213
1 7 55000
1 346 778
1 339 750
1 1 OOOOO
7 494 350
1 7 51875
1 33333
1 6 54210
5 10000
a ooooo
4 37500
7 OS7BOO
021400
OO1000
018000
054200
010000
046833
1 711052
100000
2 680500
1 108154
010000
1 101143
1 050769
02SOOO
1 042632
031667
010000
1 020000
2080140
42 56 00 0 111 29 00 0 2
HTH LITTLE BLXFT R AT HENRY HIHE
16029 IDAHO CARIBOU
PACIFIC NOBTHNEBT 1306OO
UPPER SHAKE RIVER
21IDSURV 780120
OOOO CLASS 00 C5H-RSP 0316401-0429290
VARIANCE
12 1389
143 941
494999
17 3899
38253 8
233E+06
66 6873
348313
054622
4S91 00
4746 63
oooooo
7082 31
84 4923
333335
75 6170
6 43001
6 66920
002713
001981
001654
001 S63
001576
197921
2061 73
005130
005424
001141
000390
001020
000617
776E-10
000383
STAN DEV
3 46409
11 9976
703S62
4 17012
195 586
4831 62
1 66312
8 17847
590181
233714
67 7569
68 9103
oooooo
84 1565
9 19197
5773S2
6 70730
7 53575
7 5B635
057O87
044506
040669
039537
039701
444883
454063
071627
073648
033779
019748
031945
074833
000009
P19S79
MAXIMUM
20 OOOO
40 OOOO
2 10000
15 OOOO
942 000
781601
12 5000
26 3000
100000
26 3000
65000
OOOOO
15 000
15 OOO
OOOOO
19 000
7 OOOO
OOOOO
7 OOOO
OOOOO
OOOOO
OOOOO
246000
101000
001000
101000
110000
010000
110000
1 90000
100000
1 90000
200OOO
010000
700000
15000O
050000
150000
OBOOOO
010000
OBOOOO
HINIHUH BEG DATE END DATE
7 OOOOO 77/06/09 81/11/24
8 OOOOO 77/08/30 81/08/25
400000 '7/07/06 76/11/06
29000O 79/05/09 81/11/24
107 000 77/06/09 81/11/24
771601 77/06/09 81/11/24
S 70000 77/06/09 81/11/24
400000 77/06/09 81/11/24
100000 76/11/06 70/11/06
100000 77/06/09 81/11/24
6 80000 /7/07/06 81/11/24
7 10000 77/06/09 81/11/24
204 000 /7/06/09 81/11/24
204 000 79/05/09 81/11/24
1 OOOOO 79/05/09 81/11/24
301 000 77/06/09 81/11/24
1 OOOOO 77/06/09 81/11/24
1 OOOOO /a/11/06 79/11/05
1 OOOOO 77/06/09 81/11/24
3 30000 77/06/30 77/11/28
2 OOOOO 77/06/09 77/06/09
2 OOOOO '7/06/09 77/11/28
013000 / 7/06/09 61/11/24
001000 77/06/09 77/10/25
001000 /7/11/76 77/11/28
001000 17/06/09 77/11/28)
020000 '7/06/09 77/11/28
010000 7/10/25 77/10/25
010000 7/06/09 77/11/28
100000 7/06/09 81/11/24
100000 7/07/06 77/07/06
100000 7/06/09 81/11/24
010000 78/11/06 81/11/24
01 OOOO 80/06/25 80/06/25
01 OOOO '6/11/06 81/11/74
020000 77/11/28 81/11/74
010000 77/06/09 80/11/17
010000 77/06/09 81/11/24
010000 78/11/06 81/05/19
010000 79/03/20 81/11/24
010000 78/11/06 81/11/24
'FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-6
-------
PSA,
PGM=INVENT,
PGM=INV120,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE:
The PSA keyword may be used with either the INVENT or
INV120 retrieval programs to print the station header
information for all stations retrieved whether or not
they contain any data either for the parameter codes
specified or for the stations (if all parameters are
desired) in the retrieval request.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
PSA,
There is no value associated with this
keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
If this keyword is not specified, station header
information will not print for stations which do not
contain data.
EXAMPLE(S):
Print station header
information even if data
for selected parameters
are not present.
PGM=INVENT,PURP=305B/STA,
A«14AGNFS9,B»P,S-071720,
8=071723,
P=ll ,P=300,P«400, P=610,
BD=730101,
PSA,
WQ-RET
6-7
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
SP,
PGM=INVENT,
PGM=INV120,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE: The SP keyword may be used with either the INVENT or
INV120 retrieval programs to suppress printing of
individual station summaries. It produces a summary of
the information for all stations retrieved as if the
data came from a single station. It also produces a
summary page showing parameter coverage.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
SP, There is no value associated with this
keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
If this keyword is not used, a summary for individual
stations as well as a summary which includes all
stations will be printed. If the AGGR keyword is used
with SP, summaries will print for each aggregate.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-9
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve a cumulative
inventory of all stations
specified and a summary
of parameter coverage.
PGM«INVENT,PURP= 3 0 5B/STA,
A=l4AGNFS9,B«P,S=071720,
S=071723,BD=730101,
P=l1,P=300,P«400,P«610,
P=1045,P=31501.SP.
41962
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
TOTAL
©
STA BEG
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
3
©
STA END 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
3
GROSS
©
OF OBS 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
32
23
36
81
50
136
0
0
0
358
©
OF SI
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
6
15
17
37
119
0
0
0
201
PARAMETER
00011
00300
00400
00610
01045
31501
WATER
DO
PH
NH3+NH4-
IROS
TOT COLI
TEMP
N TOTAL
FE.TOT
MFIMENDO
FAHN
MG/L
SU
MG/L
UG/L
/loom.
STA BSD-
1MPLE -O
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
©
NUMBER MEAN
43 59 6977
35 8.58855
169 6 39533
59 072542
42 153.857
10 294.500
©
PERIOD 01
«.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
O
0
0
1
GROSS
VARIANCE
149.421
9.26556
.209194
003050
25033.6
239591
' nCD IN
«3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
STAN DEV
12 2238
3.04394
.457377
055230
158.220
489.481
ns
>"3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
COEF VAR
.204762
.354418
.071517
761352
1 02836
1 66207
STAND ER MAXIMUM MINIMUM BEG DATE END DATE
1 86411 78 OOOO 33.0000 73/01/O3 76/10/27
.514519 13.9000 400000 73/01/03 78/03/30
.035183 7.40000 5 50000 73/01/03 78/07/28
007190 .280000 040000 76/04/23 78/08/30
24 4139 740.000 30.0000 73/01/O3 78/08/30
154 787 1500 00 5 00000 73/01/03 74/07/19
The following correspond to the circled numbers on the output.
1) The gross table prints at the end of any inventory
retrieval and is the only output from an inventory
when the SP keyword is used.
2) The number of stations for which data were initially
stored during the year.
3) The number of stations whose period of record ends
during the year.
4) The total number of observations made at all stations
during the year.
5) The total number of samples taken at all stations
during the year.
6) A summarization of the periods of record of the data.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-10
-------
PGM=RET,
3D
m
KEYWORDS SPECIAL TO THIS PROGRAM:
DR allows selection of decimal point locations
See Section 7, Advanced Retrieval Programs and Their
Special Keywords, for additional capabilities of this
program.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-11
-------
PGM=RET,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The RET program is usually used to obtain tabular
listings of actual sample values, i.e., raw data values
which have not been manipulated in any way by the WQF
analysis programs. These listings show the sampling
dates, sampling times, depths, and values of requested
parameters. Up to 50 parameters can be specified;
values for ten parameters will be printed per page.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
All general keywords described in Section 4 are valid
with the RET program. The parameter code keyword (P)
should be omitted if the keyword 'PRT=PAR,' is entered
for printing of station descriptive paragraphs.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-13
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Retrieve data on samples
taken since January 1, 1973
at station 071723, agency
14AGNFS9. The parameters to
be retrieved are water
temperatured1), 00(300),
pHUOO), ammonia(610),
iron(1045), and coliforms
(31501).
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071723,
P=11,P=300,P*400,P=610,
P=1045,P=31501,
BD-730101,
/TVPA/AHBXT/LAKE
00011
OH* TIME DEPTH HATER
PBON OF TBMP
TO DAY FEET FAHN
71/12/20 10 SO 33
74/01/1* 50
14/06/11 0* 10 «0
74/06/26 09 25 0007 «B
74/07/19 01 10 0007 71
74/00/9? 10 10 0001 47
75/05/14 1O SO SS
78/05/29 10 is eo
T5/O4/11 10 00 O010 *1
75/04/24 0* 00 72
Tft/07/OZ 11 00 OOM 70
TS/OT/1O 1O 00 70
7S/OT/15 10 40 71
T5/OT/22 10 » 74
79/01/27 M 30 ODD* 66
75/09/24 0* 30 53
75/10/03 10 00 50
71/10/07 1 00 0005 SI
75/10/14 0 10 47
79/10/11 1 OO 0009 40
75/11/04 0 00 41
74/04/93 0 30 44
71/05/21 0 15 61
10 10 0022 57
10 4S O044 47
74/04/10 M 10 •*
74/07/11 11 00 71
74/OO/Q1 10 00 40
10 15 0020 M
10 10 0040 54
74/08/21 M 30 70
O8 45 O01S 71
M 00 0010 41
74/09/14 10 30 «
11 00 0018 4)
0030C
00
M/L
1
1
1
1
1
004
PH
SU
071721 090704000042 40201MH0042
4C 14 10 0 009 21 45 0 1
LOW L *EABT< 26 IMC 8 7M1 PMH JCT US2 MID U045
26053 HICHIOAM OOOEBIC
LUCE SUPERIOR 221200
OHTONMGON KIVER-M1DDLE BM OHTOIIMIOII B
14MHPS9 781016
0051 FEET DEPTH CLASS OO CBH-BSP O480198-O3T1137
00 00610 O1045 11SA1
NHJ+KH4- IRON TOT OOLI
N TOTAL PE TOT HFXNEHDO
HO/L UG/L /inOML
SO 280 S
50 120 ISO
70 10
140
60 280 100
50 620 10
60 120
OO
00
20
42
70
40
no
00
70
00
70
OO
00
sn
no
no 050K 70
40 OSHK ion
60 OSOK 100
an n»oit 5ox
no osnn son
on oso 90
90 OSOK 140
60 OSOK 50K
HO 280 MO
SO PSOK ion
OO 130 SOU
110 940
jn OSOK SOR
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-14
-------
DR
PGM=RET,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE:
This keyword may be used with the RET program to select
the location of the decimal point for parameter values
that are printed by the RET retrieval.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
DR=x,
where x is any single digit value,
zero to 8, as follows:
from
value of x
DR=0,
DR=1,
DR=2,
DR=3,
DR=4,
DR=5,
DR=6,
DR=7,
DR=8,
requested decimal placement
.XXXE+XX
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxx.x
xxxxx.xx
xxxx.xxx
xxx.xxxx
xx.xxxxx
x.xxxxxx
.xxxxxxx
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is parameter dependent and applies only to
the immediately preceding parameter code keyword (P).
It may be used once for each parameter requested.
If DR is not specified, the parameter values will be
printed with the decimal placement as defined in the
parameter code definitions.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
This keyword may be used to prevent retrieved
parameters from printing imprecise trailing digits with
their default decimal placement.
WQ-RET
6-15
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Print values for parameter
11 as whole numbers
and values for parameter
400 with one number to
the right of the decimal
point. Decimal location
for parameter 300 will
not be changed.
Print values of parameter
625 using all available
decimal representations.
(See example below.)
PGM=RET,PURP=104/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5-071723,
P=11,DR«1,P=300,
P=400,DR=2.
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,PURP-
A=11EPALES,S«
P=625,DR-0,P*
P=625,DR=2.P«
P°625,DR«4,P«
P=625,DR=6,P=
P=625,DR=8,
305B/STA,
4435A2,
625,DR°1,
625,DR°3.
625,DR«5,
625,DR=7,
/TYPA/AMBNT/STREAM
DATE
FROM
TO
72/08/26
72/09/09
72/1.0/14
72/11/04
72/12/09
73/01/06
73/02/03
73/03/03
73/03/17
73/04/07
73/04/21
73/06/02
73/07/12
TIME DEPTH
OF
DAY FEET
10 30
10 10
10 35
12 30
10 00
10 30
10 10
09 15
11 15
09 50
10 00
08 30
00625
TOT KJEL
N
MG/L
799E+00
7SOE+00
500E+00
299E+00
319E+00
109E+00
519E+00
349E+00
309E+00
167E+01
369E+00
399E+00
599E+00
00625
TOT KJEL
N
MG/L
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00625
TOT KJEL
N
MG/L
0 8
0 8
0 5
0 3
0 3
0 1
0 5
0 3
0 3
1 7
0 4
0 4
0 6
00625
TOT KIEL
N
MG/L
O 80
0 75
0 50
0 30
0 32
O 11
0 52
0 35
S 31
1 68
0 37
0 40
0 60
4435A2 LS4435A2
42 00 00 0 071 35 00 O 4
BRANCH RIVER
44 75 GEORGIAVILLE
0/SLATERSVILLE RESERVOIR 010691
ST HWY 5 BRDG E EDGE OF SLATERSVILLE
HEP ALES
000
00625
TOT KIEL
N
MG/L
0 800
0 750
0 500
0 300
0 320
0 110
0 520
0 350
0 310
1 680
0 370
0 400
0 600
0 FEET DE
00625
TOT KIEL
N
MG/L
0 8000
0 7500
0 5000
0 3000
0 3200
0 1100
0 5200
0 3500
0 3100
1 6800
0 3700
0 4000
O 6000
PTH CLAS!
00625
TOT KJEL
N
MG/L
0 80OOO
0 75000
0 50000
0 30000
0 32000
0 11000
0 52000
0 35000
0 31000
1 68000
0 37OOO
0 40000
0 60OOO
i 01
> CSN-RS
00625
TOT KIEL
0
0
0
. 0
0
0
0
0
O
1
0
0
0
N
MG/L
800000
750000
500000
300000
320000
110000
520000
350000
310000
679999
370000
400000
600000
P 0091111-0081082
00625
TOT KIEL
N
MG/L
7999999
7500000
5000000
2999999
3199999
1099999
5199999
3499999
3099999
1 679999
3699999
3999999
5999999
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-16
-------
PGM=ALLPARM,
KEYWORDS SPECIAL TO THIS PROGRAM:
The following two keywords are special to the ALLPARM
program and are described in detail following the
description of the ALLPARM program.
SQUASH, prints multiple stations per page of output
P=ALL, enables retrieval of remarked data
3)
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-17
-------
PGM-ALLPARM,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The ALLPARM program is used to obtain, without
specifying any parameter codes, tabular listings of
actual raw data values for all parameters stored at the
station(s) specified in the retrieval. Alternatively,
raw data values can also be obtained for selected
parameters, as is done with the RET program.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
The program identification keywords PGM and PURP, all
station selector keywords, and the station restrictor
keyword EXTRACT are valid. All data selection keywords
except AGGR, PARU, PARF, PLV, PHV, PRV, OUTSIDE, PARH1,
PARH2, and PM are valid. The parameter keyword P may
be specified up to 2000 times. In addition, the
special keyword DR may be used (see the description of
the special keywords for PGM=RET for more information).
OTHER NOTES AND COMMENTS:
If any parameter codes are explicitly-specified within
an ALLPARM retrieval, then raw data values for those
parameters only will be retrieved.
Dissolved oxygen saturations, un-ionized ammonia,
coliform/strep count ratios, and temperature
conversions are automatically computed if all
appropriate parameters are present. See the discussion
of these capabilities described under the MEAN program
in this section.
Complete listings of the STORET parameter definitions
and codes can be obtained via the computer as described
in Appendix B.
Parameter values can also be retrieved as a function of
stored remark codes. See the description of the
program-specific keyword P-ALL, for details on how to
do this.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-19
-------
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
This program is useful when there is a need to obtain
listings of raw data values of more than 50 parameters
(the maximum number that can be obtained via the RET
program), as is often the case when working with toxic
data. Also, by specifying the parameters of interest,
any preferable order of listing can be achieved.
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Retrieve data on samples
taken at station
230040, agency 1110NET.
PGM-ALLPARM,PURP=305B/STA,
A=1110NET,S=230040,
/
23004CI POTO-MP6 01646500 GS GAGE
39 00 IB 0 077 IS 21 0 2
POTOMAC RIVER AT GREAT FALLS
74031 MARYLAND
NORTH ATLANTIC 021490
POTOMAC RIVER
1110NET 02111204
640603 DEPTH 0
/TYPA/AMBNT/STREAM
INDFX O214001
MILES 0016 42
INITIAL DATE
INITIAL TIME-DEPTH-BOTTOM
FINAL DATE
00060 STREAM
01501 ALPHA
01502 ALPHA-T
01503 ALPHA
01504 ALPHA-D
01505 ALPHA
01506 ALPHA-S
03501 BETA
03507 BETA-T
03503 BETA
035O4 BETA-D
03505 BETA
035O6 BFTA-S
31503 TOT COLI
32001 SAMPLE
37003 CCE AND
32004 CAE
37005 CCE
32021 ETHER
32022 WATER
32023 STRONG
32024 WEAK
32025 BASES
32026 NEUTRALS
32027 ALIPHA-
32028 AROMATIC
32029 OXYGEN-
FLOW
TOTAL
ERROR
DISOLVED
ERROR
SUSP
KRROR
TOTAL
ERROR
DISOLVED
ERROR
SUSP
ERROR
MFDLENDO
SIZE
CAE
INSOLUBL
SOLUBLES
ACIDS
ACIDS
TICS
ATES
CFS
PC/L
PC/L
PC/L
PC/L
PC/L
PC/L
PC/L
PC/L
PC/L
PC/L
PC/L
PC/L
/100ML
GAL
UG/L
UG/L
UG/L
UG/L
UG/L
UG/L
UG/L
UG/L
UG/L
UG/L
UG/L
UG/L
.
57/10/14 57/10/14 57/10/21
COMP
57/10/28
2B50 1790
80 60
5876
210
147
63
1
10
4
5
3
32
5
3
21
57/10/28 57/11/04
2230 2130
12
0
12
0
0
0
27
10
23
10
4
10
220 140
57/11/11
1990
0
0
0
0
0
0
a
10
3
10
5
10
13
57/11/18
2fi20
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
10
65
10
16
10
200
57/11/25
1
0
0
0
1
0
14
10
5
10
9
10
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-20
-------
SQUASH,
PGM=ALLPARM,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE: Output from the ALLPARM program is normally printed one
station (and its data) per page. By specifying the
SQUASH keyword, multiple stations (and their
accompanying data) will be allowed to print per page.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
SQUASH, There is no value associated with this keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
EXAMPLE
Retrieve data on samples taken PGM=ALLPARM,PURP=305E/STA,
at stations 230040 and 230041, A=l 1 10NET, 5=230040,
agency 1110NET. Print multiple 5=230041 .SQUASH,
stations per page.
WQ-RET
6-21
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
P=ALL,
PGM=ALLPARM,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE: If in an ALLPARM retrieval, remark codes are specified
for any explicitly-specified parameter codes, then the
retrieval of stored data values for the specified
parameters will be restricted to those with the
specified remark codes. By then specifying P=ALL, the
stored data values for all other parameters stored at
the specified stations will be retrieved.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
P=ALL,
DEFAULT VALUE; None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
The R keyword may be set equal to any valid EPA or USGS
remark code, ALL, or * (see the description of the R
keyword in Section 4). R=OFF is not valid for use with
P=ALL with the ALLPARM program.
The following table portrays the parameter retrieval
alternatives permitted with the ALLPARM program.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-23
-------
P AND R
KEYWORDS
SPECIFIED
ALLPARM OUTPUT FOR THE
SELECTED STATIONS
NONE
Data values for all parameters stored
P=parameter-code(s),
Data values for the parameters specified
only
R=m,
P=parameter-code(s),
Only data values having the indicated
remark codes, for the specified
parameters only
P=parameter-code(s),
R=m,
P=other-p-code(s),
All data values for parameter-codes
specified, and only those data values
having the indicated remark codes for
the specified other-p-codes
R=m,
P=parameter-code(s),
P=ALL,
Data values having the indicated remark
codes, for the specified parameters
only, followed by all data values for
all other parameters stored
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve only those values of
parameters 11 and 1045 which
have remark codes of K or L.
Retrieve all values of all
other parameters that are
stored at station 071723.
PGM-ALLPARM,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
R=KL,P=11,P=1045,
P=ALL,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-24
-------
PGM=MEAN,
KEYWORDS SPECIAL TO THIS PROGRAM:
The following keywords can be specified with the MEAN
program, and are described in detail in the following
pages.
LV establishes the lower limit for a parameter value
HV establishes the upper limit for a parameter value
DG specifies date grouping
SORT sorts data prior to statistical analysis
BASE establishes beginning date for statistical
analyses
VD allows variable date groupings
SF allows selection of statistical functions to be
performed
PCTL specifies the percentiles to be calculated
PCTLWT calculates percentiles by linear interpolation
LOAD allows computation of stream loadings
LOG calculates logarithmic values prior to
statistical analyses
DM controls decimal placement
LL1,LH1 specifies acceptable range for parameter values
LL2/LH2 specifies acceptable range for parameter values
The program can also be used to perform dissolved
oxygen saturation and un-ionized- ammonia calculations,
and to calculate the coliform/strep count ratio.
See Section 7, Advanced Retrieval Programs and Their
Special Keywords, for descriptions of additional
capabilities of this program.
m
WQ-RET
6-25
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
PGM «= ME AN,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The MEAN program performs a variety of user-specified
statistical calculations on requested parameters, and
provides maximum flexibility with regard to combining
stations and grouping data according to desired time
frames. The statistical functions that can be selected
include maximum and minimum value calculations, sum of
squares, variance, standard deviations, percentiles,
and other basic statistical analyses. High and/or low
data values can be eliminated prior to analyses, and
calculations can be performed on the logarithms of the
values. The program is used to calculate loadings,
dissolved oxygen saturations, coliform/strep ratios,
temperature conversions, and the percent of un-ionized
ammonia.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
All general keywords described in Section 4 are valid
with the MEAN program. The parameter keyword P may be
specified up to 50 times.
OTHER NOTES AND COMMENTS:
Neither depth values nor remark codes are printed by
the MEAN program.
Most users find that the analytical capabilities
available with the MEAN program are sufficient to meet
their data reporting requirements. In addition, the
analytical software available in the Statistical
Analysis System, a proprietary software package from
the SAS Institute, has been interfaced to STORET and
may now be used by STORET users to enhance or extend
their analysis of STORET data. Instructions on the use
of this interface may be found in Section 5 of this WQ
Part.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-27
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Retrieve statistical summaries
for the selected parameters
and suppress raw data.
The example shows a portion
of the default statistics and
groupings.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=30 5B/STA,
A=UAGNFS9,S=071723,
P=11,P=300,P=400,P-610,
P=1045,P=31501,
BD=730101,
071723 090706000042 402010280042
46 14 30.0 089 21 45 0 3
LONG L.%BAST<.261DEG.8.7HI.FROM JCT.US2 AND US45
26053 MICHIGAN GOGEBIC
LAKE SUPERIOR 221200
ONTONAGON RIVER-MIDDLE BR.ONTONAGON R
/TYPA/AMBHT/LAKE
DATE TIME DEPTH
FROM OF
TO DAY FEET
73/01/01
YEAR NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
74/01/00
74/01/01
YEAR NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
75/01/00
75/01/01
YEAR NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
76/01/00
76/01/01
YEAR NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
77/01/00
77/01/01
YEAR NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
78/01/00
78/01/01
YEAR NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
79/01/00
00/00/00
STATION NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
99/99/99
14AGNFS9 781016
0051 FEET DEPTH CLASS 00 CSN-RSP 0480198-0373137
00011
WATER
TEMP
FAHN
7
69.5000
33.0000
54 6428
5
78.0000
50.0000
64.7000
15
78 0000
43 0000
60 6000
16
73.0000
34.0000
59.50OO
43
78.0000
33.0000
59.6977
00300
DO
MG/L
7
13.9000
8 10000
10 2429
4
10.2000
7 60000
8 84999
6
10.6000
7.60000
9.16666
17
11 8000
.400000
7.49411
34
13.9000
.400000
8.51470
00400
PH
su
7
6.50000
5.50000
6.28571
5
6 70000
6.50000
6.57999
15
7 20000
5.70000
6.24133
16
6.90000
5.80000
6.37500
10
7.40000
5.60000
6.59999
29
6.67000
5.58000
6.22068
82
7.40000
5.SOOOO
6.32828
00610
NH3+NH4-
N TOTAL
MG/L
16
. 280000
.0400000
.0868749
11
. 0500000
. 0500000
. 0500000
6
. 280OOO
. 0500000
.0983332
33
.280000
.O4OOOOO
.0766665
01045
IRON
FE.TOT
UG/L
5
280.000
50.0000
132 400
5
620 000
120.000
256.000
16
740.000
50 0000
160.000
1
70.0000
7O.OOOO
70.0000
6
480.000
70.0000
161 667
33
740.000
SO. 0000
167.939
31501
TOT COLI
MFIMEHDO
/100ML
6
1500.00
5.00000
407 . 500
4
300.000
10.0000
125.000
10
1500.00
5.00000
294.500
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-28
-------
LV,HV
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keywords
USE: These keywords may be used with the MEAN program to
exclude high and/or low values from calculations
performed by the MEAN program.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
LV=lower-limit, where lower-limit is any numerical
value, including a decimal value,
between -899E+7 and +899E+7.
LV establishes the lower limit for
a parameter value; parameter values
less, or lower, than the lower-limit
are excluded from the MEAN
calculations.
HV=upper-limit, where upper-limit is any numerical
value, including a decimal value,
between -899E+7 and +899E+7.
Parameter values which are greater
than the upper-limit are excluded from
the MEAN calculations.
DEFAULT VALUES: LV=-899E+7,
HV=+899E+7,
NOTES ON USAGE:
Either, or both, of these keywords may be specified for
each parameter.
These keywords are parameter dependent and apply only
to the preceding parameter code keyword (P).
Up to ten pairs of P and LV,HV keywords can be
specified in a single retrieval request.
Although LV and HV may be used with both programs MEAN
and STAND, their function is different with each
program. With program MEAN, values which are not
within the specified limits are excluded; with program
STAND, values which are not within the specified limits
are flagged.
W9~??T FEBRUARY 1982
6-29
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Exclude from statistical
calculations those values for
parameter 1045 which are
below 50 and the values for
parameter 31501 which are
above 1000. All values for
parameter 11 are used in the
calculations.
Produce a statistical summary
for parameters 10, 60, 300,
320, and 400 excluding values
greater than 13 for parameter
10 and less than 20 for
parameter 60 and less than
0.5 and greater than 6 for
320. The default date
groupings are to be used.
The retrieval is for stations
173863 and 173811 for agency
11140100, and stations 173864
and 173863 for agency 21IND.
Print the raw data.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,8=071723,
P=l 1 ,P=1045,LV=1P_J>=31 501,
HV=1000,
BD=730101,
PGM=MEAN,PURP=104B6/EXAMPLE,
A=l1140100,8=173863,8=173811,
A=21IND,8=173864,8=173863,
P=10,HV=13,P=60.LV=20,P=300,
P=320.LV=0.5,HV=6,P=400,
PRT=DATA,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-30
-------
DG
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE: This keyword may be used with the MEAN program to
assign date groupings to the data to be analyzed. It
is also used in conjunction with the SORT keyword.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
DG°values, where values is a string of one or more of the
following alphabetic characters which invoke
the functions described:
S prints individual samples
M calculates summaries by month
Q calculates summaries by quarters
Y calculates summaries by year
P calculates summaries for period of record
G calculates summaries by aggregation of
all data retrieved as if they came from one
station
DEFAULT VALUE: DG=YPG,
NOTES ON USAGE:
The DG keyword may be specified only once within a
retrieval request.
The individual values for DG may be specified in any
order, e.g. 'DG=YPG,' or 'DG=PGY,' are equivalent
instructions. Regardless of the 'order, however,
summaries will be printed in the order of increasing
group size, i.e., in the order listed above.
The DG keyword must be specified when the SORT keyword
is used. Descriptions of its use with SORT are
provided in the description of the SORT keyword.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-31
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Calculate statistical
summaries by month,
quarter, and year.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
DG=MQY,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-32
-------
SORT
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE:
This keyword may be used with the MEAN program to sort
samples prior to statistical analysis by the MEAN
program. The keyword must be used-in conjunction with
the DG keyword.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
SORT'
SM
SV
AM
AV
AY
SORT-SM,
SORT=SV,
SORT=AM,
SORT-AV,
SORT=AY,
the SORT keyword may be assigned any one of the
listed values, and functions in conjunction with
the DG keyword, as follows:
for each station, samples are to be sorted
in monthly order, ignoring the year field.
for each station, samples are to be sorted
in ascending order by the value of the first
parameter specified in the retrieval.
samples are to be sorted in monthly order,
as in SORT=SM, except that the data for
all stations retrieved will be aggregated as
if the data were from one station.
samples are to be sorted in ascending
order by the value of the first parameter
specified in the retrieval (as in
SORT=SV), except that the data are aggregated
as if the data were from one station.
samples are to be aggregated for all
stations as if the data were from
a single station and listed in
year/month/day order.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
WQ-RET
6-33
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
NOTES ON USAGE:
The SORT keyword can be specified only once in a
retrieval.
The SORT keyword must be used with the DG keyword,
which serves as a trigger to the sorting process.
The use of the SORT keyword increases the cost of
retrievals. In some situations, it may be possible to
achieve the same results by using date grouping (DG)
keyword alone.
For SORT=SM,: When used with DG-S, the individual
values will be printed in ascending order according to
the value of the first parameter in the retrieval
within each month. When used with DG=M, or with other
date groupings, the data are grouped as if they all
came from the same year before the statistical
calculations are performed.
For SORT=AM,: When used with DG=S, the data will be
grouped by month in ascending order by the value of the
first parameter in the retrieval. When used with DG=M,
the data will be grouped by month regardless of the
year before the statistics are calculated.
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
6-34
-------
EXAMPLE 1
Retrieve individual samples
for the specified station.
Sort in monthly order
regardless of year.
PGM-MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A=UAGNFS9,5=071723,
P-11,P-300,P«400,
BD=730101,ED°751231,
SORT°SM,DGaS.
SHIFT,
071723 090706000042 402010280042
46 14 30 0 089 21 45 0 3
LONG L tCAST< 261DEG 8 7HI FROM JCT US2 AND US45
260S3 MICHIGAN COGEBIC
LAKE SUPERIOR 22120O
ONTONAGON RIVER-MIDDLE BR ONTONAGON R
14AGHFS9 781016 /TYPA/AMBNT/LAKE
0051 FEET DEPTH CLASS 00 CSN-RSP 0480198-0373137
00011
DATE TINE DEPTH WATER
FROM OF TEMP
TO DAY FEET FAHN
73/01/03 0925
73/05/15 0830
74/05/16
75/05/16 1050
75/05/29 1015
74/06/13 0930
75/06/11 1000
73/06/04 0900
74/06/26 0925
75/06/24 0900
73/07/05 0910
75/07/15 1040
75/07/22 1035
75/07/10 1000
75/07/02 1100
74/07/19 0810
75/08/27 0830
74/08/27 1030
73/08/03 0830
75/09/24 0930
73/09/11 0915
75/10/16 1030
75/10/21 1100
75/10/02 1000
75/10/07 1100
75/11/04 1000
73/12/20 1050
33 0000
49 0000
SO 0000
55 0000
60 0000
60 5000
61 0000
63 0000
68 0000
72 0000
69 5000
71 0000
76 0000
78 0000
78 0000
78 0000
66 0000
67 0000
69 0000
53 0000
66 0000
47 0000
48 0000
50 0000
51 0000
43 0000
33 0000
00300
DO
MG/L
13 8000
10 6000
10 2000
10 2000
8 70000
8 80000
8 70000
8 90000
a 20000
7 60000
7 60000
a 10000
a 10000
a 40000
10 6000
9 70000
13 9000
00400
PH
SU
50000
50OOO
50OOO
00000
00000
70000
20000
50000
60000
42000
50000
00000
00000
40000
70000
50000
70000
60000
50000
00000
00000
00000
50000
70000
OOOOO
ooooo
soooo
WQ-RET
6-35
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE 2
Retrieve individual samples,
monthly and quarterly
summaries for three stations.
Sort the data by
period regardless of year.
The output shown is for
station 071723.
PGM-MEAN,PURP-305B/STA,
A*UAGNFS9,S*071722,
S«071723,S=071724,
P«11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101/ED-751231,
SORT=SM.DG=SMQ.
SHIFT,
071723 090706000042 402010280042
46 14 30.0 089 21 45
LOVG L.%EAST<,261DEG
26053 MICHIGAN
LAKE SUPERIOR
.0 3
.8.7MI.FROM JCT.US2
GOGEBIC
221200
AND US45
ONTONAGON RIVER-MIDDLE BR ONTONAGON R
14AGHFS9 781016
/TYPA/AMBNT/LMCE
0051 FEET DEPTH CLASS 00 CSN-RSP 0480198-0373137
DATE TIME DEPTH
FROM OF
TO DAY FEET
73/01/03 0925
97/01/01
MONTH NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
97/02/00
97/01/01
QUARTER NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
97/04/00
73/05/15 0830
74/05/16
75/05/16 1050
75/05/29 1015
97/05/01
MONTH NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
97/06/00
74/06/13 0930
75/06/11 '1000
73/06/04 0900
74/06/26 0925
75/06/24 0900
97/06/01
MOUTH NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
97/07/00
97/O4/01
QUARTER NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
•7/07/00
00011 00300
WATER DO
TEMP
FAHN MG/L
33.0000 13.8000
1 1
33.0000 13.8000
33.0000 13.8000
33.0000 13.8000
1 1
33.0000 13.8000
33.0000 13.8000
33.0000 13.8000
49.0000 10.6000
50.0000 10.2000
55.0000 10.2000
60.0000
4 3
60.0000 10.6000
49.0000 10.2000
53.5000 10.3333
60.5000 8.70000
61.0000 8.80000
63.0000 8.70000
68.0000 8.90000
72.0000
5 4
72.0000 8.90000
60.5000 8.70000
64.9000 8.77499
9 7
72.0000 10.6000
49.0000 8.70000
59.8333 9.44285
00400
PH
SU
6.50000
1
6 . 50000
6.50000
6.50000
1
6.50000
6 . 50000
6 . 50000
6.50000
6.50000
6.00000
6.00000
4
6 . 50000
6 . 00000
6.25000
6.70000
7 . 20000
6 . 50000
6.60000
6.42000
5
7 . 20000
6.42000
6 . 68400
9
7 . 20000
6.00000
6.49111
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-36
-------
EXAMPLE 3
Retrieve individual samples
for each of the three
specified stations. Sort
the retrieval data in
ascending order by values
of the first parameter
specified (P-ll, water
temperature). The output
shown is for station
071723.
PGM=MEAN,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S-071722,
S«071723,S«071724,
P-11fP-300fP-400,
BD=730101,ED=751231,
SORT=SV.DG=S.
SHIFT,
071723 090706000042 402010260042
46 14 30 0 OB9 21 45
LONG L »EAST< 261DEG
26053 MICHIGAN
LAKE SUPERIOR
0 3
8 7MI FROM JCT US2
GOGEBIC
221200
AND US45
OKTONAGON RIVER-MIDDLE BR ONTONAGOK R
14AGNFS9 7B1016
/TYPA/ AM BUT/LAKE
OC51 FEET DEPTH CLASS 00 CSN-RSP 0480198-0373137
DATE TI1E DEPTH
FPO«1 OF
•"> DAY FEET
73/11/13 0975
73/12/2C 1050
75/11/04 1000
75/10/16 1030
75/10/?] no'i
73/05/15 OB3P
74/05/16
75/10/02 100O
75/10/07 llor
75/09/24 0930
75/15/16 1050
75/05/29 1015
74/16/13 0930
75/06/11 1000
73/ «/[4 0900
73/09/11 0915
75/'iB/27 0830
74/'i8/27 1031
74/06/26 0925
7j/oi,/03 0830
73/07/15 09lr
75/07/15 1040
75/"6/J4 0900
75/'7/22 1035
74/'i7/19 0810
7V7/OJ HOC
75/"7/ir 1000
00011 00300
•iATER DO
TEMP
FAHN HG/L
33 0000 13 8000
33 OOQO 13 9000
43 0000
47 0000
48 0000 10 6000
49 0000 10 6000
50 0000 10 2000
50 0000
51 0000 9 7OOOO
53 0000
55 0000 10 2000
60 0000
60 SOOO 8 70000
61 0000 8 BOOOO
63 0000 8 70000
66 0000 8 40000
66 0000 8 1OOOO
67 0000
68 0000 8 90000
69 0000 8 10000
69 5000 8 70000
71 0000
7? 0000
76 0000
78 0000 7 60000
78 0000 7 60000
70 OOOn
00400
PH
SU
6 50000
6 50000
6 00000
6 OOOOO
6 50000
6 SOOOO
6 50000
5 70000
6 OOOOO
6 OOOOO
6 OOOOO
6 OOOOO
6 70000
7 200OO
6 SOOOO
6 OOOOO
6 70000
6 60000
6 600OO
5 SOOOO
6 50000
6 OOOOO
6 42000
6 OOOOO
6 SOOOO
6 70000
6 40000
WQ-RET
6-37
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE 4
Retrieve quarterly and monthly
statistical summaries with data
aggregated as if it were from
a single station rather than
the three separate stations
specified. The data for each
summary are made up of all
values sampled for the
particular quarter or month
regardless of year.
PGM-MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A=l4AGNFS9,S=071722,
8=071723,8=071724,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,ED=751231,
SORT=AM.DG"QM.
SHIFT,
DATE TIME DEPTH
FROM OF
TO DAY FEET
97/01/01
MONTH NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
97/02/00
97/01/01
QUARTER NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
97/04/00
97/05/01
MONTH NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
97/06/00
97/06/01
MONTH NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
97/07/00
97/04/01
QUARTER NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
97/07/00
97/07/01
MONTH NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
97/08/00
97/08/01
MONTH NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
97/09/00
00011
WATER
TEMP
FAHN
1
33.0000
33.0000
33.0000
1
33.0000
33.0000
33.0000
4
60.0000
49.0000
53.5000
5
72.0000
60.5000
64.9000
9
72.0000
49.0000
59.8333
6
78.0000
69.5000
75.0833
3
69.0000
66.0000
67.3333
00300
DO
MG/L
1
13.8000
13.8000
13.8000
1
13.8000
13.8000
13.8000
3
10.6000
10.2000
10.3333
4
8.90000
8.70000
8.77499
7
10.6000
8.70000
9.44285
3
8.20000
7 . 60000
7.80000
2
8.10000
8.10000
8.10000
00400
PH
SU
1
6.50000
6.50000
6.50000
1
6.50000
6.50000
6.50000
4
6.50000
6.00000
6.25000
5
7.20000
6.42000
6.68400
9
7 . 20000
6 . 00000
6.49111
6
6 . 70000
6 . 00000
6.35000
3
6.70000
5.50000
6.26666
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-38
-------
EXAMPLE 5
Retrieve samples with the
data aggregated as if they were
from a single station rather
than the three separate stations
specified. Sort the retrieval
data in ascending order by
values of the first parameter
specified (P-ll, water
temperature).
PGM=MEAN,PURP=3 0 5B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071722,
8=071723,8=071724,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,ED=751231,
SORT°AV.DG=S.
SHIFT,
DATE
FROM
TO
73/01/03
73/12/20
75/11/04
75/10/16
75/10/21
73/05/15
74/05/16
75/10/02
75/10/07
75/09/24
75/05/16
75/05/29
74/06/13
75/06/11
73/06/04
73/09/11
75/08/27
74/08/27
74/06/26
73/08/03
73/07/05
75/07/15
75/06/24
75/07/22
74/07/19
75/07/02
75/07/10
TIME DEPTH
OF
DAY FEET
0925
1050
1000
1030
1100
0830
1000
1100
0930
1050
1015
0930
1000
0900
0915
0830
1030
0925
0830
0910
1040
0900
1035
0810
1100
1000
00011
WATER
TEMP
FAHN
33.0000
33.0000
43.0000
47.0000
48.0000
49.0000
50.0000
50.0000
51.0000
53.0000
55.0000
60.0000
60.5000
61.0000
63.0000
66.0000
66.0000
67.0000
68.0000
69.0000
69.5000
71.0000
72.0000
76.0000
78.0000
78.0000
78.0000
00300
DO
MG/L
13.8000
13.9000
10.6000
10.6000
10.2000
9.70000
10.2000
8.70000'
8.80000
8.70000
8.40000
8.10000
8.90000
8.10000
8.20000
7.60000
7.60000
00400
PH
SU
6 . 50000
6.50000
6.00000
6.00000
6 . 50000
6.50000
6.50000
5.70000
6.00000
6 . 00000
6 . 00000
6.00000
6.70000
7 . 20000
6.50000
6 . 00000
6 . 70000
6.60000
6.60000
5 . 50000
6 . 50000
6.00000
6.42000
6.00000
6.50000
6 . 70000
6.40000
WQ-RET
6-39
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE 6
Retrieve samples and monthly
summaries with the data
aggregated as if they were from
a single station rather than
the three separate stations
specified. Sort the data in
ascending order by year/month/
day.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=071722,
5=071723,8=071724,
P=11,P=300,P«400,
BD=730101,ED=751231/
SORT=AY.DG=SM.
SHIFT,
DATE TIME DEPTH
FROM OF
TO DAY FEET
73/01/03 0925
73/01/01
MONTH NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
73/02/00
73/05/15 0830
73/05/01
MONTH NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
73/06/00
73/06/04 0900
73/06/01
MONTH NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
73/07/00
73/07/05 0910
73/07/01
MONTH NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
73/08/00
73/08/03 0830
73/08/01
MONTH NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
73/09/00
73/09/11 0915
73/09/01
MONTH NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAN
73/10/00
00011
WATER
TEMP
FAHN
33.0000
1
33.0000
33.0000
33.0000
49.0000
1
49.0000
49.0000
49.0000
63.0000
1
63.0000
63.0000
63.0000
69.5000
1
69.5000
69.5000
69.5000
69.0000
1
69.0000
69.0000
69.0000
66.0000
1
66.0000
66.0000
66.0000
00300
DO
MG/L
13.8000
1
13.8000
13.8000
13.8000
10.6000
1
10.6000
10.6000
10.6000
8.70000
1
8.70000
8.70000
8.70000
8.20000
1
8 . 20000
8.20000
8.20000
8.10000
1
8.10000
8.10000
8.10000
8 40000
1
8.40000
8.40000
8.40000
00400
PH
SU
6 . 50000
1
6.50OOO
6.50000
6 . 50OOO
6.50000
1
6 . 50000
6.50000
6 . 50000
6.50000
1
6.50000
6.50000
6.50000
6.50000
1
6 . 50000
6.50000
6 . 50000
5.50000
1
5.50000
5.50000
5.50000
6.00000
1
6.00000
6.00000
6.00000
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-40
-------
BASE
VD
PGMnMEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keywords
USE: The BASE and VD keywords may be used with the MEAN
program to assign variable date groupings to the data
to be analyzed. The BASE keyword is used to specify a
beginning date other than a normal (the first day of
the first month) beginning date for the monthly,
quarterly, and/or annual statistical analyses, and the
VD keyword is used to specify date groupings other than
those that can be specified with the DG keyword.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
BASEommdd, where mm is the two-digit numeric for the
month of the year, and dd is the two-digit
VD=mmdd, numeric for the day of the month, (yy for
year is not an option with these keywords.)
Leading zeroes must be specified, and both
mm and dd must be specified for each keyword.
DEFAULT VALUES: VD: None.
BASE: BASE-0101,
NOTES ON USAGE:
BASE may be specified only once in a retrieval request.
If used, the VD keyword must appear at least twice and
may be used up to 20 times in a single retrieval. In
order to specify the date grouping, the beginning month
and day of each interval is entered. The summary will
run from the specified date through the day before the
beginning date of the next date range.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-41
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve statistical summaries
for data sampled between
February 15, 1973 and August
14, 1975. Group the summaries
in monthly and quarterly
periods from a starting date
of February 15.
Retrieve statistical summaries
for data sampled between
February 15, 1973 and August
14, 1975. Group data in the
following periods: February 15
through April 14, April 15
through August 29, August 30
through October 20, and October
21 through February 14.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730215,ED=750814,
BASE=0215,DG=MQ,
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A=l4AGNFS9,S=071723,
P=l1,P=300,P=400,
BD=730215,ED=750814,
VD=0215,VD=0415,VD=0830,
VD=1021,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-42
-------
SF
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used with the MEAN program to select
the arithmetic statistical functions that the MEAN
program is to perform.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
SF*values,
where values is a string of one or more of the
following alphanumeric characters which invoke
the calculations indicated:
N calculates the number of observations
H calculates the maximum value of the
observations
L calculates the minimum value of the
observations
S calculates the sum of the values
2 calculates the sum of the squares
M calculates the mean
V calculates the variance
D calculates the standard deviation
C calculates the coefficient of variation
E calculates the standard error
F calculates flow weighted average
DEFAULT VALUE: SF»NHLM,
NOTES ON USAGE:
The SF keyword can be specified only once within a
retrieval request.
The individual values for SF may be specified in any
order, e.g. 'SF-HLS2,1 or 'SF=H2SL,' are equivalent
values.
See keyword LOG for calculations of geometric
statistics.
WQ-RET
6-43
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve statistical summaries
with all statistics, except
flow weighted average,
calculated.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A-14AGNFS9,8*071723,
P*11,P=300,P=400,
BD-730101,
SF°N2CSHLMVDE.
/TYPA/AMBNT/LAKE
DATE TIME DEPTH
FROM OF
TO DAY FEET
76/01/01
YEAR NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
SUM
SUM-SOUAR
MEAN
VARIANCE
STAND DEV
COEF VAR
STAND ERR
77/01/00
77/01/01
YEAR NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
SUM
SUM-SOUAR
MEAN
VARIANCE
STAND DEV
COEF VAR
STAND ERR
78/01/00
78/01/01
YEAR NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
SUM
SUM-SOUAR
MEAN
VARIANCE
STAND DEV
COEF VAR
STAND ERR
79/01/00
OO/OO/OO
STATION NUMBER
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
SUM
SUM-SOUAR
MEAN
VARIANCE
STAND DEV
COEF VAR
STAND ERR
99/99/99
00011
HATER
TEMP
FAHN
16
73 0000
34 0000
952 000
SBS24 0
59 5000
125 333
11 1952
188155
2 79881
43
78 0000
33 0000
2567 00
159520
59 6977
149 421
12 2238
204762
1 86411
00300
DO
NC/L
17
11 8000
400000
127 400
1170 42
7 49411
13 4793
3 67142
489907
890451
34
13 9000
400000
289 500
2773 S3
8 51470
9 34928
3.05766
359104
524384
071723 090T06000O42 4O2O10280042
46 14 30.0 089 21 45.0 3
LONO L %EAST<,261DEO 8 7MI FROM JCT U82 AND US4S
26053 MICHIGAN GCOEBIC
LAKE SUPERIOR 221200
ONTOHAGON RIVER-MIDDLE BR.ONTONAGON R
14AOHFS9 781016
0051 FEET DEPTH CLASS 00 CSN-RSP 0480198-0373137
00400
PH
SU
16
6 90000
5 80000
102 000
652 119
6 37500
124691
353116
0553907
0882788
10
7 40000
5 60000
65 9999
439 319
6 59999
413411
642971
0974199
203325
»
6 67000
5 58000
180 400
1125 06
6 22068
101868
319167
0513074
0592678
82
7 40000
5 50000
518 919
3297 05
6 32828
162724
403391
.0637441
.0445471
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-44
-------
PCTL
PCTLWT
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keywords
USE: These keywords are used to include the calculation of
percentiles by the MEAN program. The PCTL keyword
specifies the percentiles to be calculated, and the
PCTLWT keyword specifies that the calculations are to
be linear interpolations.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
PCTL»n, where n is any positive integer, from one to
a hundred, which signifies the percentile
desired.
PCTLWT, there is no value for this keyword.
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
These keywords can be used in conjunction with the SF
keyword to obtain the desired statistical functions.
Percentiles are members of the get of observations such
that n percent of the observations are below or equal
to the percentile printed. They are calculated using
the same algorithm used by the MSP program.
The PCTL keyword may be used up to 10 times per
retrieval. However, users should expect an increase in
the cost of the retrieval run because additional data
sorts are required within each date group specified.
This cost will vary with the amount of data involved
and with the complexity of the date grouping specified.
By adding the keyword PCTLWT to the retrieval, the
percentile calculation is a linear interpolation
between two adjacent observations in the ordered set.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6—45
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Compute the sum of squares, PGM=MEAN,PURP=104B6/EXAMPLE,
number of observations, PRT=DATA,A=11140100,
coefficient of variation and 8=173863,8=173811,
the sum of the values along A=21IND,8=173864,8=173863,
with the 15th, 50th, and 85th P=10,HV=13,P=60,LV=20,P=300,
percentiles. P=320,LV=0.5,HV=6,P=400,
SF=N2CS.PCTL=15.PCTL=50.
PCTL=85,
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
6-46
-------
LOAD,
PGMoMEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE: The LOAD keyword may be used with the MEAN program to
compute stream loadings for selected parameters.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
LOAD, specifies that loadings are to be calculated
for the immediately preceding parameter
keyword. There is no value associated with
this keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
A flow parameter, such as 58 (average flow, gpm), 59
(instantaneous flow, gpm), 60 (average flow, cfs), 61
(instantaneous flow, cfs), 50050 (conduit flow, mgd),
50051 (instantaneous flow, mgd), 50053 (monthly average
flow through treatment plant, mgd), 72033 (flow,
average daily spillway discharge, cfs), 72034 (flow,
instantaneous spillway discharge, cfs), or 74020 (flow,
pump out, mgd), must be present in the retrieval sample
in order to perform the loading calculation for other
parameters in the sample.
LOAD applies only to the parameter keyword it
immediately follows, and can be specified as many times
as is required within a retrieval request.
The MEAN program cannot compute loadings if PARU and
PARF are used (see Data Selection Keywords in Section
4).
The following depicts what unit conversions are
performed when computing loadings on the parameter
values having the stored units shown.
STORED UNITS LOADING COMPUTATION
m i11i grams/1i ter(mg/1) 1bs/day
micrograms/1iter(ug/1) 1bs/day
pico curies/liter(pc/l) pc/day
/100 milliliter No./day
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-47
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Calculate loadings for PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
parameter 650 (phosphates) A=ll150050,5=255420,
at the specified station. P=60,P=650,LOAD,P=1045,
Loadings are not to be calculated
for parameter 1045 (iron). The
example shows default date
groupings and statistical
functions.
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
6-48
-------
LOG,
PGMoMEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE:
The LOG keyword may be used with the MEAN program to
compute the logarithms of the retrieved parameter
values prior to the statistical analysis, thus
providing geometric statistics, such as geometric
means.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
LOG,
specifies that logarithms of the values of the
immediately preceding parameter keyword are to
be computed. There is no value associated
with this keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
LOG applies only to the parameter keyword it
immediately follows, and can be specified as many times
as required within a retrieval request.
The value printed is not the log, but is the anti-log
of the calculation.
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve statistical summaries
with logarithms computed for
parameters 300 and 600 prior
to calculations.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=30 5B/STA,
A=UAGNFS9,S=071723,
P=11,P=300.LOG,P=600,LOG.
BD-730101,
WQ-RET
6-49
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
DM
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE:
This keyword may be used with the MEAN program to
select the location of the decimal point for parameter
values that are printed by the MEAN retrieval.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
DM=x,
where x is any single digit value, from
zero to 8, as follows:
value of x
DM=0,
DM=1,
DM* 2,
DM=3,
DM=4,
DM=5,
DM=6,
DM=7,
DM=8,
requested decimal placement
.XXXE+XX
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxx.x
xxxxx.xx
xxxx.xxx
xxx.xxxx
xx.xxxxx
x.xxxxxx
.xxxxxxx
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword is similar in function to the DR keyword
used with the RET program.
DM applies only to the parameter keyword it immediately
follows, and can be specified as many times as is
required within a retrieval request.
EXAMPLE(S):
Produce statistical summaries
and print values for parameter
11 as whole numbers and values
for parameter 400 with one
number to the right of the
decimal point.
PGM=MEAN, PURP** 3 0 5B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
P=l1,DM°1.P=300,P=400,DM=2.
BD=730101,
WQ-RET
6-51
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
LL1 LH1
LL2 LH2
PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keywords
USE: These keywords allow the selective retrieval of a
sample dependent upon the value of up to two parameters
in the retrieval. LL1 and LH1 refer respectively to
the lower and higher acceptable values of the first
water quality parameter in the retrieval, LL2 and LH2
refer similarly to the second parameter in the
retrieval. The entire sample will be ignored if the
value of either parameter falls outside the specified
values.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
LL1«lower-limit, where both lower-limit and upper-limit
LH1"upper-limit, are any numerical value, including a
LL2*>lower-limit, decimal value, between -900E+37 and
LH2=upper-limit, +900E+38. Parameter values less, or lower,
than lower-limit fall outside the
acceptable range; parameter values
higher, or greater, than upper-limit
also fall outside the acceptable range.
DEFAULT VALUE: LL1= -900E+37,
LH1« +900E+38,
LL2= -900E+37,
LH2= +900E+38,
NOTES ON USAGE:
LL2 and LH2 cannot be specified unless LL1 and LH1 are
specified.
If the values tested are outside of the specified
ranges, the entire sample is excluded from the
retrieval.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-53
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
The entire sample will be PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
ignored unless the value for A-14AGNFS9,8-071723,
parameter 11 is between P=l1,P=400,P=300,
35 and 70, AND the value LL1=35.LH1=70,
for parameter 400 is between LL2=6,LH2=8,
6 and 8. BD=730101,
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
6-54
-------
DO
Saturation
Calculation
PGM°MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Function;
Calculation of Dissolved Oxygen Saturation
USE: This function is performed automatically by the MEAN
program on each sample which contains the proper set of
parameter code keywords described below. This function
is not invoked by a keyword/value specification.
PROCEDURE:
To have the dissolved oxygen saturation calculated by
the MEAN program, specify the following parameters
within the retrieval request: P=10 (temperature in
degrees Celsius) or P=ll (temperature in degrees
Fahrenheit); P=299 (dissolved oxygen, probe) or P=300
(dissolved oxygen); and P=301 (percentage of dissolved
oxygen saturation). The MEAN program will then
automatically perform the necessary conversions and
calculations, and will place the calculated value into
the positions associated with parameter 301. (It is
essential that P=301 be specified in the retrieval,
otherwise no computation will result as there would be
no column in which to record the results of the
calculations.)
Certain adjustments can be made to these calculations
based upon the presence of chlorides and on the
altitude of the station at which the DO saturation
values are being calculated. By specifying P=940
(chloride), the MEAN program will allow for the
presence of these compounds in the DO saturation
calculations. By specifying P=42 (altitude in feet),
the MEAN program will also allow for the effect of the
associated altitude in the calculation of the DO
saturations.
NOTES ON USAGE:
The altitude of the station must have been stored as
parameter 42 for sample date 01/01/01.
This calculation will not be performed on samples
containing a user stored value for DO saturation. The
stored value will be printed.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-55
-------
The individual values will not print unless DG-S is
specified. If this is not specified, the statistical
functions will be calculated and printed according to
the default or specified values of the requested date
groupings.
If there are no values for either temperature or DO,
the calculation is not performed.
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
6-56
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Retrieve statistical summaries
including calculations of the
dissolved oxygen saturation.
PGM=MEAN, PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S«071723,
,P«400
BD=730101,DG=S,
/TYPK/JU1BMT/LJUCE
00011
tat TIHE DEPTH «TEB
PROM OP TEMP
TO DAY PEET PABN
71/01/03 09 25 31
71/05/15 OB 30 49
73/06/04 09 00 63
71/07/05 09 10 69
71/OB/03 08 30 69
73/09/11 09 15 66
71/12/20 10 SO 11
74/05/16 50
74/O6/11 09 30 60
74/06/26 09 25 0007 68
74/07/19 08 10 0007 78
74/OB/27 10 10 0007 67
75/05/16 10 SO 55
75/05/29 10 15 60
75/06/11 1O 00 O010 61
75/06/24 09 00 72
7S/07/02 11 00 0009 78
75/07/10 10 00 78
75/07/15 10 40 71
75/07/72 10 15 76
75/08/27 08 10 0009 66
75/09/24 09 30 S3
75/10/02 10 00 50
75/10/07 11 00 0005 51
75/10/16 10 30 47
75/10/71 11 00 0005 48
75/11/04 10 00 43
76/04/23 10 30 44
76/05/2B 10 IS 63
10 10 0022 17
10 45 0044 47
76/06/30 08 10 69
76/07/11 11 00 71
76/OB/01 10 OO 68
10 IS 0020 68
10 10 0040 54
76/08/25 OB 30 70
OB 45 O015 71
09 00 O010 61
00011
DMB. TIME DEPTH MTER
PMM OP TEMP
TO DAY PER PJUDI
71/01/01 0*11 11 OOOO
71/05/15 0810 4* OOOO
71/06/04 0*00 61 OOOO
71/07/09 0*10 6* 1000
71/01/01 0110 6* OOOO
71/09/11 0*11 66 OOOO
71/11/10 10M 11 OOOO
74/05/14 M OOOO
74/06/11 0*10 60 MOO
74/06/2* 0*11 6* OOOO
74/07/1* OB10 78 OOOO
14/08/17 1010 67 OOOO
11/01/16 1050 IS OOOO
75/05/29 1015 40 0000
71/08/11 1OOO 61 OOOO
71/08/24 0*00 71 OOOO
71/07/02 1100 78 OOOO
71/07/10 1000 78 OOOO
71/07/11 1040 71 OOOO
71/07/11 1011 74 OOOO
71/08/17 0810 66 OOOO
79/09/24 0*10 11 OOOO
71/10/02 1000 M OOOO
71/10/07 1100 11 OOOO
71/10/16 10JO 47 OOOO
71/10/11 1100 48 OOOO
71/11/04 1000 41 OOOO
78/04/11 1010 44 OOOO
74/05/28 1011 11 OOOO
78/01/18 1010 17 OOOO
76/01/1* 1041 47 OOOO
78/06/10 0810 6* OOOO
76/07/11 1100 71 0000
76/08/01 1000 68 OOOO
76/08/01 1011 88 OOOO
18/08/01 1010 14 OOOO
78/01/11 0810 70 OOOO
76/08/25 0845 71 OOOO
74/08/25 0*00 11 OOOO
71/09/14 1010 61 OOOO
74/09/16 1100 61 OOOO
76/09/16 1110 4* OOOO
00100
DO
M/L
11 8
10 6
8 7
a 2
B 1
B 4
11 9
10 2
8 7
8 9
7 6
1O 2
6 8
7 6
B 1
9 7
10 6
11 4
9 7
9 7
6 0
B 4
8 4
8 1
7 6
0 7
8 0
8 0
0 4
00100
DO
M/L
11 8000
10 6000
a 70000
a loooo
a 10000
a -xxx)
I* 9000
10 2000
a 70000
a »oooo
7 60000
10 1000
a BOOOO
1 60000
a loooo
• 10000
10 6000
11 4000
• 70000
* 70000
* ooooo
a 40000
a 40000
1 60000
700000
a ooooo
a ooooo
400000
a 50000
B MOOO
00101
00
8ATUR
PERCENT
O0101
DO
UTUR
PERCENT
•7 1*11
91 17*1
B* 6*07
91 1111
90 OOOO
8* 1617
91 M71
90 MSI
87 OOOO
96 7191
92 682*
94 22*4
aa oooo
92 6829
M 1702
87 1874
91 17*1
•1 4416
100 OOOO
•1 26*2
SO 4202
•1 1111
96 1S17
88 O414
89 6017
* 48148
88 8889
90 9091
4 OOOOO
87 4289
87 628*
1 44821
00400
Pft
8V
M
M
M
90
90
00
90
90
70
60
10
60
00
00
20
42
70
40
00
00
70
00
70
OO
OO
90
00
00
40
to
80
80
80
90
60
ao
M
00
OO400
PH
8U
MOOO
MOOO
90000
MOOO
9OOOO
10000
70000
60000
MOOO
60000
OOOOO
ooooo
10000
41000
70000
40000
OOOOO
70000
OOOOO
70000
00000
ooooo
10000
ooooo
ooooo
60000
60000
80000
80000
60000
MOOO
OOOOO
10000
20000
071111 09O7O60OO041 4020102*0082
4* 14 M 0 08* 21 41 0 1
LOBO L I1UT< M1DEB B 7BI PRO* JCT Ml » U845
28013 HICBIQMI OOBEBIC
LUI SUPERIOR 221200
14MBP8* 78101*
0011 PER DEPTH CLA88 00 CBN-RBP 04801*8-0171117
O
071721 090706000042 402010280041
46 14 10 O 089 21 41 0 1
LOM L «EUT< 261DEG 8 Till PROM JCT U81 «8D 0*45
26051 M1CRIOM OOCEBIC
UWE SUPERIOR 221200
ONTOUGOX RIVER-MIDDLE BR UHIUHOOB R
14KNP89 7S1O14
0011 PER DEPTH CUM 00 CSB-RtP 04801*8-0171117
1) Stored parameter data values
2) Calculation of dissolved oxygen saturation
WQ-RET
6-57
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
Un-ionized
Ammonia
Calculation
PGM-MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Function;
Calculation of Un-ionized Ammonia
USE: This function is performed automatically by the MEAN
program on each sample which contains the proper set of
parameter code keywords described below. This function
is not invoked by a keyword/value specification.
PROCEDURE:
To have the percent of un-ionized ammonia calculated by
the MEAN program, specify the following parameters
within the retrieval request: P=10 (temperature in
degrees Celsius) or Pell (temperature in degrees
Fahrenheit); P=400 (pH) or P=403 (lab pH); P=608
(ammonia dissolved), P=610 (total ammonia, mg/1 as N),
P=71845 (total ammonia, mg/1 as NH4), or P=71846
(ammonia dissolved as NH4); and P=619 (percentage of
un-ionized ammonia). The MEAN program will then
automatically perform the necessary conversions and
calculations, and will place the calculated values into
the positions associated with parameter 619. (It is
essential that P=619 be specified in the retrieval,
otherwise no computation will result, as there would be
no column in which to record the results of the
calculations.) The percent of un-ionized ammonia in
the water is computed according to the table provided
by Thurston, et al, 1974.
NOTES ON USAGE:
At least one temperature, one pH, and one ammonia
parameter must be specified in order to have this
calculation performed. However, more than one, or even
all, of the related parameters may be specified in
order to assure obtaining results for any value
present. If more than one parameter within the three
sets are specified, the order in which the parameters
are specified in the retrieval is assumed to be your
desired preference, so the first parameters specified
for which data values are found will be used to perform
the calculation. The limits of the computation are
between 5 and 30 degrees C and between 6 and 10 pH
units.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-59
-------
For example, when pH is 8.5 and temperature is 34
degrees C, 20% will be used to compute un-ionized
ammonia.
Temperature and pH are the two most commonly measured
parameters in the WQF, while ammonia is number 13 in
terms of reporting frequency. Consequently there is a
good chance that the data necessary for the calculation
will be present for the stations of interest.
This calculation will not be performed on samples
containing a user-stored value for un-ionized ammonia.
The stored value will be printed.
The MEAN program cannot compute loadings if PARU and
PARF are used (see Data Selection Keywords in Section
4).
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
6-60
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Provide statistical summaries
including calculations of
un-ionized ammonia.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A-14AGNFS9,S-071723,
P°11.P°400.P°610.P°619.
P°300,BD-7301(n,DG"Sf
74/04/11 01 M
M/01/M Ot 19 0007
M/n/lf 01 10 0007
T4/OI/I7 10 W 0007
n/o>/it u w
----- 'it u 11
'II 10 00 0010
-.'M Ot 00
IT/OI 11 oo eon
17/10 10 00
— J7/II 10 40
n/n/n u M
oo n ooot
79/01/17
n/ot/u
79/10/01 10 00
79/10/07 11 00 0009
79/10/14 10 n
79/10/11 11 00 0009
79/11/04 10 00
74/04/11 10 10
T4/09/H 10 19
10 M 0011
10 49 0044
74/01/10 00 10
74/07/11 11 00
74/00/01 10 00
10 11 OOW
10 M 004O
74/00/11 01 N
00 49 O019
Ot 00 OOM
T4/00/1I U 10
11 r
11 ]
90
90
U
70
•7
99
40
41
71
70
70
71
74
U
97
47
00
00
00
00
0901
090
own
0
0
0 4
O
071T21
10 KT
Tl/01/01 Otl9
71/09/19 0110
71/04/04 OtOO
71/07/09 M10
71/01/01 0010
71/Ot/ll Otl9
71/11/M 1090
T4/09/14
74/04/1} OMO
74/Ot/M M19
74/01/27 1010
79/09/14 1090
79/09/M 1019
79/00/11 10OO
79/01/14 OMO
79/07/01 110O
79/07/10 1000
79/07/19 1040
79/07/11 1019
79/01/17 0010
79/01/14 OMO
79/10/01 1000
79/10/07 1100
79/10/lt 1010
79/10/11 1100
71/11/04 1000
74/04/31 1010
T4/09/1I 1019
74/09/14 1010
74/09/a 1049
74/04/10 0110
70/07/11 1100
74/01/01 1000
74/00/01 1019
70/01/01 1010
70/00/19 0010
70/00/19 OM>
74/00/11 OtOO
74/00/14 ION
70/00/14 1100
74/Ot/ll 1110
44 14 M 0 001 11 49 0 1
u*a L %IUT< Mion l Tin: Finn i
LUI sumun mm
OMTOMOOI MVBI-IIZDDU U OVNMM
UAOmt TI101I
1 RR DOT* CLUI 00 CO-I
' 04001M-01T1117
1) Stored parameter data values
2) Calculation of un-ionized ammonia
WQ-RET
6-61
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
Coliform
Strep Count
Ratio
Calculation
PGM»MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION: Program Associated Function;
Calculation of the Coliform/Strep Count Ratio
USE: This function is performed automatically by the MEAN
program on each sample which contains the proper set of
parameter code keywords described below. This function
is not invoked by a keyword/value specification.
PROCEDURE:
To have the fecal coliform/fecal streptococci count
ratio calculated by the MEAN program, specify the
following parameters in the retrieval: P=82028
(coliform/strep count ratio) and at least one of the
coliform parameters and at least one of the strep
parameters listed below. The MEAN program will then
automatically perform the necessary conversions and
calculations, and will place the calculated values into
the positions associated with parameter 82028. (It is
essential that P=82028 be specified in the retrieval,
otherwise no computation will result, as there would be
no column in which to record the results of the
calculations.)
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-63
-------
PARAMETER CODES
FECAL COLIFORM
PARAMETERS
74055
31613
31614
31615
31616
31617
31618
31619
31625
31640
31641
General (Permit)
Membrane Filter, M-FC Agar, 44.5C,
24 hr
MPN, Tube Configuration
MPN, EC MED, 44.5C (Tube 31614)
Membrane Filter, M-FC, Brdth, 44.5C
MPN, Eijkman Test, 44.5C (Tube
31618)
MPN, Eijkman Test, Tube
Configuration
MPN, Boric Acid Lactose Br, 43C,
48 hr
MF, M-FC, 0.7 urn
MPN, In Shellfish, EC MED, 44.5C
MPN in Bottom Deposit, EC MED,
(MPN/lOOg)
FECAL STREPTOCOCCI
PARAMETER CODES PARAMETERS
31671
31672
31673
31675
31676
31677
31678
31679
Plate Count KF Agar, 35C, 48 hr
Plate Count M-Enter Agar, 35C, 48 hr
Membrane Filter, KF Agar, 35C, 48 hr
MPN, KF Broth, 35C (Tube 31676)
MPN, KF Broth, Tube Configuration
MPN, AD-EVA, 35C (Tube 31678)
MPN, AD-EVA, Tube Configuration
MF M-Enterococcus Agar, 35C, 48 hr
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-64
-------
NOTES ON USAGE:
At least one fecal coliform parameter and at least one
fecal streptococci parameter must be specified in order
to have this ratio calculated. However, more than one/
or even all, or the related parameters may be specified
in order to assure obtaining results for any value
present. If more than one coliform and/or streptococci
parameters are specified, the order in which you
specify the parameters is assumed to be your desired
preference, so the value of the parameter code closest
to the beginning of the list in the retrieval is used
to calculate the ratio.
This calculation will not be performed on samples
containing a user-stored value for this ratio.
EXAMPLE(S):
Calculate the coliform/strep
ratio at the indicated station
since August 1979, and print
the individual sample values.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=104B6/EXAMPLE,
A-21IDSURV,5=2020068,
P=82028,P=31616,P=31679,
DG=S,
BD=790801,
/TYPA/AMBNT/STREAM
2020068
4« 42 10 0 117 02 20.0 5
S.PK. PALOUSE R AT STATELIHB
16057 IDAHO
PACIFIC MORTHWEST
LOWER SHAKE RIVER BASIN
21IDSURV 760810
0000 FEET DEPTH CLASS 00 CSB-RSP 0286316-O4283OS
TO
82028
TIME DEPTH RATIO
OP PEC COL
DAY FEET PEC STRP
11616 31679
PEC COLI PECSTRBP
MFM-PCBR HP M-EHT
/1OOML /100HL
79/11/01 0900
80/O1/1S 13OO
80/04/10 0915
80/04/30 1330
80/05/22 1600
80/07/08 1430
3.08000
.0418605
1.41304
1.83333
3.S46S1
5.5S866
385.000
900 000
6S.OOOO
220.000
305.000
995.000
125.000
21500.0
46.0000
120.000
86 0000
179.000
WQ-RET
6-65
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
TD
5
PGM=PLOT,
KEYWORDS SPECIAL TO THIS PROGRAM:
The following keywords apply to the PLOT program.
FACT controls size of plot
SYM provides for choice of plotting symbol
representing data points
SC causes scales of axes to be identical
NOPLOT eliminates plotting of selected parameters
RECLINE calculates and plots a regression line
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6~67
-------
PGM=PLOT,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The PLOT program retrieves data from the WQF and plots
the values of each selected parameter for each selected
station (Y-axis) for the specified time period (X-axis).
Values plotted may take the form of raw concentrations
(mg/1), loadings (Ibs/dy), or logarithms. The program
allows for the control of the plot format including size
control and plot symbols used.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
All general keywords described in Section 4 are valid
with the PLOT program. The parameter keyword P may be
specified up to 10 times.
OTHER NOTES AND COMMENTS:
The program generates the plot data onto a magnetic
tape which is forwarded to EPA headquarters for
plotting and dissemination to the user.
To prevent a backlog of plots, users should exercise
restraint in producing a large number of plots in a
relatively short period of time. If you have any
questions relating to your particular plotting
requirements, please call STORET User Assistance.
The following keywords and calculations described in
the MEAN program may be used with the PLOT program to
plot calculated values:
LOAD allows computation of stream loadings
LOG calculates logarithmic values
LL1... specifies acceptable ranges for parameter
values
LV establishes lower limit for a parameter
value
HV establishes upper limit for a parameter
value
calculation of dissolved oxygen saturation
calculation of un-ionized ammonia
calculation of coliform/strep count ratio
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-69
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Plot values of iron(P=l045).
The starting date for the
x-axis (time) is to be
January 1, 1976.
PGM-PLOT,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071723,
P-1045,RECLINE,
BD=760101,ED=761231,
STORET
OH 723 090706000042 402010280042
46 14 30 0 089 21 45 0 3
LONG L.JCFAST<.26IDEO 8.7M1.FROM JCT-US2 WD US45
26053 MICHIGAN G06EB1C
LAKE SUPERIOR 221200
ONTONAGON RIVER-MIDDLE BR.ONTONAGON R.
14AGNFS9 761016
0051 FEFT DEPTH CLASS 00 CSN-RSP 0480198-0373137
N.
o
o o !
- 9 T
UJ I
in
»
o
o
8 T
1AY
r DATF
JuN
SEP
3CT
SAMriF DATE
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-70
-------
FACT
SYM
PGM=PLOT,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keywords
USE:
These keywords may be used with the PLOT program to
specify the size of each plot and the plotting symbol
to be used to represent the plotted data points.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
FACT=n,
SYM=mss,
where n is any numerical value, including a
decimal value, between 0.1 and 5 inclusive.
The specified value is the multiple by which
the basic plot size of 5 1/2" x 6 1/2"
(FACT-1.0) is increased or decreased.
where ss is any two digit whole number that
equates to one of the plotting symbols shown
below, and where m is an optional minus
sign which specifies that the plotted symbols
are not to be connected by straight lines.
m
00 01 02
Z Y X
+ X O
03
08
09
10
11
OU
X
12
05
06
X
07
20
The value of 20 specifies that no symbol is to
be plotted.
Leading zeroes must be specified.
connected by
DEFAULT VALUES: FACT-1.40, (7.75" x 9.0")
SYM=02, (plot using the symbol
straight lines.)
NOTES ON USAGE:
These keywords may be specified only once in a
retrieval request.
WQ-RET
6-71
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE(S)
Plot values of water temperature PGM=PLOT,PURP=305B/STA,
and DO as a function of time A=14AGNFS9,S=071723,
using an "X" to mark data points. P=11,P=300,
The size of the plot produced BD=730101,
is to be approximately 11" by 13". FACT=2.SYM=4,
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
6-72
-------
sc
PGM=PLOT,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE:
This keyword may be used with the PLOT program to
specify that the scales of the axes of the plots are to
be uniform throughout the program. The keyword SC
specifies that the scales of all plots associated with
stations and parameters are to be identical.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
SOA,
examines all of the data retrieved and
then sets scales according to the maximum
value for each parameter retrieved and the
maximum number of days. This causes the
scales for the various plots to be the
same.
DEFAULT VALUES: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
If 'SC=A,' is not specified, the x- and y-axes will be
set to the maximum and minimum sampling dates and
maximum parameter values for each parameter at each
station.
The PLOT program labels the x-axis according to the
period of time being plotted as shown in the table
below.
PERIOD TO BE PLOTTED
X-AXIS WILL BE LABELED
>30 years
<30 years
< 5 years
<93 days
<62 days
in years at 5-year increments
in years at 1-year increments
in years with labeled monthly
increments
in months with unlabeled tic
marks for days
in months with labeled tic
marks for days
WQ-RET
6-73
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Plot values of DO for the three
stations specified (i.e., three
plots will be produced). The
sampling characteristics of the
three stations are as follows:
PGM=PLOT,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071721,
8=071722,S=071723,
P=300,
BD=730101,
SC=A,
station
070002
070006
071723
date
730108/760713
730108/740516
730103/760713
max. value
11.0
16.4
13.9
Since 'SC=A,' is specified the axes
will be set as follows for all three
plots.
origin point
730103
0
end point
760713
16.4
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-74
-------
NOPLOT,
PGM=PLOT,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE: This keyword may be used with the PLOT program to
eliminate the plotting of specified parameters.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
NOPLOT, specifies that the values of the immediately
preceding parameter are not to be plotted.
There is no value associated with this keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
If not specified, all requested parameters will be
plotted.
NOPLOT applies to each parameter keyword it follows,
and can be specified as many times as is required
within a retrieval request, up to a maximum of 10
times.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
For calculating loadings, a flow parameter must be
retrieved, but need not be plotted.
EXAMPLE(S):
Plot loadings for parameter PGM=PLOT,PURP=305B/STA,
650 at the specified station A=l115D050,5=255420,
but do not plot values for the P=60.NOPLOT,P-eSO,LOAD,
flow parameter (60).
WQ-RET
6-75
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
RECLINE,
PGM°PLOT,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE: This keyword causes a trend line to be calculated and
drawn on the plot generated by the PLOT program.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
RECLINE, There is no value for this keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
EXAMPLE(S):
The example shown above in
the description of the PLOT
program illustrates the
regression line calculated
by this program.
WQ-RET
6-77
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
PGM=LOC,
KEYWORDS SPECIAL TO THIS PROGRAM:
The following keywords apply only to this program:
SCALE selects the desired scale for the area to
be plotted
NOCOUN suppresses plotting of county boundary lines
NOPOLPLT suppresses plotting of the polygon
TAGS tags stations with a cross reference number
STREAMS plots streams
CLR plots outlines of cities, lakes, and reservoirs
LOCSYM specifies symbol to denote station locations
SYMSIZE specifies height of symbols drawn on maps
See Section 7, Advanced Retrieval Programs and their
Special Keywords, for additional capabilities of this
program.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-79
-------
PGM»LOC,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The LOG program plots a map of the area defined with
any station selection method, and plots a symbol to
denote the locations of all stations within that area,
the state boundaries, and optionally, the county
boundaries and polygon vertices. The map will be a
maximum of 24" high (north/south), and 49" wide
(east/west) to include the area plotted. Included with
the map is a listing of all stations and their
associated latitude and longitude coordinates.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
All station identification keywords described in
Section 4 are valid with this program. Data selection
keywords are not valid since the LOC program retrieves
no data. However, the P keyword may be specified in
order to plot symbols on the map indicating the range
of observations stored for that parameter. The HEAD
keyword may be specified and will appear in the title
block of the map. (When used with LOC, the text of the
HEAD keyword may not exceed 35 characters.) SHIFT,
PRT, and PRMI are not valid for LOC.
OTHER NOTES AND COMMENTS:
Although all station selection methods are valid, it is
recommended that polygon selection (LT,L keywords) be
used to ensure the most accurate locations of stations
plotted.
See the LOC program description in Section 7, Advanced
Retrieval Programs and Their Special Keywords, for a
discussion of the use of LT=NORET to eliminate the
plotting of stations located at unwanted or
incorrectly-stored coordinates.
The LOC program plots a symbol (Q) to denote the
locations of all stations within the area plotted. If
the P keyword is used to specify a parameter whose
number (or range) of observations are to be plotted,
one of the following symbols will be used in place of
the location symbol to indicate the number of
observations stored:
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-81
-------
NUMBER OF
OBSERVATIONS
SYMBOL
USED
1
2 to 4
5 to 9
10 to 19
20 to 49
50 to 99
100 to 199
200 to 499
500 to 999
over 999
a
A
x
o
X
z
Y
X
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-82
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Plot a map of the area
described by the specified
polygon, with symbols plotted
to denote stations belonging
to agency 21 MICH.
PGM-LOC,PURP-305B/STA,
TAGS,STREAMS,CLR,
SCALE-250000,
LT-I,
L-4320,L-8404,L-4315,
L-833730,L-4330,L-8315,
L-4330,L-830730,L-430730,
L-8304,L-432230,L-825230,
L-433730,L-825230,L-433730,
L-8247,L-4345,L«8247,L-4345,
L«8315,L-433730,L-8315,
L-4330,L-8345,L-4330,L-8405,
U-21MICH,
.KTftONRENTHL CHOIECMON WCNCT
STORE! SYSTEM
WQ-RET
6-83
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
SCALE
PGM=LOC,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE:
The SCALE keyword may be used with the LOC program to
specify the desired scale for the map to be plotted.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
SCALE-scale, where scale is any numerical value
indicating the scale desired. No
commas are to be embedded within
the value. Units are in a map-
distance to real-distance ratio,
so SCALE=500000, will produce a
map at scale 1:500,000.
DEFAULT VALUE: SCALE=5000000, (5 million)
NOTES ON USAGE:
If this keyword is not specified, the system will
maximize the scale used, based upon the size of the
area to be plotted.
If the scale specified would result in a map over 24"
high (north-south direction) or 49" wide (east-west
direction), this keyword will be ignored, and the map
will be reduced to 24" x 49".
This keyword must be used in order to obtain any
standard map scale; a standard scale is not
automatically provided if SCALE is not specified.
EXAMPLE(S):
The map specified is to be
plotted with a scale of
1:250000.
PGM=LOC,PURP=305B/STA,
SCALE=250000.
LT=I,
L=4320,L=8404,L=4315,
L=833730/L=4330/L=8315,
L=4330,L=830730,L=430730,
L=8304,L=432230,L=825230/
L=433730,L=825230,L=433730/
L=8247,L=4345,Lo8247,L=4345,
L=8315,L=433730,L=8315,
L=4330,L=8345,L=4330,L=8405,
U-21MICH,
WQ-RET
6-85
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
NOCOUN,
PGM=LOC/
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE: The NOCOUN keyword may be used with the LOC program to
suppress the mapping of county boundaries.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
NOCOUN, There is no value associated with this
keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
On maps covering large geographical areas, the presence
of county boundaries on the map may hinder the study
and interpretation of the map. Specifying NOCOUN can
help alleviate this condition, as well as reduce the
cost of the plot.
EXAMPLE(S):
The map specified will be
plotted with county lines
suppresed.
PGM=LOC,PURP=305B/STA/
SCALE*250000,NOCOUN,
LT=I,
L=4320,L=8404,L=4315,
L=833730,L=4330,L=8315,
L=4330,L-830730,L=430730,
L=8304,L=432230,L=825230/
L=433730,L=825230,L=433730,
L=8247/L=4345,L=8247,L=4345,
L=8315,L=433730,L=8315,
L=4330,L=8345,L=4330,L=8405,
U=21MICH,
WQ-RET
6-87
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
NOPOLPLT,
PGM=LOC,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE:
The NOPOLPLT keyword may be used with the LOC program
(when the area whose stations are to be plotted is
defined by a polygon) to suppress mapping of the
polygon.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
NOPOLPLT,
There is no value associated with this
keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
EXAMPLE(S):
The map specified will be
plotted without the
polygon outline.
PGM=LOC, PURP=305B/STA,
SCALE=250 OOP. NOPOLPLT,
L=4320,L=
L-833730,
L=4330,L=
L=8304,L=
L=433730,
L=8247,L=
L=831 5^=
L=4330,L=
U=21MICH,
8404, L=4315;
L»4330,L=831 5,
830730,L=430730,
432230,L=825230,
L=825230,L=433730,
4345,L=8247,L=4345,
433730^=8315,
8345,L=4330,L=8405,
WQ-RET
6-89
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
TAGS,
STREAMS,
CLR,
PGM=LOC,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keywords
USE:
These keywords may be used with the LOC program to tag
stations with a cross reference number, and to plot,
where available, streams, cities, lakes, and
reservoirs.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
TAGS, specifies that each station plotted on the
map is to be tagged with a coded identifier
which relates to a listing of descriptive
information for the stations.
STREAMS, specifies that stream traces are to be plotted,
if the data are available. (Areas which have
such data include the State of Michigan and
the Southeast Region.)
CLR, specifies that the outlines of cities, lakes,
and reservoirs are to be plotted, if the data
are available. (Areas which have such data
include the State of Michigan and the
Southeast Region.)
There are no values associated with any of these keywords.
DEFAULT VALUES: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
If TAGS is specified, only 300 stations may be
retrieved/plotted. STORET will produce up to 5 maps to
avoid overprinting any of the tags. Users should not
use this keyword when plotting many stations located in
a relatively small area.
WQ-RET
6-91
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
For the previous map, include
cross reference tags for the
stations, stream traces, and
outlines of cities, lakes
and reservoirs.
PGM=LOC,PURP=305B/STA,
TAGS,STREAMS.CLR.
SCALE=250000,
LT=I,
L=4320,L=8404,L=4315,
L=833730,L=4330,L=8315,
L=4330,L=830730,L=430730,
L=8304,L=432230,L=825230,
L=433730,L=825230,L=433730,
L=8247 ^=4345^=8247^=4345,
L=8315,L=433730,L=8315,
L=4330fL=8345,L=4330,L=8405,
U=21MICH,
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-92
-------
LOCSYM
vSYMSIZE
PGM=LOC,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keywords
USE: When plotting a map of an area with the LOG program,
the LOCSYM and SYMSIZE keywords may be used to
specify, respectively, the symbol to be drawn to
denote station locations and the height of the symbols
plotted.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
LOCSYM=ss, where ss is one of the two-digit
integers, from 00 to 14, which
corresponds to one of the standard
CALCOMP plotting symbols shown below.
A leading zero must be specified.
+ X O * X
00 01 02 03 Oil 05 06 07
Z Y X X X
08 09 10 11 12
SYMSIZE=value, where value specifies the height, in
inches, of the symbols drawn in the
requested map. Value may range from
1.0 to 0.01.
DEFAULT VALUES: LOCSYM=0,
SYMSIZE=0.14,
NOTES ON USAGE:
The LOCSYM keyword is not valid with the parameter code
keyword P; the SYMSIZE keyword is valid with P.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-93
-------
PGM=STAND,
KEYWORDS SPECIAL TO THIS PROGRAM:
The following keywords apply only to this program.
They specify the type of output to be provided, and the
criteria against which the specified parameter values
are to be compared.
LV establishes the lower limit for a parameter value
HV establishes the upper limit for a parameter value
PSI=T, prints only the number of parameters retrieved
and their criteria
PSA=T, prints and flags the value of each parameter
that violated the specified criteria and
supporting sample values M
PVS=T, produces a summary of the values outside H
specified criteria z
PSO=T, prints only those parameters that are in o
violation of specified criteria
TS transforms one parameter to another before
the standards check is performed
calculation of dissolved oxygen saturation
calculation of un-ionized ammonia
calculation of coliform/strep count ratio
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-95
-------
PGM=STAND,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The STAND program compares the stored values of
selected water quality parameters with a set of values
(criteria) specified in the retrieval request. These
criteria, for instance, could be the State or Federal
standards currently in force for a particular stream
segment of interest. Stored parameter values which do
not satisfy the criteria comparison are flagged with an
asterisk in the printed output. The program provides
for various output formats, including violations lists
and violations summaries.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
All general keywords described in Section 4 are valid
with the STAND program. The parameter keyword P may be
specified up to 50 times. In addition, the program can
be used to calculate loadings, dissolved oxygen
saturations, temperature conversions, un-ionized
ammonia, and coliform/strep count ratios.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-97
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Retrieve a list of violations
along with supporting parameter
values and a violations summary.
The parameters to be examined
are iron (P«=1045) with maximum
criteria of 500 and coliforms
(P=31501) with maximum criteria
of 600.
PGM=STAND,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=071723,
P=11,P=300,P=400/P=610/
P=1045,HV=500/P=31501,HV=600,
BD«730101,
PSA=T,PVS=T,
VIOLATIONS WITH SUPPORTING PARAMETERS
/TYPA/AMBNT/LAKE
00011 00300 00400 00610
WATER DO PH NH3+NH4-
DATE TIME
73/OB/O4 0900
73/09/11 0915
74/07/19 0810
76/08/03 1030
76/09/16 1130
TEMP
FAHN
63
66
78
54
49
MG/L
9
a
8
i
0
N TOTAL
SU MG/L
7
6
7
6 0
6 0
071723 090706000042 402010280042
46 14 30 0 089 21 45 0 3
LONG L 1EAST< . 261DEG 8 7MI FROM JCT US2 AND US45
26053 MICHIGAN GOGEBIC
LAKE SUPERIOR 221200
ONTONAGON RIVER-MIDDLE BR ONTONAGON R
14AGNFS9 781016
0051 FEET DEPTH CLASS 00 CSN-RSP 0480198-0371137
01045 31501
IRON TOT COLI
FE.TOT
UG/L
620 0*
540 0*
74O 0*
MFINENDO
/loom.
1500 0*
800 0*
10 0
/TYPA/ AM BUT/LAKE
SUMMARY OP VIOLATIONS ON
NO OF VALUES
MEAN
MEDIAN
NO OF VIOLS
PFRCENT VIOL
MINIMUM VIOL
MEAN VIOL
MAXIMUM VIOL
00011
HATER
TFMP
FAHN
43
60
62
0
0
0
0
0
00300
DO
MG/L
34
9
9
0
0
0
0
0
OO400
PH
SU
82
6
6
0
0
o
0
0
00610
NH3+NH4-
N TOTAL
MG/L
33
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
071723 090706OOO042 4O2O1O280O42
46 14 30 0 089 21 4S.O 3
LONG L IEAST<.261DEG 8 7NI FROM JCT US2 AND US45
26053 MICHIGAN GOGEBIC
LAKE SUPERIOR 221200
ONTONAGON RIVER-MIDDLE BR ONTONAGON R
14AGNFS9 781016
0051 FEET DEPTH CLASS 00 CSN-RSP 0480198-0373137
SAMPLES COLLECTED FROM 73/01/O3 TO 78/08/30
01045
IRON
FE.TOT
UG/L
33
167 9
100 0
3
9
540 0
633 3
740 0
500 0
31501
TOT COLI
MFIMEHDO
/100ML
10
294 5
65 0
2
20
800 0
1150 0
1SOO O
600 0
FEBRUARY 1982
HQ-RET
6-98
-------
LV,HV
PGM=STAND/
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keywords
USE: These keywords may be used with the STAND program to
establish the upper and lower limits against which
parameter values are to be compared. Parameter values
which are outside of these keyword values are flagged
with asterisks in the printed output. Either or both
can be used in a retrieval.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
LV=lower-limit, where lower-limit is any numerical
value, including a decimal value,
between -899E+7 and +899E+7. LV
establishes the lower limit for a
parameter value; parameter values
less, or lower, than lower-limit
will be flagged.
HV=upper-limit, where upper-limit is any numerical
value, including a decimal value,
between -899E+7 and +899E+7.
Parameter values which are
greater than upper-limit will
be flagged.
DEFAULT VALUES: LV=-899E+7,
HV=+899E+7,
NOTES ON USAGE:
These keywords apply only to the preceding parameter
code keyword (P), and in order to flag any values
outside the specified criteria, either, or both, but at
least one, of these keywords must be specified in a
'PGM=STAND,' retrieval request.
Although LV and HV may be used with both programs STAND
and MEAN, their function is different with each
program. With program STAND, values which are not
within the specified limits are flagged; with program
MEAN, values which are not within the specified limits
are excluded.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-99
-------
Values stored with remark code K (actual value is known
to be less than value stored) or remark code L (actual
value is known to be greater than value stored) are
flagged or not flagged as a violation by the STAND
program, as indicated in the following example:
If LV=10 were specified, then stored values of 9
and 9K would be flagged, but values 9L and 2L would
not be considered a violation.
If HV=10 were specified, then stored values of 11
and 11L would be flagged, but values 11K and 15K
would not.
LV and HV may be specified in any order. Up to 50
pairs of P and LV/HV keywords can be specified in a
single retrieval request.
EXAMPLE(S):
Flag all temperature values PGM=STAND,PURP=305B/STA,
less than 35 degrees F and A=l4AGNFS9,S=071723,
all coliform values greater P=11,LV=35,P=31501,HV=600,
than 600. BD=730101,
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
6-100
-------
PS I
PSA
PVS
PSO
PGM=STAND,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keywords
USE: These keywords may be used with the STAND program to
specify the format for the program's output.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
PSI=T, specifies that only the number of parameters
retrieved, the criteria for these parameters,
and the number of transformations to be
performed are to be printed.
PSA=T, specifies that the flagged value of each
parameter that violated the specified criteria
will be printed for each occurrence. In
addition, it will print the supporting data
values for all other parameters specified for
each violation that occurred. (I.e., if a
violation occurred at a certain date for one
parameter, the data for all parameters
specified are to be printed for that date.)
PVS=T, specifies that a summary of the values falling
outside the criteria specified for all
parameters is to be printed.
PSO=T, specifies that only those parameters that are
in violation of the specified criteria are
to be printed.
DEFAULT VALUES: PVS=T, PSO=T,
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-101
-------
NOTES ON USAGE:
Any combination of these four keywords may be specified
in a STAND retrieval.
The summary provided by 'PVS=T,' includes the
following:
Number of total values
Mean of total values
Median of the total values
Number of violations within the total
values
Percent of violations
Minimum value of those in violation
Mean value of those in violation
Maximum value of those in violation
Minimum value specified in the retrieval
request as a criteria
Maximum value specified in the retrieval
request as a criteria
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
6-102
-------
EXANPLE(S):
Produce all four output
formats. The following
annotated output shows
the results of the retrieval,
PGM=STAND,PURP=305B/STA,
A-14AGNFS9,S=071723,
P-l 1 ,LV«35, P-31501 ,HV«600,
BD-730101,
PVS°T,PSO°T.
PSA=T.PSI°T.
-------
VIOLATIONS ONLY
/TYPA/AMBUT/LAKE
071723 090706000042 40201028004?
46 14 30 0 089 21 45 0 3
LONG L %EAST<,261DEG 8 7MI FROM JCT US? AND US45
26053 MICHIGAN QOGBBIC
LAKE SUPERIOR 221200
ONTONAGON RIVER-MIDDLE BR ONTONAGON R
14AGNFS9 781016
0051 FEET DEPTH CLASS 00 CSN-RSP 0480198-0373137
PATE
00011
WATER
TFMP
TIME FAHN
31501
TOT COLI
MFIMENDO
/100ML
73/01/03 0925
73/06/04 09OO
73/09/11 0915
73/l?/20 1050
76/10/27 0950
33 00*
33 OO*
34 00*
1500 0*
800 0*
©
071723 090706000042 402010280042
/TYPA/ AM BUT/LAKE
46 14 30 0 089 21 45 0
LONG L %EAST<.261DEG 8
26053 MICHIGAN
LAKE SUPERIOR
ONTONAGON RIVER-MIDDLE
14AGNFS9 781016
3
7MI FROM JCT US2 AND US45
GOGEBIC
221200
BR ONTONAGON R
0051 FEET DEPTH CLASS 00 CSN-RSP 0480198-0373137
NO OF VALUES
MEAN
MEDIAN
NO OF VIOLS
PERCENT VIOL
MINIMUM VIOL
MEAN VIOL
MAXIMUM VIOL
MIN CRITERIA
00011
WATER
TEMP
FAHN
43
59 70
62 00
3
7
33 00
33 33
34 00
SUMMARY OF VIOLATIONS
31501
TOT COLI
MFIMENDO
/100ML
10
294 5
65 0
2
20
800 0
1150 0
1500 0
600 0
ON SAMPLES COLLECTED FROM 73/01/03 TO 76/1O/27
0
3) Output specified by 'PSOT,'
4) Output specified by 'PVS=T,'
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-104
-------
TS
PGM=STAND,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE: This keyword may be used with the STAND program to
perform a linear transformation of water quality
parameter values prior to the values' comparison with
the specified criteria. The form of the linear
transformation is Y=A+BX.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
TS=abcd, where abed represents a 24 digit value, as
follows:
a is the two-digit positional indicator for
parameter Y
b is the two-digit positional indicator for
parameter X
c is the ten-digit intercept value A in
the'linear transformation equation
d is the ten-digit slope value B in the
linear transformation equation
Leading and trailing zeroes must be coded.
DEFAULT VALUE: None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
This keyword must be coded precisely, using the 24
digit abed as a fixed format, position dependent value.
If the parameter referenced by b is not stored for a
given point, no transformations will be performed.
Since transformation results are recorded under the
parameter referenced by the A and Y values,
transformation will not be performed for samples that
already contain a raw data observation for that
parameter.
X is the parameter present in the sample, and Y is the
parameter to which it is transformed.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-105
-------
EXAMPLE(S):
Assume that data on phosphorus
at a particular station are
stored as both parameter 665
(phosphorus total) and
parameter 650 (total
phosphorus as P04). Also
assume these two phosphate
parameters can be equated
using the transformation
P665+ 0.33333 (P650), which
transforms the P04 to total
phosphate. The example shown
will convert values for
parameter 650 using the
transormation shown prior to
comparing the parameter values
(for 665 and 650 transformed)
against the specified criteria.
PGM=STAND,PURP=305B/STA,
A=ll140100,8=173816,
P=665,LV=1.2,HV=1.7,P=650,
TS=01020000000000.333330000.
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-106
-------
PGM=INDEX,
KEYWORD SPECIAL TO THIS PROGRAM:
The following keyword applies only to this program.
CARDOUT produces station location storage cards in
machine-readable form
z
o
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-107
-------
PGM=INDEX,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The INDEX program prints station header information
(eight per page) for each station retrieved to enable
users to easily examine stations of interest.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
The only general keywords applicable are the purpose
keyword PURP and station identification keywords
described in Section 4 since this program does not
retrieve data.
OTHER NOTES AND COMMENTS:
The information provided by the INDEX program consists
of the following station header information for each
station.
state name
state and county numbers
agency code
primary and secondary station codes
major/minor/terminal basin codes
latitude/longitude coordinates
river mile indices
station type
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-109
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Retrieve station identification
information for all stations
within the lower Mississippi
River between Natchez and the
Gulf of Mexico which have a
station code of AMBNT or
STREAM.
PGM-INDEX,PURP-305B/STA,
BS=1021,
EXTRACT=AMBNT AND STREAM,
AGENCY
PRIME STN HO
11FWS
015
11POX06
TOXO03
111TSILL
110
111TSILL
111
111TSILL
112
111TSILL
113
111TSIU.
114
111T8ILL
116
111TSILL
117
11 IMS
047
ST-CO COUNTY
SECONDARY STATION NUMBERS
LAT/L01G/PREC
STATION TYPE CODE
RIVER MILE ( IF )
INDEX ( PRESENT )
22089
29 55 54 0 090 15 48 0 3
/TYPA/AMBNT/STREAP
22093
30 02 30 0 090 SO 00 0 2
/TYPA/AMBNT/STREAM
INDEX 102150O
MILES 163 OO
22075
29 09 08 0 089 IS 06 0 2
/TYPA/AMBNT/STREAM
22075
29 28 39 0 089 41 21 0 2
/TYPA/AMBNT/STREAM
22089
29 56 19 0 090 21 40 0 2
/TYPA/AMBNT/STREAM
22093
30 01 55 0 O90 41 45 0 2
/TYPA/AMBNT/STREAM
22071
29 57 03 0 090 08 17.0 2
/TYPA/AMBNT/STREAM
22047
30 17 38.0 091 13 S9.0 2
/TYPA/AMBVT/STREAH
2212S
30 45 30.0 O91 23 45.0 2
/TYPA/AHBNT/STREAH
22109
29 38 SO.O O9O 41 40.0 2
/TYPA/AMBKT/STOAN
STATE
STORED DATE
LOUISIANA
STORED 771005
LOUISIANA
STORED 780412
LOUISIANA
STORED 780418
LOUISIANA
STORED 780418
LOUISIANA
STORED 7B0418
LOUISIANA
STORED 780418
LOUISIANA
STORED 780418
LOUISIANA
STORED 78O41B
LOUISIANA
STORED 780418
LOUISIANA
STORED 780512
LOCATION NAME
MINOR BASIN BASIN CODE
MAJOR BASIN DEPTH
HYDR.UNIT CODE
MILES ON REACH
MISSISSIPPI RIV AT LULING.LA
MISS RIV-NATCHEZ TO GULP 1021
SO CENTRAL-LOWER MISS R DFPTH 0
MISSISSIPPI RIVER R M 163
NATCHEZ TO GULP 1021
LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER DEPTH 40
HEAD OP PASSES
LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-NATCHEZ TO GULF 1021
S C LOWER MISSISSIPPI R DEP*H 3276
PORT SULPHUR
LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-NATCHEZ TO GULP 1021
S C LOWER MISSISSIPPI R DEPTH 1276
LULING
LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-NATCHEZ TO GULP 1O21
S C LOWER MISSISSIPPI R DEPTH 3276
LUTCHER
LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-NATCHEZ TO GULF 1021
S.C LOWER MISSISSIPPI R DEPTH 3276
NEW ORLEANS
LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-NATCHEZ TO GULP 1021
S.C. LOWER MISSISSIPPI R DEPTH 3276
.
PLAOUEHINE
LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-NATCHEZ TO GULP 1021
S C LOWER MISSISSIPPI R DEPTH 3276
ST PRANCISVILLE
LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-NATCHEZ TO GULF 1021
S C LOWER MISSISSIPPI R DEPTH 3276
TERREBOMNE PARISH WATER WORKS
LOWER HISS R-IATCHEZ TO GULF 1021
S. CENTRAL LOWER MISS.R DEPTH 999
FEBRUARY 1982
HQ-RET
6-110
-------
CARDOUT
PGM=INDEX,
CLASSIFICATION: Program-Specific Keyword
USE: This keyword is used with the INDEX program to generate
either a data set or a deck of cards required to change
existing station header information. The output can
then be modified to create a station storage deck to
change or delete previously-stored station information.
When this keyword is used, certain job control language
statements must also be provided.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
CARDOUT, There is no value for this keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE: Not applicable.
NOTES ON USAGE:
By specifying PRT=NO, the normal printed output of an
INDEX retrieval can be suppressed. If PRT°NO is not
specified, then both the printed output and the CARDOUT
output will be generated.
JCL must be appended to the INDEX retrieval when the
CARDOUT keyword is specified. The ./CARDOUT DD
statement references the output device (i.e., whether a
disk data set or a punched card deck) to be used. The
STORET help data set named CARDOUT.JCL gives examples
of this required JCL.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-111
-------
PGM=STA,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The STA program produces a listing of all primary and
secondary station codes associated with the specified
agency code(s). The archive class (on-line or disk-
mountable status) of the parametric data associated
with the station is also listed. (Archiving is the
process of storing infrequently used data off-line.)
The output is in the form of a list of station codes,
grouped by agency, sequenced in alphabetical order.
KEYWORDS SPECIAL TO THIS PROGRAM: None.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
Only the agency code keyword (A) and the purpose
keyword (PURP) may be specified with this program.
OTHER NOTES AND COMMENTS:
Any number of agencies can be specified within a
retrieval.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
The STA program is used primarily to determine what
station codes have already been assigned within the
agency, so that new stations within the agency's
network can be assigned unique station codes.
The program output may also be used as a reference when
selecting stations by ranges of station codes.
HQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-113
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Produce a listing of the primary
(2004 total) and secondary
(1233 total) codes associated
with agency code 14AGNFS9.
PGM-STA,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,
114AGNFS9
OOS FM3
OOS OGM
OOS R22
OOS LT OXBOW
OOS 0406000001
OOS 0514000013
OOS ABOVE MUDDY
OOS ADA GLADE LK
OOS MID BR OUT
OOS MILLER DAM
OOS ML- 2
OOS MON-2
OOS MONDEAUX R-A
OOS MOOSEHEAD L
OOS MOSES POND
OOP 070847
OOP 070853
OOP 070859
OOP 070865
OOP 070871
OOP 070877
OOP 070883
OOP 070903
OOS 403010641076
OOS 403010642071
OOS 5 BL
OOS 707000100039
OOS 707000100052
NP- 4111
TNP- 4111
STORET RETRIEVAL DATE 81/05/11
OOS FM4
OOS R15
OOS 090
OOS MC-3
OOS 0406000007
OOS 0707010113
OOS ABOVE SALE
OOS ADDIS-1
OOS MID BRAN ONT
OOS MILLSTONE
OOS ML-3
OOS MON-3
OOS MONO-1
OOS MORAN-1
OOS MOTHRA
OOP 070848
OOP 070854
OOP 070860
OOP 070866
OOP 070872
OOP 070878
OOP 070884
OOP 070904
OOS 403010641116
OOS 403010642077
OOS 5110000008
OOS 707000100044
OOS 707000100053
NS-
TNS-
OOS FMS
OOS R18
OOS 04051
OOS PRECIP
OOS 0406030002
OOS A-FRAMEW
OOS ABOVESHELTER
OOS ADMIN AREA
OOS MIDDLE FORK
OOS MINERAL LAKE
OOS MHO UNIT
OOS MONB-10
OOS MOOSE L CPGD
OOS MORCRKCCCA
OOS MOUNTAINNE
OOP 070849
OOP 070855
OOP 070861
OOP O70867
OOP 070873
OOP O70879
OOP O7088S
OOP 070905
OOS 403010641146
DOS 403010647147
OOS S1101001O
OOS 707000100045
OOS 7O700010O054
2765.
27S5.
OOS FM6
OOS R19
OOP 220008
OOS USFS R-9
OOS 0406030005
OOS AA230E1200
DOS ABOVESWAMP
OOS ADMIN SITE
OOS MIDDLEBURY
OOS MIRROR LAKE
OOS MOCCASIN LK
OOS MONDEAUX
OOS MOOSE LAKE
OOS MORGAN LK »1
OOS MOUNTAINSW
OOP 07085O
OOP 070856
OOP 070862
OOP 070868
OOP 070874
OOP 0708RO
OOP 070886
OOP 070906
OOS 403010641 1R6
OOS 403010647169
OOS 517000005 U
OOS 707000100046
OOS 7O700O10O111
OOS MID
OOS R20
OOS ANTHONY
OOS 0106000019
OOS 0511000008
OOS ABOVE
OOS ABV FERT
OOS ADMIN SITE 0
OOS MILL CREEK
OOS MITIGAWK1
OOS MOLL LAKE
OOS MONDEAUX IN
OOS MOOSE LK CG
OOS MORGAN LK CG
OOS HSH-1
OOP 070851
OOP 07O857
OOP 070863
OOP 070869
OOP 070875
OOP 070881
OOP 0709O1
OOP 070907
OOS 403010642036
OOS 405000004
OOS 6ITTLE BFAV
OOS 707000100047
OOS 7O7020017 U
OOS MHS
OOS R21
OOS FERT MAX
OOS 0405130003
OOS 0511010010
OOS ABOVE LOLETA
OOS ABVFRT7778
OOS ADMIN SITE 2
OOS MILL L
OOS HL-1
OOS MON-1
OOS MONDEAUX OUT
OOS MOOSEHD WELL
OOS MORLEY POND
OOS MSH-2
OOP 07O852
OOP 070858
OOP 070864
OOP 07087O
OOP 070876
OOP 070882
OOP 070902
OOP 070908
OOS 403010642037
OOS 40S090011 U
OOS 707000100038
OOS 707000100051
OOS 90305010
This run of the STA program produced a listing of the 4,111
primary station codes and 2,765 secondary station codes (a
portion of which is shown here) associated with agency 14AGNFS9.
This listing is sorted in station code sequence, reading left to
right, top to bottom. The OOS and OOP that prefix each station
code indicate the station's archive class (00»online) and whether
the code is primary (P) or secondary (S).
FEBRUARY 1982
HQ-RET
6-114
-------
PGM=PUNCH,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
The PUNCH program retrieves data using any station and
data selection keywords, and punches 80-column cards
containing the station numbers, sampling dates, and the
raw data for up to six parameters.
KEYWORDS SPECIAL TO THIS PROGRAM: None.
GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:
All general keywords described in Section 4 are valid
with the PUNCH program. The parameter keyword P may be
specified up to six times.
OTHER NOTES AND COMMENTS: C
2
The layout of each card punched by this program is as I
follows:
columns field content
01-15 primary station number
16-25 date and time of sample (YYMMDDHHMM)
26 blank
27-74 six 8-column fields of data
PL/I format: PIC19999ES99'
FORTRAN format: (6E8.0)
75-80 sequence number
Missing values will be punched as 9999E-25. Any user-
written program using this punched deck as input should
check this value and discard such values from analysis.
The five-digit parameter code number is not punched.
The values retrieved for the specified parameter codes
are punched in the same order as the parameter codes
were specified in the retrieval request.
If the printout of punched values is not required,
specify 'PRT=NO,'.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
6-115
-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Punch 80 column cards with each
card containing the station number,
sampling date and the six
parameter measurements for each
water quality sample.
PGMspUNCH,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S»071723,
P=l1,P»300,Po400,P=61 0,
P*1045,P«31501,
80=730101,
"""""!«.I!.!.""".."."""! fl1 X! «««««ooioo oa 09 no 1001000
I I I I I I I I I I I I mm" I" I M """"""""I'l M?l m"" I MM HIM I "" | Ml"""""
2222222I22II222222Z2222 212222222,222221242222132222II2Z_2I2212IZ,1222I22>222!22
3J333J3313333333'313 33331 i333133.133J33311J331'3333J31131J33J113J111313131133
4444444444444444444 444 4444444 44444(444444444(4444'44(4444 ((4(((( 444 14444444444(4
5555SS5i5S5S55S5S5S55S55 S 5 S S S. 5 S S S 5 S S, 5 5 S Si 5 5' 5 5 S 5 S 5 5 51 S 5 5. S S 5 5 S S SB S 5 S S 5 S S S S
" tB9«S9EBSB096eS66SSSB8B80 5 S 6 B ( 9 6 t B 6 B B 0 E f t i 0 B B t B B 6 E 6 B B 6 ( E B 6 [ 11 i t B 6 S B t
' '"""""M'MMMIMMMilll 111 ,111111 IMIIII mini Ml IIIMIIIIM Ml MUM
99199999990991)89999199099999199999919)89999999899999019)999199919)1)99999191990
-?"'!-"!'.'.'."i^i'.;ii.?i!I"..."."UMi!!"!I.li'..J ^H:1"!1.,1!!!!!!!1,?!,!;1,?!',!
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
6-116
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
PART
WQ
WATER QUALITY FILE
CHAPTER
WQ-RET
WATER QUALITY RETRIEVAL
m
O
APPENDICES ' O
m
CO
(Basic Retrieval; Third Edition)
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Appendices Subject Page
1 Index of Available HELP Files Al-1
2 Tables of WQF Keywords by Retrieval Program A2-1
3 Summary of Retrieval Keyword Descriptions A3-1
4 Summary of Most Frequently Used Purpose Codes A4-1
5 Retrieval Error Messages A5-1
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
-------
APPENDIX 1: INDEX OF AVAILABLE HELP FILES
A number of helpful data sets are maintained on the system by
STORET User Assistance. These data sets are available on-line
'and can be listed at any time by simply entering the appropriate
commands from a low-speed keyboard type terminal. They also may
be printed at an RJE terminal.
The STORET help data set named INDEX provides a listing of the
names of all currently available help data sets. This data set
also gives the date each data set was added or last changed.
STORET users should occasionally list this data set, and scan the
date column for any help data sets added or changed since they
last reviewed the index. (A listing of the help data set names
can be obtained at a keyboard terminal by issuing the TSO command
LISTC LEVEL(STORET).
The STORET help data set named PRNTHELP contains the job control
language necessary to produce a listing of the names of STORET
help data sets at a user's RJE terminal.
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
Al-1
-------
APPENDIX 2: TABLES OF WQF KEYWORDS BY RETRIEVAL PROGRAM
The following two tables depict the applicability of all general
retrieval keywords (described in sections 4 and 5 of chapter WQ-
RET) with respect to the WQF retrieval programs. Table A2-1
lists the keywords in alphabetical order; table A2-2 lists the
keywords by functional group. The following Key to Table Entries
applies to both tables.
KEY TO TABLE ENTRIES
meaning
keyword may be used; keyword description
found in Section 4
keyword is not valid for the designated
program; do not use
* keyword must be used
+ keyword may be used (Table A2-2)
G keyword may be used; keyword description
also found in Appendix G
I keyword may be used; keyword description
found in Appendix I
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
A2-1
-------
TABLE A2-1
GENERAL RETRIEVAL KEYWORDS BY RETRIEVAL PROGRAM
ALL- INV120
FARM RET INVENT MEAN PLOT LOG STAND INDEX STA PUNCH MSP REG NOPAR
A
AGGR
ANC
ARCLASS
AREA
B
BD,ED
BG,EG
EOT
BS
BT,ET
C Fnct
D
DSROC
ECHO
EXTRACT
HEAD
INCLUDE
IS
LT,L
MASK
NOECHO
NOTU
ONLYU
OUTSIDE
P
PARF
PARH1,H2
PARONLY
PARU
PGM
PLV,PHV
PRV
PM
PRMI
4
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
no
4
no
no
4
no
4*
no
no
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
no
4
4
4
no
4
4
4
4
4
no
4
4
4
4
4
no
4
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
4
4
4
no
no
4
4
4
no
no
no
4
no
4
no
no
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
4
4
4
no
no
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
4
4
4
no
no
no
4
4
no
no
no
4
no
4
no
no
4
4
no
4
no
4
4
4
4
4
no
no
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
4
no
no
4
no
no
4
no
no
no
4
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
4
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
4
no
4
4
4
4
no
4
4
4
4
4
no
4
4
no
no
no
4
no
no
4
4*
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
4
4
4
no
no
4
4
4
no
no
no
4
no
4
no
no
4
4
no
4
no
4
4
4
4
4
no
no
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
A2-2
-------
TABLE A2-1
CONTINUED
PRT
PURP
RMI
R
RMKK
S
SHIFT
ST
STC,CO
STCNTY
U
UD,LD
UK
no
4*
4
4
4
4
no
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
no
4*
4
no
no
4
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 '
4* 4i
4
4
4
4
4
4 i
4 '
4 '
4 4
4 ^
4 t
I no
k 4*
4
no
no
4
no
L 4
1 4
I 4
L 4
r no
L no
4
4*
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
no
4*
4
no
no
4
no
4
4
4
4
no
no
no '
4* 4'
no *
no '
no ^
no
no
no
no
no
no f
no >•
no ^
I 4
k 4*
L 4
I 4
I 4
4
4
4
4
4
> 4
L 4
L 4
4
4*
no
4
4
4*
4
no
no
no
no
4
4
no
4*
4
no
no
4
no
4
4
4
4
no
no
WQ-RET
A2-3
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
TABLE A2-2
GENERAL RETRIEVAL KEYWORDS BY FUNCTIONAL GROUP
SEC-
TION
4
4
4
RETRIEVAL
KEYWORDS
PGM
PURP
,B,S
LI , L
KM I
STC , CC1
BS
AREA
ol
STLN 1 x
U,NOTU,
UN LxU
EXTRACT
MASK
AKLLAoo
PM
Oi , til
BOf ED
BG,EG
UD,LD
UK
AGGR
AWL
DSROC
BOT
PA RON Li
PARU , PARr
PRV, PLV,PHV
TC
lo
rn
RMKK
OUTSIDE
SHIFT
HEAD
PRT
PRMI
INCLUDE
ECHO
NOECHO
DATA SELECTION AND ANALYSIS PROGRAMS
ALL- INVENT
RET PARM STAND MSP MEAN PLOT PUNCH REG INV120
NO + + + + + + + NO
+ NO + + + + + + NO
+ NO + + + + + + NO
+ NO + + + + + + NO
+ NO+ + + + + + NO
+ + + + + + + + NO
+ » + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
SAMPLING SITE LOCATION
ANALYSIS AND DISPLAY
NOPAR LOC INDEX STA
+ + + A ONLY
+ + + NO
+ + + NO
+ + + NO
+ + + NO
+ + + NO
+ + + NO
+ + + NO
+ + + NO
+ + + NO
+ + + NO
+ + NO NO
+ NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
MM Mfl MM Ml}
NO 4 NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
yNO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO + NO NO
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
A2-4
-------
APPENDIX 3: SUMMARY OF RETRIEVAL KEYWORD DESCRIPTIONS
This appendix provides a complete summary, in alphabetical order,
of all WQF retrieval keywords. Each entry gives a brief
description of the keyword's function and the number (letter)
within parentheses indicates the WQ-RET section (appendix) in
which the keyword is described in detail. Keywords are generally
applicable to all WQF retrieval programs unless otherwise noted.
Keyword
A
ADDM
AGGR
ANC
ARCLASS
AREA
ASA99
AT
Description
(4)
(7)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(7)
(7)
AUXFILE (7)
AUXSYM (7)
B (4)
BASE (6)
BD (4)
BEGIN (7)
BG (4)
EOT (4)
BS (4)
BT (4)
C FUNCTION (4)
CARDOUT (6)
retrieves stations by agency codes
inserts a mileage for a retrieved
station (MSP)
combines data retrieved from a group of
stations into a single station
specifies the type of composite sampling
information to be retrieved
retrieves archived data
retrieves stations within designated 208
areas
generates overlays of the 99-area set
of Aggregated Subareas (LOC, MSP)
specifies the inserted location of a
station relative to another station with
a known mileage (MSP)
specifies additional location data to
be plotted (LOC)
specifies the plotting symbol to be
plotted for auxfile (LOC)
qualifies specified stations as individual
or a range of stations
establishes beginning date for statistical
analysis (MEAN)
restricts parametric data to samples taken
after a certain date
a dummy keyword, often used with the
SAMSTA keyword (MSP)
eliminates parametric data outside of
a date group
specifies whether or not bottom (mud)
samples are to be retrieved
retrieves stations by major/minor/sub
basin codes
restricts parametric data to samples
taken after a specified time
retrieves data by parameter group,
media, phase, or C.A.S. number
generates a data set of station location
storage cards usable for changing stored
station information data (INDEX)
WQ-RET
A3-1
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
Keyword
CKNO
CKWDTH
CLR
CO
COLIFORMS
COMSCL
CONLEV
CONN
CONV
CSIZE
D
DELM
DG
DG=,
DM
DO SAT
DR
DSROC
EARLY
ECHO
ED
EG
ET
EXTRACT
Description
(7) specifies the position of the first
character in the check value field (LOO
(7) specifies the number of characters in
the check value field (LOC)
(6) plots outlines of cities, lakes, and
reservoirs (LOC)
(4) retrieves stations by county codes
(6) method of calculating the fecal coliform
to fecal streptococci count ratio (MEAN)
(7) specifies that the scales of a plot
are to be the same as the previous
plot (MSP)
(7) sets the vertical (z-axis) increment at
which contour lines are to be drawn (MSP)
(7) draws a continuous line through the
plotted stations even if a station
is not plotted (MSP)
(7) produces an all-character output (RET)
(7) specifies the height of the first line
of characters in the title block
(LOC, MSP)
(4) specifies units associated with
depth-related output
(7) specifies that a station is not to
be plotted on every plot (MSP)
(6) specifies date grouping criteria (MEAN)
(7) suppresses printing of statistical
calculations performed by the MEAN
program (MEAN)
(6) controls decimal placement (MEAN)
(6) method of calculating dissolved oxygen
saturation (MEAN)
(6) controls decimal placement (RET)
(4) specifies whether grab or composite
samples are to be retrieved
(7) specifies the areas or stations to be
used as an early point of reference for
a trend map (MSP)
(4) prints lines of a retrieval request
(4) restricts parametric data to samples
taken before a certain date
(4) eliminates parametric data outside of
a date group
(4) restricts parametric data to samples
taken before a specified time
(4) restricts retrieval to stations
with certain parameter or type
characteristics
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
A3-2
-------
Keyword
Description
FACT (6) controls size of plot (PLOT)
FLEX (7) omits plotting of contour lines outside
a specified polygon (MSP)
GRAPHNO (7) specifies symbols or types of shading
to be plotted (MSP)
GROUPS (7) partitions data linearly into groups
(MSP)
GROUPSB (7) partitions data into groups at specified
breakpoints (MSP)
GROUPSQ (7) partitions data into four groups having
an approximately equal number of
observations in each group (MSP)
HEAD (4) specifies user-written report
identification information
HV (6) establishes upper limit for a parameter
value (MEAN, PLOT, STAND)
INCLUDE (4) adds retrieval instructions contained
in a data set
INCR (7) specifies the number of miles per
unit increment along the x-axis for
mileage-linear plots (MSP)
IS (4) retrieves intensive survey data
L (4) specifies latitude and longitude
coordinates for a polygon retrieval
LABEL (7) supplies map title information
LATE (7) specifies the areas or stations to be
used as a late point of reference for
a trend map (MSP)
LD (4) specifies a lower depth limitation
for samples
LEFTn (7) specifies that the scale, parameter name
and values of the nth parameter are to
appear on the left side of the plot (MSP)
LH1/LH2 (6) specifies acceptable ranges for
parameter values (MEAN, PLOT)
LINEAR (7) plots a parameter on a linear scale (MSP)
LINMIL (7) specifies mileage-linear scaling for
the x-axis (MSP)
LINSTA (7) specifies station-linear scaling for
the x-axis (MSP)
LL1/LL2 (6) specifies acceptable ranges for parameter
values (MEAN, PLOT)
LOAD (6) allows computation of stream loadings
(MEAN, PLOT)
LOCSYM (6) specifies symbol to denote stations (LOO
LOG (6) calculates logarithmic values prior
to statistical analysis (MEAN, PLOT);
plots a parameter on a log scale (MSP)
LT (4) selects stations within a user
defined polygon
WQ-RET
A3-3
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
Keyword
LT=NORET
LV
M+nS
M-nS
MASK
MAX
MEAN
MEAN=n
MIN
MODELL
MODELR
MORE
MSPARMS
MUL
NMIN
NOBOX
NOCONN
NOCOUN
NOECHO
NOLIST
NOPARCDS
NOPAREND
NOPLOT
NOPOLAUX
Description
(7) eliminates the plotting of data located
at unwanted coordinates (LOG, MSP)
(6) establishes lower limit for a parameter
value (MEAN, PLOT, STAND)
(7) plots the mean value of the parameter
plus n times sigma (MSP)
(7) plots the mean value of the parameter
minus n times sigma (MSP)
(4) selects stations satisfying system and/or
user-supplied masks
(7) plots the maximum value of the parameter
(MSP)
(7) invokes execution of PGM=MEAN (MSP)
(7) plots the mean value of the parameter
(MSP)
(7) plots the minimum value of the
parameter (MSP)
(7) establishes plot specifications for
the left axis (MSP)
(7) establishes plot specifications for
the right axis (MSP)
(7) places RET retrieval output onto
disk or tape (RET)
(7) denotes the beginning of MSP-specific
keywords (MSP)
(7) specifies the character to be used
to plot positions on which two or
more statistics fall (MSP)
(7) plots a station as a function of the
number of observations found (MSP)
(7) suppresses the drawing of a box around
a plot (LOG, MSP)
(7) causes the connecting line to be
broken when a station is not plotted
(MSP)
(6) suppresses plotting of county boundary
lines (LOG, MSP)
(4) suppresses printing of lines of a
retrieval request
(7) suppresses the printing of listings
normally produced by the MSP program
(MSP)
(7) denotes the beginning of NOPAR control
cards (NOPAR)
(7) denotes the end of NOPAR control cards
(NOPAR)
(6) eliminates plotting of selected
parameters (PLOT)
(7) plots points, in the auxiliary field
(LOG, MSP)
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
A3-4
-------
Keyword
NOPOLPLT
NORET
NOSELECT
NOSTATE
NOTRMK
NOTU
NOVERLAY
NUMLITE
ONEORG
ONLYU
OUT
OUTSIDE
P
P=ALL
P=n
PARF
PARH1
PARH2
PARONLY
PARU
PCTL
PCTLWT
%TILEnT
PGM
PHV
Description
(6) suppresses plotting of the polygon
(LOG, MSP)
(5) bypasses retrieval of water quality
stations and data
(5) bypasses retrieval of water quality
stations
(7) suppresses plotting of state and
county boundary lines (LOG, MSP)
(7) controls the plotting of parametric
data according to the remark codes
stored with the data (MSP)
(4) excludes specific agencies from retrieval
(7) suppresses plotting of state and
county boundary lines (LOG, MSP)
(7) controls the number of thin contour
lines to be plotted between thick
contour lines (MSP)
(7) forces all plots to begin at the same
origin (LOG)
(4) lists stations retrieved in order
of station selection keyword
(7) places MEAN program output onto disk or
tape (MEAN)
(4) restricts data selection by value of
parameter
(4) specifies water quality parameters
to be retrieved
(6) enables retrieval of remarked data
(ALLPARM)
(7) specifies that the nth parameter in
sequence is to be plotted (REG)
(4) converts a parameter's stored value
to an equivalent value
(4) changes first line of default parameter
heading
(4) changes second line of default parameter
heading
(4) retrieves parametric data only
when certain parameters are present
(4) converts a parameter's stored units
to equivalent units
(6) specifies the percentile to be
calculated (MEAN)
(6) calculates percentiles via linear
interpolations (MEAN)
(7) allows the plotting of percentile n (MSP)
(4) specifies which WQF retrieval program
is to be executed
(4) restricts data selection by value of
parameter
WQ-RET
A3-5
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
Keyword
Pi
PLOT
PLOTMSG
PLV
PM
POINTS
POST
PRMI
PRT
PRV
PSA
PSA=T
PSI=T
PSO=T
PURP
PVS=T
QUALITY
QUALMAP
R
RECLINE
REGPARMS
RES
RIGHTn
RMI
Description
(7) prescribes conditions under which the
parametric data are acceptable (MSP)
(7) declares the type of plot and
associated printout desired (REG, MSP)
(7) generates a message to the plotter
operator (LOO
(4) restricts data selection by value of
parameter
(4) reports related parameters
(7) determines the plotting symbol to be
used (MSP)
(7) controls the appearance of raw data
points (MSP)
(4) includes RMI coding in station header
information
(4) controls what is to be printed from
retrieval output
(4) restricts data selection by value of
parameter
(6) prints station descriptions for all
stations retrieved even if parametric
data are not present (INVENT, INV120)
(6) prints and flags the value of each
parameter that violates specified
criteria (STAND)
(6) prints only the number of parameters
retrieved and their criteria (STAND)
(6) prints only those parameters in
violation of specified criteria (STAND)
(4) identifies the purpose and recipient
of the retrieval request
(6) produces a summary of the values
outside specified criteria (STAND)
(7) specifies the value of the quality
standard line to be plotted (REG)
(7) requests geographical water quality
maps (MSP)
(4) restricts retrieval to parameters
having certain remark codes
(6) calculates and plots a regression line
(PLOT)
(7) denotes the beginning of REG-specific
keywords (REG)
(7) controls the fineness of the contour
lines plotted (MSP)
(7) specifies that the scale, parameter name,
and values of the nth parameter are to
appear on the right side of the plot (MSP)
(4) initiates a hydrological retrieval
based upon river mile indices
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
A3-6
-------
Keyword
RMK
RMKK
S
SAMSCL
SAMSTA
SAVE
SAVEOUT
SC
SCALE
SEG
SELECT
SF
SHIFT
SKPLESS
SORT
SP
SQUASH
ST
START
STAT
STC
STCNTY
STOPMSP
STOPREC
Description
(7) controls the plotting of parametric
data according to the remark codes
stored with the data (MSP)
(4) restricts the retrieval of or sets to
zero observations having a remark code
of K, actual value is known to be less
than value coded (MEAN)
(4) specifies individual or groups of
stations to be retrieved
(7) provides a common scale for both axes
of a plot (MSP)
(7) groups stations together as if they
were a single station (MSP)
(7) places MSP output onto disk or tape and
suppresses printing of MSP output (MSP)
(7) places MSP output onto disk or tape (MSP)
(6) causes scales of axes to be
identical (PLOT)
(6) selects the desired scale for the
area to be plotted (LOG, MSP)
(7) selects time intervals for plotting
(MSP)
(5) bypasses retrieval of water quality
data
(6) allows selection of statistical
functions to be performed (MEAN)
(4) shifts a retrieval's station header
information from the right corner
of the page to the left
(7) inhibits plotting of light lines to
avoid over-crowding (MSP)
(6) sorts data prior to statistical
analysis (MEAN)
(6) suppresses all printed output except
summary information (INVENT, INV120)
(6) prints multiple stations per page of
output (ALLPARM)
(4) restricts retrieved stations by
state codes
(7) specifies mileage starting point for
a mileage-linear plot (MSP)
(7) specifies which parameter statistics
are to be mapped (MSP)
(4) selects stations by state codes
(4) restricts retrieved stations by counties
(7) denotes the end of MSP-specific
keywords (MSP)
(7) specifies the highest check value to be
plotted in a given plot (LOC)
WQ-RET
A3-7
FEBRUARY 1982
-------
Keyword
STOPREG
STREAMS
STRTREC
SYM
SYMANG
SYMSIZE
TAGS
TIME
TLAT
TLONG
TPLOT
TRNDNLY
TS
U
UD
UK
UN-ION AM
VD
XMAX
YMAX
ZOOM
Description
(7) denotes the end of REG-specific
keywords (REG)
(6) plots streams (LOO
(7) specifies'the lowest check value to be
plotted in a given plot (LOG)
(6) provides for choice of plotting symbols
representing data points (PLOT)
(7) specifies angle of rotation of plotted
symbols (MSP)
(7) specifies height of plotted symbols (MSP)
(6) tags mapped stations with a cross
reference number (LOO
(7) allows specification of beginning and
ending dates for the analysis (REG)
(7) specifies the vertical position of a
plot's title block (LOG, MSP)
(7) specifies the horizontal position of
a plot's title block (LOG, MSP)
(7) requests the plotting of a trend map
(MSP)
(7) suppresses plotting of data defined in
a plot request (MSP)
(6) converts one form of a parameter to
another (STAND)
(4) restricts stations by agency-code
(4) specifies an upper depth limitation
for samples
(4) unlocks locked data for retrieval
purposes
(6) method of calculating un-ionized
ammonia (MEAN)
(6) allows variable date groupings (MEAN)
(7) specifies the maximum value for
the abscissa parameter (REG)
(7) specifies the maximum value for the
ordinate parameter (REG)
(7) restricts plotting to a specified area
(MSP)
FEBRUARY 1982
WQ-RET
A3-8
-------
APPENDIX 4: SUMMARY OF MOST FREQUENTLY USED PURPOSE VALUES
The PURP keyword must be specified in each WQF retrieval request,
and is used to identify both the purpose and the ultimate
recipient of the retrieval. The information provided by this
keyword is used by EPA headquarters personnel in various analyses
of the uses made of the data stored in the WQF. The following
summary lists the Sections of PL 92-500 that are most frequently
used as the value of this keyword. It is not intended to be all
inclusive and users may specify their own values for this keyword
in accordance with the procedures identified in Section 4 of this
chapter.
SECTIONS OF PL 92-500
TITLE I - Research and Related Programs
Sec. 104 - Research, Investigations, Training and Information
Sec. 104(a)(5) - National Water Quality Surveillance System (NWQSS)
Sec. 105 - Grants for Research and Development
Sec. 106 - Grants for Pollution Control Programs
Sec. 107 - Mine Water Pollution Control Demonstrations
Sec. 108 - Pollution Control in Great Lakes
Sec. 113 - Alaska Village Demonstration Projects
Sec. 114 - Lake Tahoe Study
TITLE II - Grants for Construction of Treatment Works
Sec. 201 - Construction Grant Facility Plan
Sec. 208 - Areawide Waste Treatment Management Plan
Sec. 209 - Basin Planning
Sec. .210 - Annual 0 & M Survey
TITLE III - Standards and Enforcement
Sec. 303 - Water Quality Standards and Implementation Plans
Sec. 303(e) - Basin Plans
Sec. 305 - Water Quality Inventory
Sec. 305(b) - Water Quality Inventory
Sec. 308 - Inspections, Monitoring and Entry
Sec. 311 - Oil and Hazardous Substance Liability
Sec. 314 - Clean Lakes
Sec. 315 - National Commission on Water Quality
Sec. 316 - Thermal Discharges
Sec. 318 - Aquaculture
WQ-RET FEBRUARY 1982
A4-1
-------
TITLE IV - Permits and Licenses
Sec. 402 - National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
Sec. 403 - Ocean Discharge Criteria
Sec. 404 - Permits for Dredged or Fill Material
TITLE V - General Provisions
Sec. 516 - Reports to Congress
Sec. 516(b) - Economics of Clean Environment (Water) Report
FEBRUARY 1982 WQ-RET
A4-2
-------
APPENDIX 5: RETRIEVAL ERROR MESSAGES
The STORET help data set named RETRIEVE.ERRMSG contains a
listing of the error messages that are generated as a result of
an inaccurate or improper attempt to retrieve information from
the WQF.
WQ-RET
A5-1
------- |